JP6996579B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery for whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a winning gaming state is performed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry portion provided in the gaming area. It will be done. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the above lottery, and the stop result according to the lottery result is displayed at the final stop display of the variable display. The display effect for one game is displayed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-81853

Here, it is necessary to raise the degree of attention to the game in the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably increasing the degree of attention to gaming.

The present invention
Information acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
An information storage means that stores the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined.
With respect to the determination information stored in the information storage means, a determination means for determining whether or not to give a privilege to the player, and a determination means.
Based on the determination by the determination means , it is possible to execute the first effect by a predetermined notification means as the notification corresponding to the result of the determination, and the period setting for setting the period during which the first effect is performed. Means and
A first effect executing means for allowing the first effect to be performed over a period set by the period setting means, and a first effect executing means.
Based on the determination by the determination means, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege and the privilege granting means
In a gaming machine equipped with
A second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect of displaying for a predetermined period by the predetermined notification means or another notification means.
An update means for performing a predetermined update in the predetermined period display during the execution of the second effect, and an update means.
Equipped with
Depending on the period of the update by the update means, the specific effect of executing the display on the side that is advantageous to the player can be easily executed.
When the second effect is performed by the second effect executing means, a specific setting means for setting a period displayed in the predetermined period display is provided .
The specific setting means is
The first means, in which the period displayed in the predetermined period display can be set when the specific effect is not executed ,
The second means, in which the period displayed in the predetermined period display can be set when the specific effect is executed ,
Equipped with
The period setting means can be set so that the period in which the first effect is performed differs depending on the period set by the second means .
The gaming machine is characterized in that, as an aspect when the predetermined period display is started, a means capable of executing a special aspect regarding a determination for granting the privilege is provided .

According to the present invention, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process in MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a variation display time. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the fluctuation display time table. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of an effect control device and a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for hold notice in MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a hold command. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing for hold display control in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating hold notice and special hold notice. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between an effect pattern and a hold display image. It is a flowchart which shows the special hold notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the grasp process of hold information. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process when a time can be specified. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various tables for special hold notice. It is a flowchart which shows the timer input process at the time of a normal pattern. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various tables for special hold notice. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various tables for special hold notice. It is a flowchart which shows the timer input process at the time specific pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the timer input process at the time of a premier pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process when a time cannot be specified. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of disengagement. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various tables for special hold notice. It is a flowchart which shows the special hold notice control processing in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer management process. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process at the time of shift. It is a flowchart which shows the process for hold display. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display control processing in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for changing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special hold notice. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process at the time of a shift in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various tables for special hold notice. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the variation display time in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the fluctuation display time table. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing for hold control. It is a flowchart which shows the special hold notice setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the variation display time table in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing for hold control in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction process at the time of shift. It is a flowchart which shows the timer management process in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the subtraction value adjustment process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline for special hold notice. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline for special hold notice in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the operation correspondence processing in MPU of an effect control device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline for special hold notice in the modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the operation correspondence subtraction processing in MPU of an effect control device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of the various counters used for the winning / failing lottery, etc. in the 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification for special hold notice. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline of the special hold notice in 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline of the special hold notice. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline of the special hold notice. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline of the special hold notice. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing for hold control. It is a flowchart which shows the special hold notice setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various tables concerning a special hold notice. It is a flowchart which shows the process for changing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special hold notice at the time of stop. It is a flowchart which shows the privilege granting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special hold notice at the time of shift. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline of the special hold notice in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing for hold control. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline of the special hold notice in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing for hold control. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for hold notice in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main side special hold notice setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a set time table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a set time table. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a hold command. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing for hold control. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the special hold notice decided by the main side. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a variation display time. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the variation display time at the time of execution of a hold notice. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the control device which decided to execute a special hold notice, and the determination process of a variation display time. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the special reservation storage area in the modification of eleventh embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the special game times in a twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows the special game circulation processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a set time table. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a variation display time. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the variation display time at the time of execution of a special game round. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a variation start. In the modified example of the twelfth embodiment, (a) is a flowchart showing a hold display setting process, and (b) to (e) are explanatory views for explaining a hold image selection table. In the modified example of the twelfth embodiment, (a) to (b) are explanatory views for explaining the holding image selection table, and (c) is the explanation for explaining the special holding notice table at the time of disconnection. It is a figure. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect pattern example about a special game times. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect pattern example about a special game times. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect pattern example about a special game times. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect pattern example about a special game times. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect pattern example about a special game times. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect pattern example about a special game times. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect pattern example about a special game times. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between chance production during a game round and a special game round. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the holding image and chance production. (A) is a flowchart showing a modification of the variation start processing, and (b) and (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the difference in character generation depending on the presence or absence of hold information. In the thirteenth embodiment, it is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect when the hold information of the priority side is acquired before the special game round. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the confirmation process for hold notice. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the setting process of a variation display time. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the variation start processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect pattern example about a special game times. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect pattern example about a special game times.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a kind of gaming machine, will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. .. The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown), a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame, and a back pack unit (not shown) arranged behind the inner frame.

The inner frame of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right sides as the support side. Further, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame, and the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with one of the left and right side portions as the support side. Further, the back pack unit is rotatably supported on the inner frame, and it is rotatable rearward with one of the left and right side portions as the support side.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. At the same time, it has a function of locking the front door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

A game board 24 is mounted on the inner frame. Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 24.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings that penetrate in the front-rear direction by being processed by a router. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating port 33, a lower operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a main display unit 43, an accessory display unit 44, and the like. ing.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, and the lower operating port 34, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the back side of the game board 24. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result.

In addition, an out opening 37 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that has not entered various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area through the out opening 37. Further, a large number of nails 38 are planted on the game board 24 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Aspects that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the ball from entering the game ball into the out port 37, the game ball enters the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34, or the through gate 35. Is also expressed as a prize.

The upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operating port 33 faces upward. The lower operating port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) of the electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot win the lower operating port 34, and the electric accessory 34a is opened (supported state or guided state), so that the lower operating port It is possible to win a prize in 34.

The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a leading to the back side of the game board 24, and also includes an opening / closing door 32b for opening and closing the large winning opening 32a. The opening / closing door 32b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and the game ball is likely to win a prize when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode (opening / closing execution state) is won in the internal lottery. It can be switched to the open state. Here, the open / close execution mode is a mode that shifts when a big hit is won. The open / close execution mode will be described in detail later. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 32, the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened with a predetermined time (for example, 30 sec) elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. There is an aspect to be done.

The main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are provided on the decorative member 39 arranged along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 39 extends from the surface of the gaming board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and further, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces the window panel 62. The distance between them is narrower than one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.

The main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 39. That is, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and the game ball can be seen in front of both the display units 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling.

In the main display unit 43, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, and as a result of the stop of the variation display, the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is performed. The result of the internal lottery based on this is clearly indicated by the display. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the winning of the upper operating port 33 and the winning of the lower operating port 34 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and the winning is based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. The result of the internal lottery is clearly shown on the main display unit 43, which is a common display area. Then, when the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the predetermined stop result is obtained on the main display unit 43. After being displayed and the variable display is stopped, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

The main display unit 43 is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and the like. It may be composed of other types of display devices such as CRT and dot matrix. Further, as the pattern to be variablely displayed on the main display unit 43, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, or a plurality of patterns are displayed. It is conceivable that the seed colors are switched and displayed.

In the accessory display unit 44, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the through gate 35, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 is obtained. Explicitly indicated by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and displayed in a variable manner. After the is stopped, it shifts to the electric service open state. In the electric service open state, the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower actuating port 34 is in the open state in a predetermined manner.

The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 for variable display (or variable display or switching display) of a symbol which is a kind of symbol. Further, in the variable display unit 36, a center frame 42 is arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 41. The upper portion of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 41, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen is not deteriorated due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. ..

The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

On the symbol display device 41, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the upper, middle, and lower directions, and these symbols are variably displayed so as to be scrolled in the left-right direction. In this case, the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is started based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. That is, when the variable display is performed on the main display unit 43, the variable display is performed on the symbol display device 41 accordingly. Then, for example, in the game round to shift to the open / close execution mode in which the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened as the open / close execution mode, the symbol display device 41 is set on a preset effective line. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed.

By the way, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33 and 34, the fluctuation display is started on the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41, the predetermined stop result is displayed, and the fluctuation display is stopped. It corresponds to one game.

On the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 42, a main hold light emitting unit 45 that emits and displays the number of holds corresponding to the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41 is provided. The main hold light emitting unit 45 is composed of LEDs. The number of game balls that have won a prize in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the main reserved light emitting unit 45.

In the upper right portion of the center frame 42, a reserved light emitting unit 46 for a character that emits and displays the number of holds corresponding to the display unit 44 for the character is provided. The reserved light emitting unit 46 for accessories is composed of LEDs. The number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is held up to four times, and the number of times the game ball is held is displayed by lighting the holding light emitting unit 46 for the accessory.

An inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 are attached to the game board 24, and the guide rail is formed by the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52, and is mounted below the game board 24 in the inner frame. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism (not shown) is guided to the upper part of the game area. In the game ball launch mechanism, the game ball is launched by operating the launch handle 54 provided on the front door frame 14.

The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire area of the game area can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 described above is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin.

Light emitting means such as various light emitting parts are provided around the window portion 61. A display light emitting unit 63 is provided above the window unit 61 as a part of the various light emitting units. These various light emitting units are composed of LEDs. Further, on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 63, speaker units 64 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided.

Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 bulging toward the front side are arranged side by side. An upper plate 71 opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower plate 72 also opened upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 72 has a function of storing the surplus game balls in the upper plate 71. The game balls paid out from the payout device mounted on the back pack unit are discharged to the upper plate 71 and the lower plate 72.

An operation unit 75 that can be operated by the player is provided above the launch handle 54 in the front door frame 14. The operation unit 75 is connected to an effect control device described later, and a predetermined effect is executed by operating the operation unit 75.

A main control device, an effect control device, and a display control device are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, a back pack unit is provided on the back surface of the inner frame as described above, and the back pack unit includes a payout mechanism unit including a payout device, a payout control device, a power supply, and a launch control device. Is installed. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Basic electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 202 is mounted on the main control board 201 provided in the main control device 81. The MPU 202 is a ROM 203 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 202, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 203 is executed. A certain RAM 204, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built-in. It is not essential that the ROM 203 and the RAM 204 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 202, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to the MPU of other control devices.

The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 202, a power failure monitoring board 205 provided in the main control device 81, a payout control device 97, various detection sensors 211, and the like are connected. In this case, a power supply and a launch control device 98 are connected to the power failure monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power failure monitoring board 205. Further, as a part of various detection sensors 211, for a winning-compatible ball-entry unit (payout-compatible ball-entry unit) such as a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating port 33, a lower operating port 34, and a through gate 35. A plurality of detection sensors provided in a one-to-one correspondence are connected, and a winning determination (ball entry determination) is made for each ball entry portion in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81. Further, in the MPU 202, the jackpot generation lottery is executed based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, and the support generation lottery is executed based on the winning of the through gate 35.

A power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, and an effect control device 82 are connected to the output side of the MPU 202. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 97 based on the winning determination result for the winning ball corresponding to the prize. In this case, the command information storage area 223 of the ROM 203 is referred to when the prize ball command is output. Then, when the winning to the general winning opening 31 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when the winning to the variable winning device 32 is specified, 15 prizes are output. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the game ball is output, and when a prize is specified for the upper operating port 33, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output and the lower operating port 34 is output. When the prize is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and a variation end command are output to the effect control device 82. In this case, when outputting these various commands, the command information storage area 223 of the ROM 203 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later. It should be noted that each of the above commands is configured as information on a predetermined number of bytes, and includes various information as information on the predetermined number of bytes.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 202, a variable winning drive unit 32c for opening and closing the opening / closing door 32b of the variable winning device 32, an electric accessory driving unit 34b for opening / closing the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34, and a main display. The unit 43 is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 201, and the MPU 202 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

The power failure monitoring board 205 relays the main control board 201 and the power supply and the launch control device 98, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and the launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

The power supply and the launch control device 98 are connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, the operating power required for each of the main control board 201, the payout control device 97, etc. is generated based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. do. Further, the power supply and the launch control device 98 are responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism based on the launch permission signal output from the main control board 201, and the game ball launch mechanism has predetermined launch conditions. Driven in case.

The effect control device 82 is a display light emitting unit 63 and a speaker unit provided in the reserved light emitting units 45 and 46 provided in the variable display unit 36 and the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 81. 64 is driven and controlled. Further, the effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212. The display control device 212 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command input from the effect control device 82.

Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIG. 4A, a plurality of variable display areas are set on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, as a plurality of variable display areas, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the upper row, the middle row, and the lower row are set. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order.

Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display screen G, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Further, as shown in FIG. 4 (b), on the display screen G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be done.

Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display screen G. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state where a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines. When the variable display of ~ Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the normal jackpot result or the probabilistic jackpot result described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a probability variation jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbols are combined. Is stopped and displayed. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when a normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. To.

The mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the type of the symbol to be variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the symbol with a number as described above, and for example, the numerical value itself may be variablely displayed, and the symbol itself may be displayed. May be configured to be displayed in a variable manner.

A hold display area Ga is set at the lower part of the display screen G. In the hold display area Ga, the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 having the same number as the maximum number of holds when the game ball wins in the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction and displayed in a section. It is provided. Specifically, when the game ball wins the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating opening 34, the maximum number of holdings is 4, and in correspondence with this, the holding display area Ga is the first unit holding display area Ga1. , The second unit hold display area Ga2, the third unit hold display area Ga3, and the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 are set.

For example, when the number of holdings is one when the game ball wins in the upper operating opening 33 or the lower operating opening 34, a predetermined holding image is displayed only in the first unit holding display area Ga1 and the game ball is displayed. When the number of holdings is 4 when the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34 is won, a predetermined holding image is displayed in all of the 1st unit holding display area Ga1 to the 4th unit holding display area Ga4. Will be done.

Further, at the lower part of the display screen G, an execution display area Gb is set in parallel with the hold display area Ga. In the execution display area Gb, the predetermined holding image corresponding to the game times currently being executed is displayed.

<About various counters and reserved ball storage areas>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

The MPU 202 uses various counter information during the game to perform a big hit generation lottery, setting the display of the main display unit 43, setting the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting the display of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for a lottery for generating jackpots, and a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining a jackpot type such as a probabilistic jackpot result or a normal jackpot result. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach lottery when the symbol display device 41 deviates and fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the fluctuations in the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41. A variable type counter CS that determines the display time is used. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 is set to the electric accessory open state is used.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 of the RAM 204. Of these, in the lottery counter buffer 231, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS is the case where a prize is generated in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 as the acquisition information storage means.

The hold ball storage area 232 includes a hold area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, according to the winning history of the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. , Each numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 is stored as hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4. To.

In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first holding area RE1 → the second holding area RE1 → the second holding area. Each numerical information is stored in the order of RE2 → 3rd holding area RE3 → 4th holding area RE4 in chronological order. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls in the upper working port 33 or the lower working opening 34 can be held and stored. Further, the reserved ball storage area 232 includes a reserved number storage area NA, and the reserved number storage area NA specifies the number of reserved winning histories stored in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. Information for is stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first hold area RE1 of the hold area RE when starting the variable display of the main display unit 43, and is an area for starting one game round. Based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE, a hit / fail determination or the like is performed.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 299, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 299). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34.

The value of the random number that wins the big hit is stored as a hit / miss table (hit / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area 221 as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 203.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means. The number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the low probability mode is different from the number of jackpot numerical information referenced in the high probability mode, and the former is smaller than the latter. As a result, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big hit than the low probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203. Then, a normal jackpot result and a probabilistic jackpot result are set as such distribution destinations.

The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode.

In the distribution table, "0 to 9" corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and "10 to 29" corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result, but the distribution of this numerical value is arbitrary. Further, the distribution destination of the jackpot result is not limited to the above two types. For example, in the opening / closing execution mode, a plurality of modes are set so that the expected value of the game ball is high or low, and the opening / closing execution is executed. By providing a difference in the mode to which the mode is transferred, the types of jackpot results may be increased from the above two types.

The reach random number counter C3 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. Then, it is decided whether or not to generate the reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203. For example, the reach table is set so that "200 to 239" is numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence winning.

Incidentally, in the game round to shift to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 202 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Here, the reach display (reach state) is a game in which the symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) is provided, and the variable winning device 32 is in the open / close execution mode. In a gaming machine whose stop display result after variable display is a special display result, after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 41 is started, before the stop display result is derived and displayed. , A display state for making the player think that the special display result is a variable display state.

In other words, by stopping and displaying some of the symbols among the plurality of symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established. It is a display state in which a combination of possible reach symbols is displayed, and in that state, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner.

More specifically, as a pre-stage for ending the variable display of the symbol, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established on the preset effective line in the display screen of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of possible reach symbols, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of the symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence.

To specifically explain the display contents of FIG. 4, first, high-speed fluctuation display is started for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or impossible to recognize which symbol is displayed. After that, the variation display mode of the upper symbol sequence Z1 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display in which the player can recognize or easily recognize the symbol displayed. Then, when the variation display of the upper symbol sequence Z1 is completed, the variation display mode of the lower symbol sequence Z3 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display. After that, the variable display of the lower symbol column Z3 ends. In this case, the reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the same numbers on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. Then, when the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display and the open / close execution mode is generated, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is attached. Is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the variation display of the symbols in the symbol row Z2 in the middle row is terminated.

Further, in the reach display, in the state where the combination of the reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variable display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to reach the reach. It includes those that perform an effect and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen after reducing or hiding the combination of reach symbols. Further, when the reach display is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to perform the advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

The variation type counter CS is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 199, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 202 to determine the variation display time on the main display unit 43 and the variation display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 41. When the variation display time is determined using the variation type counter CS, the variation display time table stored in the variation display time table storage area 222 of the ROM 203 is referred to.

The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 249, reach a maximum value, and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric accessory holding area of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state according to the value of the stored electric accessory opening counter C4.

<About various processes executed by MPU202 of the main control board 201>
Next, the timer interrupt process and the normal process executed in advancing the game of each game on the MPU 202 of the main control board 201 will be described.

In the MPU 202, in addition to the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing, the main processing started when the power is turned on is executed, and the power interruption signal from the power interruption monitoring board 205 to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) is executed. NMI interrupt processing activated by input is executed, but description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is periodically activated by the MPU 202 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S101, the reading process is executed. In the reading process, the state of the sensor corresponding to the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 connected to the main control device 81 is read, and the state of the sensor is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. ..

After executing the reading process in step S101, the process proceeds to step S102. In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

In the following step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

In the following step S104, a winning process for passing through is executed in association with winning the winning through the through gate 35. In the winning process for thru, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is set to the electric service hold on condition that the number of the accessory hold stored in the electric service hold area is less than 4. Store in the area. Further, the effect control device 82 is subjected to a process for lighting the accessory hold light emitting unit 46 of the variable display unit 36 corresponding to the number of accessory hold storages.

After that, in step S105, the timer interrupt process is terminated after the winning process for the operating port accompanying the winning of the operating ports 33 and 34 is executed.

<Prize processing for operating port>
The winning process for the operating port will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S201, it is determined whether or not the upper working opening winning flag is stored in the upper working opening winning flag storage area in the various flag storing areas 234 of the RAM 204. The upper operating port winning flag is stored in the reading process (step S101) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 6) when a game ball is won in the upper operating port 33. If the upper operation opening winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S207 without executing the processes of steps S202 to S206. If the upper working opening winning flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S202.

In step S202, the upper working opening winning flag is cleared. In the following step S203, the value stored in the hold number storage area NA of the hold ball storage area 232 is read, and the hold storage number N stored in the hold area RE is the upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment). ) To determine whether or not it is less than. If the number of reserved storages N is equal to or greater than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S207 as it is. If the number of reserved storages N is less than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S204, and the number of reserved storages N is incremented by 1.

In the following step S205, each value (each numerical value information) of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS updated in the previous step S103 is set to the empty hold area of the hold area RE. It is stored in the first hold area of RE1 to RE4, that is, the hold area corresponding to the hold storage number N added by 1 in step S204.

In the following step S206, the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212, which are the control devices on the sub side (secondary side), recognize that the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 has won a prize, and the effect control device. In 82, the confirmation process for the hold notice, which is the process for executing the hold notice, is executed. Such processing will be described in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S201, if a negative determination is made in step S203, or after the process of step S206 is executed, in step S207, the lower operation opening winning flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204 is moved down. It is determined whether or not the operation opening winning flag is stored. The lower operating port winning flag is stored in the reading process (step S101) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 6) when a game ball is won in the lower operating port 34. If the lower working opening winning flag is not stored, the main winning process is terminated as it is. When the lower working opening winning flag is stored, the processes of steps S203 to S206 are executed after the lower working opening winning flag is cleared in step S208. In this case, the winning process is terminated by making a negative determination in the process of step S207 after the process of steps S203 to S206.

In a configuration in which an upper operating port 33 and a lower operating port 34 are provided as operating ports in the game area and winning of both operating ports 33 and 34 can occur at the same time, the upper operating port can be processed once by the timer interrupt process. It is determined whether or not a prize has been generated for 33 and whether or not a prize has been generated for the lower operating port 34, and when both operating ports 33 and 34 have been awarded at the same time, respectively. The information acquisition processing of steps S203 to S205 and the information transmission processing to the control device on the sub-side based on the winning of step S206 are executed for the winning. As a result, even if the winning of both the operating ports 33 and 34 occurs at the same time, the holding information based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 and the holding information based on the winning of the lower operating port 34 can be acquired. It can be performed accurately, and the information transmission process to the control device on the sub side can be executed at an early timing.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S301 to S306 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S308 and S309 are executed in the remaining time.

In the normal processing, in step S301, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt processing or the previous normal processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. Further, when various hold commands, variation commands, type commands, variation end commands, and other effect commands are set, they are transmitted to the effect control device 82.

Next, in step S302, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

In the following step S303, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 97 are read. After that, in step S304, a game time control process for controlling the game in each game time is executed. In this game round control process, jackpot determination, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the main display unit 43, and the like are performed. The game times control process will be described in detail later.

After that, in step S305, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By this game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, and the like.

In a subsequent step S306, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower actuating port 34 is executed. In this electric service support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and the display control of the accessory display unit 44 is performed. In this case, as described above, a lottery is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as an opportunity, and the drive control of the electric accessory 34a is performed based on the lottery result.

In the following step S307, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal process. Then, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated (steps S308 and S309). That is, in step S308, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. Further, in step S309, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S301 to S306 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly. The variable type counter CS can also be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 9 to 11.

In the game turn control process shown in FIG. 9, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag (open / close execution state information) is stored in the open / close execution mode flag storage area (open / close execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. The open / close execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process, and is cleared when the open / close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process.

When the open / close execution mode is in progress, this game is performed without executing any of the processes after step S402, that is, the game round start process of steps S402 to S405 and the game round progress process of steps S406 to S409. Ends the control process. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the game round is not started regardless of whether or not the operating openings 33 and 34 have been won.

If it is not in the open / close execution mode, it is determined in step S402 whether or not the main display unit 43 is in the variable display. In this determination, it is determined whether or not the variation display flag (variation display information) is stored in the variation display flag storage area (variation display information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. It is done by. The variation display flag is stored when the variation display is started in the main display unit 43, and is cleared when the variation display ends.

If the main display unit 43 is not in the variable display, the process proceeds to the game round start process of steps S403 to S405. In the game round start process, first, in step S403, it is determined whether or not the reserved storage number N is “0”. When the hold storage number N is "0", it means that the hold information is not stored in the hold ball storage area 232. Therefore, the game round control process is terminated as it is.

If the hold storage number N is not "0", the data setting process for setting the data stored in the hold ball storage area 232 for the variable display is executed in step S404, and further, the main in step S405. The fluctuation start processing for starting the fluctuation display on the display unit 43 and the fluctuation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. After executing the fluctuation start processing, the game round control processing is terminated.

Here, the data setting process in step S404 and the fluctuation start process in step S405 will be described in detail below.

First, the data setting process in step S404 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the data setting process, first, in step S501, the reserved storage number N is subtracted by 1. In the following step S502, the data stored in the first hold area RE1 of the hold area RE is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S503, a process of shifting the data (that is, the hold information) stored in the hold areas RE1 to RE4 of the hold area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reserved area RE1 to the fourth reserved area RE4 to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first reserved area RE1 and the second. The data in each area is shifted such as the holding area RE2 → the first holding area RE1, the third holding area RE3 → the second holding area RE2, the fourth holding area RE4 → the third holding area RE3.

In the following step S504, a shift command, which is information for causing the effect control device 82 to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted, is set. After that, this data setting process is terminated. The shift command set in step S504 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 8). By receiving the shift command, the effect control device 82 executes a process for changing the display in the main hold light emitting unit 45 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds. Further, the effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 to execute a process for changing the display in the hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

Next, the fluctuation start processing in step S405 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the variation start process, first, in step S601, a hit / fail determination process for determining whether or not the hold information corresponding to the current variation start process corresponds to the jackpot winning is executed. In the win / fail determination process, it is first determined whether or not the win / fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, the hit / fail table for the high probability mode is referred to among the tables stored in the hit / miss table storage area 221, and the hit / miss determination information among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, It is determined whether or not the value related to the jackpot random number counter C1 matches the jackpot numerical information for high probability. Further, in the case of the low probability mode, the value related to the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with reference to the hit / fail table for the low probability mode among the tables stored in the hit / miss table storage area 221. Determines if is consistent with the low probability jackpot numerical information.

After executing the winning / failing determination process in step S601, it is determined in step S602 whether or not the jackpot is won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202. If the jackpot information is stored, the type determination process is executed in step S603.

In the type determination process, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for type determination, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. In addition, the information corresponding to the probabilistic jackpot information is acquired from the distribution table of the ROM 203. Then, both information are compared, and it is specified whether or not it corresponds to the probability change jackpot information.

In the following step S604, it is determined whether or not the type of the current jackpot winning is the probability variation jackpot result based on the information specified in the type determination process in step S603. If it is a probability variation jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot is executed in step S605, and if it is not the probability variation jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the normal jackpot is executed in step S606. Further, if it is determined in step S602 that the big hit is not won, the stop result setting process for the time of loss is executed in step S607.

In each stop result setting process of steps S605 to S607, information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 is specified from the information stored in advance in the ROM 203, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 204. Remember. Further, in steps S605 and S606, information for specifying in the MPU 202 that the hit / fail determination result of the current game round is a probabilistic jackpot result or a normal jackpot result is stored in various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204 ( Store the information of "1" in the corresponding area). Specifically, in step S605, the probability variation jackpot flag is stored, and in step S606, the normal jackpot flag is stored.

After executing any of the processes of steps S605 to S607, the variable display time setting process is executed in step S608.

Here, the variable display time setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 12, in the variable display time setting process, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. If the jackpot is won, in the following step S702, the variable display time table at the time of the jackpot is acquired from the variable display time table storage area 222 of the ROM 203. If the result is not a big hit but a loss, the variable display time table at the time of loss is acquired from the variable display time table storage area 222 in step S703.

In each variation display time table, the variation display time is determined by the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS, and the reserved storage number N at the start of the variation. That is, as shown in FIG. 13, the presence / absence of reach occurrence is determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. In the present embodiment, in this fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display time is determined by the hold number non-correspondence pattern in which the fluctuation display time is determined regardless of the hold storage number N at the start of fluctuation, and the hold storage number N at the start of fluctuation. The pattern for the number of pending numbers is defined.

More specifically, in the variable display time table at the time of a big hit, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 is 0 to 4, it is set to the game times in which reach does not occur. Among them, the case where the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is 0 to 24 is set as the fluctuation pattern of the reach non-occurrence A, and this is the fluctuation pattern of the hold number non-corresponding pattern. In this case, the fluctuation display time is set to 10 sec regardless of the value of the reserved storage number N at the start of the fluctuation. Further, among the non-reach occurrences, the case where the value of the variation type counter CS is 25 to 49 is set as the variation pattern of the reach non-occurrence B, and this is the variation pattern of the pending number correspondence pattern. In this case, when the reserved storage number N at the start of fluctuation is 0 to 1, the variable display time is set to 10 sec, and when the reserved storage number N is 2 to 3, the variable display time is set to 5 sec.

In the variable display time table at the time of big hit, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 is 5 to 99, it is set to the game times when reach occurs. Then, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 is 5 to 19, it is set to the game times in which normal reach occurs, and when the value of the reach random number counter C3 is 20 to 99, it is set to the game times in which super reach occurs. Will be done.

Here, the super reach is a reach display in which the expectation of winning a big hit is set higher than that of the normal reach. Further, Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach C are set as Super Reach. In Super Reach A to C, Super Reach C is set to have the highest expectation of winning a big hit, and C, B, and A are set to have the highest expectation of winning a big hit. These Super Reach A to C are also different in the production content, and Super Reach A and B are set to play an animated movie, and Super Reach C is set to play a live-action movie. ing. It should be noted that different animation movies are set for Super Reach A and B. The variable display times of Super Reach A to C are different, the variable display time of Super Reach C is set to be the longest, and the variable display time is set to be longer in the order of C, B, and A. More specifically, the super reach A is set to 45 sec, the super reach B is set to 60 sec, and the super reach C is set to 90 sec. The game times in which these super reach A to C occur are fluctuation patterns of the hold number non-correspondence pattern in which the game times are performed at the set change display time regardless of the value of the hold storage number N at the start of the change. ..

In the game times in which normal reach occurs at the time of a big hit, the case where the fluctuation type counter CS is 0 to 24 is set as the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach A, and this is the fluctuation pattern of the hold number non-corresponding pattern. In this case, the fluctuation display time is set to 20 sec regardless of the value of the reserved storage number N at the start of the fluctuation. Further, among the game times in which the normal reach occurs, the case where the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is 25 to 49 is set as the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach B, and this is the fluctuation pattern of the hold number corresponding pattern. In this case, when the reserved storage number N at the start of fluctuation is 0 to 1, the variable display time is set to 20 sec, and when the reserved storage number N is 2 to 3, the variable display time is set to 15 sec. Although the normal reach A and the normal reach B have the same effect pattern after the reach occurs, the content of the advance notice effect is different as the effect until the reach occurs, that is, the effect until the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped. ing. That is, the length of the variation display time between the normal reach A and the normal reach B is based on the length of the time until the reach occurs, and the length of the time from the start to the end of the reach is the same regardless of which of the normal reach A and B. Is set to.

On the other hand, in the variable display time table at the time of disconnection, all of reach non-occurrence A, reach non-occurrence B, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B and super reach C are set. The probability of occurrence is different. That is, at the time of deviation, when the reach random number counter C3 is 0 to 59, it is set to non-reach generation, when it is 60 to 99, it is set to reach generation, and the probability of reach occurrence is set lower than that at the time of big hit. There is. When the value of the variation type counter CS is 0 to 24 when the reach does not occur, it is set as the reach non-occurrence A, and when the value is 25 to 49, it is set as the reach non-occurrence B.

Of the reach occurrences at the time of off, when the reach random number counter C3 is 60 to 89, it is set to normal reach, when it is 90 to 99, it is set to super reach, and the occurrence rate of super reach among reach occurrences is higher than that at the time of big hit. Is also set low. In the normal reach, when the variation type counter CS is 0 to 24, it is set as the normal reach A, and 25 to 49 is set as the normal reach B. In the super reach, when the value of the variation type counter CS is 0 to 15, it is set as super reach A, when it is 16 to 33, it is set as super reach B, and when it is 34 to 49, it is set as super reach C. Has been done.

In this specification, the variable display time will be described in relation to the display on the symbol display device 41. The variable display time (operating period) is the variable display after the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is started. In addition to the time until the end of, the so-called fixed time for displaying the stop result (game result) after the variation display ends shall be included.

Returning to the description of the variation display time setting process (FIG. 12), after acquiring either the variation display time table in step S702 or step S703, the variation display time table acquired in step S704 and each parameter. The variable display time (operating period) corresponding to (reach random number counter C3, variable type counter CS, reserved storage number N) is set in the variable display time counter provided in various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204. After that, the variable display time setting process is terminated.

As described above, the variation display time of each game is determined by using the game result, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the variation type counter CS as parameters. As the fluctuation pattern to be determined, as described above, reach non-occurrence A, reach non-occurrence B, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C are set. Further, a hold number correspondence pattern in which the hold storage number N is added as a parameter and a hold number non-correspondence pattern in which the hold storage number N is not added as a parameter are set, and the above-mentioned fluctuation patterns of reach non-occurrence B and normal reach B are set. Is a hold number correspondence pattern, and other fluctuation patterns are hold number non-correspondence patterns.

The method of setting the variable display time for each game is not limited to the above. For example, a configuration that does not include reach non-occurrence at the time of a big hit, that is, a configuration in which reach occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 at the time of a big hit may be used. Further, the reach generation and its type may be determined by using not only the reach random number counter C3 but also another counter. As another counter, for example, a stop pattern counter that determines a stop symbol of a predetermined line (for example, middle line L2) can be considered when the counter is off, and a symbol that stops and displays the same symbol combination is determined when a big hit occurs. A jackpot symbol counter or the like can be considered. In this case, for example, the reach random number counter C3 may determine whether or not reach has occurred, and the other counter may determine the type.

Further, the variable display time may be different depending on the height of the support mode and the height of the winning / failing lottery mode. For example, in the high frequency support mode, as compared with the low frequency support mode, a configuration in which a short variable display time can be easily selected even if the game result is the same, and a configuration in which a long variable display time can be easily selected. May be good. In the high-frequency support mode, the hold information is acquired relatively frequently, so that a smooth game can be realized by configuring the configuration so that a short variable display time can be easily selected. In this case, it is preferable to add a process of determining the level of the support mode in the variable display time setting process to acquire the variable display time table corresponding to the support mode.

Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 11), after executing the variation display time setting process in step S608, the variation command and the type command are set in step S609. The fluctuation command includes information on whether or not reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time. In addition, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes information on the probability variation jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result, information on the missed result, and the like as information on the game result.

The variation command and the type command set in step S609 are transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 8). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variable command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a variable display mode of the symbol on the symbol display device 41, and the determined variable display mode of the symbol is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. To. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the variable display of the symbol corresponding to each game round is performed based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82. After that, in step S610, the variation display of the pattern is started on the main display unit 43, and then the variation start process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the game round control process (FIG. 9), when the main display unit 43 is in the variable display, the game round progress process of steps S406 to S409 is executed. In the game round progress process, first, in step S406, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation display time information stored in the fluctuation display time counter area of the RAM 204 is "0". As described above, the value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (step S608). Further, the value of the set variable display time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 6) is activated.

If the variation display time has not elapsed, the variation display process is executed in step S407. In the variable display process, the display mode in the result display unit related to the current game round is changed. After that, the game round control process is terminated.

If the variation display time has elapsed, the variation end process is executed in step S408. In the variable end processing, the information stored in the RAM 204 is specified in any of the processes of steps S605 to S607, and the main display is displayed so that the mode of the pattern corresponding to the information is displayed on the main display unit 43. Display control of unit 43.

In the following step S409, a variable end command is set. The variable end command set here is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 8). The effect control device 82 ends the effect in the game round based on the received variable end command. Further, the variation end command is transmitted from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212, and the display control device 212 receives the variation end command to confirm and display the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round (final). Stop display). After the execution of step S409, the game round control process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the game state transition process executed in step S305 of the normal process will be described.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the variation display of the pattern of one game round is completed. If it is not the timing when the variation display is finished, the game state transition process is finished as it is.

When the variation display is finished, in step S803, it is determined whether or not the game result of the current game times corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

If any of the above flags is stored, the opening / closing execution mode start processing is executed in step S804. In the start processing, an opening waiting time (starting waiting period) for waiting without starting the opening of the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 for the opening of the opening / closing execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for opening stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 6) is executed.

In the following step S805, a round display start process for notifying the type of the opening / closing execution mode this time is executed. In the round display start processing, first, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 is confirmed. Then, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 203, and the content of the number of rounds is confirmed from the specified stop result data. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43. As a result, the round display unit RS displays the round information related to the output.

In the following step S806, an opening command is set. This set opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 8). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a display mode in the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display (for example, moving image display) corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode is performed based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82.

In the following step S807, after executing the external signal setting process, the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided in the external output terminal 99 is set to the jackpot signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 generates a jackpot in the management control device. You can understand what you have done.

On the other hand, when the open / close execution mode is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S801, and the process proceeds to step S808. In step S808, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the large winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S809. In the large winning opening opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the large winning opening 32a is performed according to the unit opening time of each round and the waiting time between rounds, and the number of winnings to the large winning opening 32a reaches the upper limit winning number in each round. If so, the variable winning drive unit 32c is driven and controlled so that the large winning opening 32a is closed even if the unit opening time has not elapsed.

After executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S809, it is determined in step S810 whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is "0", and whether the waiting time for the ending has elapsed in step S811. Judge whether or not. If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0" or the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the value of the round counter area RC is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S812.

Here, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. When the probability change jackpot flag is stored, the flag erasing process for erasing the information for specifying the game state is executed in step S902. Specifically, if the open / close execution mode flag, the high probability mode flag, and the high frequency support flag are stored, they are deleted, and if they are not already stored, the state is maintained. In the following step S903, the high probability mode flag is stored, and in step S904, the high frequency support flag is stored. As a result, the gaming state shifts to the gaming state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode (hereinafter, the gaming state is also referred to as a special advantageous state). After executing the process of step S904, the present migration process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S901 that the probability variation jackpot flag is not stored, the flag erasing process is executed in step S905. After that, in step S906, the high frequency support flag is stored, and in step S907, "100" is set in the game count counter area provided in various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204. As a result, the gaming state shifts to the gaming state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode ends when the game times continue 100 times, and then shifts to the normal game state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. After executing the process of step S907, the present migration process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 14), after the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode in step S812 is completed, the round display end process is executed in step S813. In this process, the display control of the round display unit RS is terminated so that the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43 is turned off. After that, in step S814, after executing the end processing of the open / close execution mode, the main game state transition process is ended. In the end processing of the open / close execution mode, the probability change jackpot flag and the normal jackpot flag are cleared.

<About hold notice>
Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the hold notice corresponding to the content of the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 232 has a predetermined probability at a timing before the game round related to the hold information is started. It is configured to be done in. Such a hold notice is performed by executing a predetermined control by the effect control device 82 based on a predetermined command transmitted from the main control device 81. The electrical configuration and processing configuration related to the suspension notice will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 16, the MPU 242 is mounted on the effect control board 241 provided in the effect control device 82. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 242, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 243 is executed. A certain RAM 244, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built-in. It is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 242, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to the MPU of other control devices.

The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242. From the main control device 81, a hold display control command (hold display control information) such as a shift command or a hold command described later is received. In addition, it receives game times control commands (game times control information) such as fluctuation start commands, type commands, and fluctuation end commands. It also receives open / close execution mode commands (open / close execution mode information) such as opening commands and ending commands.

As described above, the output side of the MPU 242 is connected to the reserved light emitting units 45 and 46 provided in the variable display unit 36, and the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 provided in the front door frame 14. At the same time, the display control device 212 is connected.

The display control device 212 includes a display control board 251 on which an MPU 252 in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 256, and a video RAM 257, respectively, are mounted. There is.

From the effect control device 82, the MPU 252 has a hold display control command (hold display control information) for performing hold display control, a game turn control command (game turn control information) for performing variable display of a symbol, and a game turn control command. Receives open / close execution mode commands (open / close execution mode information) for displaying moving images in open / close execution mode. Then, the received commands are analyzed, or predetermined arithmetic processing is performed based on the received commands to control the VDP 255 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 255).

The program ROM 253 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 252 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 254 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 252. These work data, flags, and the like are stored in each area of the work RAM 254.

The VDP 255 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 255 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 255 adjusts the timings of the MPU 252, the video RAM 257, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 257 from the character ROM 256 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 256 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 256 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 256 and share them with each character ROM 256 to store image data and the like. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 253 is stored in the character ROM 256.

The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 257.

<Processing related to hold notice>
Next, the process related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 and the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described. As the process related to the hold notice on the main control device 81 side, the confirmation process (step S206) for the hold notice in the winning process for the operating port (FIG. 7) is set. This process is executed as a part of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 6), and is executed at the timing when the operating ports 33 and 34 are awarded.

The confirmation process for the hold notice will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1001, the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the hold information stored in the hold area RE and is the hold information acquired in step S205 based on the current winning of the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34. Value (information for jackpot determination), value of jackpot type counter C2 (information for jackpot type determination), value of reach random number counter C3 (information for determination of reach occurrence), value of variation type counter CS (variation type) Information about).

In the following step S1002, it is determined whether or not the high probability flag for holding is stored in the RAM 204.

Here, the high probability flag for holding will be described. While the hold information stored in the hold area RE is sequentially digested, the confirmation process for the hold notice is executed at a timing different from the digest timing of the hold information. In this case, a situation may occur in which the lottery mode differs depending on the timing at which the confirmation process for the hold notice is applied to the predetermined hold information and the timing at which the hold information is digested. For example, even if the lottery mode is in the low probability mode at the timing when the predetermined hold information is the target of the confirmation process for the hold notice, the probability change jackpot occurs between that timing and the timing when the predetermined hold information is digested. When the corresponding pending information is exhausted, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode. The hold high probability flag is a flag for grasping the change of the lottery mode in the MPU 202 and reflecting the content in the hit / fail determination in the confirmation process for the hold notice.

By providing the high probability flag for hold, even if the lottery mode changes for the hold information that is subsequently digested by the hold information stored in the hold area RE, the confirmation process for hold notice is performed in the correct lottery mode. This can be done, and it becomes possible to accurately grasp the pass / fail judgment.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, the hit / fail determination process corresponding to the high probability mode is executed in step S1003. If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the hit / fail determination process corresponding to the low probability mode is executed in step S1004.

After the execution of step S1003 or step S1004, a process of temporarily storing the determination result information of the hit / fail determination in step S1003 or step S1004 in the determination result storage area provided in the RAM 204 is executed in step S1005. As a result, by grasping the determination result information stored in the determination result storage area, it is possible to grasp the determination result of the present / wrong determination.

In the following step S1006, it is determined whether or not the pending information this time corresponds to the probabilistic jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the determination result information is the jackpot information and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is a value corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1006, the flag is set by storing "1" in the high probability flag for holding in step S1007.

When a negative determination is made in step S1006, it is determined in step S1008 whether or not the current hold information corresponds to a normal jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the determination result information is the jackpot information and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is a value corresponding to the normal jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1008, the hold high probability flag is cleared to "0" in step S1009.

After executing any one of steps S1007 and S1009, or when a negative determination is made in step S1008, the hold command setting process is executed in step S1010 to end the confirmation process for the hold notice.

The hold command setting process executed in step S1010 is a process for causing the effect control device 82 to grasp the game result information and the variation display time information as the contents of the hold information.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 18, first, in step S1101, among the reserved information acquired this time, the process of grasping the information related to the game result, that is, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 is performed. Execute. In the following step S1102, among the pending information acquired this time, the process of grasping the information related to the fluctuation display time, that is, the values of the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS is executed. Then, in step S1103, the process of setting the hold command including the information grasped in step S1101 and step S1102 as the output target to the effect control device 82 is executed, and the process of setting the hold command is completed. This hold command is output to the effect control device 82 in step S301 of the normal process (FIG. 8). In the hold command, instead of setting the values of the counters C1, C2, C3, CS, etc. as the information related to the game result and the variable display time, the information of the game result and the variable display time itself is set. It may be configured. By doing so, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts in which the values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and CS are read from the commands input / output between the main control device 81 and the effect control device 82. This also applies to other commands (variation command, type command, variation end command, etc.) input / output between the main control device 81 on the main side and the effect control device 82 on the sub side, and the counter It is preferable to configure these commands to set the information set from the counter value, not the value itself. Even with these commands, if the value of the random number counter on the main side, which is related to the interests of the player, is output to the sub side, the random number update timing may be grasped and fraudulent activity may be performed. be.

Next, the process related to the hold notice on the effect control device 82 side will be described. The processing on the effect control device 82 side is roughly classified into a hold control command correspondence process and a special hold notice control process. The hold control command correspondence process is a process for responding to a hold control command (hold command or shift command) from the main control device 81, and the special hold notice control process is a special hold set in the hold notice. This is a process for controlling the advance notice. Each of these processes is set to be started at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). Then, in the effect control device 82, in addition to each of these processes, a variable display control process for controlling the effect for the game round is set. This fluctuation display control process is also set to be started at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

First, the hold control command correspondence process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1201, it is determined whether or not the hold command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, the sub-side reserved storage number SN stored in various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 is incremented by 1 in step S1202. In the following step S1203, the hold display setting process is executed.

Here, in the present embodiment, as a look-ahead effect, which is a kind of hold notice, an effect of differentiating the hold image P to be displayed in the hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 41 is set in correspondence with the hold information. A plurality of types of the hold image P are set according to the jackpot expectation of the hold information, and the hold image P corresponding to the jackpot expectation of the hold information is displayed as a look-ahead effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20A, as the holding image P, the first holding image P1 (A), the second holding image P2 (B), the third holding image P3 (C), The fourth holding image P4 (D) and the fifth holding image P5 (E) are set, and each of these holding images P1 to P5 is set to have different colors and shapes so that they can be distinguished from each other. ing. In the present embodiment, for example, the first holding image P1 is rainbow-colored, the second holding image P2 is gold, the third holding image P3 is red, the fourth holding image P4 is yellow, and the fifth holding image P5. Is set to be displayed in blue. In the figure, the hatch settings are displayed differently.

In the hold display setting process of step S1203, the hold image P corresponding to the received hold command is set from among these hold images P1 to P5. In this case, the hold display pattern table stored in the ROM 243 is acquired, and the corresponding hold images P1 to P5 are set from the information included in the hold command. As the hold display pattern table, as shown in FIG. 21, a hold display pattern table at the time of a big hit and a hold display pattern table at the time of a miss are set. Then, based on the game result information (big hit random number counter C1) among the information included in the hold command, it is determined whether or not the hold information corresponding to the hold command is the jackpot result, and the jackpot result is used. In some cases, the hold display pattern table at the time of big hit is acquired, and in other cases (when it is a result of loss), the hold display pattern table at the time of loss is acquired.

In the hold display pattern table at the time of a big hit, the hold image P1 is set according to various fluctuation patterns (reach non-occurrence A, reach non-occurrence B, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B and super reach C). The selection rates of ~ P5 are set to be different. The first reserved image P1 is set to have the lowest probability of being selected, and the probability of being selected in the order of P1, P2, P3, P4, and P5 is set to be low. Further, when the super reach A to C and the normal reach A and B are compared, it is easier to select the holding image on the side where the number is smaller in the super reach A to C, and the normal reach A and B and the reach non-occurrence A and B are selected. By comparison, the normal reach A and B are set so that the reserved image on the smaller number side is more easily selected.

Comparing the ease of selection of the reserved image on the side with the smaller number in Super Reach A to C, Super Reach C is set so as to be most easily selected, and C, B, and A are easily selected in this order. .. In normal reach A and B, normal reach A is more easily selected than normal reach B, and in non-reach A and B, non-reach A is more likely to be selected than non-reach B. In the reach non-occurrence B, the first reserved image P1 is set not to be selected.

In the hold display pattern table at the time of off, the same fluctuation pattern (reach non-occurrence A, reach non-occurrence B, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B and super) is compared with the hold display pattern table at the time of big hit. Even in reach C), it is set so that it is difficult to select the reserved image on the side with the smaller number. For example, in the reach non-occurrence A and B at the time of disconnection, the first holding image P1 to the third holding image P3 are not selected, and the fourth holding image P4 and the fifth holding image P5 are for the fifth holding. The image P5 is easier to select than the fourth holding image P4. Further, the first holding image P1 and the second holding image P2 are not selected in the normal reach A and B at the time of disconnection, and the fifth holding image P5 is selected in the third holding image P3 to the fifth holding image P5. It is the easiest to select, and it is easier to select in the order of P5, P4, P3. Further, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, the first reserved image P1 is set not to be selected at the time of disengagement.

That is, in the hold display pattern table at the time of big hit and the hold display pattern table at the time of off, the higher the jackpot expectation is, the easier it is to select the hold image with the smaller number, and the longer the variable display time is, the higher the number is. A small hold image is set so that it can be easily selected. Therefore, by displaying the reserved image on the side with the smaller number, the player expects that a big hit result will be obtained in the game times corresponding to the reserved image, and the winning / failing judgment is held for the game times. It is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention before the execution of the game.

On the other hand, it can be predicted that the hold information on which the hold image on the higher number side is displayed is not a jackpot result but a miss result. Therefore, the game times related to such reserved information can be the game times waiting for the player to digest. In particular, when an effect pattern with a long variable display time is selected in such a game, the effect is performed for a long time even though the player predicts that the result is out of order, and the effect is performed. May feel redundant. Furthermore, for the hold information that is the target of the pass / fail judgment after the hold information corresponding to the hold image on the higher side, if the hold image with a lower number is displayed, this number is used. While the degree of attention to the game times related to the reserved information on the smaller side increases, the effect of making the game times related to the reserved information on the larger number side feel redundant is expected to increase. On the contrary, if an effect pattern with a short fluctuation display time is selected in the game times that are predicted to be the jackpot result, the result will be different even though the jackpot result is predicted. Yes), it can result in suspicion. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, a special hold notice is set as a kind of hold notice in order to eliminate the above-mentioned inconvenience due to the length of the variable display time.

That is, after executing the hold display setting process in step S1203 in the hold control command correspondence process (FIG. 19), the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether or not the hold notice counter YK provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 is less than "3". The hold notice counter YK is a counter for adjusting the number of times the above special hold notice is executed.

Here, the special hold notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 (b) to 20 (d).

In the special hold notice, which is a kind of hold notice, a predetermined hold image is set to change to another hold image based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. More specifically, the predetermined holding image is changed to the holding image on the side having a smaller number than the predetermined holding image based on the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions.

Specifically, the condition for changing the hold image is a condition related to the passage of time from the start to the end of the special hold notice. The special hold notice starts from the start of the display of the hold image, that is, the acquisition of the hold information, and in the game times of the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice, the lower symbol column Z3 starts from the high-speed fluctuation display. It is set to end at the timing of switching to the low-speed fluctuation display. Then, at the start of this special hold notice, the predetermined set time is displayed, and the predetermined set time elapses before the special hold notice ends, that is, the hold subject to the special hold notice. A hold image displayed for the hold information subject to the special hold notice by the elapse of this predetermined set time before the lower symbol string Z3 switches to the low-speed fluctuation display in the information game round. Changes to the holding image on the side with a smaller number than the displayed holding image. In the following description, the condition for changing the hold image in this special hold notice is also referred to as a special condition.

As a special hold notice, a time display for displaying the above-mentioned predetermined set time above the hold image so as to be displayed corresponding to the hold image in the third unit hold display area Ga3 in FIG. 20B, for example. The area GE is set, and the time display image Gp is displayed in the time display area GE. This time display area GE includes a time display image Gp and a hold image, for example, in a balloon or the like so that the player can recognize which hold image is the hold information subject to the special hold notice. Is displayed in association with each other. This time display image Gp is associated with a predetermined set time, for example, "68.40" is displayed updatable in 0.01 sec units, and counts down every 0.01 sec from the start to the end of the special hold notice. The display is updated in the format.

Then, in the special hold notice, the fourth hold image P4 is uniformly displayed as the hold image at the start thereof, and the hold image on the side where the fourth hold image P4 has a smaller number (for example, the third hold). It has a structure that can be changed to the image P3). For example, as shown in FIG. 20 (c), in the game times of the hold information subject to the special hold notice, the time before the lower symbol sequence Z3 switches from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. When the display image Gp becomes "00.00" and the special condition is satisfied, the hold image that is the target of the special hold notice in the execution display area Gb is changed from the fourth hold image P4 to the third hold image P3. Change.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20 (d), in the game times of the hold information subject to the special hold notice, the time before the lower symbol sequence Z3 switches from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. If the display image Gp cannot be "00.00" and the special condition is not satisfied, the hold image that is the target of the special hold notice in the execution display area Gb is for the fourth hold. The image P4 remains unchanged.

In this case, even after the end of the special hold notice, that is, even after the end of the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol column Z3, the time display image Gp at the end of the high-speed fluctuation display is continuously displayed. However, the countdown of the time display image Gp has stopped, and the remaining time at the end of this special hold notice is continuously displayed as it is.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as the special hold notice, the displayed hold image changes to the hold image on the side with the higher expectation of big hit (the side with the smaller number) based on the establishment of the special condition. It is possible to produce an effect as if the jackpot expectation has increased for the hold information corresponding to the changed hold image. Since this special condition is that a predetermined set time elapses from the start to the end of the special hold notice, the longer the variable display time of the game times from the start to the end of the special hold notice, the more this predetermined time. The set time of is easy to elapse, and the special condition is easy to be satisfied. Therefore, the player expects that when the special hold notice is started, the variable display time of the game times to be digested by the end of the special hold notice is long.

Here, it is considered that setting a predetermined effect (for example, super reach display) having a high expectation of a big hit during the game round contributes to increasing the degree of attention to the game. And, it is considered that the more flashy the predetermined production is, the higher the degree of attention will be. However, even if the production of the game times becomes flashy and the production continues for a long time, the game result does not change, and for a player who wants to know the game result quickly, such a game result. Prolonged production may not be desirable.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, as already explained, the jackpot expectation can be predicted from the relationship with the hold notice, and there are cases where the jackpot cannot be expected simply by the occurrence of a predetermined effect. .. That is, for example, even if a super reach occurs in a game in which the hold image P of the above hold notice is the hold image P on the side where the jackpot expectation is low, the hold image P on the side where the jackpot expectation is high. Compared to the case where super reach occurs in the game times, you cannot expect a big hit. Therefore, if super reach is unfolded in the case of predicting the result of deviation in this way, the time during that time is simply a waiting time for the player to digest, and the inconvenience due to the lengthening of the production is more serious. It can be remarkable.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the variable display time of the game times to be digested during the period when the special hold notice is performed is set so that the special condition is easily satisfied, the variable display time of the game times can be set. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience caused by the long time.

Returning to the description of the hold control command correspondence process (FIG. 19), if the hold notice counter is less than "3" in step S1204, the special hold notice setting process is executed in step S1205. The special hold notice setting process is a process of making various settings for the effect when the above special hold notice is executed. Hereinafter, the special hold notice setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1301, based on the information included in the hold command received this time, it is grasped whether or not the hold information that triggered the hold command is one of the jackpot results. If any of the jackpot results is obtained, the process proceeds to step S1302, and the stored pending information grasping process is executed.

The process of grasping the hold information in step S1302 is a process of grasping the variable display time of the hold information stored in the hold storage area 250 provided in the RAM 244. The hold storage area 250 is a storage area corresponding to the hold ball storage area 232 on the main control device 81 side, and the information included in the received hold command can be stored in association with each hold information.

In the process of grasping the hold information in step S1302, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 23, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not unconfirmed hold information exists in the hold storage area 250. If unconfirmed pending information exists, the variable display time table is acquired in step S1402, and the process of grasping the variable display time for the unconfirmed pending information is executed in step S1403. Here, in the various table storage areas 245 in the ROM 243 of the effect control device 82, the same variation display time table as the variation display time table (FIG. 13) on the main control device 81 side is stored. Then, the information regarding the variation display time included in the hold command, that is, the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter CS is stored in the hold storage area 250 in the hold increase process (step S1208 in FIG. 19) described later. Therefore, based on the information stored in the hold storage area 250 or the information included in the received hold command, and the information of various table storage areas 245, the effect control device 82 also has a variable display time of the hold information. It is possible to grasp.

However, as already explained, the effect pattern in each game round is set to the hold number correspondence pattern and the hold number non-correspondence pattern, and in the case of the hold number correspondence pattern, the hold storage at the start of the game round. The variable display time is determined based on the number N (secondary reserved storage number SN). Then, the hold storage number N at the start timing of the hold information grasping process (FIG. 23) may be different from the hold storage number N at the start timing of the game round of the stored hold information. Therefore, it may not be possible to specify (grasp) the variable display time in step S1403.

Therefore, in step S1404, it is determined whether or not the variable display time can be specified based on the processing result of step S1403. If it can be specified, that is, if the game times related to the hold information confirmed this time is an effect pattern of a pattern that does not correspond to the number of holds, the process returns to step S1401, the presence or absence of unconfirmed hold information is determined, and the hold is unconfirmed. If there is information, the process proceeds to step S1402 again, and if there is no unconfirmed pending information, the process of grasping the pending information is terminated.

As a specific example of the determination process in step S1401, for example, a confirmation counter is set, and the counter is incremented by 1 each time the determination in step S1401 is performed. Then, the hold information is stored in the area of the hold storage area 250 corresponding to the value of the counter (for example, if the value of the counter is 2, the hold information to be the second target of the hit / fail determination is stored). Check if it is. If the hold information is stored in the area corresponding to the counter value, a positive determination is made in step S1401, and if the hold information is not stored in the area corresponding to the counter value, the hold information is stored in the subsequent areas. Is not stored, and a negative determination is made in step S1401. If a negative determination is made in step S1401, the counter is set to the initial value (1). As a result, in the next processing round, the confirmation processing can be performed from the first area of the holding storage area 250.

If it is determined in step S1404 that the variable display time cannot be specified, that is, if the game times related to the hold information confirmed this time is an effect pattern of the hold number corresponding pattern, the process proceeds to step S1405, and various RAM 244s are used. After storing the time unspecified flag in the flag storage area 234, the process of grasping the hold information is terminated. The time unspecified flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that the hold information of the hold number correspondence pattern is included.

Returning to the explanation of the special hold notice setting process (FIG. 22), after executing the hold information grasping process in step S1302, whether or not the variable display time of the stored hold information can be specified in step S1303. Is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the time unspecified flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 244.

If the time unspecified flag is not stored in step S1303 and the variable display time of the stored hold information can be specified, the effect setting process when the time can be specified is executed in step S1304. From, this special hold notice setting process is terminated. Further, when the time unspecified flag is stored in step S1303 and the variable display time of the stored hold information cannot be specified, the effect setting process when the time cannot be specified is performed in step S1305. After executing, this special hold notice setting process ends. On the other hand, in step S1301, if the hold information related to the hold command received this time is not a big hit result but a miss result, the effect setting process at the time of miss is executed in step S1306, and then this special Ends the hold notice setting process.

Hereinafter, the effect setting process when the time can be specified in step S1304, the effect setting process when the time cannot be specified in step S1305, and the effect setting process when the time is out of step S1306 will be described.

<Production setting process when time can be specified>
First, the effect setting process when the time can be specified will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

In step S1501, among the special hold notice tables at the time of a big hit, the special hold notice table at the time when the time can be specified is acquired from the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243. Further, in step S1501, the effect pattern counter EK is acquired from various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244. As shown in FIG. 25A, a time specifying pattern, a normal pattern, and a premier pattern are set as the effect contents of the special holding notice in the special holding notice table when the time can be specified. The contents of these effects will be explained together with the explanation of each process. The effect pattern counter EK is, for example, a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in a predetermined cycle in the range of 0 to 999, reaches a maximum value, and then returns to 0. Then, in step S1502, the effect content of this special hold notice is a normal pattern based on the special hold notice table at the time when the time can be specified and the effect pattern counter EK acquired in step S1501 (EK =). It is determined whether or not it is 500 to 699).

If it is a normal pattern, the process proceeds to step S1503, and a timer input process for the normal pattern is executed as a process for setting the effect for the normal pattern.

Here, the timer input process at the time of the normal pattern will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1601, a process of setting the outline of the special hold notice is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the normal pattern is selected as the special hold notice, the outline of the special hold notice as the normal pattern is first set, and then the time display area GE at the start of the special hold notice. It is configured to set a detailed predetermined set time to be displayed as a time display image Gp. Then, in this step S1601, as an outline of the hold notice to be set, the hold storage number N (secondary hold storage number SN) immediately before the reception of the hold command this time, that is, immediately before the acquisition of the hold information, and various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 are performed. Whether or not the special hold notice is executed based on the special hold counter TK provided in the above and the special hold notice table (FIG. 27 (a)) at the time of a big hit stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243. And when executing the special hold notice, set a rough length (short time, medium time, long time) of the predetermined set time. The special hold counter TK is, for example, a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in a predetermined cycle in the range of 0 to 999, reaches a maximum value, and then returns to 0.

Specifically, in the special hold notice table at the time of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 27 (a), when the hold storage number N immediately before the acquisition of the hold information is 0 (hold storage after the acquisition of the hold information this time). When the number N is 1) and the special hold counter TK is 0 to 699, it is set not to execute the special hold notice. Further, when the reserved storage number N immediately before the acquisition of the reserved information is 0 and the special reserved counter TK is 700 to 999, the special reserved notice is executed, and among these, the special reserved counter TK is executed. When is 700 to 799, the predetermined set time is set to be a medium time, and when it is 800 to 999, it is set to be a short time.

Further, when the reserved storage number N immediately before the acquisition of the reserved information is 1 (when the reserved storage number N after the acquisition of the reserved information this time is 2), the special holding counter TK is 0 to 399. In some cases, it is set not to execute the special hold notice. Further, when the reserved storage number N immediately before the acquisition of the reserved information is 1, and the special reserved counter TK is 400 to 999, the special reserved notice is executed, and among these, the special reserved counter TK is executed. When is 400 to 499, the predetermined set time is set to be long, when it is 500 to 699, it is set to be medium time, and when it is 700 to 999, it is set to be short.

When the number of pending storages N immediately before the acquisition of the pending information is 2 (when the number of reserved storages N after the acquisition of the pending information this time is 3), and the special holding counter TK is 0 to 299. Is set not to execute the special hold notice. Further, when the reserved storage number N immediately before the acquisition of the reserved information is 2, and the special reserved counter TK is 300 to 999, the special reserved notice is executed, and among these, the special reserved counter TK is executed. When it is 300 to 599, the predetermined set time is set to be long, when it is 600 to 899, it is set to be medium time, and when it is 900 to 999, it is set to be short.

When the number of pending storages N immediately before the acquisition of the pending information is 3 (when the number of reserved storages N after the acquisition of the pending information this time is 4), and the special holding counter TK is 0 to 199. Is set not to execute the special hold notice. Further, when the reserved storage number N immediately before the acquisition of the reserved information is 3 and the special reserved counter TK is 200 to 999, the special reserved notice is executed, and among these, the special reserved counter TK is executed. When is 200 to 549, the predetermined set time is set to be long, when it is 550 to 899, it is set to be medium time, and when it is 900 to 999, it is set to be short.

That is, in the special hold notice table, the smaller the number N of hold storage immediately before the acquisition of the hold information, the lower the probability of executing the special hold notice. In other words, the larger the number of stored information on hold, the higher the probability of executing the special hold notice. The larger the number of pending information, the longer the time from the start to the end of the special pending notice can be, so the possibility that the special condition will be satisfied is high. Therefore, by doing the above, it is suppressed that the special hold notice that the special condition is hard to be satisfied is generated.

In the timer input process (FIG. 26) during the normal pattern, after setting the outline of the hold notice in step S1601, whether or not to execute the special hold notice based on the processing result of step S1601 in the following step S1602. judge. If it is determined not to execute, the timer input process is terminated as it is. If it is determined to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1603, in the rough set time set in step S1601, the time selection counter JK provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244, and the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243. Based on the stored time selection table at the time of jackpot (FIG. 27 (b)), the details of the predetermined set time in the special hold notice are set. The time selection counter JK is, for example, a loop counter in which 1 is added in order in a predetermined cycle within the range of 0 to 19, and after reaching the maximum value, the counter returns to 0.

After setting the detailed set time in step S1603, in step S1604, the numerical information corresponding to the set time set in step S1603 is input to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244. Execute the process to be performed. After executing the process of step S1604, the timer input process is terminated. This timer counter T is a counter for managing the subtraction update of a predetermined set time in the special hold notice.

Returning to the explanation of the effect setting process (FIG. 24) when the time can be specified, after executing the process of step S1503, whether or not it is set to execute the special hold notice in the process of step S1503 in step S1504. Is determined. If it is set to non-execution, this effect setting process ends as it is. If it is set to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1505.

That is, in the present embodiment, the process of determining whether or not to execute the special hold notice (step S1601 in the timer input process at the time of the normal pattern in step S1503) is the process of setting the effect pattern of the special hold notice (step S1501). And the configuration is performed after step S1502). Here, as a configuration of a normal effect setting process in the game machine field, a process of whether or not to execute the effect is performed, and if the effect is executed, the effect pattern of the effect is set thereafter. It is common to configure the processing to be performed. This is because if the effect pattern setting process is performed even when the effect is not executed, useless processing is performed by that amount, and there is a concern that the process may be complicated.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, after the effect pattern setting process, the process of whether or not to execute the effect is performed. If the configuration is such that the presence or absence of the effect execution is determined at the initial stage, the difference in the number of processes between the case where the effect is not executed and the case where the effect is executed can be large. In this case, the difference in the time required for the processing also becomes large, and even in the case of the production execution, the production generation timing may be delayed, and the presence or absence of the production execution may be recognized before the production generation occurs. .. In that case, there is a concern that the effect of the prepared production cannot be appropriately achieved. Therefore, by configuring the configuration to determine whether or not to execute the effect after the effect pattern setting process, the difference in the number of processes and the processing time may be reduced, and the presence or absence of the effect may be recognized before the start of the effect. Can be reduced, and the effect of improving the degree of attention by executing the special hold notice can be suitably achieved.

If it is determined in step S1504 that the special hold notice is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1505 to acquire the subtraction pattern table for the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 28A, the subtraction pattern table for the jackpot has a subtraction pattern of the value input to the timer counter T in step S1604, which is a subtraction pattern of a default subtraction, a shift time subtraction, and a specific timing subtraction. One of them is set to be selected based on the value of the subtraction counter GK provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244.

The default subtraction is a method in which the subtraction of the time display image Gp is subtracted according to the actual passage of time in the special hold notice. For example, if 1 sec elapses, the display of the time display image Gp is also decremented by 1 sec and updated. To. The subtraction unit is 0.01 sec corresponding to the minimum display unit of the time display image Gp. The shift subtraction is a subtraction method in which a predetermined number is subtracted at the timing when the reserved information is shifted to the lower area in the reserved ball storage area 232 after one game round is completed, and when this shift subtraction is selected. Is subtracted in addition to the subtraction by default subtraction. The specific timing subtraction is a subtraction method in which a predetermined number is subtracted based on the fact that the display of the time display image Gp becomes a predetermined predetermined display time and the specific timing is reached, and when this specific timing subtraction is selected. Is subtracted in addition to the subtraction by default subtraction.

The subtraction counter GK is, for example, a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in a predetermined cycle in the range of 0 to 999, reaches a maximum value, and then returns to 0. More specifically about the subtraction pattern table, the default subtraction is selected when the subtraction counter GK is 0 to 249, the shift subtraction is selected when it is 250 to 699, and it is specified when it is 700 to 999. Timing subtraction is set to be selected. In step S1506, the subtraction pattern of the timer counter T is set based on these parameters.

After executing the process of step S1506, in step S1507, it is determined whether or not the subtraction pattern set in step S1506 is the subtraction at the time of shift. In the case of shift subtraction, the process of storing the shift flag in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 244 is executed in step S1508. The shift flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that the shift subtraction is selected as the subtraction pattern.

When a negative determination is made in step S1507, or after the process of step S1508 is executed, it is determined in step S1509 whether or not the subtraction pattern set in step S1505 is a specific timing subtraction. In the case of specific timing subtraction, the process of storing the specific timing flag in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 244 is executed in step S1510. The specific timing flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that the specific timing subtraction is selected as the subtraction pattern.

If a negative determination is made in step S1509, or after the process of step S1510 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1511. In step S1511, the special hold command is set as an output target to the display control device 212. This special hold command includes information on the effect content of the special hold notice set in each of the above processes, and is output to the display control device 212 in the command output process started at a predetermined cycle. The display control device 212 that has received the special hold command controls the symbol display device 41 so that the special hold notice is displayed on the display screen G based on the information included in the command. After executing the process of step S1511, the present effect setting process is terminated.

In step S1502, if the effect pattern of the special hold notice this time is not a normal pattern, the process proceeds to step S1512 to determine whether or not it is a time-specific pattern. If it is a time-specific pattern, the process proceeds to step S1513, and the timer input process for the time-specific pattern is executed.

In this timer input process, each hold information stored in the hold storage area 250, the hold information corresponding to the hold command received this time, and the remaining fluctuation display time in the currently executed game round are based on. , The time from the start to the end of the special hold notice is grasped, and the process of setting the timer counter T is performed based on the grasped information.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 29, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not unconfirmed hold information exists in the hold storage area 250. As a specific configuration for confirming the unconfirmed pending information, a configuration similar to the configuration in step S1401 can be considered. If unconfirmed pending information exists, the variable display time table at the time of disconnection is acquired in step S1702. In the present embodiment, when there are a plurality of hold information corresponding to any of the jackpot results in the hold ball storage area 232 (holding storage area 250), an event in which special hold notices based on these jackpot results overlap occurs. It is configured not to. Further, when there are a plurality of reserved information corresponding to these jackpot results, the special reserved notice can be executed only for the reserved information that is the target of the hit / fail judgment first. The process for doing this will be described later, but since it is set in this way, each hold information to be grasped in the timer input process at the time specific pattern is an outlier result. Therefore, in step S1702, a process of acquiring a variation display time table (see FIG. 13B) at the time of disconnection is executed. Then, in step S1703, a process of grasping the variable display time of the reserved information is executed based on the variable display time table acquired in step S1702. In the following step S1704, a process of adding the fluctuation display time grasped in step S1703 to the timer counter T is executed.

After executing the process of step S1704, the process returns to step S1701 to determine whether or not unconfirmed pending information exists, and if so, the processes of steps S1702 to S1704 are repeated. If there is no unconfirmed pending information, the process proceeds to step S1705, and the variable display time table at the time of a big hit (see FIG. 13A) is acquired in order to grasp the variable display time corresponding to the pending information acquired this time. Execute the process to be performed. In the following step S1706, the effect pattern is grasped based on the fluctuation display time table acquired in step S1705, and the time until the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol sequence Z3 is completed in the game times related to this hold information is grasped. Execute the process.

Here, in the present embodiment, from the information of the game result and the information of the variation display time, at least the pattern of the time until the high-speed variation display of the lower symbol string Z3 is completed among the effect patterns of the corresponding game times is obtained. It is possible to grasp. Specifically, regarding this configuration, various table storage areas 245 of ROM 243 of the effect control device 82 store an effect pattern table that determines an effect pattern for each game. The effect pattern table is set so that the time pattern from the game result information and the variation display time information to the end of the high-speed variation display of the lower symbol sequence Z3 is uniquely determined. In step S1706, based on this effect pattern table, the time until the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol sequence Z3 is completed is grasped. In addition, in this effect pattern table, in addition to the time until the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3 is completed, the detailed effect pattern of each game time is also defined. Then, in the fluctuation start processing in the fluctuation display control processing described later, the stop result of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is set based on the information on the presence / absence of reach occurrence, the information on the fluctuation display time, the information on the game result, and the like. Based on the information on the stop result and the information on the variable display time, the details of the corresponding effect pattern are read out from the effect pattern table and set as the effect pattern in the current game round.

That is, the process of step S1706 is a process of specifying the effect pattern of the game times at a timing prior to the start of the game times, and the effect pattern setting process (variation start process) performed at the start of the game times is the game. It is performed before the start timing of the round. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform an effect according to the effect pattern of the game times at a timing before the game times are performed. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect pattern table for setting the effect pattern at the start of the game round is used, and the effect pattern is specified at the timing prior to the start of the game round. The configuration has been simplified to identify it first.

The configuration for specifying the effect pattern of the game round at a timing prior to the start of the game round is not limited to the above, and may be another configuration. For example, the effect pattern table may be separately prepared as a table for the time until the high-speed fluctuation display ends and a table in which detailed effect patterns are set. Further, it may be configured to specify not a part of the effect pattern of the game times but the whole at the previous timing. Furthermore, the time until the high-speed fluctuation display ends is determined by lottery using a counter or the like, and this lottery or the like is performed at the earlier timing, and at the start of the game round, details are taken based on the result of the lottery or the like. It may be configured to determine the production pattern. That is, if the configuration is such that the effect pattern is determined at the start of the game round, it is sufficient if at least a part of the effect pattern to be determined can be specified at a timing earlier than that, and the effect pattern is determined at the start of the game round. If the configuration is determined at a timing earlier than that, the effect pattern determined at the timing after that can be specified, and at the start of the game round, the effect is set based on the determined effect pattern. good.

Then, in step S1707, a process of adding the time grasped in step S1706 to the timer counter T is executed.

After executing the process of step S1707, in step S1708, a process of grasping the remaining fluctuation display time of the game times currently being executed is executed. By the way, in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244, a progress counter for grasping the elapsed status of the fluctuation display time of the game times being executed is provided, and the numerical information corresponding to the fluctuation display time at the start of the game times is this. Input to the progress counter. Further, this progress counter is subtracted and updated every predetermined cycle, and becomes 0 at the end of the game round. In step S1708, by grasping the numerical information of the progress counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining fluctuation display time of the game times being executed. After performing the process of step S1708, in step S1709, the process of adding the remaining time grasped in step S1708 to the timer counter T is executed.

After executing the process of step S1709, the predetermined time adjustment process is executed in step S1710, and then the timer input process is terminated. In this predetermined time adjustment process, adjustment is performed by increasing or decreasing the predetermined set time specified in steps S1701 to S1709. That is, by increasing or decreasing the specified actual time by lottery or the like, it is possible to give randomness to whether or not the predetermined set time elapses until the end of the high-speed fluctuation, that is, the success or failure of the special condition.

It should be noted that the time to be increased or decreased in step S1710 is not limited to the configuration of randomly determining by lottery or the like, and may be determined according to the game result of the hold information subject to the special hold notice or the type of jackpot, for example. Alternatively, it may be determined according to the game situation (for example, the number of holdings or the winning / losing lottery mode). Further, the increase / decrease in step S1710 may be randomly determined by lottery or the like, or may be determined according to the gaming situation during the execution of the special hold notice. By doing so, it becomes possible to more reflect the game situation with respect to the possibility of establishing the special condition, and it is possible to suppress giving the impression of a so-called finished race.

Returning to the explanation of the effect setting process (FIG. 24) when the time can be specified, after executing the timer input process at the time specification pattern in step S1513, after setting the output of the special hold notice command in step S1511, this End the effect setting process. If the premier pattern is used instead of the time-specific pattern in step S1512, the timer input process for the premier pattern is executed in step S1514. After the processing of step S1514, the above-mentioned step S1511 is executed, and then the present effect setting processing is terminated.

In the timer input process at the time of the premier pattern in step S1514, which of the plurality of set premier effects is to be executed is set, and each process corresponding to the set effect is performed. Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30, first, the premier effect lottery process is executed in step S1801. In the premier production lottery process, the production selection table (FIG. 25 (b)) at the time of the premier pattern stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243, and the premier counter PK for the premier production lottery from the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244. , And set which premier production to execute. In the effect selection table at the time of the premier pattern, as the premier effect, there is a fixed time display effect that makes it possible to grasp the jackpot result at the display time at the start of the special hold notice, and a predetermined end time during subtraction. A tail specific change effect in which a big hit confirmation effect is performed, and a one-shot reversal effect in which a large subtraction is performed at a predetermined timing during subtraction to forcibly establish a special condition are set. The premier counter PK is, for example, a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in a predetermined cycle in the range of 0 to 999, reaches a maximum value, and then returns to 0. In the effect selection table at the time of the premier pattern, the case where the premier counter PK is 0 to 333 corresponds to the fixed time display effect, the case where it is 334 to 666 corresponds to the end specific change effect, and the case is 667 to 999. It is set to correspond to the one-shot reversal effect.

After the effect lottery process is executed in step S1801, it is determined in step S1802 whether or not the one-shot reversal effect is set based on the process result. The one-shot reversal effect is a predetermined timing during subtraction as described above, which is a timing before the end of the special hold notice, for example, the start of the game round of the hold information subject to the special hold notice. Occasionally, it is an effect of forcibly satisfying a special condition by subtracting until the set time becomes 0. When this one-shot reversal effect is set, the one-shot reversal flag is set in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 244 so that it can be grasped that the MPU 242 is set to this one-shot reversal effect in step S1803. Executes the process of storing.

The execution timing of the one-shot reversal effect is not limited to the above as long as it is a timing before the end of the special hold notice. For example, it may be before the start of the game round of the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice (during the game round of the hold information that is digested before the hold information that is the target). Further, it may be the timing when new hold information is acquired during the execution of the special hold notice. However, the closer the timing is to the end of the special hold notice, the more unexpected it is when a one-shot reversal effect occurs.

In the following step S1804, the effect time setting process for one-shot reversal is performed. In this effect time setting process, a time selection table at the time of one-shot reversal effect is acquired from various table storage areas 245 of ROM 243, and the time corresponding to the number N of hold storage immediately before the acquisition of the hold information this time is grasped. As shown in FIG. 25 (c), in the time selection table at the time of one-shot reversal, the effect time is set corresponding to the hold storage number N, and the effect time becomes longer as the hold memory number N increases. It is set. It should be noted that a plurality of effect times are set so that the selected effect times can be different even if the number of reserved storages is the same, and which effect time is set is randomly selected by lottery or the like. These effect times are set so that the variable display time in one game is longer than the variable display time that is normally easily selected, and the effect time selected in the time selection table at the time of one-shot reversal is specially reserved. When the notice is executed, it is set so that the special condition is difficult to be satisfied only by the normal default subtraction. It should be noted that no matter which effect time is selected, the special condition may not be satisfied only by the default subtraction.

After executing the process of step S1804, in step S1805, the process of inputting the time grasped in step S1804 to the timer counter T is executed. After executing the process of step S1805, the present timer input process is terminated.

If it is not a one-shot reversal effect in step S1802, it is determined in step S1806 whether or not the effect set in step S1801 is a tail specific change effect. As described above, in the end specific change effect, the display of the predetermined time display image Gp being subtracted is set to "7" in the present embodiment as the predetermined end, and the display of the time display image Gp is "X7.77" (X). Is an arbitrary number) (in the following explanation, it is also referred to as the end specific timing), and the effect of confirming the jackpot is set to occur. When it is determined in step S1806 that the tail specific change effect is set, various flag storage areas of the RAM 244 can be grasped so that it can be grasped that the MPU 242 is set to the tail specific change effect in step S1807. The process of storing the tail specific change flag in 234 is executed.

The end specific timing is not limited to the above, and is, for example, "X7.70", "X7.00", "XY.70", "XY.Z7" (Y and Z are arbitrary numbers). The predetermined end does not have to be a streak. Further, the predetermined end is not limited to one type, and may be a plurality of types. In this case, the number of times that the end specific timing occurs can be increased.

In the following step S1808, the effect time setting process for the end specific change is performed. In this effect time setting process, the time selection table at the time of the tail specific change effect is acquired from various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243, and the time corresponding to the reserved storage number N immediately before the acquisition of the current hold information is grasped. As shown in FIG. 25 (d), in the time selection table at the time of the specific change at the end, the effect time is set corresponding to the hold storage number N, and the effect time becomes longer as the hold memory number N increases. It is set. It should be noted that a plurality of effect times are set so that the selected effect times can be different even if the number of reserved storages is the same, and which effect time is set is randomly selected by lottery or the like. These effect times are set so as to include the above-mentioned predetermined end timing at least once. Specifically, a production time shorter than a predetermined end time is not set. Further, it is set so that the probability that the predetermined tail specific timing becomes a singular number during the subtraction is higher than the probability that the tail specific timing becomes a singular number. More specifically, for example, when the end specific timing is "XY.Z7", the probability that "XY.Z8 to XY.Z9" is selected is higher than the probability that "XY.Z0 to XY.Z6" is selected. It is set to be higher than the probability.

When the effect time in which a plurality of end specific timings exist is selected during the subtraction in step S1808, a process of randomly setting at which timing the effect of confirming the jackpot is to be generated is also performed by lottery or the like. It should be noted that, of the plurality of end specific timings, the timing on the side where the occurrence timing is later may be set so that the probability of generating the jackpot confirmation effect is higher. By doing so, the probability of passing through the tail specific timing multiple times before the jackpot confirmation effect is performed increases, and the number of times the player pays attention to whether or not the same jackpot confirmation effect is performed at this tail specific timing. Can also be high. Further, in this case, if a fanning effect that steps up each time the end specific timing is passed is set, the degree of attention toward the timing on the later side can be more preferably increased. As a jackpot confirmation effect, the subtraction of the time display image Gp may be completed at the above-mentioned end specific timing, and the subtraction may not be performed thereafter. By doing so, it is considered that the player expects the subtraction to end at the specific timing at the end, and the attention to the special hold notice can be increased. As the timing to end the subtraction, when there are a plurality of tail specific timings as described above, the value may be a value more suggestive of a hit, such as "XY.77" rather than "XY.Z7". It may be a timing corresponding to a value suggesting that it is advantageous to the player as compared with other values, such as an odd number (corresponding to a probabilistic jackpot result) rather than an even number (corresponding to a normal jackpot result). Further, the time display image Gp may be enlarged at a specific timing at the end, the color may be changed to a conspicuous color, the shape may be sharpened, or the like to be emphasized. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest in the time display image Gp. It is also possible to combine this highlighting with a configuration that stops the subtraction as described above. In this case, the configuration may be performed from a predetermined time (for example, 2 sec before) of the end specific timing (timing at which the subtraction can be completed), and in this way, the end specific timing (timing at which the subtraction can be completed) approaches. The player can easily grasp that the time display image Gp is changed.

After executing the process of step S1808, in step S1809, the process of inputting the time grasped in step S1808 to the timer counter T is executed. After executing the process of step S1809, the timer input process ends.

If it is determined in step S1806 that the tail specific change effect is not set, the process proceeds to step S1810. The case where the negative determination is made in step S1806 is the case where the fixed time display effect is set as the premier effect. The fixed time display effect is, for example, "77.77", "7.77", and "3.41" as the fixed time that makes it possible to grasp the jackpot result at the display time at the start of the special hold notice. (See FIG. 25 (e)), and one of these fixed times is displayed at the start of the special hold notice, so that the player is subject to this special hold notice. It is possible to know that the pending information is the result of one of the jackpots.

Needless to say, the type of fixed time in the fixed time display is not limited to the above. Further, as in the case of the end specific change effect, the configuration may be such that the subtraction is not performed while the fixed time is displayed, or the time display image Gp may be changed (emphasized) in the fixed time display.

Then, in step S1810, a process of storing the fixed time display flag in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 244 is executed so that it can be grasped that the MPU 242 is set to the fixed time display effect. In the following step S1811, the effect time setting process for displaying the fixed time is performed. In this effect time setting process, the time selection table at the time of the fixed time display effect is acquired from various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243, and the fixed time to be displayed this time is selected. Which of the plurality of fixed times is to be set is randomly determined by lottery or the like. It should be noted that a plurality of jackpot results may be set in association with the fixed time to be displayed. By doing so, by displaying the fixed time, it is possible not only to grasp that it is a big hit result but also to grasp the type, and the degree of attention to this fixed time display becomes more preferable. It will be possible to increase.

After executing the process of step S1811, in step S1812, the process of inputting the time grasped in step S1811 to the timer counter T is executed. After executing the process of step S1812, the timer input process ends.

<Production setting process when time cannot be specified>
Next, the effect setting process when the time cannot be specified in step S1305 in the special hold notice setting process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31.

The effect setting process when the time cannot be specified is substantially the same as the effect setting process when the time can be specified. That is, first, in step S1901, among the special hold notice tables at the time of a big hit, the special hold notice table at the time when the time cannot be specified is acquired from the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243. Further, in step S1901, the effect pattern counter EK is acquired from various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244. As shown in FIG. 25A, in the special hold notice table when the time cannot be specified, a normal pattern and a premier pattern are set as the effect contents of the special hold notice. That is, the time specifying pattern is set not to be selected in the special holding notice table when the time cannot be specified, as compared with the special holding notice table when the time can be specified.

After setting the effect pattern of the special hold notice in step S1901, it is determined in step S1902 whether or not it is set to the normal pattern, and if it is set to the normal pattern, steps S1503 to S1511. After executing the processes of steps S1903 to S1911, the present effect setting process is terminated in the same manner as the process of. If it is determined in step S1902 that the pattern is not set to the normal pattern, it is set to the premier pattern. In this case, the same process as the process of step S1514 is executed in step S1912, and then the process is executed. After executing the process of step S1911, the present effect setting process is terminated.

<Production setting process at the time of disconnection>
Next, the effect setting process at the time of disconnection of step S1306 in the special hold notice setting process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32.

The effect setting process at the time of off is substantially the same as the process when the special hold notice of the normal pattern is set in each effect setting process (step S1304, step S1305) at the time of the big hit. That is, in step S2001, immediately before the reception of the hold command this time, that is, immediately before the acquisition of the hold information, the hold storage number N, the special hold counter TK provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244, and the various table storages of the ROM 243 are stored. The process of acquiring the special hold notice table (FIG. 33 (a)) stored in the area 245 at the time of disconnection is executed. Then, in step S2002, a process of setting the outline of the special hold notice is executed.

In the special hold notice table at the time of disconnection, as shown in FIG. 33 (a), when the hold storage number N immediately before the acquisition of the hold information is 0 (the hold storage number N after the acquisition of the hold information this time is 1). If the special hold counter TK is 0 to 679, the special hold notice is not executed. Further, when the hold storage number N immediately before the acquisition of the hold information is 0 and the special hold counter TK is 800 to 999, the special hold notice is executed, and among these, the special hold counter TK is executed. When is 800 to 949, the predetermined set time is set to be long, when it is 950 to 989, it is set to be medium time, and when it is 990 to 999, it is set to be short.

Further, when the reserved storage number N immediately before the acquisition of the reserved information is 1 (when the reserved storage number N after the acquisition of the reserved information this time is 2), the special holding counter TK is 0 to 599. In some cases, it is set not to execute the special hold notice. Further, when the reserved storage number N immediately before the acquisition of the reserved information is 1, and the special reserved counter TK is 600 to 999, the special reserved notice is executed, and among these, the special reserved counter TK is executed. When is 600 to 799, the predetermined set time is set to be long, when it is 800 to 969, it is set to be medium time, and when it is 970 to 999, it is set to be short.

When the number of pending storages N immediately before the acquisition of the pending information is 2 (when the number of reserved storages N after the acquisition of the pending information this time is 3), and the special holding counter TK is 0 to 399. Is set not to execute the special hold notice. Further, when the reserved storage number N immediately before the acquisition of the reserved information is 2, and the special reserved counter TK is 400 to 999, the special reserved notice is executed, and among these, the special reserved counter TK is executed. When is 400 to 699, the predetermined set time is set to be long, when it is 700 to 949, it is set to be medium time, and when it is 950 to 999, it is set to be short.

When the number of pending storages N immediately before the acquisition of the pending information is 3 (when the number of reserved storages N after the acquisition of the pending information this time is 4), and the special holding counter TK is 0 to 199. Is set not to execute the special hold notice. Further, when the reserved storage number N immediately before the acquisition of the reserved information is 3 and the special reserved counter TK is 200 to 999, the special reserved notice is executed, and among these, the special reserved counter TK is executed. When is 200 to 599, the predetermined set time is set to be long, when it is 600 to 949, it is set to be medium time, and when it is 950 to 999, it is set to be short.

That is, when comparing the special hold notice table at the time of the miss and the big hit, the probability that the special hold notice table is set to non-execution is higher at the time of the miss. Further, it is easier to select a long time as a predetermined set time when the time is off, and as a result, even if the special hold notice is executed, it is more difficult to satisfy the special condition when the time is off.

After executing the process of step S2002, in the following step S2003, it is determined whether or not to execute the special hold notice based on the process result of the above step S2002. If it is not executed, the effect setting process is terminated as it is. When executing, in step S2004, a process of setting the details of the set time is executed in the same manner as the process of step S1603. That is, in step S2004, a special hold is made based on the rough set time set in step S2002, the time selection counter JK of the RAM 244, and the time selection table (FIG. 33 (b)) when the ROM 243 is disconnected. Set the details of the predetermined set time in the notice. After setting the detailed set time in step S2004, the process of inputting the numerical information corresponding to the set time set in step S2004 to the timer counter T of the RAM 244 is executed in step S2005.

In the following step S2005, a subtraction pattern table for deviation is acquired. As shown in FIG. 28A, the subtraction pattern table for deviation is specified by default subtraction and subtraction at shift based on the value of the subtraction counter GK of RAM 244, similarly to the subtraction pattern table for jackpot. It is set to select either timing subtraction or.

More specifically, when the subtraction counter GK is 0 to 749, the default subtraction is selected, and when the subtraction counter GK is 750 to 874, the shift subtraction is selected, which is 875 to 999. In some cases, specific timing subtraction is set to be selected. That is, the probability that the default subtraction is selected is set higher at the time of deviation compared with the time of big hit. In other words, there is a higher probability that shift subtraction or specific timing subtraction will be selected at the time of big hit than at the time of off.

Then, in step S2006, the subtraction pattern of the timer counter T is set based on the values of the subtraction pattern table and the subtraction counter GK acquired in step S2005.

The process of step S2007 to step S2011 is the same as the process of step S1507 to step S1511, and the process when the shift time subtraction or the specific timing subtraction is selected (the process of storing the corresponding flag) is executed.

After executing the process of step S2011, the process of adding "1" to the hold notice counter YK and updating the process is executed in step S2012, and then the present effect setting process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the hold control command correspondence process (FIG. 19), after executing the special hold notice setting process in step S1205, the process proceeds to step S1206. In step S1206, it is determined whether or not the hold command received this time corresponds to any of the jackpot results. If it corresponds to any of the jackpot results, the process proceeds to step S1207, and a process of adding "3" to the hold notice counter YK and updating is executed. As a result, a negative determination is made in the process of step S1204.

That is, when the hold information corresponding to any of the jackpot results is stored, the special hold notice is not executed for the hold information that is digested after the hold information. This is because, as described above, the special hold notice is subject to the special hold notice based on the time from the start of the special hold notice to the predetermined timing in the game times related to the hold information that is the target. It is an effect of whether or not to change the hold image related to the hold information, and if the hold information digested from the start to the end includes any jackpot result, it is until the end. The open / close execution mode will be included. That is, depending on the length of the open / close execution mode, the possibility that the special condition is satisfied becomes extremely high, and the interest may be reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to avoid such a case, when the open / close execution mode is performed during the execution of the special hold notice, the special hold notice is not given.

However, even if the open / close execution mode is performed during the special hold notice, if the set time in the special hold notice is not subtracted during the open / close execution mode, the possibility of establishing the special condition is extremely increased. Since it does not connect, it is considered possible to avoid a decline in interest even if a special hold notice is executed in such a case. By doing so, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the special hold notice is executed.

Further, the special hold notice may be given when the open / close execution mode and the special hold notice overlap, and the special hold notice may be subtracted also in the open / close execution mode. In this case, for example, if the probability of establishing the special condition is set by using the length of time that the opening / closing execution mode is performed, not only the length of the variable display time during the game round but also the opening / closing execution mode is set. It can be a new effect that the probability of establishing the special condition of the reserved information differs depending on the length. In particular, in the open / close execution mode, the length required for the execution may differ depending not only on the setting on the gaming machine side but also on the gaming mode of the player. Specifically, in the open / close execution mode, the round ends when the number of winnings in the large winning opening 32a reaches the upper limit of winnings in each round. The duration can be different. Therefore, it is possible to make a novel game in which the special condition is more likely to be established as the timing of reaching the upper limit of winnings is delayed by the operation of the player. This makes it possible to fully enjoy the open / close execution mode.

When a negative determination is made in step S1204 or step S1206, or after the process of step S1207 is executed, the hold increase process is executed in step S1208, and then the hold control command correspondence process ends. In this process, the light emission control of the hold light emitting unit 45 is performed in response to the increase in the hold information, and a command corresponding to the increase in the hold information is output to the display control device 212. This command includes information on the hold image determined in step S1203, information on the special hold notice determined in step S1205, and information on the secondary hold storage number SN. Based on the received command, the display control device 212 reads the data corresponding to the corresponding hold image from the hold image data storage area stored in the character ROM 256, and holds the unit corresponding to the secondary hold storage number SN. The symbol display device 41 is controlled so as to display in the display areas Ga1 to Ga4.

If a negative determination is made in step S1201, the process proceeds to step S1209. In step S1209, it is determined whether or not a shift command has been received. If the shift command has not been received, the hold control command correspondence process is terminated as it is. If the shift command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1210, and a process of subtracting 1 from the secondary reserved storage number SN is executed.

In the following step S1211, it is determined whether or not the shift subtraction flag is stored. The shift subtraction flag is a flag stored when shift subtraction is selected as the subtraction pattern in the special hold notice as described above. If this flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1212, and the shift subtraction process is executed. This shift subtraction process will be described in detail later.

If the shift subtraction flag is not stored in step S1211, or after the process of step S1212 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1213. In step S1213, the shift process is executed. In the shift process, the data in each storage area in the hold storage area 250 is shifted. That is, in the shift process, the hold information stored in each storage area of the hold storage area 250 is shifted from the upper area to the lower area. Further, in the shift process, the light emission control of the hold light emitting unit 45 is performed in response to the decrease of the hold information, and a command corresponding to the decrease of the hold information is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 so as to change the display of the corresponding unit hold display areas Ga1 to Gs4 based on the received command. After executing the process of step S1213, the hold control command corresponding process is terminated.

<Special hold notice control processing>
Next, the special hold notice control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 34, in the special hold notice control process, it is determined in step S2101 whether or not the special hold notice is being executed, and if it is being executed, a predetermined setting is made in step S2102. A timer management process, which is a process related to time subtraction, is executed, and a hold display process, which is a process related to the hold image P, is executed in step S2103. When a negative determination is made in step S2101, or after the process of step S2103 is executed, the special hold notice control process is terminated.

Hereinafter, the timer management process and the hold display process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 35 and 36.

In the timer management process, as shown in FIG. 35, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the elapsed flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. The elapsed flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that the timer counter T is "0" and the special condition is satisfied. If the elapsed flag is stored, the timer management process is terminated as it is.

If the elapsed flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2202, and it is determined whether or not the subtraction end flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. The subtraction end flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that the subtraction of the predetermined set time in the special hold notice has been completed without satisfying the special condition. If the subtraction end flag is stored, the timer management process ends as it is.

If the subtraction end flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2203 and the timer subtraction process is executed. In this process, the timer counter T is decremented by "1" and updated. In the following step S2204, the subtraction command is set as an output target to the display control device 212. This subtraction command includes the information of the timer counter T updated in step S2203, and is output to the display control device 212 by the command output process started in the MPU 242 at a predetermined cycle. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 reads the image corresponding to the information of the timer counter T included in the subtraction command from the character ROM 256 based on the reception of the subtraction command, and reads the image corresponding to the information of the timer counter T from the character ROM 256 to read the time display area GE in the special hold notice. The symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the time display image Gp of the above is updated.

In the following step S2205, it is determined whether or not the specific timing subtraction flag is stored. When the specific timing subtraction flag is stored and the specific timing subtraction is selected as the subtraction pattern, it is determined in step S2206 whether or not the specific timing subtraction should be performed. As described above, the specific timing subtraction is a subtraction method in which a predetermined number is subtracted based on the fact that the display of the time display image Gp becomes a predetermined predetermined display time and the specific timing is reached.

As shown in FIG. 28 (c), in the specific timing subtraction table stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243, the specific timing which is a predetermined display time, the subtraction probability at the specific timing, and the subtraction are performed. The subtraction time in the case is set for each game result of the hold information that triggered the special hold notice. Specifically, regardless of the game result, the case where the set time of the special hold notice is any of the remaining 10 sec, 20 sec, 40 sec, and 60 sec is set as the specific timing. In addition, the subtraction probability is uniformly set to 25% regardless of the specific timing when the game result is a big hit result, and when the game result is a deviation result, the specific timing. It is set that the winning probability becomes lower as the time becomes slower (the specific timing when the remaining time of the set time is short). The subtraction time is set so that the subtraction time becomes shorter as the specific timing is delayed (the specific timing with less remaining time of the set time) regardless of the game result.

In step S2206, the specific timing subtraction table is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the specific timing (any of the remaining 10 sec, 20 sec, 40 sec, and 60 sec) is reached. If it is a specific timing, the subtraction lottery process is executed in step S2207. In this process, a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244, and a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute the subtraction at the present specific timing based on the subtraction probability of the specific timing subtraction table of the ROM 243. Then, in step S2208, it is determined whether or not the subtraction lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S2207. If the subtraction lottery is won, the timer subtraction process is executed in step S2209. In this process, the numerical value corresponding to the current subtraction time set in the specific timing subtraction table is subtracted from the current timer counter T. In the following step S2210, the specific subtraction command is set as the output target to the display control device 212. This specific subtraction command includes information on the subtraction time subtracted in step S2209 and the timer counter T after the subtraction. The output mode of the specific subtraction command and the processing on the display control device 212 side when the subtraction command is received are the same as those of the subtraction command described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, different commands are provided for each subtraction trigger, such as outputting the information at the time of normal default subtraction as the command at the time of subtraction and outputting the information at the time of specific timing subtraction as the command at the time of specific subtraction. .. As a result, on the display control device 212 side, it is possible to grasp the subtraction trigger by grasping the type of the command, so that the processing configuration is simplified in setting the effect corresponding to the subtraction trigger. be able to. However, from the viewpoint of reducing the types of commands to be set to reduce the storage capacity on the effect control device 82 side and reducing the input / output commands between the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212, these commands are used. May be a common configuration. Specifically, in step S2210, the subtraction command set in step S2204 may be updated. For example, if the information obtained by subtracting the timer counter T by "1" (step S2203) is set in the subtraction command in step S2204, the information subtracted by "1" and the information subtracted at a specific timing in step S2210 (step). The information regarding the subtraction value including S2209) is reset to the subtraction command. By doing so, the subtraction command can be used regardless of the subtraction trigger, the number of commands set in one timer management process is only one type, and the number of input / output commands is set as described above. It can be reduced more than the configuration.

If a negative determination is made in any of step S2205, step S2206, and step S2208, or after the process of step S2210 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2211. In step S2211, it is determined whether or not the timer counter T has become “0”. When the timer counter T becomes "0", the process of storing the elapsed flag in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 is executed in step S2212, and then the timer management process ends.

If it is determined in step S2211 that the timer counter T is not "0", the process proceeds to step S2213. In step S2213, it is determined whether or not any of the tail specific change flag and the one-shot reversal flag is stored in the RAM 244. If any of the flags is stored, in step S2214, it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the effect corresponding to the stored flag. Specifically, when the tail specific change flag is stored, the tail specific change effect is set as the effect pattern of this time, and in step S2214, the timing (time display area) in which the end specific change effect should be executed is set. It is determined whether or not the GE display is "X7.77"). Further, when the one-shot reversal flag is stored, the one-shot reversal effect is set as the effect pattern of this time, and in step S2214, the timing at which this one-shot reversal effect should be executed (the target of the special hold notice). It is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the game round of the reserved information.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2214 and it is the execution timing of the effect corresponding to the stored flag, the process proceeds to step S2115 to execute the effect setting process for executing the corresponding effect. In this process, the timer counter T is set to "0", the tail specific change flag is executed when the tail specific change flag is stored, and the one-shot reversal flag is stored. The drive control of the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 is executed so as to execute the one-shot reversal effect, and the corresponding effect is executed by the symbol display device 41 by outputting a command to the display control device 212. To. After that, the elapsed flag is stored in step S2212, and then the timer management process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S2213 or step S2214, the timer management process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the timer management process, the periodic subtraction process of the timer counter T, the subtraction process at a specific timing, and the process in the premier effect such as the fixed time display effect, the end specific change effect, and the one-shot reversal effect are performed. Execute. Then, when the special condition is satisfied, the elapsed flag is stored. In the hold display process (step S2103) in the special hold notice control process (FIG. 34), a process is performed based on the fact that the elapsed flag is stored (the special condition is satisfied).

As described above, in the present embodiment, in addition to the default subtraction and the specific timing subtraction, the subtraction at the time of shift is set as the subtraction pattern. Therefore, prior to the description of the hold display process, the shift subtraction process for the shift subtraction will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The shift subtraction process is a process executed based on the reception of the shift command from the main control device 81 in the hold control command correspondence process (FIG. 19) (step S1212).

In the shift subtraction process, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the shift winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. The shift-time winning flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that the shift-time subtraction has already been performed. If it is determined in step S2301 that the shift winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2302.

In step S2302, the shift subtraction lottery process is executed. In this process, a shift subtraction table is acquired from various table storage areas 245 of ROM 243 and a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 249 of RAM 244, and whether or not to execute subtraction at the time of this shift is drawn. .. As shown in FIG. 28B, the shift subtraction table has a winning probability of the shift subtraction based on the number of holds after the shift and the game result of the hold information subject to the special hold notice. , The subtraction time at the time of winning, and are set. Specifically, the winning probability of the shift subtraction is such that the shift subtraction is performed with a higher probability when the game result is a jackpot result than when it is a miss result, regardless of the number of holdings after the shift. It is set. Further, the subtraction time at the time of winning is set so that the longer the number of holdings after the shift is, the longer the subtraction time is, regardless of the game result.

Here, as shown in FIG. 28B, in the present embodiment, the subtraction time at the time of shift is set to be different depending on the game result of the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice. Specifically, when the number of holds after the shift is 2 or 3, the subtraction time is 20 sec if the game result of the hold information that is the target is a big hit result, and 10 sec if the result is out of order. It is supposed to be. By doing so, a game of grasping the result of the hold information from the subtraction time at the time of shift is added, and the special hold notice can be fully enjoyed. In order to make it difficult to grasp the result of the hold information from the subtraction time at the time of shift, the same subtraction time may be set regardless of the game result. Furthermore, in order to add the enjoyment of predicting the result of the hold information from the subtraction time at the time of shift, for example, as a configuration in which the subtraction time is set by lottery or the like, it is easy to set a different subtraction time depending on the game result. You may do it.

In step S2303, it is determined whether or not the lottery for subtraction at the time of shift is won based on the processing result of step S2302. If the lottery for subtraction at the time of shift is won, the process of storing the winning flag at the time of shift is executed in step S2304. As a result, affirmative determination is made in step S2301 at the time of the next and subsequent shifts.

In the following step S2305, the timer subtraction process is executed. In this process, based on the subtraction table at the time of shift, the numerical information corresponding to the subtraction time according to the number of holdings after the shift and the game result is grasped, and the grasped numerical information is subtracted from the numerical information of the timer counter T. Execute the process. Then, in step S2306, the subtraction command is set as an output target to the display control device 212. This subtraction command includes information on the subtraction time to be subtracted in step S2305 and information on the timer counter T after the subtraction. The processing in which the subtraction command is output to the display control device 212 side and the subsequent processing on the display control device 212 side are as described above.

If the shift winning flag is stored in step S2301, if it is determined in step S2303 that the subtraction lottery has not been won, or after the process of step S2306 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2307. In step S2307, it is determined whether or not the timer counter T has become "0". If the timer counter T is "0", the elapsed flag is stored in step S2308, and if the timer counter T is not "0", the shift subtraction process is terminated as it is.

Next, the hold display process in step S2103 in the special hold notice control process (FIG. 34) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37.

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the elapsed flag is stored. When the elapsed flag is not stored, it means that the special condition is not satisfied yet. In this case, the hold display process is terminated as it is. If the elapsed flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S2402. In step S2402, it is determined whether or not the changed flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. The changed flag is a flag stored when the reserved image is changed based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied (the elapsed flag is stored) (step S2406 described later). If the changed flag is stored, the hold display process is terminated as it is. If the changed flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2403.

In step S2403, the hold display after the change is set. In this process, a hold image to be changed from the fourth hold image P4 is set based on the establishment of the special condition based on the game result of the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice. For example, the ROM 243 stores a pattern table for the reserved image after the special condition is satisfied, and a plurality of patterns of the reserved image to be changed when the special condition is satisfied are set in this pattern table according to the game result. There is. Then, a counter is acquired from the RAM 244, and which holding image is to be changed is determined by lottery or the like. In this embodiment, the reserved image after the change is uniformly set as the third reserved image P3. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load when changing the reserved image. However, in order to diversify the pattern of change, it is preferable to set a plurality of reserved images after the change and determine which reserved image is to be changed. In these cases, the holding image after the change may be set to be the holding image on the side where the jackpot expectation is higher than that of the holding image before the change.

Since the first reserved image P1 in the present embodiment is configured to be selected only when it is a jackpot result, when the reserved image after the change is set, the first reserved image is reserved as the reserved image after the change. It is preferable to prevent the image P1 for holding from being selected, or to allow the first image P1 for holding to be selected only when the holding information subject to the special holding notice is a jackpot result. Further, in the present embodiment, the reserved image before the change is uniformly set as the fourth reserved image P4, but this may be randomly determined from the reserved images P1 to P5 by lottery or the like. In this case, the first reserved image P1 is set only when the reserved image P1 is not selected as the reserved image before the change, or the reserved information which is the target of the special reserved notice is a big hit result. It is good to be able to be selected. Further, if the second holding image P2 is selected as the holding image before the change, the jackpot result is fixed after the change (changes to the first holding image P1), so that it is tentatively subject to the special holding notice. If the special condition is satisfied even though the reserved information is out of order, a contradiction between the game result and the reserved image may occur. Therefore, the second reserved image P2 is configured so that it can be selected only when the time can be specified, and in the case of a big hit result, the time is set so that the special condition can be satisfied, and the result is out of order. In that case, if the time is set so that the special condition is not satisfied, the contradiction with the game result can be avoided. It should be noted that the second hold image P2 is selected only when the hold information for which the second hold image P2 is not selected as the hold image before the change or which is the target of the special hold notice is a big hit result. It may be possible to be selected.

In the following step S2404, the effect pattern at the time of change is set. In this process, an effect pattern for changing the hold image is set based on the game result of the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice. For example, the ROM 243 stores a pattern table for the effect pattern at the time of change, and a plurality of effect patterns according to the game result and the game situation when the special condition is satisfied are set in this pattern table. Then, a counter is acquired from the RAM 244, and which effect pattern is used to change the reserved image is determined by lottery or the like. As the effect pattern, for example, an effect pattern that makes the hold image before the change visible by displaying smoke or the like and then makes the hold image after the change visible, or a change destination. It is conceivable to display a plurality of candidate holding images and change the plurality of holding images, and then confirm and display one candidate to change the effect pattern.

In the following step S2405, the effect setting process when the special condition is satisfied is performed based on the information set in the above steps S2403 and S2404. In this process, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled so as to perform an effect corresponding to the effect pattern at the time of change and the image for holding after the change. Further, in step S2405, the change command is set as an output target to the display control device 212. The change command includes information on the pending image after the change set in step S2403 and information on the effect pattern at the time of change set in step S2404, and is periodically activated. It is output to the display control device 212 in the command output process. Based on the reception of this change time command, the display control device 212 grasps that the special condition is satisfied, the pending image after the change, and the effect pattern at the time of the change. Then, the image data corresponding to these effects is read from the character ROM 256, and the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the effects are displayed on the display screen G.

In the following step S2406, a process of storing the changed flag in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 is executed. By performing this process, affirmative determination is made in step S2402 in the hold display process from the next time onward. After executing the process of step S2406, the hold display process ends.

As described above, the hold image P is different from the previous images based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied, that is, the time display image Gp of the time display area GE in the special hold notice is "00.00". It changes to an image (see FIG. 20 (c)). More specifically, among the plurality of holding images P set corresponding to the jackpot expectation, the holding image P on the side with the lower jackpot expectation changes to the holding image P on the higher side. Therefore, as a player, when the special hold notice is started, the time display image Gp becomes "00.00" by the end of the special hold notice, that is, the game of the hold information that has been the target since the special hold notice is started. It is expected that the period until the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol sequence Z3 ends (switches to the low-speed fluctuation display) will be as long as possible. Therefore, even if the variation display time of one game is long, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently perform the effect during one game, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

On the other hand, when the special condition is not satisfied, that is, the time display image Gp is set to "00. If it does not reach "00", the reserved image P does not change. Hereinafter, the processing when the special condition is not satisfied will be described. This process is performed as a part of the variable display control process for controlling the effect during the game. Therefore, first, the variable display control process will be described, and then the process when the above special condition is not satisfied will be described.

<Variable display control processing>
The variation display control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38.

In the variation display control process, when the variation command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received, the symbol display device 41 starts the variation display of the symbol for one game, and is transmitted from the main control device 81. When the change end command is received, the process of displaying the change of the symbol as the final stop display (fixed stop display) is executed.

That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not one game is being executed. If one game is not being executed, it is determined in step S2502 whether or not a variation command has been received. If the variation command has not been received, the variation display control process is terminated as it is. If a variation command has been received, the variation start process is executed in step S2503, and then the variation display control process ends.

In the fluctuation start processing, based on the command received from the main control device 81, the information on the presence / absence of reach occurrence, the information on the fluctuation display time, and the information on the game result are grasped, and the grasped information is stored in the register of the MPU 242. .. Then, based on the grasped information, the stop result of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 in this game round is set. Specifically, five effective lines L1 to L5 are set on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, and if any of the jackpot results is obtained, a combination of jackpot symbols is placed on any of the valid lines. Set the stop result so that the stop is displayed. In addition, if the reach is displayed even if it is not the result of any big hit, the combination of reach symbols is stopped and displayed on one of the effective lines, and a symbol different from the reach symbol is displayed on the effective line. Set the stop result so that it stops. Further, when the reach display is not displayed, the stop result is set so that the combination of reach symbols is not stopped and displayed on any effective line. Then, the address information corresponding to the set stop result is read from the stop information table stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243, and the address information is stored in the stop information address storage area of the RAM 244.

In addition, in the variable start processing, the effect pattern of this game round is also set. In this effect pattern setting process, the effect pattern table provided in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 is referred to, and the information on the variable display time in the current game round and the address information stored in the stop information address storage area are used. The production pattern corresponding to both of the above is specified, and the production pattern is set as the production pattern in this game. Then, the control of the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 is started based on the information of the stop result and the information of the effect pattern, and the display control device is output by outputting a command including these information to the display control device 212. The 212 is controlled to execute the display effect for the game round.

In step S2501 in the variation display control process, if one game is being executed, step S2104 determines whether or not the variation end command has been received. If the variable end command has not been received, the variable display control process is terminated after the variable intermediate process is executed in step S2105. Further, when the variation end command is received, the variation display control process is terminated after the variation end process is executed in step S2106. In the variation end processing, the variation display in the game round is terminated, the notification corresponding to the game result is executed, and the processing for ending the game round by erasing various counters and flags set during the game round. To execute.

The processing when the special condition is not satisfied in the special hold notice is performed in the above-mentioned variable intermediate processing. Therefore, the variable processing process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39.

First, in step S2601, it is grasped whether or not it is the fluctuation start timing of all the symbol rows. By the way, in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244, an elapsed time counter for grasping the elapsed time from the start of the game round is provided, and at the start of the game round (more specifically, at the start of the variable start process). , The update of the elapsed time counter is started. The effect pattern determined by the variation start process is associated with the information of the elapsed time counter, and the MPU 242 can specify the execution timing of various effects by referring to the elapsed time counter. can. In step S2601, it is determined whether or not it is the fluctuation start timing from the elapsed time counter and the effect pattern in the game times being executed. In the following description, the elapsed time counter and the effect pattern are referred to in the process of determining whether or not each effect is the execution timing, as in the process of step S2601.

If it is the fluctuation start timing of all the symbol rows, the high-speed fluctuation start processing of all the symbol rows is executed in step S2602. In this process, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in response to the start of the high-speed fluctuation display, and by outputting a command to the display control device 212, the symbol display device 41 displays the high-speed fluctuation of all the symbol rows. To start. After executing the process of step S2602, the variable intermediate process is terminated.

If it is not the fluctuation start timing of all the symbol rows in step S2601, it is determined in step S2603 whether or not it is the deceleration timing of the upper symbol row Z1. If it is the deceleration timing, the deceleration process of the upper symbol row Z1 is executed in step S2604, and then the variable intermediate process is terminated. In the deceleration process, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in correspondence with the deceleration of the upper symbol string Z1, and the command is output to the display control device 212 so that the symbol display device 41 displays the upper symbol string Z1. The fluctuation display is switched from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation.

If it is not the deceleration timing of the upper symbol row Z1 in step S2603, it is determined in step S2605 whether or not it is the deceleration timing of the lower symbol row Z3. When the deceleration timing is reached, the deceleration process of the lower symbol row Z3 is executed in step S2606. In the deceleration process, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in correspondence with the deceleration of the lower symbol row Z3, and by outputting a command to the display control device 212, the symbol display device 41 displays the lower symbol row Z3. The fluctuation display is switched from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation.

After the deceleration process of the lower symbol column Z3 is executed in step S2606, the special hold notice process is executed in step S2607, and then the variable intermediate process is terminated. The special hold notice processing will be described in detail later.

If it is not the deceleration timing of the lower symbol row Z3 in step S2605, it is determined in step S2608 whether or not it is the deceleration timing of the middle symbol row Z2. If it is the deceleration timing, the deceleration process of the middle symbol row Z2 is executed in step S2609, and then the variable middle process is terminated. In the deceleration process, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in correspondence with the deceleration of the middle symbol row Z2, and by outputting a command to the display control device 212, the symbol display device 41 displays the middle symbol row Z2. The fluctuation display is switched from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation.

If it is not the deceleration timing of the middle symbol row Z2 in step S2608, it is determined in step S2610 whether or not it is the stop timing of the upper symbol row Z1. If it is the stop timing, the stop process of the upper symbol column Z1 is executed in step S2611, and then the variable intermediate process is terminated. In the stop processing, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in correspondence with the stop of the upper symbol row Z1, and the command is output to the display control device 212 so that the symbol display device 41 can display the upper symbol row Z1. Stop the fluctuation display.

If it is not the stop timing of the upper symbol row Z1 in step S2610, it is determined in step S2612 whether or not it is the stop timing of the lower symbol row Z3. If it is the stop timing, the stop process of the lower symbol column Z3 is executed in step S2613, and then the variable intermediate process is terminated. In the stop processing, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in correspondence with the stop of the lower symbol row Z3, and by outputting a command to the display control device 212, the symbol display device 41 displays the lower symbol row Z3. Stop the variable display.

If it is not the stop timing of the lower symbol row Z3 in step S2612, it is determined in step S2614 whether or not it is the stop timing of the middle symbol row Z2. If it is the stop timing, the stop process of the middle symbol column Z2 is executed in step S2615, and then the variable intermediate process is terminated. In the stop processing, the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in correspondence with the stop of the middle symbol string Z2, and the command is output to the display control device 212 so that the symbol display device 41 displays the middle symbol string Z2. Stop the fluctuation display.

If it is not the stop timing of the middle symbol row Z2 in step S2614, the process for various effects during change is executed in step S2616, and then the process for changing is terminated.

Here, in the fluctuation display of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3, the time from switching from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display until the stop, that is, the time during which the low-speed fluctuation display is performed is basically predetermined. It's time. Specifically, it is a predetermined time (for example, 1 sec) except for the period in which the low-speed fluctuation display of the middle symbol string Z2 in the reach display is performed. In the low-speed fluctuation display, the player can clearly grasp the moving symbol. Therefore, the player can grasp to some extent which symbol stops at which line at the timing when the high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display. Therefore, the player can grasp whether or not the reach line is formed with the upper symbol row Z1 in the low-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3, that is, whether or not the reach display occurs, and this timing is the game. It can be said that this is the timing when people are highly interested. Therefore, since the special conditions of the special hold notice are determined at this timing, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player looks away and is overlooked. In addition, since it is the timing that attracts attention every game in this way, this timing (switching timing of the lower symbol row Z3) is to some extent for the player, even if he / she does not see the variation display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It is considered possible to grasp. Therefore, it can be said that the situation where the determination of special conditions is overlooked is further suppressed.

Next, the special hold notice process in step S2607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40.

First, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the special hold notice is being executed. If it is not being executed, the special hold notice process is terminated as it is. If the special hold notice is being executed, in the following step S2702, it is determined whether or not the game round this time is the target of the special hold notice being executed. If it is not the target game, the special hold notice processing is terminated as it is. In the case of the target game times, it is determined in the following step S2703 whether or not the elapsed flag is stored, that is, whether or not the special condition is satisfied. When the elapsed flag is stored, the special condition is satisfied even in the game times subject to the special hold notice, and the hold image P is displayed in the hold display process (FIG. 37). Processing to change is being performed. Therefore, if the elapsed flag is stored, the special hold notice process is terminated as it is. In this case, since the hold image has already changed, the special hold notice process may be ended after the display of the time display area GE is finished.

If the elapsed flag is not stored, that is, if the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol sequence Z3 ends without the special condition being satisfied in the game times of the hold information subject to the special hold notice, step S2704. After executing the end processing of the special hold notice at, the process for the special hold notice is ended. In this end processing, the subtraction end flag is stored in order to stop the subtraction of the timer counter T. As a result, in the timer management process (FIG. 35), the timer subtraction process (step S2203) is no longer performed, and the subtraction of the timer counter T is stopped.

Here, in the present embodiment, as the end processing of step S2704, the subtraction of the timer counter T is stopped, while the display of the time display image Gp in the time display area GE is continuously displayed as it is. Therefore, as the time display image Gp, an image showing the time at the time when the subtraction of the timer counter T is stopped is displayed as it is (see FIG. 20 (c)). Therefore, although the predetermined set time is subtracted in the special hold notice, the player can grasp that the special condition is not satisfied even after the subtraction is completed (after the special hold notice is finished). .. That is, even after the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3 was completed in the game times subject to the special hold notice, the special hold notice had been given until then, and the special condition was not satisfied. It is possible to grasp the facts and the time required for the special conditions to be met. By doing so, even if the reserved image P is not changed without satisfying the special condition, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the degree of attention to the game times while leaving the lingering sound.

That is, in the hold notice that is executed at the timing before the game times of the hold information and is the effect corresponding to the hold information, the effect with high expectation of big hit as the effect of this hold notice (special hold notice in this embodiment). If is set, it is possible to increase the attention to the hold notice, but on the other hand, when the production with high expectation of big hit branches to the production on the off side at the branch point during the production, for example (special in this embodiment). In the case of unsatisfied conditions), not only this hold notice but also the degree of attention to the game times of the hold information subject to the hold notice may be extremely reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the branch point is branched to the off-side effect as a branch point during the effect, an index indicating how soon the branch is to the hit-side effect (in the present embodiment). The remaining time of the predetermined set time) is displayed. In other words, by not only branching to the hit side and the off side at the branch point in the production, but also by displaying the degree of ease and difficulty of branching to the hit side at the branch point even after the branch. It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation even when branching to the off side, and it is possible to prevent the degree of attention from dropping extremely after that.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied after the predetermined set time has elapsed, a special hold notice for changing the hold image P is set as a privilege for the player. As a result, the special condition is satisfied after a predetermined set time has elapsed in the situation where the special hold notice is given, that is, the variable display time of the game times executed in the situation where the special hold notice is given. Players expect it for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game times from being perceived as redundant due to the lengthening of the variable display time during the game times.

In particular, in this gaming machine, an effect is set in which the game result is predicted before the end of the gaming round by using the type of the holding image P as a holding notice. Therefore, in the game times that are predicted to be out of order due to this hold notice, even if the reach is displayed, the player does not have high expectations for it and is regarded as a mere waiting time for digestion. There is a possibility that it will end up. Therefore, by associating the special condition in the special hold notice with the variable display time as in the above configuration, it is possible to contribute to the establishment of the special condition even in the time that tends to be regarded as a mere waiting for digestion, and the game can be played. It is possible to avoid an extremely low degree of attention.

In the above configuration, by displaying the special condition (time display image Gp in the time display area GE) as a special hold notice, the player can grasp the ease of establishment of this special condition and the process of establishment. can. By doing so, the relationship between the special condition and the variable display time can be clearly understood, and the effect of avoiding the inconvenience caused by the long variable display time can be suitably achieved.

In particular, since the time display image Gp is configured to be updated with the passage of time, it is possible to clearly grasp the process of changing the possibility of establishment (probability of establishment) of the special condition, and the process of changing this possibility of establishment is sufficient. Can be entertained. Since the time display image Gp is configured to be updated and displayed from the start to the end of the special hold notice, it is possible to enjoy the above-mentioned possibility of establishment at the longest.

If the special condition is not satisfied in the special hold notice, the remaining time at the time of determination of the special condition (the end time of the high-speed fluctuation display) is displayed as the time display image Gp even after the end of the special hold notice. Therefore, even if the special condition is not satisfied, the player can clearly understand how soon the special condition is satisfied. For example, if the special condition is satisfied soon, the special condition is simply satisfied. Since not only the result of not having it but also the regrettable degree is displayed, it is possible to leave a lingering sound of the special hold notice and suppress the drastic drop in the degree of expectation.

In the special hold notice, the predetermined set time is set based on not only the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice but also the hold information that is digested before the hold information that is the target. did. By doing so, not only the pending information that is the target of the special pending notice but also other pending information can be attracted attention, and the degree of attention of each can be appropriately increased.

Processing to grasp the fluctuation display time of the game times related to the hold information that is digested before the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice before the start of the game times related to the hold information that is digested earlier ( By providing the timer input process at the time specific pattern), it is possible to suitably execute the effect of the special hold notice using the length of the variable display time.

On the other hand, the variable display time of the game times related to the hold information that is digested before the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice changes depending on the game status (for example, the number of holds) at the start of the game times. obtain. That is, the fluctuation display time of the game times is set to the hold number correspondence pattern and the hold number non-correspondence pattern, and in the case of the hold number correspondence pattern, it is difficult to grasp the fluctuation display time first. .. Therefore, when the hold information of the hold number corresponding pattern is included in the hold information to be digested earlier, the variable display time is not specified. As a result, in the effect using the variable display time, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconvenience in the effect due to the difference of the previously specified variable display time from the actual time as much as possible.

Here, the privilege (change of the image P for reservation) based on the establishment of the special condition in the special reservation notice is a privilege for the production and does not contribute to the direct benefit of the player such as leaving the ball. That is, for example, if the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice is a jackpot result, the special condition does not have to be satisfied, and if the hold information that is the target is the result of being out of order, the special condition is set. It may hold, and vice versa does not affect the player's direct interests. Therefore, it is not necessary to determine the success or failure of the special condition at the start of the special hold notice, and it is not necessary to grasp all of the variable display time at the start of the special hold notice as described above. Therefore, when the hold information to be digested earlier includes the hold number correspondence pattern, the setting time of the special condition is set without grasping the fluctuation display time. In other words, regardless of the game result of the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice, the special set at the start of the special hold notice depends on the game status (acquisition status of the hold information) during the execution of the special hold notice. The success or failure of the conditions will be different. By doing so, the impression that the success or failure of the special condition is decided according to the game situation is strengthened, and it is suppressed that the attention level is extremely lowered in the middle like the so-called finished race in which the result is decided in advance. Is possible.

In the special hold notice, the setting of the special condition is mainly performed based on the hold information different from the hold information subject to the special hold notice. By doing so, it is possible to attract attention not only to the hold information targeted in the special hold notice but also to other hold information, and it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the game in a well-balanced manner. Become.

In this case, since the variable display time of the other hold information can be set after the start of the special hold notice as described above, it can be said that the probability of establishment of the special condition can also be set after the start of the special hold notice. .. Therefore, in the special hold notice, it is possible to pay attention not only to the initial stage such as the start time but also to other timings.

Furthermore, as a method of subtracting the remaining time of a predetermined set time for special conditions, in addition to the default subtraction which is a periodic subtraction, as a method of changing the remaining time in the middle, subtraction at shift time or specific timing subtraction is performed. Provided. If only the above default subtraction is used, it is judged from experience by the player whether or not the special condition is likely to be satisfied from the number of hold information and the remaining time of the current situation at the start of the special hold notice or at the stage in the middle of the notice. It may also be possible. In such a case, it is conceivable that the degree of attention to the special hold notice will be extremely reduced. Therefore, by including a pattern in which a set time is subtracted at an unexpected timing such as a shift subtraction or a specific timing subtraction, it is possible to draw attention to the special hold notice until the end.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, among the subtraction patterns of the set time in the special hold notice, the configuration of the subtraction at the time of shift is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the shift subtraction process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42.

In the present embodiment, similarly to the process of step S2301 in the first embodiment, it is determined in step S2801 whether or not the shift time winning flag is stored. If the shift winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2802. In step S2802, a process of grasping the hold image P shifted to the execution display area Gb in this shift is executed. Then, in step S2803, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute the subtraction process at the time of this shift.

In step S2803, a lottery table at the time of shift is acquired from ROM 243, and a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute the above subtraction process. After executing the process of step S2803, the process of steps S2804 to S2809 is executed in the same manner as the process of steps S2303 to S2308 in the first embodiment, and then the shift subtraction process is terminated.

In the shift lottery table in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, the game result of the hold information subject to the special hold notice, the number of holds after the shift, and the display area Gb for execution this time are shifted. The holding image P defines the probability of subtraction and the subtraction time when subtraction is performed. Specifically, when compared with the holding image P shifted to the execution display area Gb, the holding image P having a lower jackpot expectation is shifted than the holding image P having a higher jackpot expectation is shifted. It is set so that the probability of subtraction is higher regardless of the game result. This probability is set to be higher when the game result is a jackpot result than when it is a missed result.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the fluctuation display time of each game is basically set according to the jackpot expectation, and the fluctuation display time can be longer as the jackpot expectation is higher. ing. Further, as described above, the reserved image P is set so that different images are displayed according to the degree of expectation of a big hit. Therefore, in the game times corresponding to the holding image P on the side where the jackpot expectation is low, the variable display time is basically shortened. That is, if there is a game round corresponding to the hold image P on the side where the jackpot expectation is low in the situation where the special hold notice is given, not only can it not be expected that the jackpot result will be obtained in this game round. The length of the variable display time of this game is likely to be short, and the rate of contribution to the establishment of the special condition is also low. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by increasing the probability that the subtraction at the time of shift is performed when the game times corresponding to the holding image P having such a low jackpot expectation are executed, at least in the special holding notice, the special condition is set. Can be easily established. By doing so, when the special hold notice is given, even if the jackpot expectation of the hold information to be digested before that is low, the attention of the special hold notice is extremely reduced. It is possible to avoid such an event.

In the present embodiment, the probability that the shift subtraction is performed is increased when the variable display time is short, but the subtraction time when the shift subtraction is performed may be lengthened. Further, the subtraction speed of the default subtraction may be increased to make it easier to satisfy the special condition. Even in this way, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Contrary to the above configuration, the longer the variable display time, the higher the probability that the subtraction at the time of shift is performed, the longer the subtraction time when the subtraction at the time of shift is performed, or the faster the subtraction speed. It may be easy to establish the special condition. In this case, in addition to the effect of increasing the variable display time, special conditions are more likely to be satisfied, which is preferable for the player.

Further, it may be configured to make it difficult to satisfy the special condition by lowering the probability that the subtraction at the time of shift is performed, shortening the subtraction time when the subtraction at the time of shift is performed, or slowing down the subtraction speed. By setting such a case, even if it is predicted that the special condition will be satisfied at the initial stage of the special hold notice, it will be possible to prevent it from being fulfilled, and the special hold notice will be given until the end. It is possible to make them pay close attention to.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the special hold notice is executed when the variable display time of the hold information can be specified. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the variable display time in the present embodiment.

First, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the special mode is in progress. As this special mode, in the present embodiment, the special mode is set during the high frequency support mode. Specifically, the special mode is a situation in which the special mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. This special mode flag is stored in the case of setting the high frequency support mode (step S903, step S906) in the transition process (FIG. 15) at the end of the open / close execution mode, and is stored in the case of setting the low frequency support mode (game count counter). Is deleted when becomes 0). When the special mode flag is stored or deleted, a command including the information is output from the main control device 81 side to the effect control device 82 side. As a result, it is possible for the effect control device 82 side to grasp that the special mode is in progress.

If it is determined in step S2901 that the special mode flag is not stored, the same processing as in steps S701 to S704 is executed in steps S2902 to S2905 to end the variable display time setting processing. do.

If it is determined in step S2901 that the special mode flag is stored, the variation display time table in the special mode is acquired in step S2906, and the process proceeds to step S2905. As shown in FIG. 44, the variable display time table in the special mode is set so that the hold number correspondence pattern is not set, and the hold number non-correspondence pattern is selected in any case. .. That is, in the special mode, it is possible to specify the fluctuation display time before the start of the game round of the hold information based on the information at the time of acquisition of the hold information (game result, reach random number counter C3, change type counter CS). It is possible.

The hold control command correspondence process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In this embodiment, the processes of steps S3001 to S3003 are executed in the same manner as the processes of steps S1201 to S1203 in the first and second embodiments. Then, in step S3004, it is determined whether or not the special mode is in progress. If the mode is in the special mode, the process proceeds to step S3005, and it is determined whether or not the hold notice counter YK is less than "3", as in the process of step S1204. If it is less than "3", the special hold notice setting process is executed in step S3006.

In the special hold notice setting process in the present embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 46, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the hold command received this time corresponds to any of the jackpot results. If any of the jackpot results is obtained, the effect setting process when the time can be specified is executed in step S3102, and then the special hold notice setting process is terminated. If it is determined in step S3101 that the result is not a big hit result but a missed result, the effect setting process at the time of missed is executed in step S3103, and then the special hold notice setting process is terminated. The effect setting process when the time can be specified and the effect setting process when the time is off are as shown in FIGS. 24 and 32.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the special hold notice is executed in the situation where the variable display time of the hold information can be specified, the time cannot be specified at the start of the special hold notice (the pattern corresponding to the number of holds). Processing for (when pending information is included) is not required, and the processing configuration can be simplified. In a configuration in which the variable display time of the game times is used for the hold notice, if this variable display time can be specified in advance, the hold notice can be set in advance accordingly, so that there is a grace period for setting the effect. , It is possible to avoid an extreme increase in processing load. Therefore, if the special hold notice is given in the special mode in which the variable display time can be specified in advance as in the above configuration, it is possible to set the special hold notice effect in advance in any case. preferable.

On the other hand, if all of these effects are set in advance, there is no room for the effects to change depending on the subsequent game situation, and it will be noticed after that if the results of the effects are grasped in advance to some extent. There is a possibility that the degree will be extremely reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, while the configuration is such that the special hold notice is executed when the time can be specified as described above, when the time is directly used (timer input processing at the time specification pattern), that is not the case. By setting the case (timer input processing at the time of normal pattern), it is possible to prevent the result from being grasped in advance from the effect content.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the hold information includes the hold information of the hold number corresponding pattern at the start of the special hold notice, a predetermined set time is set with the change display time as a provisional change display time.

The hold control command correspondence process in the present embodiment is substantially the same as the hold control command correspondence process (FIG. 19) in the first and second embodiments, and only the configuration of the special hold notice setting process is different. .. The special hold notice setting process in the present embodiment is the same as the special hold notice setting process (FIG. 46) in the third embodiment.

Here, even when the time specifying pattern is selected as the effect pattern of the special hold notice in the effect setting process (FIG. 24) when the time can be specified, the change in the hold information is different from the third embodiment. The case where the display time cannot be specified in advance (when the pattern corresponds to the number of pending numbers) is included. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the hold information of this hold number correspondence pattern, the change display time is specified as a provisional change display time and the effect is set.

That is, as shown in FIG. 47, the variation display time table in the present embodiment includes the reach non-occurrence B and the normal reach B as the hold number correspondence pattern, and the provisional variation display time corresponding to these is set. ing. In this case, the provisional variable display time is set to be less than or equal to the time that can be actually set, and more specifically, the shortest time that can be actually set. Therefore, even if such a provisional variable display time is incorporated into a predetermined set time in the special hold notice, the success or failure of the final special condition is not affected. That is, regarding the hold information of the hold number correspondence pattern, regardless of whether the actual fluctuation display time is set to the longest time or the shortest time, the provisional fluctuation display time is the shortest in any case. Since the time is set, the success or failure of the special conditions is not affected. By doing so, there may be a difference in the variable display time due to the difference between the timing of grasping the variable display time for setting the effect of the hold notice and the timing of setting the actual variable display time. However, it is possible to avoid inconvenience in the setting of the above effect.

In the present embodiment, the provisional fluctuation display time is set to be less than or equal to the time that can be actually set, but after being set to be longer than the time that can be actually set, the hold control command correspondence process is performed. May be changed as follows.

That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 48, the processes of steps S3201 to S3208 are executed in the same manner as the processes of steps S1201 to S1208. If it is determined in step S3201 that the hold command has not been received, it is determined in step S3209 whether or not the shift command has been received, and if it has been received, the sub-side hold storage is stored in step S3210. Subtraction processing of several SNs is performed. Then, in step S3211, as the adjustment process at the time of shift, it is determined whether or not the hold information shifted to the execution area AE this time is the hold information of the hold number corresponding pattern. If the pattern does not correspond to the number of pending numbers, it is determined in step S3212 whether or not the shift subtraction flag is stored, and if it is stored, the shift subtraction process is executed in step S3213. If the pattern corresponds to the number of pending numbers in step S3211, the shift subtraction process is executed in step S3213 regardless of the presence or absence of the shift subtraction flag. After executing the process of step S3213, the shift process is executed in the same manner as the process of step S1213 in step S3214, and then the hold control command correspondence process is terminated.

In the shift subtraction process in step S3213, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 49, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the pattern corresponds to the number of pending numbers as in step S3211. If the pattern does not correspond to the number of pending numbers, the processes of steps S3302 to S3309 are executed in the same manner as the processes of steps S2301 to S2308. If the pattern corresponds to the number of holds in step S3301, the process proceeds to step S3310 to determine whether or not the special hold notice is being executed.

If the special hold notice is being executed, the process proceeds to step S3311 to determine whether or not the variable display time is shortened from the variable display time provisionally set as described above in the special hold notice. For this fluctuation display time, it is possible to grasp the actual fluctuation display time by referring to the value of the secondary reserved storage number SN, and it is also possible to determine whether or not the fluctuation display time has been shortened from the provisionally set fluctuation display time. .. When the shift command is output from the main control device 81, the variation command is also output. Therefore, the actual variation display time may be grasped based on the variation command.

If it is determined in step S3311, in step S3312, as a timer subtraction process, a process of subtracting numerical information corresponding to the shortened time from the timer counter T is executed. Then, in step S3313, the subtraction command including the information of the subtraction time and the timer counter T after the subtraction is set as an output target to the display control device 212, and then the process proceeds to step S3308. If a negative determination is made in step S3310 or step S3311, the shift subtraction process is terminated as it is.

As described above, even if the effect is set as a temporary variable display time when the special hold notice is set, inconvenience in the effect occurs by performing the shift time subtraction as a post-adjustment means. You can avoid that.

By using this adjusting means as a shift subtraction that can occur even in a normal time, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player during the adjustment, and it is also necessary to provide a new process as the adjusting means. It is also possible to suppress the complexity of the processing configuration.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the subtraction method of the timer counter T is different from that of the above embodiment. Hereinafter, different configurations will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart for explaining the timer management process in the present embodiment.

In the timer management process in the present embodiment, the processes of steps S3401 to S3415 are executed in the same manner as the processes of steps S2201 to S2215 in each of the above embodiments. When it is determined in step S3413 that neither the tail specific change flag nor the one-shot reversal flag is stored, or when it is determined in step S3414 that it is not the timing of the specific change and the timing of the one-shot reversal effect. After executing the subtraction value adjustment process in step S3416, the timer management process ends.

Here, in the default subtraction subtraction process (step S3404) in the present embodiment, the subtraction value (subtraction width) in one process can be set. Then, in step S3404, a process of subtracting the set subtraction value from the timer counter T is performed. In the subtraction value adjustment process in step S3416, this subtraction value is set. The normal subtraction value is "1" as in each of the above embodiments.

The subtraction value adjustment process in step S3416 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the game times currently being executed are the game times of the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice. If a negative determination is made in step S3501, the subtraction value adjustment process is terminated as it is. If the affirmative judgment is made in step S3501 and the game is the game of the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice, the process proceeds to step S3502 and whether or not the adjusted flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. Is determined. The adjusted flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to specify that the subtraction value has already been adjusted in the game round. If the adjusted flag is stored, the subtraction value adjustment process ends as it is.

If the adjusted flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3503. In step S3503, a process of grasping the remaining time (setting remaining time) of the predetermined set time is executed. Specifically, the value of the current timer counter T is grasped. In the following step S3504, a process of grasping the remaining time (actual remaining time) until the end of the high-speed fluctuation display is executed in this game round. Specifically, the time required until the end of the high-speed fluctuation display is grasped by referring to the address information of the effect pattern for the game round. Then, in step S3505, the set residual time grasped in step S3503 and the actual residual time grasped in step S3504 are compared, and the value (S1) obtained by subtracting the actual residual time from the set residual time is 0. Is larger than, that is, whether or not the set residual time is longer than the actual residual time is determined.

The case where S1 is larger than 0 in step S3505 is the case where the set residual time is longer than the actual residual time and the specific condition is not satisfied even if the default subtraction is performed as it is. In that case, the process proceeds to step S3506, and the subtraction value increase lottery process is executed. In this process, a lottery table is acquired from ROM 243 and a lottery counter is acquired from RAM 244, and the subtraction value (usually "1") of the timer counter T in one process is increased in the default subtraction. Execute a lottery to see if or not.

In the present embodiment, the winning probability is set to differ depending on the game result of the hold information that triggered the special hold notice. Specifically, if it is a big hit result, it is 30%, and it is a loss result. In that case, it is set to win the subtraction value increase lottery with a probability of 10%. The winning probability may be set differently according to the length of S1. For example, if the longer S1 is, the higher the winning probability is, the unexpectedness when a specific condition is satisfied can be enhanced. On the contrary, if the shorter S1 is, the higher the winning probability is, it is possible to relieve the situation where the specific condition is satisfied (the subtraction value is increased to establish the specific condition).

After executing the subtraction value increase lottery process in step S3506, it is determined in step S3507 whether or not the subtraction value increase lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S3506. If it is not won, the subtraction value adjustment process is terminated as it is. If it is won, the process proceeds to step S3508. In step S3508, it is determined whether the value (S2) obtained by further subtracting the actual residual time from S1 becomes larger than 0, that is, whether the set residual time is longer than twice the actual residual time. If S2 is larger than 0 in step S3508, in step S3509, the value (S3) obtained by further subtracting the actual residual time from S2 becomes larger than 0, that is, the set residual time is 3 of the actual residual time. Determine if it is longer than double. If S3 is smaller than 0 in step S3509, that is, if the set residual time is 2 to 3 times the actual residual time, the process proceeds to step S3510, and the subtraction value for subtraction is set to "3". Execute the process. By performing this process, in the subsequent steps S3404, the process of subtracting from the timer counter T by "3" is performed. That is, the subtraction speed of the predetermined set time is changed to three times the speed up to that point.

If S2 is 0 or less in step S3508, that is, if the set remaining time is 1 to 2 times the actual remaining time, the process proceeds to step S3511 and the subtraction value for subtraction is set to "2". Execute the process. By performing this process, in the subsequent step S3404, the process of subtracting from the timer counter T by "2" is performed. That is, the subtraction speed of the predetermined set time is changed to twice the speed up to that point.

After executing the process of step S3510 or step S3511, the process proceeds to step S3512, the timer effect change process is executed, and then the subtraction value adjustment process ends. In this timer effect change process, a command including the information of the subtraction value changed in step S3510 or step S3511 is set as an output target to the display control device 212. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 so that the notification mode of the set time by the time display image Gp in the time display area GE is different from the previous notification mode.

As this different notification mode, specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), a start and a goal are displayed, and a preset character moves from the start to the goal by a vehicle. conduct. Then, if the character reaches the goal by the end of the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol sequence Z3, the special condition is satisfied and the reserved image P changes to a different image, and if the character does not reach the goal, the special condition is set. It shall not hold. Then, when the subtraction value is set to "3" in step S3510, the vehicle is set to the rocket (FIG. 52 (a1)), and when the subtraction value is set to "2" in step S3511. The vehicle is set on the motorcycle (Fig. 52 (a2)). That is, the effect suggests the degree of expectation of reaching the goal (the degree of expectation of establishment of special conditions) depending on the type (speed) of the vehicle.

By doing so, even if the set residual time is clearly longer than the actual residual time, by leaving the possibility that the special condition can be satisfied, the establishment of the special condition is given up early. It is possible to suppress a decrease in attention. In this case, the success or failure of the special condition that the character moves from the start to the goal is notified by the display of the relative distance from the mode in which the success or failure of the special condition is notified by the absolute time display as in the time display image Gp. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of giving the player a sense of discomfort even if the speed at which the set time is advanced is changed.

If S3 is larger than 0 in step S3509, that is, if the set remaining time is longer than three times the actual remaining time, the subtraction value adjustment process is terminated as it is. That is, in this case, the subtraction value is not adjusted. This is because even if the set remaining time and the actual remaining time are too far apart, if the subtraction value is adjusted and the special condition is satisfied, the attention to this special hold notice may decrease in the first place. It is a device to avoid a decrease in the degree of attention.

If it is determined in step S3505 that S1 is not larger than 0, that is, if the actual remaining time is longer than the set remaining time, the process proceeds to step S3513. The case of proceeding to step S3513 is a case where a special condition is satisfied, and in step S3513, it is determined whether or not the absolute value of S1 is equal to or more than a predetermined set value (for example, a value corresponding to 2 sec). If the absolute value of S1 is less than the set value, the subtraction value adjustment process is terminated as it is.

If the absolute value of S1 is equal to or greater than the set value, that is, if the actual residual time is longer than the set residual time and the difference is greater than or equal to the set value (2 sec), the process proceeds to step S3514. In step S3514, the subtraction value reduction lottery process is executed. In this process, a lottery table is acquired from ROM 243 and a lottery counter is acquired from RAM 244 to reduce the subtraction value (usually "1") of the timer counter T in one process in the default subtraction. Execute a lottery to see if or not.

In the present embodiment, the winning probability is set to differ depending on the game result of the hold information that triggered the special hold notice. Specifically, if it is a big hit result, it is 10%, and it is a loss result. In that case, it is set to win the subtraction value reduction lottery with a probability of 30%. The winning probability may be set differently according to the length of S1. For example, if the longer S1 is, the higher the winning probability is, it is possible to prevent the specific condition from being satisfied early, and conversely, the shorter S1 is, the higher the winning probability is. By doing so, it is possible to create a situation in which the specific condition is satisfied by making the difference between the set remaining time and the actual remaining time shorter.

After executing the subtraction value reduction lottery process in step S3514, it is determined in step S3515 whether or not the subtraction value reduction lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S3514. If it is not won, the subtraction value adjustment process is terminated as it is. If it is won, the process proceeds to step S3516. In step S3516, it is determined whether the value (S4) obtained by subtracting the set residual time from the absolute value of S1 becomes larger than 0, that is, whether the actual residual time is longer than twice the set residual time. When S4 is larger than 0 in step S3516, that is, when the actual residual time is longer than twice the set residual time, the process of setting the subtraction value for subtraction to "0.5" in step S3517. To execute. By performing this process, in the subsequent step S3404, the process of subtracting from the timer counter T by "0.5" is performed. That is, the subtraction speed of the predetermined set time is changed to 0.5 times the speed up to that point.

If S4 is 0 or less in step S3516, that is, if the actual residual time is 1 to 2 times the set residual time, the process proceeds to step S3518 and the subtraction value for subtraction is set to "0.8". Execute the setting process. By performing this process, in the subsequent steps S3404, the process of subtracting from the timer counter T by "0.8" is performed. That is, the subtraction speed of the predetermined set time is changed to 0.8 times the speed up to that point.

After executing the process of step S3517 or step S3518, the process proceeds to step S3519, the timer effect change process is executed, and then the subtraction area adjustment process is terminated. In this timer effect change process, a command including the information of the subtraction value changed in step S3517 or step S3518 is set as an output target to the display control device 212. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 so that the notification mode of the set time by the time display image Gp in the time display area GE is different from the previous notification mode.

As this different notification mode, specifically, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), a start and a goal are displayed, and a preset character moves from the start to the goal by a vehicle. Then, if the character reaches the goal by the end of the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol sequence Z3, the special condition is satisfied and the reserved image P changes to a different image, and if the character does not reach the goal, the special condition is set. It shall not hold. Then, when the subtraction value is set to "0.5" in step S3517, the vehicle is set to the rocket, and when the subtraction value is set to "0.8" in step S3518, the vehicle is set. To the bike. That is, the same effect as when the subtraction value is increased is performed. However, when the subtraction value is set to "0.5" in step S3517, for example, a meteorite group appears between the start and the goal, and the rocket cannot move at high speed during that time, and its speed increases. A slowing effect is performed (FIG. 52 (b1)). If the subtraction value is set to "0.8" in step S3518, for example, a gas station appears near the goal and refuels there, and the motorcycle stops just before the goal during that time. An effect is performed (FIG. 52 (b2)).

By doing so, even if the set residual time is clearly shorter than the actual residual time, by leaving the possibility that the special condition will not be satisfied, it is assumed that the special condition will be satisfied and the special hold notice will be given on the way. It is possible to prevent people from losing attention to their whereabouts. In this case, the success or failure of the special condition that the character moves from the start to the goal is notified by the display of the relative distance from the mode in which the success or failure of the special condition is notified by the absolute time display as in the time display image Gp. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of giving the player a sense of discomfort even if the speed at which the set time is advanced is changed. Further, by associating with the effect when the subtraction value is increased, it is possible to pay attention to which adjustment is performed among the increase / decrease of the subtraction value.

The execution timing of the process for reducing the subtraction value (step S3514 to step S3521) may be set to be earlier than the above. That is, as a timing earlier than the start timing of the game round of the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice, the hold information that is digested one before the hold information that is the target or the hold information that is digested two times before is digested. It may be configured to perform a process for reducing the subtraction value at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start) of the reserved information to be held. By doing so, it is possible to prolong the special conditions that can be satisfied early to the game times of the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the first to fifth embodiments described above, based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied in the special hold notice, the hold image P is changed to the hold image on the side with the higher expectation of big hit as a privilege. However, in this embodiment, the privilege to be given based on the establishment of this special condition is changed.

In the present embodiment, the character PM is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the lower right) in the display screen G separately from the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 for variable display (see FIG. 53 (a)). The character PM is involved in the production of the game times, and for example, assists the same symbol as the reach symbol forming the reach line in the reach display to stop at the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2 (for example, the variable destination side). It appears in the production (trying to stop the fluctuation by pushing the pattern from).

When the special condition is satisfied in the special hold notice of the present embodiment, the item A equipped by the character PM is displayed as a privilege given to the player (see FIG. 53 (b)), and thereafter, the character PM is the item A. Is displayed with the equipped. When the character PM is equipped with this item A, the effect of assisting the reach symbol to stop at the above reach line is different (specifically, it becomes flashy) compared to the case where it is not equipped. Will be done. Therefore, by equipping the character PM with this item A, the player can obtain the satisfaction of customizing the effect of the reach display by himself / herself, and can be more absorbed in the game. If the special conditions are not satisfied in the special hold notice, the item A will not be displayed.

In the present embodiment, an operation unit 75 that can be operated by the player is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine main body 12 (see FIG. 1), and by operating the operation unit 75, the state of the character PM can be changed by the player. Output information that can be read by a mobile terminal or the like possessed by the machine is output. Further, by reading this output information with a mobile terminal or the like, the information is stored in the mobile terminal or the management server or the like. Then, by inputting the stored information into the pachinko machine 10 via the operation unit 75, the character PM is displayed in a state corresponding to the stored information. Therefore, for example, from the start of the game, it is possible to display the character PM equipped with the item A under special conditions, and even if the game consoles are different between the same models, the mobile terminal or the management server can display the character PM. It is possible to divert the stored information.

The operation unit 75 is connected to the effect control device 82, and the operation information of the operation unit is output to the effect control device 82. The operation unit 75 has, for example, a rotation operation unit capable of a rotation operation, and is in an output state for outputting character PM information depending on the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit, or an input state for inputting character PM information. It is possible to select whether to. Further, the operation unit 75 is provided with, for example, a ten o'clock key as an input unit for inputting character PM information. Then, in the above input state, a screen keyboard or the like is displayed on the display screen G, and by operating the cross key to move the cursor, it is possible to input character PM information (for example, an 8-digit password). ing. The configuration of the operation unit 75 is not limited to this, and is arbitrary.

Hereinafter, the operation processing executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54. The operation process is a part of the corresponding process for corresponding to the operation of the operation unit 75 started in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec cycle) in the MPU 242, and the output state or the input state is set in the corresponding process. Launched for. In this corresponding process, in addition to the operation process, for example, a process for effect based on the operation of the operation unit 75 (for example, a process for performing an effect such as an operation of the character PM or an attack by item A) or a special hold. Processing and the like for corresponding to the operation of the operation unit 75 in the production and setting other than the advance notice are performed.

First, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the operation of the operation unit 75 has been performed. In step S3601, once an operation is detected, an affirmative determination is made until the process based on the operation is completed. If the operation is performed, the process proceeds to step S3602, and whether or not the operation for setting the output state has been performed (the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit corresponds to the direction for setting the output state). To judge. If it is an operation for setting the output state, the process proceeds to step S3603, the output state flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244, and the output state is set. Further, in step S3603, the information for output is grasped. That is, the process of grasping the information of the item A possessed by the character PM is executed. Then, in step S3604, the information output command is set as an output target to the display control device 212. This information output command includes information that the output state has been set and information on item A possessed by the character PM, and the display control device 212 that has received this information output command has a character from the character ROM 256. The code image CG (for example, QR code (registered trademark)) corresponding to the information of the item A possessed by the PM is read out, and the symbol display device 41 is controlled so as to display the code image CG on the display screen G (FIG. 53 (FIG. 53). c) See).

If it is determined in step S3602 that the operation is not for setting the output state, the process proceeds to step S3605 and the operation for setting the input state is performed (the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit is set to the input state). It is determined whether or not it corresponds to the direction in which it is used. If it is an operation for setting the input state, the process proceeds to step S3606, and the input state flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 and set to the input state. Then, in step S3607, the information input command is set as an output target to the display control device 212. This information input command includes information that the input state has been set, and the display control device 212 that has received this information input command receives an image for the input state (for example, input of a code) from the character ROM 256. The symbol display device 41 is controlled so as to read out the image prompting the user and display the image for the input state on the display screen G (see FIG. 53 (d)).

If it is determined that the operation has not been performed in step S3601, if it is determined that the operation is not for setting the input state in step S3605, or after the processing of step S3604 or step S3607 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3608. .. In step S3608, a process of determining whether or not the output status is in progress is executed by checking the output status flag. If it is in the output state, the process proceeds to step S3609, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined predetermined time (for example, 10 sec) has elapsed since the output state was set. When the output / input state is set in step S3603 or step S3606, the timer counter that can grasp the passage of time is started to be updated. Then, in step S3609, it is possible to specify that the predetermined time has elapsed based on the value of the timer counter being the numerical information corresponding to the predetermined time. If the predetermined time has not elapsed, the operation process is terminated as it is.

If the predetermined time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3610, and the state recovery process is executed. In this process, the output status flag is cleared in order to return from the output status to the normal status. Then, in step S3611, the state return command is set as the output target to the display control device 212, and then the operation process is terminated. This state return command includes information that the output state has returned to the normal state, and the display control device 212 that has received the state return command receives an image (character PM) corresponding to the normal state from the character ROM 256. The symbol display device 41 is controlled so as to read out the image, etc.) and display the image on the display screen G.

If it is determined in step S3608 that the output state is not present, the process proceeds to step S3612, and the input status flag is confirmed to determine whether or not the input status is in progress. If it is in the input state, the process proceeds to step S3613, and whether or not a predetermined predetermined time (for example, 20 sec) has elapsed since the input state was set, or whether the input operation has been performed. Is determined. The above timer counter is used to determine the passage of the predetermined time. Further, in the input state and the output state, the predetermined time is set longer in the input state. This is because, when comparing the time required for code input and the time required for code reading, it is considered that the code input has a larger amount of operation and requires a longer time. Further, it is possible to determine whether or not the input operation has been performed by grasping the signal from the cross key in the operation unit 75. If the code input is such that the operation unit 75 needs to be operated a plurality of times, for example, when a code having a plurality of digits is input, the predetermined time is extended for each operation. It is good to say. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the input state is released before the operation is completed when the operation is started near the elapse of a predetermined time.

When the predetermined time has elapsed or the input operation is performed in step S3613, the state recovery process is executed in step S3614. In this process, the input state flag is cleared in order to return from the input state to the normal state. Then, in step S3615, the state return command is set as the output target to the display control device 212, and then the operation process is terminated. This state return command includes the information of the item A corresponding to the input code in addition to the information that the input state has returned to the normal state, and the display control device that has received the state return command. The 212 reads an image corresponding to the normal state (such as an image of the character PM) and an image of the item A from the character ROM 256, and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the images are displayed on the display screen G. As a result, the character PM can play the game with the item A equipped (see FIG. 53 (e)).

As described above, as in the present embodiment, if the specific condition is satisfied in the special hold notice and some privilege is given to the player, the player is satisfied with the specific condition, that is, the special hold notice is given. Since we expect that the variable display time of the game times executed during the period being performed is long, even if the variable display time of the game times is lengthened, it does not simply become redundant, and attention is paid to the game. It is possible to suppress the decrease in degree.

In addition, if you set multiple items A and set which item A will be given as a privilege by lottery etc. each time a specific condition is met, the fun of collecting item A will be added, and it will improve the interest of the game. More preferable from the viewpoint. In this case, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the type of the item A to be given may be set differently according to the difficulty level (the length of the predetermined set time) of the specific condition. By doing so, it is possible to increase the rarity when more difficult special conditions are met and increase the enjoyment of collecting item A.

Further, the type of the item A to be given may be different depending on the game rotation effect during the execution of the special hold notice. For example, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), it may be configured to be different depending on the number of stops of a specific symbol (for example, the main symbol with 7) in the game times during the execution of the special hold notice. By doing so, it is possible to further increase the degree of attention to the special hold notice and the game times being executed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the character PM is equipped with the item A so that the reach display mode is different, but the probability that the special condition is satisfied may be changed. That is, for example, as in the operation-corresponding subtraction process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 56, in the process started by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 at a predetermined cycle (2 msec cycle), the special conditions are adjusted based on the operation. May be good.

Specifically, it is determined in step S3701 whether or not the special hold notice is being executed, and if it is being executed, it is determined in step S3702 whether or not the operation unit 75 is operated. .. When the operation is performed, it is determined in step S2703 whether or not the item A is displayed. If a negative determination is made in any of steps S3701 to S3703, the operation-corresponding subtraction process is terminated as it is.

If the item A is displayed in step S3703, the process proceeds to step S3704 to execute the process of selecting the type of the item A. In this process, for example, a selection screen for displaying the type of item A to be selected this time from a plurality of items A is displayed (see FIG. 55 (b)). On this selection screen, the item A (including the information input from the mobile terminal) given so far and the subtraction value information corresponding to the type of the item A are displayed. As shown in FIG. 55A, the subtraction value information is information on the time to be subtracted from a predetermined set time among the information set according to the type of the item A. The symbol columns Z1 to Z3 being displayed in a variable manner are reduced and displayed in an area that does not overlap with the selection screen, for example. Then, the type of the item A is selected based on the operation signal of the operation unit 75.

In the following step S3705, a process of grasping the subtraction value information of the selected item A is executed. Then, in step S3706, the subtraction process of the timer counter T based on the subtraction value information grasped in step S3705 is performed, and in step S3708, the subtraction command is displayed and controlled by the display control device 212 to end the operation-corresponding subtraction process. The processing on the display control device 212 side that received the subtraction command is as described above.

In this way, by making it possible to reflect the item A as a granted privilege in the special conditions, not only the fun of collecting the item A is increased, but also the fun of using the item A is added. And, by using item A, the fun of making item A easier to obtain (reflecting in special conditions) is also added. In other words, depending on the success or failure of the special conditions, it is possible to make the game in which a chain of fun is set, and it is possible to encourage active participation in the game and to be more absorbed in the game.

In this case, the information of the item A may be deleted by using it during the special hold notice. By doing so, it is possible to further motivate the collection of item A.

Further, if the item A is not used in this special hold notice, the item A may be configured to hold its use until the execution of the next special hold notice. By doing so, for example, depending on the special conditions in the special hold notice, it is possible to consider whether to use item A or to devise the type of item A to be used, and to be more active in the game. It will be possible to encourage participation.

Further, the right to execute the special hold notice may be set to be held. Specifically, for example, in the special hold notice setting process, if the special hold notice execution lottery is won, the right to execute the special hold notice can be obtained. When the execution right is obtained, for example, a right image indicating that the right is reserved is displayed on the display screen G. Then, this execution right can be exercised at the timing intended by the player, and specifically, the special hold notice can be executed based on the operation of the operation unit 75. By doing so, when the game situation in which the special condition is likely to be satisfied in the special hold notice (for example, when there are a plurality of hold information, or when the variable display time is expected to be long depending on the type of the hold image P, etc.). ), The player can entrust the execution of the special hold notice, such as the change in the hold image P and the timing when he / she wants to obtain benefits such as item A (type of hold information), and more actively participates in the game. Can be encouraged.

The opportunity to obtain the right to execute this special hold notice is not limited to the lottery at the time of receiving the hold command, and may be, for example, when the number of games reaches a predetermined number (for example, 500 times) or a predetermined number. It may be the case where the effect (for example, the premier effect) is executed, or the case where the predetermined number of times the predetermined effect is executed reaches a predetermined number. In these cases, the total number of times may be a plurality of units in the configuration for interlocking with the mobile terminal or the like. By doing so, the right to execute the special hold notice can be obtained in various situations, and the game can be diversified.

In addition, the special conditions of the special hold notice that is held may be set by a lottery or the like at the time of acquiring the right, and the above may be set according to the game situation at the time of exercising the right (at the start of the special hold notice). It may be configured to be set as in each embodiment. In the case of the configuration set at the time of acquiring the right, the special condition (predetermined set time) may be a configuration that can be grasped by the player (for example, a configuration in which the special condition is displayed according to the above right image). By doing so, it becomes possible to further devise the timing of exercising the right. However, even if it is difficult or impossible to grasp the special conditions, the effect of enhancing the unexpectedness at the time of exercising the right can be expected.

<7th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the winning of the upper operating port 33 and the winning of the lower operating port 34 are distinguished from each other, and whether or not the hold information is based on the winning of either one (for example, the winning of the lower operating port 34). The lottery is executed with priority over the winning / failing lottery of the reserved information based on the winning of the other.

The configuration of the reserved ball storage area 232 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 57.

The holding ball storage area 232 in the present embodiment includes a holding area Ra for a first result display unit provided as a first acquisition information storage means and a holding area for a second result display unit provided as a second acquisition information storage means. It is equipped with Rb. The holding area Ra for the first result display unit sets each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS according to the winning history of the game ball to the upper operating port 33. It is a holding area for storing in series. The combination of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is the hold information related to the upper operating port 33. The reserved information corresponds to the special information in the present embodiment.

Further, the holding area Rb for the second result display unit sets each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS according to the winning history of the game ball to the lower operating port 34. It is a holding area for storing in chronological order. The combination of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is the hold information related to the lower operating port 34. The reserved information corresponds to the special information in the present embodiment.

The hold area Ra for the first result display unit and the hold area Rb for the second result display unit are each composed of four storage areas of the first area to the fourth area and a hold number storage area. Each storage area has a C1 storage area for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a C2 storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and a C3 storage for storing the value of the reach random number counter C3. It is composed of an area and a CS storage area for storing the value of the variation type counter CS. The four storage areas of the first area to the fourth area allow up to four winning histories of game balls to be stored in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, respectively.

Then, in the winning process for the operating port (FIG. 7) in the present embodiment, when a winning is generated for the upper operating port 33, the reserved storage number RaN of the holding area Ra for the first result display unit is less than 4. On condition that there is, each buffer value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding storage area. Further, when a prize is generated in the lower operating port 34, the jackpot random number counter C1 to the corresponding storage area, provided that the reserved storage number RbN of the holding area Rb for the second result display unit is less than 4. Each buffer value of the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS is stored.

Further, although detailed description by drawing is omitted, in the present embodiment, the main holding light emitting unit 45 is a light emitting unit for the upper operating port 33 (first holding light emitting unit) and a light emitting unit for the lower operating port 34 (the first). 2 Hold light emitting unit) and is provided separately. The hold display area Ga on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 also includes a hold display area (first hold display area) for the upper working port 33 and a hold display area (second hold display area) for the lower working port 34. , And are set separately. Each of the reserved light emitting units is provided with four each corresponding to the maximum number of stored storages RaN and RbN, and each reserved display area is also divided into four corresponding to the maximum number of stored storages.

Each of the hold commands set in the above-mentioned winning process for the operating port includes information on which of the operating ports 33 and 34 is the holding command based on the winning. Further, the holding storage area 250 on the effect control device 82 side also includes the first storage area to the fourth storage area corresponding to the upper operating port 33 and the first storage area to the fourth storage area corresponding to the lower operating port 34. Is set, and in the hold display control command correspondence process (FIG. 19), information on the hold information is stored in the corresponding storage area based on the reception of each hold command. Then, the effect control device 82 that has received the hold command controls the corresponding hold light emitting unit in accordance with the increase in the number of hold storages. In the hold display area 271 of the display control device 212, the first unit area to the fourth unit area corresponding to the upper operating port 33 and the first unit area to the fourth unit area corresponding to the lower operating port 34 are set. ing. The effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 to execute a process for displaying the hold image in the corresponding hold display area.

Next, the data setting process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the data setting process is a process executed at the start of each game round in the game round control process (FIG. 11).

In the data setting process in the present embodiment, first, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is "0". When the second start hold storage number RbN is "0", the data setting process for the first result display unit of steps S3802 to S3807 is executed, and when the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0". Executes the data setting process for the second result display unit of steps S3808 to S3813.

Here, when the data setting process is executed, the first start hold storage number RaN of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit and the second start hold storage number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit are executed. This is the case where the common hold number CRN, which is the total number, is 1 or more. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN is "0", and if it is not "0", whether the first start hold storage number RaN is 1 or more. Regardless of whether or not, the data stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is set for variable display. As a result, when the hold information is stored in both the hold area Ra for the first result display unit and the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, the hold for the second result display unit corresponding to the lower operating port 34 is held. The reserved information stored in the area Rb has priority.

In the data setting process for the first result display unit, first, in step S3802, the hold storage number RaN of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is subtracted by 1. In the following step S3803, the common hold number CRN is subtracted by 1. After that, in step S3804, the data stored in the first area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S3805, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area to the fourth area to the lower area side, and while clearing the data in the first area, the second area → the first area, The data in each area is shifted such as from the third area to the second area and from the fourth area to the third area.

In the following step S3806, a shift command is set. In this case, from the command information storage area 223 of the ROM 203, information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, that is, to the upper operating port 33. A shift command including information that the data is supported is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S3807 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 8). The effect control device 82 executes a process for changing the display in the first hold light emitting unit in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command. Further, the effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 to execute a process for changing the hold image in the corresponding hold display area.

In the data setting process for the second result display unit, first, in step S3807, the second start hold storage number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is subtracted by 1. In the following step S3808, the common hold number CRN is subtracted by 1. After that, in step S2509, the data stored in the first area of the second result display unit holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S3810, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second result display unit holding area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area to the fourth area to the lower area side, and while clearing the data in the first area, the second area → the first area, The data in each area is shifted such as from the third area to the second area and from the fourth area to the third area.

In the following step S3811, a shift command is set. In this case, from the command information storage area 223 of the ROM 203, the information that the hold area targeted for the data shift this time corresponds to the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, that is, corresponds to the lower operating port 34. A shift command containing information about what is being done is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S3811 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal process (FIG. 8). The effect control device 82 executes a process for changing the display in the second hold lamp unit in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command. Further, the effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 to execute a process for changing the hold image in the corresponding hold display area.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the hold information based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 is stored, the lower operating port 34 is won at the timing before the holding information becomes the target of the winning / failing determination. When the above occurs, the hold information based on the winning of the lower operating port 34 is the target of the winning / failing determination first. Then, for example, when a special hold notice is executed for the hold information based on the winning of the upper operating port 33, when the winning of the lower operating port 34 occurs, the time for the predetermined set time to elapse increases. .. That is, the probability that the special condition is satisfied changes (becomes higher). In this way, the special hold notice is started by configuring the configuration so that the probability of establishment of the special condition can be changed based on the ball entering the predetermined ball entry portion (lower operating port 34) during which the special hold notice is being executed. If this is the case, it is possible not only to keep an eye on it, but also to actively continue firing the game ball so that the ball can enter the predetermined entry section even while the special hold notice is being executed. Will be.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, not only the hold information subject to the special hold notice but also the information on the variable display time of the other hold information contributes to the establishment of the special condition in the special hold notice. In the embodiment, this is changed so that the effect during the game round in the above other hold information contributes to the establishment of the special condition in the special hold notice.

That is, the stop result of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 during the game round contributes to the success or failure of the special condition in the special hold notice. Specifically, a special condition is established when a special hold notice is presented, for example, in a bingo game, when a predetermined combination of symbols is presented and all or part of the presented combination of symbols is stopped in the game. To do. By doing so, when a special hold notice occurs, it is possible to draw attention to the stop symbol of each game.

Like the pachinko machine 10, the holding information that is the basis of the winning / failing lottery is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry portion (upper operating port 33 or lower operating port 34), and the holding information thereof. In a gaming machine that can store up to a predetermined number of cards, in addition to the game times production corresponding to the winning / failing lottery of each holding information, the holding notice (not only the special holding notice but also the holding image) about the holding information before the winning / failing lottery If an effect with a high expectation of a big hit occurs in this hold notice, the attention to the hold information corresponding to the effect will increase, but other hold will be performed. There is a possibility that the degree of attention to the game performance of information will decrease. Therefore, as described above, when a hold notice with a high expectation of a big hit occurs, the effect of the special hold notice generated by the hold notice may be associated with the stop symbol of the game times being executed. By increasing the degree of attention to the special hold notice, it is possible to increase the degree of attention not only to the hold information that is the target of the hold notice but also to the game round production of other hold information.

In this embodiment, the configuration in which the success or failure of the special condition is associated with the stop symbol of each game round is illustrated in the special hold notice, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold notice (change of the hold image) is used as a start trigger. A predetermined effect (special hold notice) is performed in the game round for the hold information other than the hold information that is the target of the hold notice, and the success or failure of the special condition set in the predetermined effect is determined by the hold. The configuration may be such that the determination is made based on the pending information other than the pending information that is the subject of the advance notice.

The success or failure of the special condition is associated with the stop symbol of each game round for the hold information other than the hold information subject to the hold notice, and also with the game result of the hold information as in the second embodiment, for example. Alternatively, it may be associated with the number of hold information as in the special hold notice table (for example, FIGS. 27 (a) and 33 (a)) in each of the above embodiments, and the operation that triggered the acquisition of the hold information may be performed. It may be associated with mouths 33 and 34. Further, it may be associated with the acquisition timing of the pending information. The acquisition timing may be, for example, a difference in acquisition timing between the target hold information and other hold information, or a timing associated with an internal clock using an RTC or the like.

This specific configuration will be described below. 60 to 63 are explanatory views for explaining the outline of the special hold notice in the present embodiment.

The special hold notice in the present embodiment is started based on the acquisition of the predetermined hold information, and is different from the game times related to the hold information that triggered the start (rather than the game times related to the hold information that triggered the start). It is executed in the situation where the game rounds related to the hold information (which is the target of the hit / fail judgment before) are performed. Then, the success or failure of the special condition in the special hold notice is determined by using the stop result of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 in the game round.

In the present embodiment, as a special hold notice, a special effect A for playing a bingo game using the stop result of each game time and a special effect B for playing a lottery game using the stop result of each game time are provided. There is. In the special effect A and the special effect B, the special condition is set so that the special condition is satisfied by the combination of three symbols in the special effect A, and the special condition is satisfied by the combination of the two symbols in the special effect B. In the special production B, the special conditions are more likely to be satisfied than in the special production A.

First, the special production A will be described. As shown in FIG. 60 (a), it is assumed that the special effect A is started with the hold information about the hold image P2 (B) displayed in the second unit hold display area Ga2 as a trigger. As described above, the hold image P2 (B) can be selected regardless of whether the game result is a jackpot result or a miss result, but it is a hold that it is confirmed that any of the super reach A to C will be performed. It is an image for.

In this special effect A, if the bingo is established in the bingo game, the player is given a privilege as if the special conditions were established. Specifically, when the special effect A is performed, the bingo card 300 on which any number (design) of "1" to "9" is arranged and the explanation unit 310 explaining the progress of the bingo game. Is displayed on the display screen G. In this case, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed on the upper display unit GU reduced to the upper part of the display screen G as an area that does not overlap with the bingo card 300 and the explanation unit 310, and each of the vertical symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed. Z3s are displayed side by side (upper symbol row Z1 is left symbol row Y1, middle symbol row Z2 is middle symbol row Y2, lower symbol row Z3 is right symbol row Y3). Further, the fluctuation direction of each symbol row Y1 to Y3 is also changed so as to scroll from top to bottom. Each symbol row Y1 to Y3 stops in the order of the left symbol row Y1, the right symbol row Y3, and the middle symbol row Y2. In the embodiment, the symbol columns Y1 to Y3 are composed of only the main symbols (symbols with numbers "1" to "9"), and the sub-symbols (numbers "1" to "9") in each of the above embodiments. Designs not marked with) are not included. Then, the symbols ("1" to "9") that stop in each of the symbol rows Y1 to Y3 correspond to the numbers arranged in each square in the bingo card 300.

The contents (arrangement of numbers) of the Bingo card 300 are determined by lottery or the like, and special conditions are determined by the determined contents. That is, in the 9-square bingo card 300, the symbol corresponding to the combination of numbers in a total of 8 columns of 3 vertical rows, 3 horizontal rows, and 2 diagonal rows corresponds to the special condition. In the bingo card 300 shown in FIG. 60 (a), the combination of "1", "2", "3", the combination of "4", "5", "6", "7", "8", "9". , "1", "4", "7" combination, "2", "5", "8" combination, "3", "6", "9" combination, "1", Each of the combination of "5" and "9" and the combination of "3", "5" and "7" is a special condition. Then, each time the symbol is stopped in each game, the square with the number corresponding to the stopped symbol is switched to the established square, and all the squares in any of the eight columns are cut into the established squares. By changing, it becomes a bingo, and special conditions are established. It should be noted that the symbol rows Y1 to Y3 may include sub-symbols, and in this case, it is possible to make it difficult to establish the special condition (bingo).

In the present embodiment, even if the game rounds switched to the established squares are completed and the next game round is started, the information of the established squares is carried over as long as the special hold notice continues. .. Therefore, the more times the game is played in the situation where the special hold notice is executed, the easier it is for the special condition to be satisfied.

For example, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), in the game times executed in the situation where the special effect A is performed, the main symbols "5" and "8" are displayed from the left as the stop result of each of the symbol rows Y1 to Y3. When "6" is stopped, the squares of the numbers corresponding to these symbols on the Bingo card 300 are displayed as completed, so that the player can identify before and after the establishment, for example, in a color different from that before the establishment. indicate. In the case of the bingo card 300 in FIG. 60 (b), if "5", "8", and "6" are displayed as established, in this game round, the bingo is not established and the special condition is not satisfied. The state immediately before the establishment of Bingo is the state before the condition is satisfied (reach state). In the state before the condition is satisfied, if the symbol corresponding to "2" or "4" is stopped in the next and subsequent game times, the bingo is established and the special condition can be satisfied. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60 (c), the fact that such a condition is not satisfied is displayed on the explanation unit 310, and the reach line is displayed superimposed on the bingo card 300.

In the next game round, for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (a), when the main symbols "3", "2", and "3" are stopped from the left as the stop result of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the middle As a privilege that the bingo is established by the symbol "2" and the special condition is satisfied, for example, one rare image data is given to the player. Further, in the next game round, for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), when the main symbols "3", "7", and "9" are stopped from the left as the stop result of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The left symbol "3" and the right symbol "9" form three rows of bingo. In this case, for example, rare image data is used so that the number of benefits given to the player increases according to the number of rows in which the bingo is established (the number of establishments of the special condition) (the benefit is more beneficial to the player). Give 3 sheets. On the other hand, in the next game round, for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (c), when the main symbols "3", "1", and "3" are stopped from the left as the stop result of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Bingo was not established in this game, and there are no more games related to the hold information that is subject to the hit / fail judgment before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the start of the special hold notice. Assuming that the special conditions have not been met, this special hold notice (special production A) will end. Then, the explanation unit 310 is notified to that effect (for example, a character display such as "sorry", see FIG. 61 (c)).

In the special effect B, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), if the lottery is established in the lottery game, the player is given a privilege as if the special condition is satisfied. Specifically, when the special effect B is performed, a lottery card 320 in which a plurality of numbers (designs) are arranged and an explanation unit 310 explaining the progress of the lottery card are displayed. The explanation unit 310 is shared with that of the special effect A. This is a device for reducing the storage capacity of image data for production. In this case, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is reduced and displayed at the upper part of the display screen G as an area that does not overlap with the lottery card 320 and the explanation unit 310 (upper display unit GU).

The contents (arrangement of numbers) of the lotto card 320 are determined by lottery or the like, and special conditions are determined by the determined contents. That is, in the two-square lotto card 320, the symbol corresponding to the combination of the two numbers corresponds to the special condition. In the lotto card 320 shown in FIG. 62 (a), it is a special condition that the symbols “1” and “6” are stopped. Then, each time the symbol is stopped in each game, the square with the number corresponding to the stopped symbol is switched to the established square, and both of the two squares of the lottery card 320 are switched to the established square. And the special condition is satisfied.

In the game times executed in the situation where the special effect B is performed, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the stop results of the respective symbol rows Y1 to Y3 are the main symbols "1" and "6" from the left. , "3", when "1" and "6" are stopped, it becomes a lottery, a special condition is satisfied, and the player is given, for example, one piece of rare image data as a privilege. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 62 (c), when the main symbols "1," 8 "," 3 "are stopped from the left as the stop result of each of the symbol rows Y1 to Y3, it is a lottery in this game round. It is assumed that the special condition was not satisfied because there are no more games related to the reserved information that is subject to the hit / fail judgment before the game times related to the reserved information that triggered the start of the special hold notice. , This special hold notice (special production B) will end. Then, the explanation unit 310 is notified to that effect (for example, a character display such as "sorry", see FIG. 62 (c)).

Here, as described above, the number of symbols for satisfying the special condition is different between the special condition A and the special condition B. That is, in the special effect A, the special condition is satisfied by the combination of the three symbols, whereas in the special effect B, the special condition is satisfied by the combination of the two symbols, which is a smaller number than the special effect A. Therefore, the special effect B is basically easier to satisfy the special condition than the special effect A.

However, even in the special effect A, depending on the type of the arrangement of numbers (combination of symbols) arranged on the bingo card 300, the special condition may be more likely to be satisfied than in the special effect B. For example, the numbers in any column of the Bingo card 300 of the special effect A are the same as two of the three numbers (designs), such as "1", "1", and "6". When there is another column in which the numbers (designs) are different, the probability of establishment of the special condition in this column is the same as the probability of establishment of the special effect B in the example of FIG. 62. However, in this case, in the special effect A, another column exists, and the special condition may be satisfied by the combination of other numbers in the other columns. Therefore, in such a case, the probability that the special condition is satisfied is higher in the special effect A than in the special effect B.

The details of the production patterns of the special productions A and B will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 63 (a), as the effect pattern of the special effect A, the special effects A1, A2, and A3 are set so that the arrangement of the numbers of the bingo card 300 is different. In the special effect A1, numbers are arranged in each square so that the numbers in all 9 squares are different. The arrangement of these numbers is randomly determined by lottery or the like. Since the numbers of all 9 squares are set to be different as described above, in this special effect A, the success or failure of the special condition is determined by the combination of the three numbers in any row of the bingo card 300.

In the special effect A2, a predetermined cell (in the present embodiment, the central cell) is a cell that has been established from the start of the effect. Specifically, "F" is displayed on the predetermined cell as the established cell. Will be done. Therefore, the special condition is satisfied by the combination of the two numbers in the column including the established cell (all columns in this embodiment). As a result, the special effect A2 has the same number of numbers to be combined to satisfy the special condition as compared with the special effect B, but the special effect A has more columns (types of combinations), so that the special condition is It becomes easy to be established. Further, in the special effect A2, two numbers out of the combination of the three numbers are set to be the same number. Therefore, in the special effect A2, in the column including the cells that have been established, the special condition is satisfied by one kind of the same number.

In the special effect A3, all the cells have been established since the start of the effect, and specifically, "F" is displayed on all the cells. That is, the special effect A3 is a premier effect in which it is confirmed that the special condition is satisfied at the start of the effect.

As shown in FIG. 63 (b), in the special effect B, the special effects B1, B2, and B3 are set so that the arrangement of the numbers of the lotto card 320 is different. In the special effect B1, the numbers are set in each square so that the numbers in the two squares are different. The arrangement of these numbers is randomly determined by lottery or the like. From the relationship with the special effects A1 to A3, the special effects B1 are more likely to satisfy the special conditions than the special effects A1, and the special conditions are less likely to be satisfied than the special effects A2 and A3.

In the special effect B2, the numbers in the two squares are set to be the same. Therefore, in the special effect B2, the special condition is satisfied by one kind of number which is the same number. Compared to the special effect A2, both are configured to have special conditions with one type of number in the same way, but the special effect A2 has more special conditions than the special effect B2 by the number of rows of the bingo card 300. easy. In the special effect B2, the same effect can be obtained even if either the left or right square is set to "F".

In the special effect B3, all the cells have been established since the start of the effect, and specifically, "F" is displayed on the left and right cells. That is, the special effect B3 is a premier effect in which it is confirmed that the special condition is satisfied at the start of the effect.

In each game round, the number of times the symbols in the symbol rows Y1 to Y3 are stopped differs depending on the length of the variable display time, and the longer the variable display time is, the more times the symbols are stopped. That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), the game times (normally off) in which the fluctuation display time is set to 5 sec to 10 sec correspond to the game times in which reach does not occur, and the symbol rows Y1 to Y3 are left and right. , And each of the symbol rows Y1 to Y3 is stopped once in the order of the middle, so that the total number of stops is three. In this case, the types of stop symbols (hereinafter referred to as the number of stop symbol species) are two types (when the left and the middle are the same, or the middle and the right are the same) or three types.

In the case of a game round (normal reach) in which the variable display time is set to 15 sec to 20 sec, the symbols are first stopped in the order of left and right, and the same type of symbols are stopped on the left and right to form a reach line. Will be done. In this normal reach, the middle symbol row Y2 is frame-advanced from the symbol three before the jackpot symbol (the symbol forming the reach line). That is, the symbol three before the jackpot symbol, the symbol two before, and the symbol one before stop in order. Then, after the symbol immediately before the jackpot symbol is stopped, a fanning effect is performed as to whether the symbol changes to the next symbol (big hit symbol) or the game round ends as it is. In this case, if the game result is a big hit result, the game changes to the next symbol after the fanning effect, and the big hit symbol stops. When the jackpot symbol is stopped in the middle symbol row Y2, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped, and the number of stopped symbol species does not increase. Further, even if the symbol immediately before the jackpot symbol is stopped in the middle symbol row Y2, the number of stopped symbol species does not increase. Therefore, regardless of the game result, the number of stop symbol types is four.

In the case of the game times (super reach A, B) in which the variable display time is set to 45 sec to 60 sec, the game develops into super reach A or super reach B after the fanning effect in the above normal reach. That is, in the normal reach, the fanning effect is performed after the symbol immediately before the jackpot symbol is stopped, and then, as the super reach A and B, the middle symbol row Y2 is displayed in high-speed fluctuation, and then the movie effect and animation are performed. The reach production of the production is performed. It should be noted that these movie effects and animation effects are performed as background effects for the bingo card 300, the explanation unit 310, the lottery card 320, and the like. Super Reach A and Super Reach B are set so that the content of the production and the degree of expectation of a big hit are different. Then, in each of these Super Reach A and B, either the jackpot symbol or the symbol one ahead of the jackpot symbol is stopped, and if it is a jackpot result, the jackpot symbol is finally stopped and the result is off. If so, the symbol one ahead of the jackpot symbol will stop. That is, if the result is off, the number of stopped symbol species increases by one. Therefore, the number of stop symbol species is 4 for the jackpot result and 5 for the missed result.

In the case of a game round (super reach C) in which the variable display time is set to 90 sec, the above super reach A and B are performed, and the middle symbol row Y2 is temporarily stopped one step ahead of the jackpot symbol (stop). After the number of symbol types becomes 5, the middle symbol row Y2 re-variates, and the symbol corresponding to the game result is stopped. In this case, if the result is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol will stop after re-variation, and if the result is off, the symbols other than the jackpot symbol will stop randomly regardless of the symbol forming the reach line. That is, if the result is off, the number of stopped symbol species may increase by one (due to normal reach, etc., the symbols that were stopped before that may be stopped again). Therefore, the number of stop symbol species is 5 types in the case of a big hit result, and 5 types or 6 types in the case of a missed result.

As described above, the number of stopped symbol species is set to increase as the variable display time increases in each game round, and when the variable display time of the game round becomes long, Bingo and Lotto will be announced in the special hold notice. It is easy to hold, and it is easy to hold special conditions.

Next, the hold control command correspondence process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In steps S3901 to S3903, the same processes as those in steps S1201 to S1203 are executed. In step S3904, it is determined whether or not the hold notice counter is less than "1". If it is less than "1", the special hold notice setting process is executed in step S3905. This setting process will be described in detail later. If a negative determination is made in step S3904, or after the process of step S3905 is executed, the hold increase process is executed in step S3906 in the same manner as the process of step S1208, and then the command corresponding process is terminated.

In the hold increase process in the present embodiment, when the special hold notice is executed, the display control is performed so that the second hold image P2 (B) is displayed regardless of the hold image determined in step S3903. Control device 212. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the special hold notice is executed when the super reach A to C occurs even if it is a jackpot result or a miss result.

If a negative determination is made in step S3901, the processing of steps S3907 to S3911 is executed in the same manner as the processing of steps S1209 to S1213, and then the processing corresponding to this command is terminated.

Next, the special hold notice setting process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S4001, as a process of grasping the number of pending information before acquiring the current pending information, "1" is subtracted from the number of stored information other than the reserved information acquired this time, specifically, the number of stored information on the secondary side. Execute the process to grasp the numerical value. In the following step S4002, a process of grasping the game result of the hold information in the hold command received this time is executed. Then, in step S4003, the lottery process for the special hold notice is executed. In the lottery process, the number of hold information other than the hold information acquired this time grasped in step S4001, the game result of the hold information acquired this time grasped in step S4002, and the special hold notice stored in ROM 243. Based on the lottery table of, it is determined whether or not to execute the special hold notice.

Here, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process performed in step S4003 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 66 (a), in the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the special hold notice depends on the number of stored other hold information at the time when the hold information is acquired and the acquired hold information. It is set to be determined by the game result and. That is, regardless of the acquired hold information, if the number of other hold information stored is 0 (secondary hold storage number SN = 1), the special hold notice is not executed. In addition, when the number of stored other reserved information is 1 to 3, regardless of the game result of the reserved information acquired this time, the larger the number of stored other reserved information is, the higher the execution probability of the special reserved notice (special). The winning probability in the lottery process of whether or not to execute the hold notice) is high. Then, even if the number of stored information is the same, when the reserved information acquired this time is a jackpot result, the execution probability of the special reserved notice is higher than when it is a missed result. If the game result is a deviation result, the information on the variable display time is specified, and the lottery process at the time of deviation is executed when corresponding to the super reach, and if not, the lottery process itself is not executed. ..

In the present embodiment, the game result of the hold information acquired this time is reflected in the execution probability of the special hold notice, but the fluctuation display time related to the hold information acquired this time is specified first (the first embodiment described above). ), If the variable display time is identifiable and the variable display time is a relatively long time (for example, if the variable display time corresponds to super reach), a special hold notice is executed. The configuration may be easy, or the special hold notice may be executed only when the variable display time is longer than a predetermined time. By doing so, the difference in the degree of attention to the hold information that triggered the special hold notice and the other hold information due to the special hold notice may increase. It is possible to enhance the significance of executing the special hold notice (special effect A or special effect B) in the game times related to the hold information different from the hold information that triggered the special hold notice.

In addition, instead of specifying the variable display time for all the reserved information, the variable display time for the reserved information other than the reserved information acquired this time is specified first, and the variable display time for any of the reserved information is specified first. May be configured to facilitate the execution of the special hold notice when is a relatively long variable display time. As described above, if the variable display time becomes long, the number of stopped symbol species can also increase. Therefore, if the hold information that is such a relatively long variable display time is included, the special condition is satisfied. It will be easier to do.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the second holding image P2 (B) is displayed as a holding image related to the holding information that triggered the execution of the special holding notice. However, in order to make it possible to clearly distinguish between the hold information that triggered the execution of the special hold notice and the other hold information, the hold image for the hold information that triggered the execution is used for other hold. The image may be different (identifiable) from the image.

If the holding images P1 to P5 that can normally appear are also used when executing the special holding notice, the storage capacity can be reduced as compared with storing the dedicated holding image, and the normal holding image can be stored. Even if is displayed, it can be expected that a special hold notice will occur, and the effect of not interrupting the interest in the production can be expected. In the present embodiment, the bingo card 300 and the lottery card 320 in the special hold notice are displayed at the start of the game round that is started after the acquisition of the hold information that triggered the special hold notice, and the hold image is displayed. The start of the special hold notice is later than the timing (at the time of hold acquisition). Therefore, even when the normal hold image is displayed as described above, the expectation that the special hold notice can be executed after that is further increased.

Returning to the description of FIG. 65, after the lottery process is executed in step S4003, it is determined whether or not to execute the special hold notice in step S4004 based on the result of the lottery process. If it is not executed, this setting process is terminated as it is. If it is executed, the process proceeds to step S4005.

In step S4005, a process of setting an effect pattern in this special hold notice is executed. In this process, the effect pattern is set with reference to the effect pattern table for big hits or the effect pattern table for removal stored in the ROM 243. In these effect pattern tables, the effect pattern to be executed in this special hold notice differs depending on the game result of the hold information acquired this time and the number of stored other hold information at the time when the hold information is acquired. Is set to.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 66 (b) and 66 (c), when the effect pattern table for big hits and the effect pattern table for off are compared, the special hold notice for the big hit is higher than that for the off. It is easy to select an effect pattern that makes it easy to satisfy the special conditions in. For the special effect A3 and the special effect B3, in which it is confirmed that the special condition is satisfied at the start of the effect, only the effect pattern table for big hits is selected. Further, the special effect A2 and the special effect B2, which include the squares that have been established from the start of the effect, are easier to select for the jackpot than for the off-target. And, as already explained, the special condition B is more likely to be satisfied than the special effect A, and the ratio of the special effect B selected for the big hit is higher than that for the off-target. There is. Therefore, in relation to the game result of the hold information acquired this time, a special hold notice is given in which the big hit result is more likely to establish the special condition than the case where the result is the off result. As a result, the special condition is established in the special hold notice and the game result of the hold information that triggered the notice is linked, and the privilege (rare image data) is given simply by the special condition being satisfied. It is possible to expect that it will lead to a big hit as well as the joy of playing, and it is possible to draw attention to both while associating the production of each game and the special hold notice.

In relation to the number of reserved memories, the special effect A is more likely to be selected when the number of reserved memories is larger, and the special effect B is more likely to be selected when the number of reserved memories is smaller. Therefore, regardless of whether the number of reserved memories is large or small, it is possible to flexibly change the ease of establishment according to the situation, and the player gives up early due to the small number of reserved memories at the start of the special hold notice. It is possible to suppress the event that occurs.

Here, as described above, from the viewpoint of the ease with which the special condition is satisfied, the special effect B is more likely to be satisfied than the special effect A when the number of reserved memories is the same. However, in these special effects A and B, the special effect A2 is most established except for the special effect A3 and the special effect B3 in view of the relationship between the detailed effect pattern and the ease with which the special conditions are established. It is easy, the special effect A1 is most difficult to be established, and A2, B2, B1, and A1 are likely to be established in this order. Further, in the present embodiment, the order of the detailed ease of establishment and the ease of selection do not have a one-to-one correspondence. By doing so, for example, while thinking that the special condition may not be satisfied when the special effect A is started, the special effect A2 (or A3) can be seen by looking at the pattern of each square in more detail. It is possible to give the joy of the case (the opposite feeling that a special condition is satisfied), add inflection of the production, and immerse yourself in the game.

In addition, regardless of the game result of the hold information that triggered the special hold notice, the effect pattern of the special hold notice (special effects A1 to A3, B1 to B3) may be determined by lottery or the like, as described above. A configuration in which both are provided may be configured in which the effect pattern is determined based on the game result. By providing a configuration that determines the effect pattern regardless of the game result, it is possible to further strengthen the impression that the effect of each game time and the special hold notice are separate effects. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event such as the result of the effect of the notice side (success or failure of the special condition) being predicted. In addition, if the configuration is provided with both of the above, there is a concern that special conditions should be established in order to produce the game times (despite the long fluctuation display time, the off-results will continue and the degree of attention will decrease. Situations, situations where the probability of establishing special conditions per unit time is low, situations where it is better not to be established (situations where it is difficult to secure time for granting benefits due to short fluctuation display time of game times, etc., or unit time It is possible to avoid inconsistencies and inconveniences in the production in situations where there is a high probability that the special conditions will be met, and the production design will be facilitated.

Returning to the description of FIG. 65, in the following step S4006, based on the effect pattern determined in step S4005, the setting of special conditions, that is, the numbers (designs) to be arranged in each square are determined by lottery or the like. Then, in step S4007, a special hold notice command including the contents determined in steps S4005 and S4006 is set as an output target to the display control device 212. Based on receiving this special hold notice command, the display control device 212 reads the image data of the corresponding effect pattern from the character ROM 256, and sets the symbol display device 41 so as to execute the special hold notice based on the data. Control. In this embodiment, the special hold notice is set to be performed from the start of the game round. Therefore, the display control device 212 that has received the special hold notice command controls the symbol display device 41 so that the special hold notice is given from the next game round of the game round that is being executed at the received timing.

After executing the process of step S4007, the process of adding "1" to the hold notice counter YK is executed in step S4008, and then the present setting process is terminated. By performing the process of step S4008, a negative determination is made in step S3904 in the next hold control command correspondence process. That is, in the present embodiment, the special hold notice is set so as not to be duplicated at the same time. By doing so, it is possible to avoid an event in which the degree of attention is conversely lowered due to the extreme complication of the game. Incidentally, the hold notice counter YK is cleared to the initial value "0" at the start of the game round (at the end of the special hold notice) for which the hold information that triggered the special hold notice is subject to the hit / fail determination.

Next, the variable intermediate processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 67.

In the present embodiment, it is determined in step S4101 whether or not the game is a game in which the special hold notice is being executed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the special hold notice is being executed depending on whether or not the execution flag is stored in the RAM 244. This running flag is a flag that is stored in the RAM 244 at the start of the special hold notice and is erased at the end. If the special hold notice is not being executed, the normal variable intermediate processing is executed in step S4102, and then this processing is terminated. In the process of step S4102, other processes other than the process of step S2607 in the variable intermediate process of FIG. 39 are performed.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the special hold notice is executed from the start of each game. The start processing of this special hold notice is performed in the variation start process (step S2503) of the variation display control process (FIG. 38). Although the specific description by the figure is omitted, in the fluctuation start processing (step S2503), it is determined whether or not the hold notice counter YK is “1” at the start of the start processing, and “1”. If this is the case, it is determined whether or not the special hold notice is being executed, and if not, the special hold notice start process is executed. In the start processing of this special hold notice, the above-mentioned running flag is stored in the RAM 244, and the special hold notice based on the special hold notice command output set in step S4007 (from the variable display of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3). Display control of the symbol display device 41 so as to change to each symbol row Y1 to Y3 variable display on the upper display unit GU and to perform the effect pattern set in the above special hold notice setting process and the special hold notice of special conditions). And so on. Further, even if the hold notice counter YK is "1", if the special hold notice is being executed, the display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed so that the effect of the special hold notice is continuously executed. The termination process of the special hold notice is executed at the time of shifting to the game times related to the hold information that triggered the special hold notice. This process will be described in detail later.

When it is determined in step S4101 that the special hold notice is being executed, the process excluding step S2607 in FIG. 39, specifically, the processes of steps S2601 to S2606 and steps S2608 to S2616. Similarly, in steps S4103 to S4117, deceleration processing is performed at the deceleration timing of each symbol sequence Y1 to Y3, stop processing is performed at the stop timing, and other effects during fluctuation are executed. .. By the way, in the process of step S4115 in the present embodiment, not only the determination of whether or not it is the stop timing of the middle symbol row Y2 but also the determination of whether or not it is the temporary stop timing of the middle symbol row Y2 is performed. If it is the timing of, affirmative judgment is made. The temporary stop timing means the timing at which the middle symbol row Y2 is temporarily stopped (temporary stop timing at the time of frame advance effect, etc.) in the reach effect already described.

In the game round in which the special hold notice is being executed as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 corresponds to the left symbol row Y1, the middle symbol row Z2 corresponds to the middle symbol row Y2, and the lower symbol row Z3 corresponds to the right symbol row Y3. However, the deceleration order and the stop order also correspond to the order in the fluctuation display in the normal time (the same as the order in the fluctuation display in the normal time). In addition, the deceleration timing and the stop timing correspond to the timing in the fluctuation display in the normal time (the same as the timing in the fluctuation display in the normal time).

Then, in the present embodiment, after the stop processing (step S4112, step S4114, step S4116) of each symbol sequence Y1 to Y3 is executed, the special hold notice processing at the time of stop is executed in step S4118, and the process is changing. End the processing. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special hold notice process (step S2607) after the deceleration process of the lower symbol row Z3 is not performed.

The special hold notice process (step S4118) at the time of stop will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S4201, a process of grasping the stopped symbol of the symbol string stopped in the current stop process is executed. In this process, the symbol sequence stopped this time is obtained by grasping the effect pattern and the stop symbol set for the current game round in the variable start processing (step S2503) executed at the start of each game round. It is possible to grasp the stop symbol of. In addition, instead of or in addition to the configuration for confirming the set effect pattern and the stop symbol as described above, the configuration for confirming the symbol that is actually stopped at the time of stop may be used. For example, the symbols stopped or temporarily stopped in the immediately preceding stop processing (step S4112, step S4114, step S4116) may be temporarily stored in the RAM 244 or the register and referred to, for example, each. A counter or the like that changes according to the fluctuation of the symbol rows Y1 to Y3 (Z1 to Z3) is provided so that the position of each symbol that is changing can be grasped by the counter, and the symbol stopped this time can be checked by checking the counter. It may be a structure that can be grasped.

In the following step S4202, a process of grasping the special condition in the special hold notice being executed is executed. That is, as a special condition, the numbers (designs) arranged in each square are grasped, and whether or not those squares have been established is grasped. As a specific configuration of this process, for example, the RAM 244 is provided with storage areas for the number of squares (9 or 2) set in the special hold notice, and in each of those storage areas, the position of the squares and the position of the squares are determined. Numbers (designs) placed as special conditions can be stored. In addition, an area for storing a flag for grasping whether or not the cell is an established cell is provided corresponding to each storage area. For associating each storage area with the position of the mass, for example, a loop counter that can be updated from 1 to 9 and returns to the initial value (1) when updated to the maximum value (9) is used. In step S4202, for example, from the storage area of the cell corresponding to the number 1 to the storage area of the cell corresponding to the number 9, the information of the numbers (designs) stored in each storage area and the cells in which the information has been established are established. Information on whether or not it is collected repeatedly. If the special hold notice being executed is the special effect B, numerical information and information on whether or not the cells have been established are collected in the storage areas of numbers 1 and 2 in each storage area.

In the above configuration, it is preferable to execute the process of grasping whether or not the information of each storage area is an established cell before the process of grasping the information of the numbers (designs) arranged in the cell. .. Since it is not necessary to grasp the numerical information (design) for the established squares, the processing can be omitted and the processing configuration can be simplified.

After the special condition grasping process is executed in step S4202, it is determined in the following step S4203 whether or not the symbol stopped this time is a symbol constituting a part of the special condition. In this process, even if the symbol constitutes a part of the special condition, if it corresponds to the established square, it is determined to be negative. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4203, the corresponding processing is executed in step S4204, and if a negative determination is made in step S4203, the non-corresponding process is executed in step S4205.

In the corresponding process of step S4204, the process for changing the cell corresponding to the symbol stopped this time to the established cell is executed. Specifically, a command including information on the corresponding cell is output and set to the display control device 212. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 212 changes the corresponding cell so that it can be distinguished from the one before the establishment, for example, the background of the corresponding cell is set to a background of a color different from the background before the establishment. The image data is read from the character ROM 256, and the symbol display device 41 is controlled so as to display the image data.

On the other hand, in the non-correspondence process of step S4205, a process for notifying that there is no cell corresponding to the symbol of the symbol string stopped this time is executed. Specifically, a command including information that there is no corresponding cell is output and set to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command has an effect indicating that there is no corresponding cell (for example, an effect of displaying an image in which a predetermined character is disappointed, or an effect such as "that ..." in the explanation unit 310. Image data is read from the character ROM 256 so as to perform display effects, etc., and the symbol display device 41 is controlled to display the image data.

If there is no square corresponding to the symbol stopped this time, but it corresponds to a square that has already been established, a configuration different from the above-mentioned effect may be performed. Specifically, for example, it may be an effect of displaying an image in which a predetermined character is disappointed while comparing the symbol stopped this time and the established square corresponding to the symbol, or the explanation unit 310 may be used. It may be a production that displays "It has been established". By doing this, not only is there no corresponding square this time, but the player can clearly understand that it overlapped with the previously stopped symbol, and he is more interested in the special hold notice. Can be made to.

Further, the fact that the symbol was overlapped with the previously stopped symbol means that, for example, when this event occurs in the stop processing of the right symbol column Y3, the previously stopped symbol corresponds to the left symbol column Y1. If it is a thing, since the reach line is formed by the left and right symbol rows, the reach display will occur in this game round. Therefore, the fact that an event that overlaps with the previously stopped symbol does not contribute to the success or failure of the special condition from the viewpoint of the success or failure of the special condition, but the game is played from the viewpoint of the game result of the game. The result is more likely to be a jackpot result. Therefore, as described above, if the symbol overlaps with the previously stopped symbol, it is possible to shift the subject of interest from the special hold notice to the game round by setting the configuration to notify it. It is possible to entertain the production while more closely relating the hold notice and the game times.

It should be noted that the configuration in which the game result of the game round is likely to be a big hit result when it overlaps with the previously stopped symbol as described above is not limited to the case where the reach display occurs, and is the same. The so-called chance eye display (continuous effect) in which the symbols or symbols of the same type are stopped continuously may be configured to increase the probability of a big hit result. That is, the game times that are more likely to result in a big hit are not limited to the game times in which the above duplication occurs, and may be subsequent game times. Further, the duplication of the stop symbols may also target the symbols that stop over a plurality of game times.

After executing the process of step S4204 or step S4205, the process proceeds to step S4206. In step S4206, it is determined whether or not the special condition is satisfied by the stop processing this time. Specifically, in the case of special effect A, it is determined whether or not the bingo line is formed by being switched to the cell that has been established this time, and in the case of special effect B, it is switched to the cell that has been established this time. It is determined whether or not the lottery has been established. Then, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4206, a process of storing the condition establishment flag indicating that the special condition is satisfied in the RAM 244 is executed, and a privilege is given based on the establishment of the special condition in step S4207. Execute the privilege granting process for. When it is determined in step S4206 that the special condition is not satisfied, or after the process of step S4207 is executed, the special hold notice process at the time of stop is terminated.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 69, the privilege granting process (step S4208) is first executed in step S4301 to grasp the symbol sequence stopped this time. That is, the process of ascertaining whether the symbol string stopped this time is the left symbol column Y1, the right symbol column Y3, or the middle symbol column Y2 is executed.

In the following step S4302, it is determined whether the symbol string stopped this time is the left symbol string Y1 based on the processing result of step S4301. If it is the left symbol column Y1, the granting process is executed in step S4303. In this granting process, a command indicating that the special condition is satisfied is output and set to the display control device 212. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 212 reads the image data for reading the data such as the rare image as the privilege from the character ROM 256 and displays the image so as to give the privilege according to the established special condition. The design display device 41 is controlled.

If it is not the left symbol row Y1 in step S4302, it is determined in step S4304 whether or not it is the right symbol row Y3. In the case of the right symbol row Y3, it is determined in step S4305 whether or not the reach line is formed in the left and right symbol rows Y1 and Y3. If the reach line is not formed, the process proceeds to step S4303 described above to execute the granting process.

If the middle symbol row Y2 is formed instead of the right symbol row Y3 in step S4304, or if the reach lines are formed in the left and right symbol rows Y1 and Y3 in step S4305, the reach is displayed in step S4306. Proceed to. In step S4306, the grant carry-over process is executed. In this process, the privilege corresponding to the establishment of the special condition is not given during the current game round, but is carried over so that the privilege is given after that. In the present embodiment, the privilege corresponding to the above-mentioned special condition is given at the end of the current game round, not during the current game round. Then, as a process for carrying over, a process of storing a carry-over flag indicating that the RAM 244 is in a carry-over state in which the special condition is satisfied but the privilege is not yet given is executed.

Further, in this carry-over process, the command indicating the carry-over state is output and set to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command displays, for example, a character or displays a character such as "I will give you a privilege later" in the explanation unit 310 so as to notify that the carry-over state is in effect. The image data is read from the character ROM 256, and the symbol display device 41 is controlled to display the image.

After the grant process is executed in step S4303 or the grant carry-over process is executed in step S4306, the privilege grant process ends.

Next, the special hold notice process (step S3910) at the time of shift in the hold control command correspondence process (FIG. 64) in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 70.

In step S4401, it is determined whether or not the special condition is already satisfied. In this process, the success or failure of the special condition can be grasped by confirming the condition establishment flag stored when the affirmative determination is made in step S4206. If the special condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S4402, and it is determined whether or not the privilege has been granted. In this process, the presence or absence of the above carry-over flag (stored in the carry-over process of step S4306) is grasped, and if the carry-over flag is stored, the privilege is not given, and if the carry-over flag is not stored, the privilege is not given. Is determined to have been given. If the carry-over flag is stored and the privilege is not granted, the granting process is executed in step S4403. This process is the same as the process of step S4303.

However, when the privilege is granted in the granting process of step S4403, the image for granting the privilege is continuously displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 sec) even after the game round after the shift is started. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconvenience such that the privilege (code) cannot be read even though the privilege is given (the code is displayed). In this case, it is preferable to continuously display the image for granting the privilege regardless of the length of the variable display time of the game times after the shift. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the image display for giving is ended based on the end of the game round after the shift.

If it is determined in step S4401 that the special condition is not satisfied, if the privilege has been granted in step S4402 (when the carry-over flag is not stored), or after the process of step S4403 is executed, step S4404 Proceed to. In step S4404, whether or not this shift is a shift to the hold information that triggered the special hold notice, that is, whether or not the next game round is the game round related to the hold information that triggered the special hold notice. judge. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4404, the process proceeds to step S4405 to execute the end processing of the special hold notice. Specifically, a command indicating that the special hold notice ends is set as an output target to the display control device 212. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 212 performs a process for ending the special hold notice. For example, the explanation unit 310 or the like reads image data indicating the end of the special hold notice such as "Play again!" From the character ROM 256, and controls the symbol display device 41 to display the image data. In addition, in the end processing of the special hold notice, initialization (clearing) processing of various flags (running flag, established flag, carry-over flag, etc.) and various counters (hold notice counter YK, etc.) used in this special hold notice. I do. After that, the processing for special hold notice at the time of shift is terminated.

It should be noted that the effect at the end of the special hold notice may be configured to be continued for a predetermined period (for example, 3 sec) even after the shift (after the start of the next game round). This not only prevents the effect at the end from being overlooked, but also indicates that the game in which the effect at the end is performed is the game related to the hold information that triggered the special hold notice. It can be clearly grasped by the player.

If the effect at the end of the special hold notice and the grant process in step S4403 overlap, the effect of the grant process is prioritized, and then the effect at the end of the special hold notice is performed. In this case, in the lottery process (step S4003) of the special hold notice, the period for specifying the variable display time of the game times related to the hold information acquired this time and continuously displaying the image for granting the above privilege or more. In the case of the length of, the special hold notice may be executed (that is, the special hold notice may be executed in other cases except when the fluctuation display time of the direct hit B is short). By doing so, it is possible to end the display for granting the privilege before the end of the game round related to the hold information that triggered the special hold notice, for example, a new special in the next game round. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of duplication of processing and display, such as when a hold notice is generated. Further, for a player who expects that super reach A to C will be generated by the reserved image, the situation where the normal reach before the super reach is performed can be a so-called waiting time in which the degree of attention can be relatively lowered. There is sex. Therefore, if the privilege is given in such a situation (that is, the situation before the development to super reach), the waiting time can be effectively used on the special hold notice side, and the degree of attention can be raised in a well-balanced manner.

If a negative determination is made in step S4404, the process proceeds to step S4406 to determine whether or not the condition is before the condition is satisfied, which is a state in which the special condition can be satisfied during the next game round. If the condition is in the pre-condition state, the subsequent step S4407 executes a process for notifying that the condition is in the pre-condition state. Specifically, a command indicating that the condition is not satisfied is set as an output target to the display control device 212. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 212 reads out image data (for example, a display of "reach", see FIG. 60 (c)) for indicating that the state before the condition is satisfied by the explanation unit 310 from the character ROM 256. , The symbol display device 41 is controlled to display the image data. After that, the processing for special hold notice at the time of shift is terminated.

Here, the state before the condition is satisfied may be set as the state before the condition is satisfied, for example, the state where the bingo or the lottery is satisfied in one more square may be set as the state before the condition is satisfied, or as the state before the condition is satisfied according to the number of stopped symbols of the next game round. It may be configured to be used. In this case, when the shift command is received, the game round command (variation command or type command) is also received, so it is advisable to grasp the number of stop symbol species based on the information contained in those commands. In the present embodiment, as described above, the longer the variable display time, the larger the number of stopped symbol species. Therefore, if the larger the number of stopped symbol species grasped, the easier it is to set the pre-condition state, the pre-condition state is set. By setting it, it is possible to predict that the next game will have a high expectation of a big hit and a long variable display time.

In addition, as described above, in the special hold notice, the notification of the state before the condition is satisfied is not performed during the game round, but is performed at the time of the shift. Therefore, in each game round, the effect for the game round and the special hold notice are given. You can focus your attention on whether or not the special conditions for. That is, if the configuration is such that the notification of the state before the condition is satisfied in the special hold notice is performed in the middle of the game round, the reach display for notifying the stage before the jackpot result is notified in each game round and the notification of the state before the condition is satisfied , May be confused. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to concentrate on each production in the configuration in which each production (the production for the game round and the special hold notice) is performed in parallel.

It should be noted that the timing of notifying the state before the above condition is satisfied may be changed according to the number of pending information. Specifically, if the condition is not satisfied in the special hold notice, there are still game times that are executed before the game times related to the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice. For example, as in the present embodiment, the state before the condition is satisfied is notified at the time of the shift to the game times executed before the game, and if the game times to be executed before the game do not exist, the state before the condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that the game has been played, a notification to that effect may be given during the game. However, in this case, when the condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the symbol may be further stopped during the game, and if the symbol is not stopped, there is no possibility that the special condition is satisfied. , It is preferable to configure the configuration so that the notification of the state before the condition is satisfied is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the symbol does not stop and the special condition is not satisfied at all even though the notification of the state before the condition is satisfied is performed.

Further, in the above-mentioned special hold notice processing at the time of shift, the game result before shift is not referred to. This means that, for example, even if a jackpot result is obtained in a game round during which the special hold notice is being executed, the continuation of the special hold notice is executed after the game round and the open / close execution mode in which the jackpot result is executed. Means. By doing so, for example, even though the special condition is almost satisfied (the state before the condition is satisfied), the special hold notice ends depending on the game result on the game round side (because it becomes a big hit result). It is possible to avoid the event that the special condition is satisfied, and it is also possible to avoid the event that the game result on the game turn side is too different and the result is desired. In addition, by doing so, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the privilege (image data) given in the special hold notice and the privilege (prize ball) given in each game time, and it is given in each game time. When changing the game conditions that are directly linked to the interests of the player, such as many or few benefits, there is no need to reset even the special conditions on the special hold notice side, designing the game machine, managing the ball exit of the game hall. Etc. can be facilitated.

In addition, as the timing of granting the privilege based on the establishment of the special condition, there are a case where the privilege is granted during the game round and a case where the privilege is granted at the time of shifting the reserved information. Specifically, when the left symbol row Y1 is stopped or the right symbol row Y3 is stopped without occurrence of reach, a privilege based on the establishment of special conditions is given during the game round. Other than that, it was set to be given at the time of shift. In the game round, the player first expects that the reach display will occur, and in view of the fact that the reach display will occur after the right symbol column Y3 has stopped, after the left symbol column Y1 has stopped. Until the right symbol row Y3 is stopped, it may be a waiting time for the player. Further, when the right symbol row Y3 is stopped but the reach display does not occur, there may be a waiting time for the player until the middle symbol row Y2 is stopped and the game round is completed. In particular, as described above, while the special hold notice is being executed, the variable display of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 is reduced and displayed on the upper display unit GU, so that it is compared with the situation where the special hold notice is not executed. , The element of enjoying watching the pattern fluctuation can be reduced. Therefore, by using these waiting times to grant benefits based on the establishment of special conditions, it is possible to efficiently use the waiting time during the game and prevent the interest in the game from diminishing. Is possible.

On the other hand, when the right symbol column Y3 is stopped and the reach display is generated, it is considered that the interest in the production on the game round side is increased because the jackpot result can be notified in the game round. Therefore, when the right symbol column Y3 is stopped and the reach display occurs, even if the special condition is satisfied and there is time left to grant the privilege based on the establishment (after that, the variable display time of the game times is concerned). (Even if it remains), the privilege is not given during the game round (granted when shifting to the next game round). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the attention is dispersed between the reach display of the game times and the special hold notice, and the production cannot be enjoyed.

When the special condition is satisfied due to the stop of the middle symbol row Y2, the configuration is set so that the special condition is given at the time of shifting to the next game time instead of the game time. After the middle symbol row Y2 is stopped, the remaining time of the fluctuation display time of the game times is short, and even if the privilege is given, the player cannot recognize it or cannot read the code indicating the privilege. There is a possibility that you will not receive the benefits. Therefore, if the privilege is given at the time of the shift (start) of the next game round, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be avoided.

The end process (step S4405) of the special hold notice may be configured to be performed by the variation start process (step S2503) or the variation end process (step S2506). By doing so, it is not necessary to perform the processing for the special hold notice at the timing when the processing load can be extremely increased, such as when the hold information is shifted, and the processing load can be distributed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the present embodiment, when a predetermined holding image (second holding image P2) is selected as the holding notice, the special effect A or the special effect B is executed as the special holding notice with a predetermined probability. This special hold notice is executed as a game time different from the game times related to the hold information that triggered the special hold notice, and is executed in the game times executed before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the special hold information. To. Here, by giving a hold notice, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game times related to the hold information that is the target of the hold notice, while the game related to the hold information that is the target of the hold information. As the attention to the times increases, the attention to other game times may decrease. That is, since there is a high possibility that a privilege (prize ball) will be given as a result of the game round, the player expects that the game round to be performed as soon as possible, and then, for the previous game rounds, It can be annoying. Therefore, as described above, by giving a special hold notice at a game time different from the game times related to the hold information that triggered the hold notice (executed before that), the game is played to this special hold notice. If people are interested in the game, it will be possible to entertain the game even during the game, which can be annoying. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Since a special condition is set in this special hold notice and a privilege is given based on the establishment of the special condition, it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to this special hold notice. Then, by making this special condition possible in relation to the stop result in the game times being executed, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the stop result on the game times side.

In the relationship between the game result on the game turn side and the stop result, there are more types of stop symbols as the stop result when the game result on the game turn side is the off result than when it is the jackpot result. Therefore, it is easier for the special condition to be satisfied when the game result on the game round side is out of order than when it is the jackpot result. As a result, even in a situation where the degree of attention to the game round side may decrease, it is possible to draw attention to the special hold notice side, and the degree of attention can be increased in a well-balanced manner.

The number of times each symbol sequence Y1 to Y3 is stopped in each game round is set so that the longer the variation display time of the game round, the larger the number of stops. Therefore, the longer the variable display time of the game times executed in the situation where the special hold notice is given, the easier it is for the special condition to be satisfied in the special hold notice. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the slackening caused by the prolonged game times. In particular, the situation in which the special hold notice is given is the situation in which the game times subject to the hold notice (second hold image P2) that triggered the special hold notice are pending after that, and the player If you expect too much from the game times that are the subject of the hold notice, and the game times before that are prolonged, you may feel that the game times are troublesome. Therefore, as described above, the longer the game times are, the easier it is for the special conditions on the special hold notice side to be satisfied. Is possible.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above-described embodiment, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to other embodiments or modifications thereof, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to other embodiments or variations thereof. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or a part or all of them may be applied in combination.

In the above embodiment, the probability of establishing the special condition may differ depending on the number of times the symbol stops depending on the variable display time. However, even if the variable display time is the same, the number of times the symbol stops is different and the special condition is satisfied. It may be configured so that the probability of establishment of is different. For example, in a so-called pseudo-continuous production in which the fluctuation display and stop of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are performed multiple times during one game round, if the time of one fluctuation display is shortened, the fluctuation display time during one game round can be changed. It is possible to increase the number of times the symbol is stopped. In general, the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous production is set so that the greater the number of fluctuation displays and stops during one game round, the higher the expectation that the game round will result in a big hit. Therefore, assuming such a configuration, regardless of the length of the variable display time, the special condition is likely to be satisfied if a highly expected effect that results in a big hit occurs in the game times during which the special hold notice is being executed. It becomes a composition. Therefore, even if the production with high expectation as the big hit result is out of order, the ease of establishing the special condition side is guaranteed (the special condition is likely to be established), and the game times. It is possible to maintain the balance of the overall attention level by compensating for the situation where the attention level may decrease in the side production by the special hold notice side.

In the production on the game round side, the number of stop symbols (number of stopped symbol types) is increased by developing into a super reach with high expectation that will result in a big hit, but the reach with low expectation that will result in a big hit It may be configured such that the number of stops of the symbol (the number of stopped symbol species) is larger. For example, if a super reach D is provided in addition to the above super reach A, B, and C and is distributed to the super reach D, the expectation of a big hit result is low, but the frame advance effect of the middle symbol row Y2 (once). It is set so that the stop effect) is repeated for a long time (stops once a large number of times). By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the special hold notice side even in a situation where the attention level of the game round side may be lowered due to the production with a low expectation level.

In an effect in which the symbol being reached (particularly, the middle symbol row Y2) is frame-advanced, the number of stop symbol types may be different depending on the start position (symbol) or end position (symbol) of the frame-advance. That is, for example, in the case of an effect in which the symbols from 3 to 1 before the symbol forming the reach line are frame-by-frame, the number of stop symbol types in the middle symbol row Y2 is 3. When the symbols from 5 to 1 before the symbol forming the reach line are frame-by-frame, the number of stop symbol species in the middle symbol row Y2 is 5. By doing so, it is possible to change the probability of establishing the special condition without increasing the types of reach, and the production can be diversified. As such a configuration, the frame advance start position (design) may be associated with the jackpot expectation of the game times. For example, if the jackpot expectation is lowered as the frame advance position is earlier (the larger the number of stopped symbol species is), the special hold notice side compensates for the decrease in the attention of the game round side. On the contrary, if the position where the frame advance is performed is earlier (the larger the number of stop symbol species is), the higher the expectation of big hit is, the attention of both effects can be increased. In these configurations, the start / end position (design) of frame advance may be associated with the variable display time. That is, the longer the period in which the frame advance effect is performed, the longer the variable display time can be, and the larger the number of stop symbol species. Therefore, by lengthening the frame advance effect, it is expected to have the effect of avoiding a decrease in the degree of attention to the increase in the variable display time of the game times related to the hold information other than the hold information that triggered the special hold notice. Can be done.

As an effect for game rounds, it is provided with an effect that suggests that the same symbol or the same type of symbol is likely to be a big hit result when the same symbol or the same type of symbol is stopped in a pseudo-continuous production over multiple game rounds or during one game round. It may be configured as a new type. By performing this effect, the degree of attention to the stopped symbol or the type thereof on the game rotation side is increased, but the degree of attention may be decreased when a different symbol or a different type of symbol is stopped. On the other hand, in the special hold notice, the more types of symbols to be stopped, the easier it is for the special conditions to be established. The configuration will increase the degree, and it will be possible to raise the overall degree of attention in a well-balanced manner.

The configuration is such that the number of stop symbols in each game is reflected in the special conditions, but the production of the special hold notice is not limited to the above (BINGO and LOTO), and may be other productions, during the game. It suffices if the production is reflected in the special conditions. For example, the configuration may be such that the number of predetermined effects is reflected in the special conditions, and the player intervenes (the operation of the operation unit 75, the operation of the firing handle 54, the predetermined operation of the player by the motion sensor, etc.). It may be a possible production (such as using the detection result of), or it may be a production that cannot intervene. In the case of an effect in which the player can intervene, for example, the operation unit is configured to change the probability of establishment of the special condition based on the number of operations and the operation timing of the operation unit 75, or the operation unit is based on an instruction (mission) from the pachinko machine 10 side. It is conceivable that the probability of establishing the special condition changes depending on the number of times the 75 can be operated / not operated.

As an effect in the special hold notice, a predetermined image (for example, a rare image) is displayed in a state where it is difficult to see / cannot be seen at the start of the special hold notice, and the predetermined image is easily visually recognized by the operation of the operation unit 75. / It may be a so-called scratch effect that changes to a visible state. If the effect that the player can intervene is executed in the game times related to the hold information other than the hold information that triggered the special hold notice, the more the operation unit 75 or the like is operated, the more the special condition is established. If it is easy to do, you should be absorbed in the operation, and even if the degree of attention to the game times related to the hold information other than the hold information that triggered the operation may decrease, the total degree of attention to the game The decline can be avoided. Even in these cases, the configuration may be such that the variable display time is associated with the number of occurrences and the number of operations of these effects, and the number of occurrences and the number of operations of this effect are irrelevant to the variable display time. The configuration may be such that the probability of establishment of the special condition changes depending on the situation.

Even if the effect cannot be intervened by the player, for example, the type of the character or the like that appears as the effect during the game may be reflected in the success or failure of the special condition. Specifically, for example, a configuration is set in which a plurality of characters can appear as an effect during a game round, and the degree of expectation that the result of the game round will be a big hit result differs depending on the type of the appearing character. Then, the above-mentioned plurality of characters are placed on the bingo card in the case of the special effect A and in the lottery card in the case of the special effect B, and the square in which the characters appearing during the game round are placed is regarded as the established square. .. Then, if the established squares are aligned and the bingo (lottery) is established, the privilege is given as if the special conditions were satisfied. In this way, even if the effect is different from the variable symbol of each game, it can be associated with the special hold notice, and the effect during the game and the special hold notice can be associated. In addition, in the above configuration, if the special condition is made easier to be satisfied so that a character with a low expectation of a big hit result appears as a result of the game round, the special hold notice side may reduce the attention level of the game round. It is preferable because the configuration is supplemented with.

As a special hold notice, for example, a configuration may be configured in which a privilege of a predetermined image (for example, a rare image) is given regardless of the success or failure of the special condition. By doing so, it is possible to give fun different from the effect of the game turn side, such as viewing at least a predetermined image, and the special hold notice side can guarantee the decrease in the degree of attention of the game turn side.

The start timing of the special hold notice is set to the start of the game round after the acquisition of the hold information that triggers the special hold notice, but it may be started before or after that. May be good. Since the number of stopped symbol species may differ depending on the start timing of the special hold notice, it may be configured to change the probability of establishment of the special condition by using it. Specifically, for example, although it is notified in advance that the special hold notice will be given, the number of stopped symbol species may be reduced by delaying the start timing. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the start timing of the special hold notice, and it is expected that the degree of attention will be further improved.

As the effect of the special hold notice, an effect (for example, a movie effect) that is continued for a predetermined period may be displayed. Specifically, based on the acquisition of the hold information that triggered the special hold notice, the above movie production is started, and according to the fluctuation display time of the game times related to the hold information other than the hold information that triggered the special hold information. The period during which the movie production can be viewed is different. In this way, for a player who wants to watch a movie effect for a long time, it is rather preferable that the variable display time of the game times is long, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience caused by the long variable display time. .. In this case, a plurality of movie effects may be stored according to the length of the variable display time of each game, and the movie effect of the same time as the variable display time may be selected, or the length close to the variable display time. Select the movie production and adjust the difference in length on the movie production side (for example, adjust the start timing and end timing, add or reduce the short-time adjustment movie production to the selected movie production. Etc.) may be configured.

As a special hold notice, a configuration may be configured in which the player shifts to an acquisition state in which the player can acquire the privilege, triggered by a predetermined hold notice. Specifically, for example, based on the display of a predetermined holding image (second holding image P2), the player shifts to an acquisition state in which a predetermined privilege (rare image, item, etc.) can be acquired. However, the privilege may be selected or acquired. In this way, the longer the variation display time of the game times related to the hold information other than the hold information that triggered the special hold notice, the longer the period of the state in which the above privilege is selected / acquired, so that the game It will be preferable for the person. In this case, the privilege may be selectable / acquired in a state other than that state, and the privilege that can be selected / acquired in the other state and the privilege that can be selected / acquired in the state are different from the state. The advantage of becoming can be enhanced. If the operation unit 75 is used to select / acquire the privilege, it is possible to encourage the active participation of the player. Further, the privilege that can be selected / acquired may be different depending on the points held by the player. In this case, points and the like may be given based on the number of times of the game, based on the occurrence of a predetermined effect during the game, or based on the number of visits to the game hall. .. It is good that the above points can be diverted between different game consoles or on different days, and it is assumed that the number of points is read by the mobile terminal or the like owned by the player and the number of points is stored by the mobile terminal or the management server. good. If the acquired benefits are those that can be used during the game round (for example, if the acquired item is used, the game round effect will change to a different effect than usual), the special hold notice side privilege and the game round side It is possible to enhance the relevance to the production of.

As a privilege to be given based on the establishment of special conditions, for example, in the special production A, the number of benefits (number of rare image data) and the quality of the privilege (rare degree of rare image) are made different according to the number of established bingo lines. Or, the benefits to be given differ depending on the type of symbol that forms the established special conditions (bingo line or lottery) (if 7 symbols that are easy to associate with a big hit are included, a higher privilege is given, etc.). You may.

The benefits to be given this time will be different depending on the game situation at the time of establishment (high or low of support mode and lottery mode, number of reserved memories, etc.), and the benefits to be given this time will be different according to the special conditions established before that. You may. As a configuration in which the benefits to be given differ depending on the game situation, the lower the expectation of the benefits (prize balls) on each game turn side (as a result of the winning / failing lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 33 and 34), the more special conditions. If the privilege based on the establishment is increased, the decrease in the degree of attention to the game time due to the low expectation of the privilege of each game time can be compensated by the special hold notice, and conversely, the privilege of each game time side can be compensated. If the higher the expectation of, the higher the privilege based on the establishment of special conditions, the special hold notice will be given in a situation where the attention is relatively high, and it is possible to easily increase the attention to the special hold notice. Therefore, in the above embodiment, since the second holding image P2 in which the jackpot result and the super reach are determined is set as the execution condition of the special holding notice, the execution rate of the special holding notice can also be increased. In addition, in a configuration in which the privilege to be granted this time is different according to the special conditions established before, the data of the privilege to be granted is stored in the game machine (RAM 244), and the privilege to be granted this time is based on the data. A game is played in a configuration for determining (for example, a configuration for making it difficult for the granted privilege to be granted) or a configuration in which the player can input game data stored in a mobile terminal, an external server, etc. into the game machine. The privilege to be granted this time may be determined by referring to the privilege stored in the person's mobile terminal or server. Further, the real-time clock (RTC) function may be used to configure different benefits depending on the time zone, day of the week, date, and the like.

In the setting of special conditions (step S4006) in the special hold notice setting process (FIG. 65), numbers (designs) to be placed in each square are set based on the number of holds and the game result of the hold information that triggered the special hold notice. Although the configuration is determined, it may be configured to refer to the reserved information that has already been stored. For example, as in the timer input process (FIG. 29) at the time specifying pattern in the first embodiment, the configuration in which the effect pattern of the hold information is specified in advance is used. Then, when setting the special condition, the effect pattern and the stop result of the stored hold information are specified in advance, and the number (design) to be arranged in each cell is determined based on the effect pattern. By doing so, it is possible to make an effect in which the special condition is satisfied based on the result specified in advance, or it is possible to make an effect in which the special condition is not satisfied.

If the special conditions are not satisfied in the special hold notice, the special hold notice may be extended. Specifically, for example, at the time of shifting to the game round (step S4405) related to the hold information that triggered the special hold notice, the special hold notice is related to the subsequent hold information based on the subsequent hold information. A lottery will be held to determine whether or not to extend the game times (at the time of shift). Then, if the lottery is won, the special hold notice will be extended. For example, if the subsequent hold information is a jackpot result, if the special hold notice is easily extended, the special hold notice is extended, so that not only the hold information that triggered the special hold notice but also the hold information is used. , It can be expected that the pending information after that will result in a big hit, and the degree of attention can be suitably increased.

As a special hold notice, like special effect A and special effect B, it is configured to produce whether or not the special condition is satisfied during the special hold notice, but the special condition is established during one special hold notice. It doesn't have to be something that can be done. For example, points may be given by giving a special hold notice, and by accumulating the points, the privilege may be easily given. Further, by giving a special hold notice, the points given may differ depending on the number of holds at that time. Further, a lottery for whether or not to give points may be performed, and points may be given when the lottery is won. In these cases, the privilege to be given may be different (image data having different rarity is given) depending on the number of points.

While the special hold notice is being executed, all the game times that are executed until the game times related to the hold information that triggered the special hold notice are started are subject to the success or failure of the special conditions, for example. The game may be configured so that the target game times can be selected. For example, the probability of being targeted (selected) differs depending on the reserved image. More specifically, the holding image with a lower jackpot expectation has a higher probability of being targeted (selected). In this way, the special hold notice side can suitably compensate for the degree of attention to the game times, which is predicted in advance as the hold image that the jackpot expectation is low.

Needless to say, the number of digits (number of squares) of the bingo card 300 and the lottery card 320 in the special effect A and the special effect B is not limited to the above. When changing the probability that the special condition is satisfied, the number of digits may be changed. For example, the larger the number of reserved storages, the easier it is to select the bingo card 300 or lotto card 320, which has a large number of digits (number of squares). The configuration may be such that 320 is easily selected. Further, in the bingo card 300 or the lottery card 320, an effect in which only one square may be set may be set.

The symbols (numbers) arranged in each cell have a one-to-one correspondence with the main symbol of the variable display, but for example, cells corresponding to a plurality of symbols may be provided. In this case, for example, it may be based on the type of numbers such as "odd number" and "even number", or may have a range defined such as "1 to 5" and "6 to 9".

Although the squares that have been established (the squares in which "F" is displayed) are provided from the start of the special hold notice, the cells may be switched to the established squares at a predetermined timing after the start. For example, a configuration in which a cell that has not been established is switched to a cell that has been established when a predetermined effect (for example, reach display) occurs during the execution of the special hold notice or the number of reserved cells reaches the upper limit. good. In this case, it is preferable to read the stopped symbol of the game times being executed at the switching timing from the fluctuation pattern, and switch the cell corresponding to the symbol that is not stopped to the established cell. This is because even if the square is switched to a square that has already been established, if the square corresponds to the symbol that should have been stopped and displayed in the game round, the player feels lost.

In the non-correspondence process of step S4205 in the special hold notice processing at the time of stop, although there is no cell corresponding to the symbol of the symbol string stopped this time, it corresponds to the cell whose symbol stopped this time has already been switched to established. If so, the configuration may be such that the established square is switched (returned) to the non-established square, or whether or not to switch to the non-established square is determined by lottery or the like. By doing so, it becomes difficult to satisfy the special conditions, and it is possible to diversify the special production. In the case of a configuration in which whether or not to switch to a non-established square is determined by lottery, the probability may be different depending on the stopped symbol or the game state.

In the present embodiment, the special hold notice is configured not to be executed in duplicate, but may be configured to be executed in duplicate. For example, if the pending information acquired this time is a predetermined result (big hit result), duplication is allowed, but if it is not the case, duplication is restricted. The game result of the reserved information can be associated with the game result (the player can grasp that the result is a predetermined result by duplicating the special hold notice). The same can be said for other embodiments regarding the presence or absence of duplication of special hold notices.

In the present embodiment, the special effect A and the special effect B are configured to start at the start of the game round (process for starting fluctuation) which is started after the acquisition of the hold information that triggers the special effect A and B. , In relation to the stop timing of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 of the game round, the configuration may be started at least after the start of the game round until the first symbol is stopped (until the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped). Just do it. That is, the timing of presenting the special condition in the special hold notice is not limited to the start of the game round, and may be such that it is presented at least until the first symbol is stopped. Further, even after any of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped in the game round, if the changing symbol row remains, the special effects A and B are started during the game round (special conditions are set). It may be a configuration (presented). In these cases, the already stopped symbols may be reflected in the special effects A and B (if there is a cell corresponding to the stopped symbol, it is switched to the established cell), or it may not be reflected. good. However, since the special effects A and B can be fully enjoyed as the number of remaining stopped symbol species increases in the game round, the configuration is such that at least the first symbol is stopped as described above. Is preferable.

<9th embodiment>
In the eighth embodiment described above, the special hold notice is used as an opportunity to reflect the production of the game times other than the game times related to the hold information that triggered the special hold information in the special conditions in the special hold notice. In the form, not only the production of the game times, but also the information related to the hold information other than the hold information that triggered the special hold notice is reflected in the special condition.

As shown in FIG. 71 (a), in the special effect A, any one of the reserved images P1 to P5 is arranged in each cell. Then, if the hold image related to the hold information acquired during the execution of the special hold notice is the hold image corresponding to the bingo card, that square is regarded as the established square. If the rows of established squares are aligned and Bingo is established, the corresponding benefits will be granted.

For example, in FIG. 71 (a), it is assumed that the fourth hold image P4 (D) of the first unit hold display area Ga1 is the target of the special hold notice (in the present embodiment, the execution trigger of the special hold notice). Is not limited to the second reserved image P2). The bingo card 300 contains, for example, a second holding image P2 (B), a third holding image P3 (C), a fourth holding image P4 (D), and a fifth holding image P5 (E). Each is arranged. The explanation unit 310 explains about the special hold notice that establishes the special condition (BINGO) in the hold image.

As shown in FIG. 71 (b), the hold image related to the hold information that triggers the execution of the special hold notice is the fourth hold image P4 (D), and the hold information of the game times being executed. Since the holding image (holding image of the execution display area Gb) according to the above is the fifth holding image P5 (E), the fourth holding image P4 (D) in the bingo card 300 at the start of the special holding notice. And the cells of the fifth reserved image P5 (E) are the established cells. In this example, since the state before the condition is satisfied (reach state) at the start of the special hold notice, the explanation unit 310 will explain to that effect. In this embodiment, the special hold notice is started not at the start of the game round but at the acquisition of the hold information. Therefore, it is possible to reflect the information of the game times being executed (the image for holding related to the game times) in the situation where it is decided to execute the special hold notice.

Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (c), the hold image corresponding to the hold information acquired thereafter is displayed in the second unit hold display area Ga2, and the hold image is the second hold image P2 ( In the case of B), the square of the second holding image P2 (B) in the bingo card 300 is changed to the established square. As a result, in the case of this example, it becomes BINGO when all the established squares are prepared, and the notification that the special condition is satisfied and the privilege based on the establishment are given (notified by the explanation unit 310). ).

By doing so, it is possible to give the enjoyment of acquiring the hold information after the start of the special hold notice. At the start of the special hold notice, the image for hold related to the already acquired hold information is reflected in the special conditions (for hold information related to the hold information that has already been acquired and is before the target of the pass / fail judgment). It may be configured (the mass corresponding to the image or the reserved information that has been acquired and is the target of the pass / fail judgment and corresponds to the reserved image related to the running game times is the established mass), and it may be an opportunity for a special hold notice. The hold image related to the hold information that has become the target may or may not be the target. By doing so, the more the reserved information stored at the start of the special reserved notice, the easier it is for the special condition to be satisfied, and the significance of storing a large amount of reserved information during the game can be enhanced.

The processing in this case will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 72.

The processes of steps S4501 to S4504 are executed in the same manner as in steps S3901 to S3904 in the hold control command correspondence process of FIG. 64. Then, in the special hold notice setting process of step S4505, a process of determining whether or not to execute the special hold notice is performed, and when the special hold notice is executed, the type of the bingo card 300 in which the hold image is arranged in each cell is selected. The process of determining is performed, and the information is output to the display control device 212.

The type and arrangement of the hold image of each cell in the Bingo card 300 may be determined by lottery or the like, or may be determined in relation to the hold image related to the acquired hold information. If it is easy to establish the special condition (BINGO), the arrangement of each cell may be determined so that the reserved image related to the acquired pending information is arranged as much as possible, and the special condition (BINGO) is satisfied. If it is difficult to make it difficult, the arrangement of each cell may be determined so that the reserved image related to the acquired reserved information is not arranged as much as possible.

Further, the type and arrangement of the holding images of each square may be changed depending on the game state. For example, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10, a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of winning or losing lottery is relatively high or low are set as a game state, and the high probability mode is a big hit result. Since the probability of becoming a hold image is high, the type of hold image selected is a hold image (such as the first hold image P1 (A) or the second hold image P2 (B)) that is likely to result in a big hit. It is thought that it will be easier to select, and conversely, the low probability mode has a lower probability of producing a jackpot result, so the type of reserved image selected is a reserved image that is unlikely to result in a jackpot (fifth). It is considered that the holding image P5 (E), the fourth holding image P4 (D), etc.) can be easily selected. Therefore, if the type and arrangement of the hold images to be placed on the Bingo card 300 are determined according to these modes, the ease / difficulty of establishing the special conditions will be adjusted to some extent on the gaming machine side at the start of the special hold notice. can do.

Further, if the holding image that is easy to be selected is arranged in the square that easily contributes to the establishment of the special condition such as the central square of the bingo card 300, the special condition is easily satisfied and the holding image that is difficult to be selected is difficult to be selected. If the configuration is such that the above are arranged, it becomes difficult for the special conditions to be satisfied. In this way, the probability that the special condition is satisfied may be changed depending on the position of the squares to be arranged.

The process of step S4506 is the same as the process of step S3906. If the command received from the main control device 81 in step S4501 is not a hold command, it is determined in the process of step S4507 whether or not it is a shift command in the same manner as the process of step S3907, and if it is a shift command. In the same manner as in the processes of steps S3908 and S3911, a process of reducing the number of secondary reserved storage SNs is performed in step S4508, and a shift process is performed in step S4509. After the hold increase process in step S4506 or the shift process in step S4509 is executed, the hold determination process is executed in step S4510, and then the command corresponding process ends. In the hold determination process of step S4510, it is determined whether or not there is a cell corresponding to the hold image related to the increased / decreased hold information, and if the corresponding cell exists, a process of setting it as an established cell is performed. ..

In step S4510, if the hold image related to the reduced hold information (the hold image displayed in the execution display area Gb before the reduction) corresponds to the established mass, the hold information It may be configured to continue as a state in which it is a established mass even if it is digested, or it may be configured to return the established mass in which the reserved information has been digested to the mass in the original state which is not the established mass. In the former case, it becomes easier to establish special conditions, and the game of the special hold notice itself becomes easier to understand, so even beginners who are not accustomed to the game can fully enjoy the game of this special hold notice. Become. Also, in the latter case, not only will it be possible to immerse yourself in the game by making it difficult for the special conditions to be established, but also new conditions will be established before the established squares are no longer established. It is conceivable to continue firing the game ball so that the hold information is acquired, and so-called stop hitting can be suppressed.

In particular, when the configuration of the present embodiment is applied to a gaming machine provided with a priority means for first determining the granting of the reserved information acquired later and performing the game round, as in the seventh embodiment, the holding notice is triggered. It is possible to more effectively utilize the period until the game result related to the pending information is notified. That is, it is considered that the player who grasps that the hold information having a high expectation of big hit exists by the hold notice wants the game times related to the hold information to be performed as soon as possible. Therefore, in the case of the configuration provided with the priority means as described above, if the hold information is further acquired while the hold notice is being executed, the game times related to the hold notice may be postponed. , Can be a motivation for not wanting to get more pending information. Therefore, as described above, if the hold information acquired later in the special hold notice is also reflected in the success or failure of the special conditions, it is possible to make it more meaningful to acquire the hold information, so-called stoppage. Can be more preferably suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the hold image is applied to the Bingo game (special effect A), but points are given according to the type of the hold image during the special hold notice, and the privilege is given according to the points. It may be configured to be. For example, if the 5th holding image P5 has more points than the 1st holding image P1, and the lower the jackpot expectation, the higher the points given, it will be an opportunity for a special holding notice. Even if the hold image related to the hold information other than the hold information that has become has a low jackpot expectation, it can give joy (a lot of points are given) different from the jackpot result, and the attention level. Can be enhanced in a well-balanced manner. The points based on the hold image may be given by lottery or the like, and the points may be carried over even after the end of the special hold notice.

In the hold display setting process (step S4503) of the hold control command correspondence process (FIG. 72), the hold image may be determined by lottery or the like regardless of whether or not the special hold notice is executed. The holding image of each square in the special holding notice may be referred to to determine the holding image this time, or both may be used properly depending on the conditions such as the game state.

In the above embodiment, the configuration relating to the change of the reserved image shown in the other embodiment may be applied. That is, when the holding image changes at a predetermined timing, if there is a square corresponding to the holding image after the change, the square is switched to the established square. In this way, it is possible to preferably relate the effect using each cell and the hold image in the present embodiment to the effect related to the change of the hold image in the other embodiment. Then, not only the game that is one-to-one associated with the hold information that the game result of the hold information corresponding to the hold image is predicted by changing the hold image, but also the hold image after the change is displayed. It is possible to perform multi-stage games such as giving benefits by using it for other effects (special hold notice in this embodiment), and the game result of the hold information corresponding to the changed hold image is the game. It is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged, even if it is unfavorable to the player.

<10th Embodiment>
In the ninth embodiment, the hold image is reflected in the special condition as the information related to the hold information other than the hold information that triggered the special hold notice, but in the present embodiment, the hold information being executed is used. The configuration is such that the number is reflected in the special conditions.

As shown in FIG. 73 (a), numbers 1 to 4 are arranged on the bingo card 300. Then, for example, if the number of hold information at the start of the special hold notice is "2", the square in which "2" is arranged is regarded as the established square. In this case, if the hold information is not added by the game times related to the hold information that triggered the special hold notice, the number of hold information changes from "2" to "1" above. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), if the reserved information is not added, the cell of "1" is also the established cell in addition to the cell of "2". If the hold information is added during the execution of the special hold notice (the ball enters the operating ports 33 and 34) and the number of hold information becomes "3" or "4", the number corresponds to that number. Let the squares to be established be the established squares. In FIG. 73 (c), after the hold information becomes one (from the state of FIG. 73 (b)), two more hold information is added, the number of hold information becomes "3", and the corresponding cell is It shows that BINGO has been established by changing to the established square.

By doing so, it is possible to entertain the special hold notice with a simple configuration such as increasing or decreasing the number of hold information during the execution of the special hold notice. Then, as described above, it is also meaningful to add the hold information after the start of the special hold notice, and the degree of attention to the game during the special hold notice can be suitably increased.

Further, since the number of the reserved information changes due to the shift of the reserved information (digestion of the game times), even if the reserved information is not added after the special reserved notice is started (operation port 33, Even if the ball does not enter the 34), the special condition can be satisfied. That is, for example, when the number of hold information at the start of the special hold notice is "3", "3", "2", and "1" are lined up in any column of each cell of the bingo card 300. If it is a column, the special condition is satisfied if the hold information is not added after the start of the special hold notice. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event that makes the player frustrated because the ball does not easily enter the operating ports 33 and 34, and the special condition is already satisfied at the start. Compared with the effect (for example, the special effects A3 and B3 in the eighth embodiment), the special condition is satisfied while it is confirmed that the special condition is satisfied (provided that the reserved information is not added). It will be possible to entertain the way you do it.

In addition, the larger the number of hold information at the start of the special hold notice, the easier it is for the special condition to be satisfied (for example, "4", which is the upper limit of storage of hold information, is placed in a plurality of cells, or "4" is bingo. It may be configured (placed in the central square of the card 300). By doing so, it is possible to motivate to store as much hold information as possible before the start of the special hold notice, and it can also be a motivation to add hold information even after the start.

As described above, in the configuration in which the hold information acquired after the start of the special hold notice is reflected in the special conditions, an opportunity to acquire the hold information (ball entry into the operating ports 33 and 34) exceeding the storage upper limit of the hold information has occurred. In this case, the reserved information may not be acquired, but the occurrence of the acquisition opportunity may be reflected in the special conditions. In this case, the bingo card 300 is arranged with numbers "5", "6" ,,, which exceed the storage conditions.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 74, in the winning process for the operating port on the main control device 81 side, the processes of steps S4601 to S4608 are performed in the same manner as the processes of steps S201 to S208. Then, if it is determined in step S4603 that the reserved storage number N is "4" or more, the process proceeds to step S4609. In step S4609, a process of setting an upper limit command indicating that an opportunity to acquire pending information exceeding the storage upper limit has occurred as a transmission target to the effect control device 82 is executed. After executing the process of step S4609, the process proceeds to the process for the lower working port of step S4607.

If the winnings for the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are duplicated, a plurality of the above upper limit commands may be set, or one upper limit command may include the duplicated information. May be good. The former configuration is preferable from the viewpoint of simplifying the processing configuration, and the latter configuration is preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing an increase in the number of command inputs / outputs.

As the processing on the effect control device 82 side, in the holding control command correspondence processing of FIG. 75, the processing when the holding command is received (steps S4701 to 4706 which are the same processing as steps S4501 to S4506) and the shift command are used. In addition to the processing when received (step S4707 to step S4709 which is the same processing as step S4507 to step S4509), if the command received from the main controller 81 side is not a hold command or a shift command, step S4710 Judges whether or not it is the above upper limit command. In the case of the upper limit command, in step S4711, as a process for reflecting the information in which the acquisition trigger of the hold information exceeding the storage upper limit occurs in the special hold notice, for example, the number of minutes exceeding the storage upper limit is used. The process of adding "1" to the counter for storage is executed. It is assumed that this counter is cleared to "0" in the shift process (step S4709).

Then, after any of the processes of step S4706, step S4709, and step S4711, as the hold determination process in step S4712, in addition to the hold image and the number of holds, the presence or absence of cells exceeding the upper limit of storage is determined. At the same time as determining, if they exist, the process of changing to the established square is executed.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the interest from being extremely reduced due to the fact that the hold information is not acquired in the configuration in which the effect is performed using the information related to the hold information other than the hold information that triggered the special hold notice. It becomes possible to do.

As a general gaming machine, for example, in the case of a configuration in which a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the entry into the operating ports 33 and 34 and a prize ball is given based on the entry, the pending information for the winning / failing lottery. In the situation where is the upper limit of memory, the winning / failing lottery is not performed based on the entry into the operating ports 33 and 34, and only the prize ball is obtained. In this case, if there are many prize balls based on the balls entering the operating openings 33 and 34, it is considered that there is not a little merit in allowing the balls to enter these operating openings 33 and 34 even if the winning / failing lottery is not performed. However, there are few prize balls based on the entry into the operating ports 33 and 34, the number of prize balls is the same as the number of entry balls (one prize ball for one entry ball), and there is no prize ball. In the case of the configuration, the merit of entering the ball into the operating ports 33 and 34 in the situation where the memory is the upper limit may be extremely reduced. On the other hand, it may not be preferable to increase the number of prize balls or the upper limit of the memory in order to manage the ball ejection rate of the gaming machine. Therefore, as described above, if the configuration is such that a privilege (image data, game item, etc.) that is not directly related to the profit such as a prize ball is easily given based on the ball entering the ball exceeding the upper limit of the memory. It is possible to make the player feel the merit even if the ball enters the ball exceeding the upper limit of the memory.

<11th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, in the special hold notice using the time display image Gp or the like described in the first embodiment or the like, the privilege based on the establishment of the special condition is given by the change of the hold image regarding the target hold information. Instead, the item A as shown in the sixth embodiment is given. Then, the special hold notice is set on the main control device 81 side. The configuration will be described below.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a confirmation process of the hold notice in the present embodiment. As described above, the hold notice confirmation process is a process performed as one of the winning processes (step S206) for the operating port in the main control device 81, and is activated when the hold information is acquired. It is a process.

In the confirmation process of the hold notice in the present embodiment, similarly to the above steps S1001 to S1009, in the process of steps S4801 to S4809, the hold information acquired this time is determined to be correct or not, and the hold information is changed to the pass / fail lottery mode. Perform processing. After executing the processes of step S4807 and step S4809, or when it is determined in step S4808 that the result is out of order, the process proceeds to step S4810.

In step S4810, the main side special hold notice setting process is executed. This process will be described in detail later, but the special hold notice is set on the main control device 81 side by the process. Then, in step S4811, the hold command setting process is executed, and the confirmation process for the hold notice is completed.

Next, the main side special hold notice setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 77.

In step S4901, the process of grasping the pending information is executed. In this process, not only the current hold information but also other hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 232 is grasped. Specifically, as in the process of grasping the hold information on the effect control device 82 side of FIG. 23, first, among the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 232, whether or not there is unconfirmed hold information is determined. judge. If there is unconfirmed pending information, the process of grasping the information for determining whether or not the pending information is correct (big hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2) and information about the fluctuation display time (reach random number counter C3, variable type counter CS) is performed. conduct. The grasped contents may be temporarily stored in the register of the MPU 202, or may be stored in the holding information confirmation area provided in the RAM 204. As an area for confirming these registers and hold information, it is preferable to have a configuration in which each hold information in the hold ball storage area 232 can be stored separately. Then, the grasping process is repeated until the unconfirmed pending information exists, and the grasping process is terminated when the unconfirmed pending information disappears.

After executing the hold information grasping process in step S4901, in step S4902, it is determined whether or not any of the jackpot results exists in the hold information to be granted judgment prior to the current hold information. judge. If any of the jackpot results exists, it is assumed that the special hold notice is not executed based on the hold information acquired this time, and the main side special hold notice setting process is terminated. If any of the jackpot results does not exist, the process proceeds to step S4903.

In step S4903, it is confirmed whether or not the hold notice execution flag is stored. This hold notice execution flag is a flag for the MPU 202 to grasp that the special hold notice has been executed by the processing on the main control device 81 side, and is a flag stored in a later step S4914. .. If the hold notice execution flag is stored, the main side special hold notice setting process is terminated as it is. That is, the special hold notice set on the main control device 81 side is not executed in duplicate.

If it is determined in step S4903 that the hold notice execution flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S4904. In step S4904, it is determined whether or not the hold information acquired this time is one of the jackpot results. If it is any of the big hit results, the special hold notice lottery process for big hits is executed in step S4905, and if it is a miss result, the special hold notice lottery process for loss is executed in step S4906. .. As for the winning probability in these lottery processes, in the present embodiment, the one for big hits is won at 70%, and the one for losing is won at 1%. In the lottery process for losing, the winning probability is higher when the reach random number counter C3 corresponds to the reach occurrence among the pending information grasped in step S4901 than when it is not. It may be set.

Further, in the lottery process of step S4905 and step S4906, when it is won to execute the special hold notice, it is determined whether or not the special condition is satisfied in this special hold notice. Specifically, it is determined whether or not to grant the item A. In the present embodiment, the probability of establishing the special condition is 90% in the special hold notice at the time of a big hit and 50% in the special hold notice at the time of a miss. It should be noted that, at the time of deviation, the case where the reach random number counter C3 corresponds to the occurrence of reach as described above may be set so that the probability of establishment of the special condition is higher than the case where it does not. .. In these configurations, when the special condition is satisfied, the establishment flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204, and when the special condition is not satisfied, the establishment flag is not stored, so that the success or failure of the special condition is stored. You should do it.

After executing the process of step S4905 or step S4906, it is determined in step S4907 whether or not to execute the special hold notice based on the process results of these steps S4905 and S4906. If it is determined that the special hold notice is not executed, that is, if the lottery process is not won, the main side special hold notice setting process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the special hold notice is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S4908.

By the way, in the present embodiment, when there is no hold information other than the hold information acquired this time, that is, when the hold information acquired this time triggers the start of the game turn in the game turn control process (FIG. 9) immediately after. , It is determined in step S4907 that the special hold notice is not executed. Therefore, even if the winner is won in the lottery process of step S4905 or step S4906, the special hold notice may not be given. In addition, for example, when the hold information to be grasped does not exist in step S4901, it is possible to configure the configuration so that the subsequent processing is not performed (even the processing such as the execution lottery of the special hold notice is not performed). By doing so, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration. On the other hand, if the same processing is performed regardless of the number of pending information as in the present embodiment, for example, the timing of the production occurrence may be different depending on the presence or absence of the processing, and as a result, the special suspension notice is given. It is possible to avoid an event such as the presence or absence of occurrence being grasped.

In step S4908, the process of grasping the number of pending items excluding the pending information acquired this time is executed. In this process, the value of the current hold storage number N is acquired, and by subtracting 1 from the hold storage number N, the number of hold items excluding the hold information acquired this time is grasped. As described above, the hold storage number N is in a state in which the number of hold information acquired this time in the process of the immediately preceding step S204 is added. In the following step S4909, a process of acquiring the set time table corresponding to the number of reserved pieces from the ROM 203 is executed. In the set time table, the set time input to the timer counter T on the effect control device 82 side when the special hold notice is executed and the variation display time of each game time during the execution of the special hold notice are one-to-one. Multiple patterns are defined so as to have a relationship of. Further, a table including the plurality of patterns is set according to the number of reserved items.

Then, in step S4910, a counter for the set time is acquired from the RAM 204, and the counter and the set time table acquired in the above step S4909 are used to determine the set time and its pattern used for this special hold notice. Execute the process to determine.

The counter for the set time is, for example, a loop counter that can be updated by 1 at a predetermined cycle from 0 to 999. It is also possible to use another counter (for example, a variable type counter CS or an electric accessory opening counter C4) as this counter. If the counters used in this way are shared, the storage area can be reduced. Further, if the counter included in the hold information is used as the shared counter, such as the variable type counter CS, since this counter is grasped in step S4901, a process to be newly acquired is set. There is no need to do this, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

78 and 79 are explanatory views showing a set time table in the present embodiment.

For example, when the number of reserved pieces is one, as shown in the set time table shown in FIG. 78 (a), the set times are 50 sec, 55 sec, 60 sec, ... 80 sec, and a plurality of set times in 5 sec increments. The patterns are set, and the address information A (1) to A (8) are set in a one-to-one correspondence with them. Then, in step S4910, a pattern of 1 is randomly selected from these set time patterns according to the counter for the set time to be acquired, and the corresponding address information is stored in the address information storage area of the RAM 204. Execute. The setting time of this selected pattern is set as a value input to the timer counter T in the special hold notice.

Incidentally, a value different from this set time may be input to the timer counter T, which will be described later. Further, in this selected pattern, the pattern of the variation display time of the game times for each of the hold information during the special hold notice is set, including the hold information acquired this time. Further, when the special hold notice is executed, one of Super Reach A to C is set to be executed for the hold information acquired this time.

As described above, the variation display time of each game is normally set according to the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter CS (see FIG. 13). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the variation display time during execution of the special hold notice is set with reference to the set time table regardless of the reach random number counter C3 or the variation type counter CS. Therefore, the method of setting the variable display time differs depending on whether or not the special hold notice is being executed.

For example, when a set time of 55 sec (A (2)) is selected, a numerical value corresponding to 55 sec is input to the timer counter T in the special hold notice. Then, the variation display time of the game times for the hold information acquired this time is set to 45 sec (super reach A), and the variation display time of the game times for the hold information immediately before the hold information acquired this time is 10 sec (reach). Set as non-occurrence). When a set time of 65 sec (A (4) or A (5)) is selected, a numerical value corresponding to 65 sec is input to the timer counter T in the special hold notice. If the selected pattern is the address A (4), the variable display time for the hold information acquired this time is set to 45 sec (super reach A), and if the selected pattern is the address A (5), the time is acquired this time. The variable display time for the hold information is 60 sec (super reach B). If the hold information acquired this time is 45 sec, the previous hold information is 20 sec (normal reach), and if the hold information acquired this time is 60 sec, the previous hold information is 5 sec (reach non-occurrence). ..

When the number of holdings is 2, as shown in FIG. 78B, the set time is 55 sec, 60 sec, ... 100 sec, and a plurality of set time patterns are set in 5 sec increments. , The address information B (1) to B (20) is set in a one-to-one correspondence with them. For example, when 55 sec (B (1)) is selected as the set time, the variable display time related to the hold information acquired this time is set as 45 sec (super reach A), and the hold information immediately before that is 5 sec (reach). It is set as non-occurrence), and the hold information two before is also set as 5 sec (reach non-occurrence).

Further, when the number of reserved pieces is 3, as shown in FIG. 79, the set times are 65 sec, 70 sec, ... 120 sec, and a plurality of set time patterns are set in 5 sec increments. Address information C (1) to C (39) are set in a one-to-one correspondence with them. For example, if 120 sec (C (39)) is set as the set time, the variable display time related to the hold information acquired this time is set as 60 sec (super reach C), and the variable display time related to the three hold information before that is set. Are all set as 20 sec (normal reach).

Here, in each set time table in the present embodiment, with respect to the hold information that is digested before the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice, the larger the number of the hold information, the easier it is for reach to occur. ing. Specifically, the hold information whose variable display time is set to 15 sec or more corresponds to the occurrence of reach (see FIG. 13), and when the number of holds is one, the special hold notice is applied. The ratio of reach occurring in the game times immediately before the reserved information is 4/8, which is 50.0% of the total. Further, when the number of reserved pieces is 2, the ratio of reach occurring in the game times immediately before the reserved information subject to the special hold notice is 14/20, which is 70% of the total. When the number of holdings is 3, the ratio of reach occurring in the game times immediately before the holding information subject to the special holding notice is 32/39, which is about 82.1% of the total. Is. In this way, it can be said that the situation in which reach is likely to occur is a situation in which the frequent occurrence of off-reach may cause fatigue. In that respect, by giving the special hold notice, it is possible to give another enjoyment such as the item A or the like being given, and it is possible to reduce the above-mentioned fatigue. Not only that, it is also possible to make the player predict that the big hit expectation is high because the special hold notice is executed and the missed reach occurs frequently, and it is possible to entertain it. Therefore, by giving a special hold notice and frequently reaching the game in the previous game, it is possible to change the situation that would otherwise cause fatigue to a situation that arouses a sense of expectation. It is possible to increase the degree of attention.

Further, in each set time table in the present embodiment, the larger the number of holds at the time of setting the special hold notice, the easier it is to select the one having a longer variable display time for the hold information acquired this time. Specifically, either 45 sec (super reach A) or 60 sec (super reach B) is selected as the variable display time for the reserved information acquired this time. When the number of reserved pieces is 1, the ratio of selecting 60 sec on the long side as the variable display time for the held information acquired this time is 3/8, which is 37.5% of the total. When the number of reserved pieces is 2, the ratio of selecting 60 sec on the long side as the variable display time for the held information acquired this time is 10/20, which is 50.0% of the total. When the number of hold items is 3, the ratio of selecting 60 sec on the long side as the variable display time for the hold information acquired this time is 21/39, which is about 53.8% of the total. In this way, by setting the variable display time selected for the pending information acquired this time to be longer as the number of pending items increases, the variable display time related to the reserved information subject to the special pending notice becomes longer. , You can fully enjoy the game such as whether or not the item A is finally given.

Returning to the description of the main side special hold notice setting process, after determining the pattern of the set time to be used for the special hold notice this time in step S4910, the process proceeds to step S4911. In step S4911, it is determined whether or not the special condition is satisfied in this special hold notice. In such a determination, it is grasped whether or not it is decided in step S4905 or step S4906 to establish the special condition (the presence or absence of the establishment flag is confirmed). If the special condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S4912, and a process of adding a predetermined predetermined time (for example, 5 sec) to the set time (for example, 60 sec) determined in step S4910 is executed. As a result, the value input to the timer counter T on the effect control device 82 side becomes a value corresponding to a time longer than the set time by a predetermined time (the special condition is no longer satisfied).

When it is determined in step S4911 that the special condition is satisfied, or after the process of step S4912 is executed, the hold acquired this time by the hold number counter HK provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 in step S4913. The process of inputting the value of the current pending number (held storage number N) including the information is executed. The hold quantity counter HK is a counter for the MPU 202 to grasp the game times related to the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice. Then, in step S4914, a process of storing the hold notice execution flag in the various flag storage areas 234 is performed, and then the main side special hold notice setting process is terminated. By performing this process, an affirmative determination will be made in the above step S4903 from the next time onward.

Next, the hold command setting process (step S4811) in the hold command confirmation process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S5001, the process of grasping the information regarding the game result is executed for the hold information acquired this time. In step S5002, the process of grasping the information regarding the variable display time is executed for the hold information acquired this time. These processes are the same as the processes of steps S1101 and S1102.

In the following step S5003, it is determined whether or not the hold notice execution flag is stored. If it is stored, that is, if the special hold notice is set by the main side special hold notice setting process, the process proceeds to step S5004. In step S5004, the process of grasping the set time is executed. In such a process, a process of grasping the set time for the current special hold notice determined in step S4910 or the set time after adding the predetermined time in step S4912 is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S5003, that is, if the special hold notice is not set on the main control device 81 side, or after the process of step S5004 is executed, the process proceeds to step S5005. In step S5005, the hold command is set. In this process, in addition to the information grasped in steps S5001 and S5002, when the set time (or the set time after addition) is grasped in step S5004, the information of that time and the information of that time, and If the hold information acquired this time is the hold information that triggered the special hold notice, the hold command is set so that the information is included in the hold command. After that, this setting process ends.

Next, as the process on the effect control device 82 side, the hold control command correspondence process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the hold control command correspondence process in the present embodiment, it is determined in step S5101 whether or not the hold command is received in the same manner as in step S1201, and if so, the process proceeds to step S5102. In step S5102, as in step S1202, the addition process of the secondary reserved storage number SN is performed. In step S5103, the hold display setting process is executed in the same manner as in step S1203.

In the following step S5104, unlike the first embodiment and the like, it is determined whether or not the special hold notice is being executed. If it is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S5105, and it is determined whether or not the execution of the special hold notice has been decided on the main control device 81 side. In such a process, it is determined whether or not the hold command received this time includes information for which the main control device 81 has decided to execute the special hold notice. If it has not been determined on the main control device 81 side, the process proceeds to step S5106 to execute the special hold notice setting process. This process is the same as the process of step S1205. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5105 that the determination has been made on the main control device 81 side, the process proceeds to step S5107 to execute the setting process of the special hold notice determined on the main side. This process will be described in detail later.

When it is determined in step S5104 that the special hold notice is being executed, or after any of the processes of steps S5106 and S5107 is executed, the hold increase process is executed in step S5108, and then the corresponding process. To finish. The process of step S5108 is the same as the process of step S1208. If a negative determination is made in step S5101, the corresponding processing is terminated after the processing of steps S5109 to S5113 is executed in the same manner as the processing of steps S1209 to S1213.

The setting process of the special hold notice determined on the main side of step S5107 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In this setting process, first, in step S5201, the process of grasping the information of the set time (or the information of the set time after addition) in the special hold notice included in the hold command received this time is executed. Then, in step S5202, the process of inputting the numerical information corresponding to the grasped set time information to the timer counter T is executed. In the following step S5203, a process of setting the special hold notice command as an output target to the display control device 212 is executed, and the present setting process is terminated.

That is, in the present embodiment, the execution of the special hold notice may be decided on the main control device 81 side, or the execution of the special hold notice may be decided on the effect control device 82 side. When the execution of the special hold notice is determined on the effect control device 82 side, the success or failure of the special condition is determined on the main control device 81 side as described above, so that the timer counter T is determined accordingly. The success or failure of the special condition in the special hold notice is set only by inputting.

In the present embodiment, the special hold notice is configured to be started at the time of digesting the next hold information after the hold command is acquired (at the start of the next game round). Therefore, the numerical value input to the timer counter T and the fluctuation display time of each game after the start of the special hold notice are completely linked.

By the way, when it is set on the effect control device 82 side, various subtraction patterns such as subtraction at the time of shift can be set, but when it is determined on the main control device 81 side, it is set on the main control device 81 side. The special hold notice is executed using the set time as it is. In that respect, the processing configuration has been simplified.

However, even in the special hold notice determined on the main control device 81 side, a shift time subtraction, a specific timing subtraction, or the like may be set. In this case, for example, when the set time determined on the main controller 81 side is 60 sec, if 10 sec is subtracted at the time of shift, the numerical information input to the timer counter T is added by 10 sec to the set time of 60 sec to be 70 sec. It is preferable to add the subtracted values of the shift subtraction and the specific timing subtraction in advance and input them to the timer counter T, such as by using the corresponding numerical information. In this case, it is preferable that the shift subtraction lottery process is always won, or the subtraction is subtracted without going through the lottery process, and the pre-added amount is always subtracted. In this way, it becomes difficult for the player to understand whether the special hold notice is determined by the main control device 81 or the special hold notice determined by the effect control device 82, and the special hold notice is determined. It is possible to make it difficult to predict whether or not the success or failure of the special condition is predetermined, that is, whether or not the special condition is set without considering the success or failure of the special condition.

Next, the variable display time setting process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the variation display time setting process is a process (step S608) executed in the variation start process at the start of one game round as the process on the main control device 881 side.

In the present embodiment, first, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the hold notice execution flag is stored. If the special hold notice is not stored and at least the special hold notice determined on the main controller 81 side is not executed, the process of steps S701 to S704 is performed in steps S5302 to S5305. Similarly, the variable display time setting process is performed as usual. That is, the process of setting the variation display time is executed based on the game result, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5301 that the hold notice execution flag is stored, the change display time setting process at the time of hold notice execution is executed in step S5306. Then, the time set in the setting process is set in step S5305, and the variable display time setting process ends.

The process of setting the variable display time at the time of executing the hold notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 84.

First, in step S5401, the read processing of the set time pattern this time is executed. Specifically, from the set time tables of FIGS. 78 and 79, a process of reading the address information (A, B, C) of the set time pattern determined in step S4910 from the address information storage area of the RAM 204 is executed. .. In the following step S5402, a process of grasping the hold quantity counter HK is executed. Then, in step S5403, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the set time pattern grasped in step S5401 and the hold number counter HK grasped in step S5402 is grasped as the fluctuation display time of the current game times. do.

Specifically, for example, assuming that the address information of the set time pattern read in step S5401 is A (3), the set time is 60 sec, and the current hold quantity counter HK is 2, the fluctuation display time of this time is specified. Is set to 15 sec. In this setting, the value of the variable type counter CS for the current hold information is not referred to. Further, if the variable display time is 15 sec, it is the variable display time corresponding to the occurrence of the normal reach B. In this case, the game times corresponding to the occurrence of the normal reach B are set regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Will be.

In the following step S5404, a process of subtracting 1 from the hold quantity counter HK is executed. Then, in step S5405, it is determined whether or not the hold quantity counter HK after subtraction is 0, and if it is 0, the hold notice execution flag is cleared in step S5406, and if it is not 0, this setting process is performed as it is. To finish.

The difference in the method of setting the variable display time due to the different triggers for executing the special hold notice will be described with reference to the table of FIG. 85.

That is, when it is determined by the effect control device 82 to execute the special hold notice, the fluctuation display time is determined based on the counter at the time of acquisition of the hold information such as the fluctuation type counter CS and the fluctuation display time table as usual. .. When setting the special condition in the special hold notice determined on the effect control device 82 side, the success or failure may be determined by referring to the variation display time on the game round side, or the variation display time is not referred to. In some cases, the success or failure of the game is decided, and the relationship between the special hold notice and the game times is shown to be low or high.

On the other hand, when it is determined by the main control device 81 to execute the special hold notice, the fluctuation display time of each game during that time is set based on the counter for the set time and the set time table. Then, when setting the special condition in the special hold notice in this case, the variable display time is not referred to, and the variable display time is set according to the success or failure of the special condition. By doing so, the special conditions in the special hold notice will be completely linked to the variable display time of each game, and if you want or do not want to satisfy the special conditions, you can produce as designed. It becomes possible to.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the execution time of the special hold notice and the game during the execution of the special hold notice are set by the configuration in which the main control device 81 decides to execute the special hold notice. It is possible to link the variable display time of the times with, and it is possible to intentionally adjust the success or failure of the special condition in the special hold notice.

Here, in the present embodiment, the main control device 81 side is configured to set the special hold notice, while the effect control device 82 side is also configured to set the special hold notice. Therefore, regardless of the variable display time of each game, the special condition may be set without considering the success or failure of the special condition, but instead, the success or failure of the special condition based on the pending information before digestion. In some cases, special conditions may be set based on the above. In this way, by providing both, it is possible to make adjustments so that inconvenience does not occur when the special condition is to be satisfied or not to be satisfied, while giving randomness to the success or failure of the special condition. Become.

As a configuration to set the special condition based on the success or failure of the special condition, after grasping the result of the judgment of whether or not the hold information that triggers the special hold notice is made, it is decided whether or not to establish the special condition accordingly. Based on the special conditions, the variable display time on the game round side is determined. That is, a special condition in which the probability of establishment may differ depending on the length of the variation display time on the game round side is determined based on the result of the hit / fail judgment of the game round, and the success or failure of the game round side is determined. It was configured to produce a production. By doing so, it is possible to relate the special condition associated with the length of the variable display time of the game round to the game result of the game round for the special hold notice. That is, even if the special condition in the special hold notice is associated with the game result, a contradiction may occur in relation to the variable display time of the game times, and conversely, even if it is associated with the variable display time. In some cases, a contradiction may occur in relation to the game result of the game. Then, in order to eliminate such an event, in each of the above embodiments, the effect control device 82 is configured to perform various adjustments on the effect. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to associate both the variable display time and the game result with the special condition without requiring such various adjustments, and to realize the special hold notice with a simpler configuration. Is possible.

The success or failure (set time) of the special condition is determined on the main control device 81 side, and based on this, the fluctuation display time during execution of the special hold notice is determined on the main control device 81 side. If the effect control device 82 determines the success or failure of the special condition and the main control device 81 side sets the variation display time on the game rotation side according to the special condition, the effect control device 82 controls the main control. It becomes necessary to output information about the success or failure of the special condition to the device 81. At present, the exchange of information between the main control device 81 and the effect control device 82 is configured only for one-sided output from the main control device 81 to the effect control device 82, but as described above, the effect control device 82 mainly exchanges information. In order to enable the output of information to the control device 81, it becomes necessary to provide a new connection path (cable or the like), which is not preferable from the viewpoint of simplifying the configuration. Further, when the main control device 81 is performing the pass / fail determination process particularly related to the interests of the player, information is input from other devices to the main control device 81 that makes such a determination related to the interests. With this configuration, it may be difficult to find an act of manipulating the result of the above-mentioned pass / fail determination process for an illegal purpose. Therefore, if the main control device 81 is configured to determine the success or failure of the special condition as described above, it is possible to obtain an excellent effect by executing the special hold notice while avoiding the occurrence of such inconvenience. It will be possible.

On the other hand, the effect control device 82 is configured to perform a process of setting special conditions without referring to the variation display time of the game times. By doing so, while further achieving the effect of causing randomness in the success or failure of the special condition, the setting of the special condition is shared among the control devices 81 and 82, so that the processing load is local. The increase can be suppressed.

In the main side special hold notice setting process, when setting a special condition, it is possible to set so that the special condition is satisfied, but it is also possible to set so that the special condition is not satisfied. did. By doing so, for example, even if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the reserved information is a wrong result and is not preferable for the player, the follow-up that the special condition is satisfied and the result is the wrong result. (Item A is given), and conversely, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the hold information is a big hit result and is a favorable result for the player, the big hit is not intentionally established. It is possible to make adjustments such as concentrating on.

In addition to / instead of setting the success or failure of the special condition according to the jackpot result / missed result as the game result, it is also possible to set the success or failure of the special condition according to the type of the jackpot result and the type of the missed result. good. As the type of jackpot result, for example, a special condition may be satisfied if it is a probabilistic jackpot result, but a special condition may not be satisfied if it is a normal jackpot result, or vice versa. In addition, as the type of jackpot result, a jackpot result with a different number of continuous rounds (for example, an 8-round jackpot result and a 16-round jackpot result, etc.) is set, and if the jackpot result is on the side with a large number of rounds, a special condition is satisfied. , If it is a big hit result on the side with a small number of rounds, the special condition may not be satisfied, or vice versa. If it is easy to establish special conditions in the case of a result that is advantageous to the player (in the above example, a probability variation jackpot result or a 16-round jackpot result), it is possible to further increase the attention to the special hold notice. However, as the opposite configuration, if it is difficult to establish a special condition in the case of a favorable result for the player, the depressed player can be followed by the establishment of the special condition (giving a privilege such as item A). It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to suppress the decrease in motivation for the game.

Furthermore, as a type of jackpot result, to an opening / closing execution mode in which the number of prize balls obtained is less than usual (for example, an opening / closing execution mode for two rounds or an opening / closing execution mode for opening / closing in a mode in which it is difficult to win a prize in the big winning opening 32a). As a result of the transition, the winning / fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode, or the support mode up to that point is maintained (so-called latent probability change result), and the above-mentioned prizes obtained. As a result of the ball shifting to the opening / closing execution mode with less than usual, the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode or maintains the support mode up to that point (so-called sudden). Probability change results) may be set, and the success or failure of special conditions may be set including these results. For example, by adding the above latent probability change result to the type of jackpot result, it is possible to add fun to predict whether or not the winning / fail lottery mode has shifted to the high probability mode, while the latent probability change result is determined by the success or failure of the special condition. Once it is known, the enjoyment may be wiped out. Therefore, in the case of the latent probability change result, if the special condition is not satisfied / difficult to be satisfied, it becomes possible to make it difficult to predict the transition of the winning / failing lottery mode from the special hold notice, and the game result is diversified. It is possible to achieve both the effect of improving the interest and the effect of improving the interest by giving a special hold notice. In addition, in the above-mentioned sudden probability change result, the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode shift to the side that is advantageous to the player, but the prize ball that can be obtained in the opening / closing execution mode itself that shifts to the jackpot result is small, so that the player It is expected that the next big hit result will be obtained as soon as possible. Therefore, if a privilege based on the establishment of special conditions is given (such as selecting item A) as a connecting effect until the next big hit result is obtained, it is possible to suppress the delay of the effect.

Furthermore, as a result of the deviation, in addition to the normal deviation result that does not shift to the open / close execution mode, a special deviation result that shifts to the open / close execution mode of only one round and does not shift to the game state (win / fail lottery mode and support mode) is set. Including these results, the configuration may be such that the success or failure of the special condition is set. In this case, if the opening / closing mode of the large winning opening 32a is the same as or the same as the above-mentioned latent probability change result, and the effect of the display screen G or the like after the opening / closing execution mode is the same or the same, the player can execute the opening / closing. There is more fun in predicting whether the game result that triggered the mode was a latent probability change result or a special out-of-order result. In such a configuration, for example, even if it is a latent probability change result or a special deviation result, the special condition is satisfied with a predetermined probability, and the probability that the special condition is satisfied in the latent probability change result and the special condition in the special deviation result are set. If the probability of being established is different (for example, the latent probability change result is higher), it is possible to predict whether the latent probability change result or the special deviation result is obtained from the success or failure of the special condition in the special hold notice. , It is possible to increase the number of branches of prediction and diversify the game.

In the configuration where the success or failure of the special condition differs depending on the type of the jackpot result as described above, the success or failure of the special condition may be set according to the presence or absence of the promotion effect in the production at the time of the big hit, during the big hit, and after the big hit. .. For example, even if the jackpot result is advantageous for the player (for example, the probability variation jackpot result or the 16-round jackpot result), the display screen G is notified as a disadvantageous jackpot result (normal jackpot result or 8-round jackpot result) when the jackpot is established. At the same time, it will be easier to establish special conditions in the special hold notice. After that, a promotion effect is generated as an effect during the jackpot, and it is notified that the jackpot result is advantageous for the player. By doing so, it is possible to expect that promotion effects will occur due to the establishment of special conditions, and even if the result is a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed. Can be done. On the contrary, the configuration may be such that the special condition is easily satisfied when the promotion effect does not occur. This is because it is considered that giving a privilege (item A, etc.) to a player may lead to raising the interest of the player rather than showing a promotion effect (promotion failure effect) that cannot be expected so much.

Instead of / in addition to the configuration in which the success / failure probability of the special condition is changed according to the type of the game result as described above, the configuration may be configured in which the execution probability of the special hold notice is changed according to the type of the game result. Specifically, if it is difficult to satisfy the special condition, the probability of occurrence of the special hold notice may be lowered, and if it is easy to meet the special condition, the special hold notice may occur. You may increase the probability. By doing so, in the first place, it is not necessary to bother to execute the special hold notice in the situation where the special condition is difficult to be satisfied (for example, the situation which is the result of the latent probability change), and the success rate of the special condition with respect to the execution rate of the special hold notice. Can be secured.

In the main side special hold notice setting process, the game result of the hold information that is not the target of the hit / fail judgment in the game round is grasped before the hit / miss judgment, and based on the result, the fluctuation display time of the subsequent game round is set. The configuration was decided. By doing so, it is possible to set the success or failure of the above special conditions on the main control device 81 side, and it is possible to realize diversification of the game production.

When the special hold notice is set in the main side special hold notice setting process and the set time is determined as the success or failure of the special condition, in the subsequent variable display time setting process, each game time is referred to with reference to the set time table. It was configured to determine the variable display time of. Normally, the variable display time is set based on the variable type counter CS, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable display time table acquired as hold information. If the variable type counter CS and the reach random number counter C3 are changed when the change is made, is the value of each counter CS or C3 changed based on the success or failure of the special condition as described above, or is there noise or something? It can be difficult to determine if it has been changed by fraudulent activity. Therefore, while keeping these counters CS and C3, the fluctuation display time set by changing the referenced table is changed, so that the fluctuation is avoided while avoiding the above-mentioned inconvenience. It is possible to preferably realize the change of the display time.

In the variable display time setting process (FIG. 83), the variable display time table selected differs depending on whether or not the special hold notice is being executed (normal variable display time table and set time). One of the tables is selected). By doing so, it is possible to realize the above-mentioned change in the variable display time with a very simple configuration.

In particular, since the variable display time can be referred to by the variable display time table and the set time table, the variable display time is determined at the start timing of the game at the latest regardless of whether or not the special hold notice is executed. There is. Therefore, the variable display time is not changed (extended or shortened) after the start of the game round, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load.

In each set time table, the variable display time of each game is pre-allocated including the hold information that triggered the special hold notice within the set time. By doing so, the variable display time of each game is determined at the start of the special hold notice, and the special hold notice is executed while avoiding the occurrence of inconveniences such as inconsistency in the success or failure of the special conditions in the special hold notice. The process of setting the variable display time for each game can be greatly simplified.

In the main side special hold notice setting process, if the hold information includes a jackpot result, the special hold notice is not executed. As a result, it is not necessary to set a special condition as a period including the jackpot result (open / close execution mode) in the special hold notice, and the configuration can be simplified. In addition, as described above, when the jackpot result is included, the special hold notice setting process on the main side does not set the special hold notice. On the other hand, in the effect control device 82, the special condition may be set and the special hold notice may be executed without considering the success or failure of the special condition. Therefore, even if the special condition is not satisfied in the special hold notice, after that. It is also possible to have a sense of expectation that the jackpot result is included.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above-described embodiment, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to other embodiments or variations thereof, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to other embodiments or variations thereof. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or a part or all of them may be applied in combination.

In the main side special hold notice setting process, the address information of the set time table corresponding to the set time of this time is stored, and the variable display time of each game is set by reading the address information in each game. However, it may be changed as follows. FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the special holding storage area 235 provided in the RAM 204 of this modification.

As shown in FIG. 86, the special hold storage area 235 corresponds to the first hold area RE1, the second hold area RE2, the third hold area RE3, and the fourth hold area RE4 of the hold ball storage area 232. 1 Hold area 235a, 2nd hold area 235b, 3rd hold area 235c, and 4th hold area 235d are provided. Then, when the set time in the special hold notice is determined in step S4910, the information of the variable display time allocated to each hold information in the set time table or the corresponding numerical information (dedicated random number) is dealt with. The process of storing in the holding areas 235a to 235d is performed. Then, in the process of setting the variable display time at the time of executing the hold notice, the information on the variable display time of the current game times is acquired from the special hold storage area 235. By doing so, it is possible to separately store the information on the fluctuation display time at the time of executing the special hold notice without changing the fluctuation type counter CS or the reach random number counter C3.

In particular, by using the present modification, the degree of freedom in the setting process of the variable display time is improved as compared with the configuration uniquely determined in the set time table. That is, for example, even when the special hold notice is executed, if the variable display time is changed (for example, when the change is made according to a change in the hold storage number N), the change is made. The values of the holding areas 235a to 235d may be changed. In this case, in order to be consistent with the special conditions in the special hold notice, the variable display time of the other special hold storage area 235 may be increased or decreased by that amount, or the information on which the variable display time has been changed may be displayed. It is preferable that the output is output to the effect control device 82 and adjusted on the effect control device 82 side.

In the above embodiment, even in the variable display time setting process at the time of executing the hold notice, the values of the variable type counter CS and the reach random number counter C3 may be once acquired from the hold ball storage area 232. By doing so, it is possible to avoid an event in which the variable type counter CS and the reach random number counter C3 have no meaning in being held and stored. As this configuration, for example, the values of the variable type counter CS and the reach random number counter C3 are acquired, and it is determined whether or not the values of these counters are equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 1000) exceeding the update upper limit value, and the hold execution flag is set. If is stored and less than a predetermined value, the variable display time at the time of executing the hold notice is set, and if the hold execution flag is stored but is more than the predetermined value, error processing is executed. .. By doing so, when the fluctuation type counter CS or the reach random number counter C3 at the time of acquiring the hold information has an abnormal value, it is possible to perform the corresponding processing.

As the set time table, the variable type counter CS and the reach random number counter C3 are uniquely associated with the set time, and the variable display time may be set for each number of reserved items. By doing so, it is not necessary to provide a new random number to determine the set time, and the storage capacity can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the production using the time display image Gp or the like in the first embodiment or the like has been described as an example as a special hold notice, but whether or not other conditions are satisfied is set as a special condition, and accordingly. Any configuration may be used as long as the variable display time is changed. For example, using the fact that the fluctuation display time and the reach display are related as the fluctuation pattern, the success or failure is determined with the special condition that the reach display occurs (continuously) a predetermined number of times, and the fluctuation display time is determined accordingly. It may be configured to set. Further, if the variable display time is long, a predetermined effect (character appearance, etc.) is likely to occur, and the success or failure is determined on the special condition that the predetermined effect occurs a predetermined number of times, and the variable display time is adjusted accordingly. It may be configured to set.

In the above embodiment, the item A is given based on the establishment of the special condition, but the given privilege is not limited to this and may be another privilege. For example, it may be a privilege related to the interests of the player so that a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out as a privilege, or it may be a rare image or the like. Further, as in the first embodiment or the like, the reserved image may be changed. In particular, in a configuration in which the reserved image changes, a special condition is set so as to change the reserved image for the reserved information that triggered the special reserved notice, specifically, the special reserved notice was triggered. It is advisable to set the variable display time of each game time by setting the target of the special condition up to the game time immediately before the reserved information. In this way, the significance of changing the hold image for the hold information that triggered the special hold notice is guaranteed.

As in the seventh embodiment, the hold information (hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit) that is the target of the hit / fail judgment preferentially regardless of the acquisition order of the hold information, and the postponement. In the configuration having the holding information (holding information stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit), the following may be used. For example, if the hold information that is the target of the hit / fail determination is preferentially acquired during the execution of the special hold notice, the timer subtraction process (timer management process, step S2203 in FIG. 35) may be stopped. good. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the contradiction of special conditions with a relatively simple configuration.

When the reserved information that is the target of the hit / fail judgment is preferentially acquired and the reserved information is a predetermined result (for example, a big hit result), the effect of forcibly satisfying the special condition (for example). For example, the effect of exploding the time display image Gp to make it "0:00") may be executed.

When the hold information that is the target of the hit / fail judgment is obtained with priority, the process of changing the address information of the set time pattern stored in correspondence with the increase of the hold information so as not to change the set time is performed. May be. For example, in a situation where the address A (8) is stored and 80 sec is set as the set time, when one pending information to be preferentially determined is acquired, the set time is held at 80 sec. The process of changing the stored address to B (11) to B (13) corresponding to the increase in the number of held items is executed. In this way, the set time is not changed, so that there is no contradiction in the special conditions.

When the reserved information that is the target of the pass / fail judgment is preferentially acquired, the reserved information that is the target of the special pending notice may be deviated. That is, for example, in a situation where three hold information is stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit and the third hold information is subject to the special hold notice, the second result display unit is used. When one hold information is acquired in the hold area Rb, the second hold information in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit may be shifted as the target of the special hold notice. By doing so, even if the address information of the set time pattern is not changed, the success or failure of the special condition does not change, and no contradiction occurs.

In the special hold notice, the end timing of the special condition, that is, the timing of setting the timer to "0:00" is not limited to the end of the fluctuation of the game round, and may be another timing during the game round. In this case, the set time in the set time table may be changed (subtracted / increased) according to the other timing.

In the present embodiment, the subtraction start timing of the timer subtraction process is the start time of the game round for the hold information that is first digested after the special hold notice is set, but the timing when the special hold notice is set or The timer subtraction process may be subtracted by a predetermined period from that timing, or the special hold notice itself may be started. In this case, in the main side special hold notice setting process of the main control device 81, a process of grasping the remaining variation display time of the game times currently being executed is added, and the remaining variation display is performed at the set time determined from the set time table. The configuration may be such that the time is added or the time for the predetermined period to be shifted is subtracted from the added time.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the following effects are set by using the configuration for changing the variable display time as in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the special game times in the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, when the acquired hold information is a jackpot result and the hold information immediately before it is a miss result, the hold information acquired this time is set as a special game time, and the hold information immediately before the special game time is set as a special game time. In the game round, as shown in FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (b), the super reach that results in the deviation is executed. Then, as the next special game round after the super reach that resulted in the deviation, as shown in FIG. 87 (c), the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower that formed the reach line in the super reach that resulted in the deviation. While the symbol row Z3 is stopped, only the middle symbol row Z2 is variablely displayed, the reach symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is moved to the reach line, and the special game round is ended.

That is, in the special game times, the so-called re-variation effect in the reach display can be realized by different game times (subsequent game times). Then, in order to realize this special game, the configuration for changing the variable display time shown in the eleventh embodiment is used.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a winning process for the operating port in the present embodiment.

The winning process of this embodiment is basically the same as the winning process for the operating port (FIG. 7) shown in the first embodiment, but between the process of step S205 and the process of step S206. , Processing for setting special game times has been added. That is, in the present embodiment, similarly to the processes of steps S201 to S205, the processes of steps S5501 to S5505 are executed, and then the special game circulation process is executed in step S5506. After executing the process of step S5506, the processes of steps S5507 to S5509 are executed in the same manner as the processes of steps S206 to S208. By making a negative determination in step S5508, the main winning process is terminated.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the special game circulation process of step S5506.

The processing of the first half of the special game circulation processing is basically the same as the confirmation processing for the above-mentioned hold notice. That is, in steps S5601 to S5609, for example, similarly to the processing of steps S4801 to S4809, the winning / failing determination processing of the reserved information acquired this time and the shifting process of the winning / failing lottery mode for the reserved information are performed. In relation to the subsequent confirmation process for holding notice (step S5507), a high probability flag for holding may be separately provided for the special game rounding process.

If the hold information acquired this time is an outlier result (step S5608: NO), the special game rounding process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the case of either the probabilistic jackpot result or the normal jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S5610 after the processing of step S5607 or step S5609. In step S5610, it is determined whether or not the reserved storage number N is larger than 1 (2 or more). That is, it is determined whether or not there is the reserved information that is the target of the winning / failing determination before the reserved information acquired this time and the game round has not been started yet. If the number of reserved storage N is 1, the special game circulation process is terminated as it is.

When the number of reserved storages N is larger than 1, it is determined in step S5611 whether or not the pending information to be determined as to whether or not the reserved information includes the jackpot result is included before the reserved information acquired this time. If the jackpot result is included, the special game rounding process is terminated as it is.

If the jackpot result is not included, the special game round lottery process is executed in step S5612. The winning probability of this lottery process is set to 10% in this embodiment. That is, once in 10 times of the jackpot result is set as a special game time.

The winning probability of the special game is arbitrary and may be higher or lower than 10%. Further, the winning probability may be set to be different depending on the gaming state. In particular, in the low-probability mode, the frequency of occurrence of super reach is higher than that in the high-probability mode because there is a high probability that the result will be out of order even if it is not set to the special game times. Therefore, by increasing the winning probability in the low probability mode, it is possible to further increase the expectation for super reach. On the contrary, if the winning probability in the high probability mode is lowered, it is possible to reduce the frequency of useless production (a production in which a super reach that results in a loss is performed before the game times that result in a big hit), and for the player. Is preferable.

In step S5613, it is determined whether or not the special game has been won. If it is not won, the special game circulation process is terminated as it is. If the player has been elected, the process of determining the set time for the special game round this time is executed in step S5614. In this process, the number of pending items excluding the pending information acquired this time is grasped, and the set time table for the special game times is acquired from the ROM 203, and the fluctuation of the special game times this time and the game times digested before that. Set the display time. In the present embodiment, as a set time table for performing a special game round, as shown in FIGS. 90 (a) to 90 (c), a set time table according to the number of reserved games is provided. In the set time table, a plurality of patterns are defined so that the variable display time of the special game times and the previous game times and the effect pattern of each game time have a one-to-one relationship. Then, the address information is stored so as to have a one-to-one relationship with each pattern.

For example, when the address D (1) is selected in FIG. 90 (a) as the pattern to be selected when the number of reserved items is one (two when the number of reserved items acquired this time is added), the pattern is acquired this time. The game times for the reserved information are set as special game times (variable display time is 20 sec, effect pattern is re-variable effect), and Super Reach A (variable display time is 45 sec), which results in a loss in the previous game time. Is set to be executed.

For example, if the address E (3) is selected in FIG. 90 (b) as the pattern to be selected when the number of reserved items is 2 (3 when the number of reserved items acquired this time is added), the pattern is acquired this time. The game times for the reserved information are set as special game times, and Super Reach C (variation display time is 90 sec), which is the result of the loss in the previous game times, is executed, and the previous game is further executed. It is set so that a completely out-of-game game (variation display time is 5 sec) in which reach does not occur is executed.

For example, when the address F (9) is selected in FIG. 90 (c) as the pattern to be selected when the number of reserved items is 3 (4 when the number of reserved items acquired this time is added), the pattern is acquired this time. The game times for the reserved information are set as special game times, and super reach C (variable display time is 90 sec), which results in a loss, is set to be executed in all three game times before that.

In the present embodiment, as the number of holdings increases, it becomes easier to select an effect pattern in which the reach is continuously lost before the special game round. More specifically, if the number of games before the game set as the special game is 2 (the number of holdings is 2), the probability of losing reach is 3/6 (50.0%). Occurs continuously in. On the other hand, if the number of games before the game set as the special game is 3 (the number of reserved games is 3), the reach loss is 6/9 in succession (66.7%). Occur. Further, when the previous game times are 3 times and the reach loss is continuous, the reach loss is 3 consecutive times with a probability of 3/6 (50.0%). In this way, by making the reach out of reach continuous, it is possible for the player to expect that the next one will be hit, and it is possible to make even the out-of-reach reach an interest.

It should be noted that, for example, in a configuration in which super reach is continuous as in addresses F (7) to F (9), the order of super reach A → super reach B → super reach C is increased so that the jackpot expectation level increases in order. , You may set the production pattern of super reach. In this way, it is possible to further raise the expectation that the next time will be hit.

Further, instead of executing the super reach in each game round, a production straddling a plurality of game rounds (for example, a production using animation, a moving image, or the like like a story reach) may be set. By executing such an effect that straddles a plurality of game times, it is possible to further raise the expectation that a big hit result will be obtained in that game time (the last game time).

In step S5614, the set time for the special game round is determined by using the number of pending information and the random number counter for lottery, and corresponds to the determined effect pattern. The process of storing the address information in the storage area of the address information of the RAM 204 is executed.

In the following step S5615, a process of inputting the current number of holds to the hold number counter HK is executed. Then, in step S5616, the process of storing the special game round flag in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204 is executed, and then the special game round process is terminated. The special game round flag is a flag for the MPU 202 to grasp that the special game round is set.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing a variable display time setting process in the present embodiment.

In the setting process of the present embodiment, basically the same processing as the setting process of the variable display time in the eleventh embodiment is performed. That is, in steps S5701 to S5705, the same processing as that of steps S5301 to S5305 is performed. In step S5701, instead of the process of confirming the presence / absence of the hold advance notice execution flag, the presence / absence of the special game round flag is confirmed. When the special game round flag is stored in step S5701, the variable display time setting process at the time of executing the special game round is performed in step S5706, and then the variable display time is set in step S5705. conduct.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the variable display time at the time of executing the special game round of step S5706.

In this setting process, basically, the same process as the process of setting the variable display time (FIG. 84) at the time of executing the hold notice is performed. That is, in step S5801, the address information corresponding to the effect pattern is read out as the set time pattern this time, and in step S5802, the hold quantity counter HK is grasped. Then, in step S5803, a process of grasping the corresponding variable display time is executed. In step S5804, a process of subtracting 1 from the hold quantity counter HK is performed, and in step S5805, it is determined whether or not the hold count counter HK after the subtraction becomes 0. If it is 0, the special game times flag is cleared in step S5806, and if it is not 0, the present setting process is terminated as it is.

Here, information on whether or not the current game is a special game is set in the change command or type command set in the change start process (FIG. 11) in the present embodiment. Then, in the variable start processing on the effect control device 82 side, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 93, in step S5901, it is determined whether or not the game times to be started this time are special game times, and if it is not a special game time. In step S5902, a normal fluctuation start process is executed. In this case, various settings are made so that the game rotation effect according to the information on the game result included in the change command and the type command and the information on the change display time is executed. On the other hand, in the case of a special game round, the re-variation process is executed in step S5903. In the re-variation process, it is premised that the super reach that results in the deviation is executed in the game round before this game round, and various types are performed so that only the middle symbol row Z2 is changed to align the jackpot symbols. Make settings.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation display time of each game time is changed so as to change the effect pattern of the subsequent game times based on the jackpot result at the time of acquiring the hold information. As a result, it becomes possible to make the production for the game more diverse, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

When changing the production pattern, the super reach display that is off in the game times before the jackpot result is displayed, and the variable display time is set according to the content of the super reach. In this case, since the effect control device 82 is set so that the variable display time and the effect content are uniquely determined, it is not necessary to force the effect control device 82 to make an excessive processing change, which is simple. In the configuration, it is possible to link the change of the variable display time with the change of the effect pattern.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above-described embodiment, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to other embodiments or variations thereof, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to other embodiments or variations thereof. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each embodiment. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or a part or all of them may be applied in combination.

Although the configuration is such that the re-variation effect is executed as the specific game times, the configuration may be such that the normal reach or the direct hit effect is performed. That is, an effect that the player does not normally expect to have a big hit result may be executed in the special game times, and the result may be a big hit. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the surprising effect of achieving a big hit result in the special game times.

As a stage effect before performing the re-variation effect, a fanning effect may be set in which the name expects the symbol string Z2 to re-variate, such as by shaking the middle symbol string Z2. Then, this fanning effect may be executed even after the normal out-of-reach (out-of-order super reach) in the game times other than the special game times next time. In this way, it is possible to raise the expectation that a re-variation effect may be performed after the fanning effect.

Although it is configured to execute the special game round after the super reach, it may be configured to execute the special game round after the normal reach. In addition, a special game may be executed after a non-reach game (normally out of order). The game times after the reach does not occur are, for example, a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a so-called chance eye in which a reach line is not formed and the same type of symbol is stopped in each symbol row Z1 to Z3). Set the stop result of the game times before the special game times in. Then, in the special game round, each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is re-variable and set so as to obtain a big hit result. Even in these cases, when it is decided to execute the special game times (at the time of holding acquisition), it is preferable to set (change) the variable display time of the game times before the special game times.

As the special game times, the game times that result in a big hit have been described, but the game times that result in a missed game may also be set as the special game times. In this way, even if a re-variation effect occurs, the jackpot is not confirmed, and the effect can be focused on until the end.

Depending on the type of jackpot result, a configuration may include a jackpot result that is not set as a special game round. For example, if it is a probabilistic jackpot result, it can be set as a special game time, but if it is a normal jackpot result, it is not set as a special game time. In this way, if a big hit is achieved by the re-variation effect, it is confirmed that the result is a probabilistic big hit, and it is possible to further increase the degree of attention to the special game times.

When the hold information is acquired, if the hold information that is digested before the acquired hold information contains a jackpot result, the special game times are not set, but the hold that is digested before that is not set. If a predetermined effect (reach effect, advance notice effect, etc.) is set in the game times related to information, the special game times may not be set. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the complexity of processing such that the effect must be set again due to the change in the variable display time even though the predetermined effect has been set. ..

Further, when a predetermined effect is set, the special game times may be positively set. For example, when the game result of the hold information acquired this time is a predetermined result (big hit result), and the effect set for the game times to be digested immediately before that is the predetermined effect (super reach). The lottery probability of the special game may be set so that the special game is easier than usual. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the frequency of rewriting the variation display time of the game times by setting the special game times, and to reduce the processing load.

Even if the special game times are set at the time of holding acquisition, the configuration may be such that the special game times are subsequently canceled based on the fact that the predetermined conditions are satisfied. For example, in the configuration in which the superiority or inferiority is set for the digestion of the reserved information as in the seventh embodiment, after the special game times are set, the reserved information set for the special game times and the reserved information are digested immediately before the reserved information. It is assumed that the pending information on the side to be preferentially digested is interrupted and digested with the pending information that should have been digested. That is, the game round has already started for the hold information immediately before the hold information set in the special game round, and the game round is preferentially digested after the start of the game round and before the start of the special game round. It is assumed that the pending information on the side to be received is acquired. In this case, in the game round related to the previous hold information, there is no contradiction in the production even if the super reach that is out of the way is performed as it is, but depending on the hold information on the side that is preferentially digested. Inconvenience may occur in the production of the special game round side. That is, in the special game times, the re-variation effect of the special game times (variation display of only the middle symbol column Z2) is set on the premise of the stop result of the out-of-reach. If the game times do not generate reach, changes in the production when performing the re-variation effect (change the game times on the interrupted side from non-reach occurrence to reach occurrence, or in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (Change to execute re-variation effect, etc.) is required. Therefore, if the above-mentioned interruption occurs, the setting of the special game times is canceled (that is, the normal game times effect based on the variation type counter CS or the like acquired at the time of acquiring the hold information is executed). , It is possible to avoid an extreme increase in processing load due to changes in production.

In the configuration in which the interrupt of the hold information on the priority side can occur as in the above configuration, the interrupted hold information is applied to the interrupted hold information while the special game times are enabled, as shown in the modified example of the eleventh embodiment. The hold quantity counter HK may be increased to refer to the corresponding table. Further, if the interrupted hold information is the hold information (big hit result) corresponding to the setting of the special game times, the game times related to the interrupted hold information may be set as the special game times. In this case, it is preferable to cancel the setting of the special game times for the reserved information related to the original special game times (return to the game times that result in a big hit after the normal game times effect).

In the configuration where the interrupt of the hold information on the priority side can occur as in the above configuration, the game times are being executed and the hold information acquired this time corresponds to the next game time (in the situation where the number of holds is 0). (Acquired hold information), and if the hold information is a predetermined result, etc. (big hit result), the game times related to the acquired hold information are once set as special game times, and interrupted before the start of the special game times. If this occurs, the game times related to the interrupted hold information may be set as the game times (super reach) before the special game times, and the special game times may be canceled if no interruption occurs. By doing so, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the special game times are executed, while leaving the possibility that the hold information acquired with the number of hold pieces being 0 is also regarded as a special game time. In this case, the probability of special game times may be different depending on the situation in which interrupts are likely to occur and the situation in which interruptions are difficult (high or low of the support mode). More specifically, the situation where interrupts are likely to occur (high frequency support mode) is more special for the hold information acquired when the number of holds is 0 than the situation where interrupts are unlikely to occur (low frequency support mode). By increasing the probability of playing games, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the special game times are set without interruption.

A special hold notice for granting a privilege according to the establishment of a special condition such as the first embodiment may be combined with the special game times in the above embodiment. For example, if it is easy to set a special game time (easy to win a lottery for a special game time) when executing a special hold notice that satisfies a special condition, the relationship between the special hold notice and the special game time is enhanced, and the special game time is first. It is possible to further increase the attention of the special hold notice side that is being executed. In the special game times, it is considered that the higher the expectation (for example, super reach) of the production in the previous game times (the production of the deviation result), the greater the surprise when the special game times occur. .. Therefore, as a privilege of establishing the special condition in the special hold notice, the type of the hold image is changed to the side with high expectation as in the first embodiment, while the special hold notice is the target. If the next game time of the game time is a special game time, even if the game time that was the target of the special hold notice is missed, the expectation that it will be hit in the next game time is maintained. It is possible to make it.

Contrary to the above configuration, a configuration may be configured in which a special game time is easily set at the time of executing a special hold notice in which the special condition is not satisfied. By doing so, for example, even if it is predicted that the special condition will not be satisfied early in the special hold notice (depending on the set time) due to the production, it is expected that the special game times will occur after that. It is possible to maintain the attention level during the execution of the special hold notice.

In addition, depending on the number of holds corresponding to the special hold notice (the number of hold information digested by the hold information subject to the special hold notice), the configuration makes it easier / difficult to set for the special game times. May be. As the number of holdings increases, the total fluctuation display time tends to be longer, so that the special conditions in the special holding notice are more likely to be satisfied. Therefore, for example, if the configuration is such that the larger the number of holdes corresponding to the special hold notice, the easier it is to set the special game times, it is possible to link the situation where the special conditions are likely to be established and the ease of setting to the special game times. .. On the contrary, if the number of holdings corresponding to the special holding notice is increased, it becomes more difficult to set the special game times, and the effect of increasing the attention by giving a privilege (item A etc.) different from the prize ball by the big hit etc. Can be played favorably. In this case, for example, if the privilege corresponding to the special hold notice is given before the start of the special game (previous game), the special game and the privilege given in the special hold notice are not batting. It is possible to enjoy both productions in a well-balanced manner.

In the special hold notice, the special hold notice can be executed regardless of the number of acquired hold information, and the game times can be interrupted (can be terminated) by the hold information subject to the special hold notice. .. Then, in the situation where there is no next hold information of the hold information subject to the special hold notice, new hold information is acquired, and if the acquired hold information is a jackpot result, the acquired hold is obtained. The game times related to information may be easily / difficult to be set as special game times. In this case, since the special hold notice was scheduled to end before the acquired hold information until the hold information resulting in the jackpot was acquired, the success or failure of the special conditions for the special hold notice is new. It cannot be changed depending on the pending information acquired in. Therefore, there is a concern that the act of enjoying only the effect until the special hold notice is completed, that is, the act of stopping the so-called stop so as not to acquire new hold information. Therefore, if the special hold notice is terminated as it is and the newly acquired hold information is configured so that special game times are likely to occur, a new one will be created just before the end of the special hold notice (during the ending game). It is possible to make the person feel a special feeling of acquiring the pending information, and it is possible to deter the above-mentioned stopping action. On the contrary, if the special game times are less likely to occur depending on the hold information acquired during the game times when the special hold notice ends, it enhances the impression that the special hold notice and the special game times are separate productions. Not only will it be possible to entertain the production of, but it will also be possible to select the production of the next game after the end of the special hold notice from various types of production, not limited production such as special game times. , It is possible to diversify the production. Further, if the privilege in the special hold notice is not only the grant of the item A or the like but also the change of the hold image as in the first embodiment described above, it makes sense to acquire the hold information just before the end of the special hold notice. This also makes it possible to suppress the above-mentioned stopping action.

Further, regarding the hold information acquired during the execution of the special hold notice, the variable display time for the acquired hold information is set in relation to the game result of the hold information and the special conditions in the special hold notice during execution. May be. In this case, the order of grant determination of the acquired special information is prioritized and the order of grant determination is the acquisition order so that the variable display time of the acquired pending information may be involved in the special condition in the special hold notice. Even so, it is preferable to have a configuration that can extend the special hold notice that is being executed. Then, for example, when the special hold notice such as the first embodiment is executed in which the special condition is not satisfied, and the hold information resulting in the jackpot is acquired, the special condition in the running special hold notice is set. The remaining time in the special hold notice being executed is referred to so that it can be established, and the variable display time of the game times related to the acquired hold information is set so as to be equal to or longer than the remaining time. In this way, it is possible to make it meaningful to acquire new hold information while the special hold notice is being executed.

The present embodiment may be changed as follows. FIG. 94A is a flowchart showing the hold display setting process of this modification. As described above, the hold display setting process is a process executed when a hold command is received in the hold control command correspondence process of the effect control device 82, and the hold image corresponding to the hold information acquired this time is displayed. This is the process for setting.

In step S6001, a process of grasping the game result is executed based on the received hold command, and in step S6002, a process of grasping the variable display time is executed. By these processes, it is possible to grasp what kind of effect (presence / absence of reach, its type, etc.) is executed in the game round of the reserved information acquired this time. In step S6003, a process of acquiring a holding image selection table from various table storage areas 245 of ROM 243 is executed.

As the holding image selection table, as shown in FIGS. 94 (b) to 94 (e), different tables are provided depending on the game result and whether or not the game is a special game. In the hold image selection table for the hold information that is the jackpot result in the normal time, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), the first hold image P1 (A) is 2%, and the second hold image P2 (B). Is selected with a probability of 30%, the third reserved image P3 (C) is selected with a probability of 40%, the fourth reserved image P4 (D) is selected with a probability of 20%, and the fifth reserved image P5 (E) is selected with an 8% probability. On the other hand, in the hold image selection table for the hold information that is the result of the deviation in the normal time, as shown in FIG. 94 (d), the first hold image P1 (A) is 0%, and the second hold image P1 (A) is for the second hold. Image P2 (B) has a 10% probability, third holding image P3 (C) has a 20% probability, fourth holding image P4 (D) has a 30% probability, and fifth holding image P5 (E) has a 40% probability. Be selected. As described above, the hold image P1 is set so that the first hold image P1 has the highest jackpot expectation, and the fifth hold image P5 has the lowest jackpot expectation. , P4, and P5 are set so that the jackpot expectation is higher in this order. Therefore, in normal times, the hold information that results in a big hit is more likely to select the hold image on the side with the smaller number, and the hold information that results in the loss is easier to select the hold image on the side with the higher number. ..

On the other hand, in the hold image selection table for the hold information (hold information that is the target of the special game) that is the result of the big hit at the time of the special game, as shown in FIG. 94 (c), the first hold is used. The image P1 (A) is 0%, the second reserved image P2 (B) is 0%, the third reserved image P3 (C) is 10%, the fourth reserved image P4 (D) is 30%, and the fifth. The reserved image P5 (E) is selected with a 60% probability. In other words, at the time of the special game round, even though it is a big hit result, the hold image is set so that it is easy to select the one with a low big hit expectation, and the big hit expectation is higher than the normal off result. The lower one is set so that it is easier to select.

By doing this, it is predicted in advance that the game times set for the special game times will be a big hit result, and the re-variation effect itself is expected, so it is earlier than that. It is possible to avoid the effect, that is, the event that the super reach in the game time immediately before the special game time cannot be noticed. Then, by predicting the game times set for the special game times in advance as a result of the deviation, it is possible to further enhance the surprising effect of performing the re-variation effect as the special game times. ..

Here, as already explained, in the game times related to the hold information which is the big hit result in the normal game times instead of the special game times, the fluctuation display time is longer than the game times related to the hold information which is the result (the variation display time is out of order). For example, see FIG. 13). In addition, in the game times related to the hold information that results in a big hit in the normal game times, super reach A to C are selected rather than the probability that reach non-occurrence or normal reach is selected (reach random number counter C3 = 0 to 19). The probability (reach random number counter C3 = 20 to 99) is higher. Therefore, it is considered that the variable display time (45 sec to 60 sec) corresponding to the super reach A to C is normally set in the game times related to the hold information that is the result of the big hit. On the other hand, in the special game times, the variable display time shorter than the variable display time corresponding to the super reach A to C is set (20 sec, see FIG. 90). In other words, it can be said that the special game times are game times in which the variable display time is shorter than the other game times that result in a big hit.

On the other hand, as described above, it is easy to select a game time variation display time in which the game result is out of alignment, which is shorter than the game time variation display time in which the jackpot result is obtained. Then, normally, the probability that super reach A to C is selected (reach random number counter C3 = 90 to 99) is higher than the probability that reach non-occurrence or normal reach is selected (reach random number counter C3 = 0 to 89). Is lower. On the other hand, in the game round before the special game round, Super Reach A to C are selected even though the game result is out of order. Therefore, it can be said that the game times before the special game times (particularly one before) are game times in which the variable display time is longer than usual even if the result is off.

That is, when the variable display time becomes long → short, and the hold information continues in the order of the game result being off → hit, the hold image is the hold image with high jackpot expectation → low hold image. It is easy to set in order. By doing so, as described above, the player does not expect the previous hold information (off) side, and the player does not expect the next hold information (hit) side. For the player who is expecting the previous reserved information (missing), even if the game times for the reserved information are prolonged, he / she greatly expects that it will be a big hit result. It is thought that the feeling of extension is diminished. On the other hand, if the game ends in a miss, the degree of disappointment can be significant. Then, when the next game round is a production of a long variable display time, it is assumed that the result of the previous game round (long time and off) will be combined and it will be off again anyway, and it is simply fluctuating. Even if the display time is long, the degree of attention to the next game round (hit) may decrease. In that respect, since the variable display time is set short for the next game, it is possible not only to suppress the decrease in attention, but also to greatly shake emotions such as disappointment → surprise, greatly improving the interest. be able to.

It should be noted that it is low when the hold information is a jackpot result and the fluctuation display time of the game times related to the hold information is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, shorter than the average fluctuation display time in other game times). The reserved image on the expectation side may be easily selected. Further, it is high when the hold information is a result of deviation and the fluctuation display time of the game times related to the hold information is longer than a predetermined period (for example, longer than the average fluctuation display time in other game times). The reserved image on the expectation side may be easily selected.

Further, in the hold image selection table for the hold information that is the result of the loss one time before the special game, as shown in FIG. 94 (d), the first hold image P1 (A) is 0%, the second. The hold image P2 (B) is 30%, the third hold image P3 (C) is 40%, the fourth hold image P4 (D) is 20%, and the fifth hold image P5 (E) is 10%. Selected with probability. In other words, as for the reserved image for the game times that is the result of the deviation one time before the special game times, it is easy to select the image for holding that has a high expectation of big hit even though it is the result of the deviation. It is set.

By doing so, it is possible to predict in advance that the big hit result will be obtained one time before the special game, and to pay attention to the super reach before the special game. Then, after that, by executing the re-variation effect as a special game, it is possible to further enhance the surprising effect.

Further, the above embodiment may be applied to each of the first to eleventh embodiments. 95 (a) and 95 (b) are explanatory views showing a holding image selection table in this modification, and FIG. 95 (c) shows an outline of a special holding notice table at the time of disconnection in this modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows. As described above, the special hold notice table at the time of disconnection is the table referred to in step S2001 in the effect setting process at the time of disconnection (FIG. 32) in the effect control device 82.

FIG. 95 (a) is the same as the table of FIG. 94 (d), and shows the selection rate of the hold image for the hold information for the normal time off. FIG. 95 (b) shows the selection rate of the hold image for the hold information one time before the special game round, and in this modification, the fourth hold image P4 has a high probability (100% probability). It is designed to be selected with. Then, as shown in FIG. 95 (c), in this modified example, it is easy to execute a short-time special hold notice in which the special condition is likely to be satisfied in the game round one time before the special game round. In this modification, the privilege based on the establishment of the special condition of the special hold notice is the change of the hold image shown in the first embodiment or the like.

By doing so, it becomes easier to establish the special condition of the special hold notice in the game round one time before the special game round, thereby changing the holding image as if it were the game round one time before. It is possible to expect that the result will be a big hit. As a result, the surprising effect of performing the re-variation effect after that can be further emphasized, and the fatigue caused by the effect being performed for a long time in the previous game round can be eliminated. It will be possible.

The effect pattern of the special game times is not limited to the above, and may be as follows. Modifications of the effect pattern and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 to 103. In the following figures, the symbols and the like used for various effects of the display screen G are shown in a simplified manner.

FIG. 96 shows a case where an even-numbered main symbol (a non-specific symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot result) causes an out-of-reach in the game round before the special game round. FIG. 96A shows a case where the game result of the special game time is a probability variation jackpot result, but as described above, the game result before the special game time is different from the game result of the special game time. The out-of-reach display corresponding to is performed. Therefore, in the special game round, although the game result is different from the game result of the special game round, the combination of even-numbered main symbols is re-established by using the stop result of the out-of-reach display of the previous game round. Perform variable production. After that, a so-called promotion effect is performed in which the result notified as a normal jackpot result is promoted to a probabilistic jackpot result and notified, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the game result of the special game is stopped and displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect pattern of the reach display before the special game round from being limited due to the game result in the special game round. Furthermore, in a configuration in which different types of benefits that the player can obtain, such as a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, are set, even if the occurrence of re-variation effect is detected in advance, the game is played. If it is detected that the benefits that a person can obtain are small, the player will not be able to enjoy it even if he / she predicts that the result will be a big hit, especially before the special game. Since the variable display time of the game times is set to be long, the above-mentioned non-enjoyable period can be long. Therefore, by providing the promotion effect as described above, even if the effect (reach display) in the game time before the special game time suggests a game result that is not preferable for the player, he is interested in the middle. It is possible to suitably maintain the degree of attention without interruption.

Further, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), as a re-variation effect, an effect of stopping a symbol (“V” symbol in the figure) different from the main symbol forming the reach line is performed. After that, a production that informs the type of jackpot (for example, a production that if the main character wins the battle, the result is a probable change jackpot, and if the main character loses the battle, the result is a normal jackpot) is performed, and the game of the special game times. Notify the combination of symbols corresponding to the result. Even in this way, it is possible to avoid an event in which the sense of expectation is lowered depending on the type of reach display in the game times before the special game times.

In addition, the above-mentioned promotion effect and the effect of notifying the jackpot type may be performed after the special game round. That is, these effects may be performed during the opening period at the start of the opening / closing execution mode, during the opening / closing execution mode, and during the ending period at the end.

In FIG. 97, as the reach display before the special game round, the reach display having the possibility of any jackpot result (for example, the cross-line reach in which the reach by the specific symbol and the reach by the non-specific symbol are performed in parallel) is shown. conduct. Then, the reach display in the game times before the special game times is a stop result corresponding to the off result. When it becomes a special game round, a re-variation effect is performed so that the symbols corresponding to the game result of the special game round are aligned with the reach line, and the type of the jackpot result is notified. That is, in the case of a normal jackpot result, the re-variation effect is performed so that even-numbered main symbols are aligned, and in the case of a probabilistic jackpot result, the re-variation effect is performed so that odd-numbered main symbols are aligned. By doing so, it is possible to detect that the occurrence of the re-variation effect will result in a big hit, and to increase the attention of the re-variation effect from the viewpoint of which symbol is aligned.

FIG. 98 shows an effect pattern in which the re-variation effect is not performed in the special game times. For example, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), the symbol corresponding to the disengagement result is displayed in the game round before the special game round, and the game round is ended. When it comes to special game times, these symbols are displayed (bubbles, smoke, etc.) and shielded (difficult to see or invisible) by moving accessories, etc., and then a combination of symbols corresponding to the special game times is performed. Is displayed to notify the game result of the special game times. By doing so, it is possible to further improve the degree of freedom of the stop position of the symbol of the reach display in the game round before the special game round and the symbol corresponding to the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2. That is, as described above, the symbols forming the reach line can affect the game result of the special game times. For example, in the re-variation effect in the special game times, the period for displaying the middle symbol row Z2 in a variable manner is set. Assuming that the predetermined period is set, the amount of deviation between the reach line and the reach symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 in the reach display in the game round before the special game round depends on the predetermined period. Then, it becomes difficult to generate only the reach display that is the predetermined amount of deviation in the game times before the special game times, which leads to the monotonicization of the effect pattern of the reach display, and it becomes easy to predict the presence or absence of the special game times in advance. As a result, the surprising effect of special game times may be reduced. Therefore, if the symbols are aligned during the shielding effect as described above, the position of the reach symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is irrelevant, and even if the effect pattern is any reach display in the game times before the special game times. It becomes possible to align and display the symbols in the subsequent game times.

Further, if the configuration is such that the shielding effect is performed in the special game times, it is not necessary to generate even the reach display in the game times before the special game times. That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), even when the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the game round before the special game round, after the shielding effect is performed in the next game round (special game round). It is possible to display the symbols in a uniform manner.

As the shielding effect, for example, the entire display screen G may be displayed in black (blackout) so that not only all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 but also the background and the like are invisible. The larger the difference in visibility from before it becomes visible when the symbols are aligned, the more the surprising effect when it becomes visible can be enhanced.

In addition, a fanning effect may be provided before the effect such as the shielding effect. For example, in the case of a configuration in which a movable accessory is used to perform a shielding effect, as a pre-operation in which the operation of shielding the display screen G by the movable accessory may be performed, for example, an effect of rattling the movable accessory. To do. Further, as a pre-operation, it is conceivable to generate an effect on the display screen G near the movable accessory.

FIG. 99 shows another form of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that are changed in the special game times. That is, in the above embodiment, the configuration in which the middle symbol row Z2 is varied is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variablely displayed and then the symbols are aligned and displayed. The symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (for example, the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3) may be variablely displayed, or the symbol trains Z1 and Z3 different from the middle symbol row Z2 may be variablely displayed. Further, the fluctuation speeds of the symbol trains Z1 to Z3 to be changed may be different. In the figure, the difference in the fluctuation speed is expressed by the difference in the thickness of the arrow. Further, the fluctuation direction may be different depending on each symbol row Z1 to Z3. In the figure, the difference in the direction of fluctuation is expressed by the difference in the direction of the arrow. Furthermore, the fluctuation direction is not limited to either the left-right direction (normal fluctuation direction), but changes in the front-back direction (a pattern that fluctuates so as to be sucked toward the back side and a pattern that fluctuates so as to pop out toward the front side). The configuration may be such that the fluctuation direction between the back side and the front side thereof differs depending on each symbol. Then, each of these patterns may be combined in a complex manner. Further, for example, each of these patterns is associated with the types of symbols that are aligned in the special game round (specifically, if the number of fluctuating symbol rows is large, the specific symbols (odd symbols) are likely to be aligned, and the speed is high. It is possible to pay attention to the pattern in which the specific symbols are easily aligned when the speed is fast, the pattern in which the specific symbols are easily aligned when the fluctuation direction is different, or the reverse pattern thereof, or a combination thereof), and which pattern causes the re-variation. , Can be useful for improving the interest.

Depending on the stop result of the game round before the special game round, the symbol trains Z1 to Z3 to be changed and their speeds and directions may be different. In FIG. 100, for example, the amount of deviation from the other symbol rows Z2 and Z3 is calculated using the main symbol with "7" stopped in the upper symbol row Z1 on the middle line L2 as a reference symbol, and the calculation result thereof. The fluctuation speeds and directions of the other symbol rows Z2 and Z3 are different based on the above. For example, if the amount of deviation is larger than a predetermined amount, the fluctuation speed is increased, or if the side with the smaller amount of deviation is set as the fluctuation direction by comparing the left and right deviation amounts, the time required for re-variation is shortened. be able to. In the figure, the middle symbol row Z2 is changed to the left, the lower symbol row Z3 is changed to the right, and the fluctuation speed of the lower symbol row Z3 is faster than the fluctuation speed of the middle symbol row Z2. Is shown.

The reference symbol is not limited to that of the above symbol row Z1, and may be that of other symbol rows Z1 to Z3. For example, in FIG. 100, the main symbol with "2" stopped at the middle line L2 of the lower symbol row Z3 may be used as the reference symbol. In this case, different symbols (main symbols with "2") are aligned from the case where the main symbol with "7" is used as the reference symbol. In addition, the re-variable symbol sequence and its speed and direction are also different from those described above. In the figure, the upper symbol row Z1 is changed to the left, the middle symbol row Z2 is changed to the right, and the fluctuation speeds of both the symbol rows Z1 and Z2 are the same. Further, in the symbol row (middle symbol row Z2 in FIG. 100) in which a plurality of main symbols are stopped on the display screen G, one of the main symbols may be selected as the reference symbol. .. For example, in FIG. 100, the symbol column Z1 to be changed is used depending on whether the main symbol with "6" in the middle symbol column Z2 is used as the reference symbol or the main symbol with "7" is used as the reference symbol. , The fluctuation direction and speed of Z3 are different, and the aligned symbols are also different.

The configuration may include an effect (for example, discoloring, deforming, shining, etc.) of making the player recognize which stop symbol is used as the reference symbol. As described above, if the symbols to be aligned differ depending on the reference symbol, the player is interested in the reference symbol.

In FIG. 101, an effect pattern suggesting the occurrence of a special game time by sandwiching an effect that cannot occur when each game time is continuously performed between the special game time and the previous game time. Is shown. That is, when each game round occurs consecutively, the game round by the variable display is performed until there is no undigested pending information, such as variable display start → variable display → fixed stop → variable display start → ... It is unfolded. On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 101 (a), at the start of the special game round, the variation display of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is predetermined even though the reserved information corresponding to the special game round exists. The configuration is such that it does not start over a period (for example, 3 sec). That is, in the special game round, the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started later than usual by a predetermined period. By doing so, it is possible to detect the occurrence of re-variation effect, etc. by making people feel uncomfortable that the fluctuation display does not start even though there is undigested pending information, and it is a novel effect. Can be.

In the example of FIG. 101 (b), the demo screen is displayed (for example, the manufacturer's logo is displayed or the energy saving mode is displayed) at the start of the special game round. By doing this, not only does it make you feel uncomfortable that the variable display does not start even though there is undigested hold information, but the player misunderstands that the game is over (there is no hold information) and sits down. Immediately after trying to stand up, re-variation effects will occur, and it will be possible to further enhance the surprising effect of special game times. It is preferable that the re-variation effect or the like occurs in a shorter period than the assumed period (for example, 5 sec) until the player finishes the game and leaves the seat.

In the example of FIG. 101 (c), the information communication screen between the player's mobile terminal or the like and the gaming machine is displayed at the start of the special gaming round. By doing so, the re-variation effect or the like will occur immediately after the player picks up the mobile terminal or the like and tries to communicate, and in addition to the above-mentioned surprising effect, the re-variation effect or the like will be performed on the mobile terminal. It is possible to perform the preparatory operation for shooting with the like without detecting the occurrence of the re-variation effect or the like. In addition, it is preferable that the above information communication screen cannot occur when there is undigested pending information.

When performing the effect at the start of these special game times, it is preferable that the variable display on the display screen G does not start, but the variable display on the main display unit 43 side starts as usual. By doing so, it becomes possible for the main display unit 43 to determine whether each of the above-mentioned effects is performed as the effect of the special game times, or whether the game machine is out of order or the like. As a result, the game is enjoyed as a novel effect for the player who will mainly pay attention to the display screen G, and the game is played for the manager of the game hall who will mainly pay attention to the main display unit 43 side. It is possible to clearly grasp the state of the machine.

Further, in the example of FIG. 101, as an effect pattern suggesting the occurrence of special game times, an effect that cannot occur when each game time is continuously performed has been described. It suffices as long as it is an expected effect, and it is sufficient if the difference from the end effect of the game round can be clearly grasped. That is, in each game round, the final effect of the game round is usually such that the final display is performed with the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 completely stopped. Specifically, even after the variation display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is performed, there is a possibility that the development effect and the re-variation effect after the stop may be performed in the game round. The variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is configured to be oscillated (does not stop completely) although it is finished, or the configuration is such that a part of the symbol or the background is operating, but it matches the game result of the game. It is possible to grasp the end of one game round (the game result is notified) by performing a definite display in which the state in which the completed symbol combination (at least a part of the symbol) is completely stopped is performed. On the other hand, apart from the definite display, it is possible to expect the occurrence of the above-mentioned special game times by performing the expected sustaining effect across the game times to maintain the expectation for the next game times. The expected continuous effect includes, for example, an effect in which some symbols (characters such as a main symbol, a sub symbol, a background, and a part thereof) are operating even during a fixed stop period. The effect in which some of the symbols operate even during the fixed stop period may be configured to be performed with a predetermined probability even when a special game round occurs. As a result, it is possible to raise the expectation that the special game times will occur in the next game times, not only before the game times when the special game times occur, but also in other game times. Further, not only the effect of operating a part of the symbols but also the expected continuous effect may be performed on the entire display screen G. As this effect, for example, the background is set to a different background, and each symbol is a pattern different from the usual one (for example, it is usually a fish-based main symbol, whereas in the expected continuous production, it is a dog-based main symbol. It is conceivable to stop at (change to). By doing so, it is possible not only to raise the expectation that the special game times occur, but also to reduce the possibility that the expected continuous effect is overlooked.

In the example of FIG. 102, the period between the special game times and the game times before the special game times is used to perform an effect suggesting the occurrence of the special game times. That is, as described above, each game is continuously performed in the order of variable display start → variable display → confirmed display → variable display start, etc., but the next variable display starts after the confirmed display is performed. There is a waiting period in the period until it is done. During this waiting period, an effect suggesting the occurrence of special game times will be performed. As the effect, as shown in FIG. 102 (a), for example, an operation instruction effect of the operation unit 75 (for example, a character display of "press a button!") Is performed. In this operation instruction effect, an operation instruction period for accepting the operation of the operation unit 75 is provided, and if the operation unit 75 is operated during the operation instruction period, the effect is developed. As the development effect, it is preferable to use the shielding effect of FIG. 98 or the like. Then, if the next game round is a special game round, a re-variation effect is generated or the symbols are displayed as they are, otherwise, the fluctuation display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is started as in the normal game round. Let me. By doing so, it is possible to perform a novel production using the waiting period between each game.

Explaining in relation to the variable display of the main display unit 43, as shown in FIG. 102 (b), the operation instruction effect is executed in a predetermined period of the period during which the variable display of the main display unit 43 is stopped. You may. That is, at the timing of t1, the variation display of the game times before the special game times ends, and the variation display on the main display unit 43 also ends. After that, an operation instruction effect is generated from the timing of t2 to the timing of t3 as the operation instruction period. The variable display corresponding to the special game times (or normal game times) is started at the timing of t4, which is the timing after the timing of t3. By doing so, it is possible to secure a period (timing from t3 to t4) for performing an effect (shielding effect, etc.) corresponding to the operation of the operation unit 75 performed during the operation instruction period. Further, as shown in FIG. 102 (c), a waiting period (shorter) different from the normal waiting period (the period from the timing of t1 to the timing of t4) (the period from the timing of t1 to the timing of, for example, t3). ) May be used as an effect to suggest the occurrence of special game times. That is, it is also possible to suggest the occurrence of special game times by changing the length of the waiting period on the main display unit 43 side.

The operation instruction effect is not limited to the configuration executed during the standby period, and may be configured to start from the timing when the confirmation display or the temporary stop display prior to that is performed.

FIG. 103 shows the relationship with the chance effect (expectation degree suggestion effect) that can occur in each game. That is, as shown in FIG. 103 (a), as a chance effect, it is an effect generated based on, for example, the operation of the operation unit 75 at a predetermined timing during the game times (reach display), and the degree of expectation of the game times. It is assumed that a chance effect A having a high expectation and a chance effect B having a low expectation are provided so that That is, when the chance effect A occurs, the jackpot result is likely to occur in the game round, and when the chance effect B occurs, the probability of the jackpot result is lower than when the chance effect A occurs. Then, the game times in which the chance effect A is generated are likely to result in a big hit, and the next game times are likely to be performed after the big hit (opening / closing execution mode) in which the chance effect A is generated and shifted, and the game in which the chance effect B is generated is likely to occur. It can be said that the times are likely to be out of order, and the next game times are likely to be performed (consecutively) following the game times in which the chance effect B is generated. Based on such a premise, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), in the game times before the special game times, the chance effect B is set so as to be more likely to occur than the chance effect A. By doing so, even if it is expected that chance production B will occur and the result will be off in the game, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the next game will be a special game. Become.

Here, it is clear that it is easier to attract the attention of the player if the chance effect A, which has a high expectation, is generated as the chance effect as described above, but if the frequency of occurrence of the chance effect A is increased, the occurrence frequency is increased. It is conceivable that the expectation level of the chance effect A will be lowered by the minute, and as a result, even if the chance effect A is generated, it will not be noticed. That is, the expectation level of the chance production A is kept high because the frequency of occurrence is low. In that respect, the balance between the chance production A and the chance production B is important as the chance production, and the frequency of occurrence of the chance production B is determined. It can be said that the higher the value, the higher the expectation of chance production A. Therefore, if the chance effect B is configured to easily occur in the game times before the special game times, it is possible to have a good balance of expectations in relation to the chance effect A.

Further, even in the chance production B, in order to raise expectations, it is considered necessary to generate it in a scene that leads to a big hit result to some extent. However, if the frequency of occurrence in the game times that results in a big hit is increased too much, the balance of expectations may be lost in relation to the chance production A. Therefore, if the frequency of occurrence in the game times before the special game times is increased, the game results of the game times before the special game times are out of order, so the expectation level of the chance production B should be increased only in the game times. On the other hand, it is possible to increase the frequency of occurrence in situations that lead to a big hit result, and it is possible to improve the balance between the degree of expectation of chance production B and the frequency of occurrence.

Here, in addition to the chance production as described above, the expected degree of the game times can be obtained by combining the types of reach display (super reach A to C, normal reach, etc.) and the expected degree of each of the reserved images in a complex manner. Sophistication of suggestion production is planned. Then, FIG. 104 illustrates a combination pattern of the reserved image and the chance effect as a part of the combination of the suggestion effect. That is, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), as the reserved images for the game times before the special game times, the first reserved image P1 (A) to the third reserved image P3 (C), which have high expectations, are used. ) Is selected with a probability of 70%, and the 4th holding image P4 (D) to the 5th holding image P5 (E) having a low expectation are selected with a 30% probability, and the holding image having a high expectation is selected. Is easier to select (see FIG. 94 for more details). Then, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), the chance effect A and the chance effect B in the game times before the special game times are set so that the selection ratio differs depending on the selected reserved image. Specifically, in FIG. 104 (b-1), the selection rate of the chance effect when the first reserved image P1 (A) to the third reserved image P3 (C), which have high expectations, is selected is shown. As shown above, the chance effect B having a low expectation is set to be easier to select than the chance effect A having a high expectation. In other words, in the reach display of the game times before the special game times, which is executed in the situation where the expectation is raised by the image for holding, the chance effect B on the side with the lower expectations is likely to occur, and the expectation is high or low. Suggestion effects occur in the order of high → low. Further, FIG. 104 (b-2) shows the selection rate of the chance effect when the fourth reserved image P4 (D) to the fifth reserved image P5 (E), which have low expectations, are selected. The chance effect A, which has a high degree of expectation, is set to be easier to select than the chance effect B, which has a low degree of expectation. In other words, in the reach display of the game times before the special game times, which is executed in a situation where the expectations are not so high due to the image for holding, chance production A on the side with high expectations is likely to occur, and the expectations are high or low. In other words, suggestion effects occur in the order of low → high.

In general, as a combination of suggestive effects, a pattern that is combined so that the degree of expectation gradually increases is set so that the total degree of expectation tends to be high as in the so-called chance-up (step-up) effect. As a player, it is considered that the combination of a plurality of suggestive effects is expected to gradually increase in expectation. In that respect, since the pattern of FIG. 104 (b-2) is a pattern in which the degree of expectation gradually increases, the player can enjoy the production of the game with peace of mind. However, since the game times are out of order, the result is contrary to the player's expectation. In such a situation, the re-variation effect or the like will occur in the next game round (special game round), so that the surprising effect can be extremely enhanced.

On the other hand, if only combinations with gradually higher expectations are generated, the total expectation may decrease due to the higher frequency of occurrence of the combinations. In other words, the total expectation of the combination with the gradually increasing expectation is high because the combination different from the combination with the gradually increasing expectation is generated. In that respect, the pattern shown in FIG. 104 (b-2) is less likely to occur, and the pattern shown in FIG. 104 (b-1) is more likely to occur. It is possible to produce a surprising effect by the pattern shown in FIG. 104 (b-2) without disturbing the balance of degrees.

Further, if the chance effect B occurs in the game times that are seen as having high expectations as in the pattern of FIG. 104 (b-1), it is considered that the interest in the game times can be extremely reduced. In particular, since it is easy to select a long variable display time for the game times (game times before the special game times), the game times that are digested in a situation where the degree of attention is lowered will continue for a long time, and the player Is considered to be very discouraging. In such a situation, if a re-variation effect or the like is generated in the next game round (special game round), it is considered that the surprising effect will be further enhanced.

In other words, regardless of the pattern, while the surprising effect of the re-variation effect in the next game round can be obtained, the route to the surprise is different (after the expectation is extremely high and the player deviates). A pattern in which a re-variation effect occurs, and a pattern in which a re-variation effect occurs after a state of disappointment continues for a long time while expecting halfway, but the expectation is betrayed. It is possible to increase it.

The expectation suggestion effect that suggests the expectation of each game such as the hold image and the chance effect is not limited to these hold images and the chance effect, and may be other effects. Then, in order to achieve the effect of the high and low expectations as described above, it is sufficient that the order thereof is the above-mentioned relationship (the order of the image for holding → the chance effect).

FIG. 105A shows a modified example of the variation start processing performed at the start of the variation of each game round. That is, in step S6101, it is determined whether or not the current game is a special game, and if it is not a special game, the normal fluctuation start process is performed in step S6102, and if it is a special game. In step S6103, the revariation process is executed. These processes are the same as the processes of steps S5901 to S5903. After executing the normal variation start processing in step S6102, it is determined in step S6104 whether or not the next variation is a special game. In this process, it is possible to determine whether or not the game is a game before the special game by referring to the value of the reserved number counter HK. If it is a game round before the special game round, the character generation process for generating a predetermined character in the game round is executed in step S6105, and then the variable start processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6104 that the next variation is not a special game, it is determined in step S6106 whether or not there is pending information for the next variation. If there is no pending information for the next change, the change start process is terminated as it is. If the pending information exists, the character generation lottery process for determining whether or not to generate the predetermined character in the game round is executed in step S6107, and if it is determined in step S6108 that the character has been won, it is determined. After executing the process of step S6105, the variation start process is terminated. Further, if it is determined in step S6108 that the non-winning process is performed, the variation start process is terminated as it is.

In this way, if a predetermined character is generated in the game times before the special game times, the player can grasp that the revariable effect can occur in the next game times. On the other hand, if the predetermined character is generated even in a situation where there is no pending information corresponding to the next fluctuation, it is easy to find out that it is a so-called ghost effect, and even if the effect is performed, it is rather noticeable. It becomes a factor to reduce the degree. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), when the reserved information corresponding to the next fluctuation exists, a predetermined character may be generated, while as shown in FIG. 105 (c), the reserved information corresponding to the next fluctuation is generated. If the configuration is such that a predetermined character cannot be generated (regulates / limits the generation) in the absence of the above-mentioned character, the effect of generating the predetermined character can be suitably exhibited.

<13th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, in the configuration for executing the special game round of the twelfth embodiment, a configuration (seventh embodiment) in which the priority order is determined in the digestion order according to the type of the acquired pending information is added. The effect pattern when the hold information on the priority side is acquired will be described in more detail.

Specifically, in the situation where the special game times are set, when the hold information of the priority side is acquired, the effect pattern of the subsequent game times is set as the effect pattern of the game times related to the hold information of the priority side. (More specifically, the fluctuation display time of the subsequent game times) is referred to, and the effect is set accordingly. For example, as shown in FIG. 106 (a), when the hold information on the priority side is acquired in the game times before the special game times, the game times (game times during which the reach display is being executed) are as initially set. End the reach display so that the result is off. Then, in the next game round (the game round on the priority side), the re-variation effect is executed so as to result in a deviation (for example, the re-variable middle symbol sequence Z2 stops past the reach line). As the variation display time of this deviation re-variation effect, the variation display time that should have been set in the next game round (special game round) is set. Then, in the next game round (special game round), the re-variation effect is executed so as to result in a big hit.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 106 (b), although the game result of the game times set to the special game times is a probabilistic jackpot result, the reach display corresponding to the normal jackpot result is displayed in the game times before the special game times. It is assumed that the promotion effect is set for the special game times or after that. If the pending information on the priority side is acquired during the reach display, the reach display is terminated so as to be out of the initial setting as described above. Then, in the next game round (the game round on the priority side), the reach line (upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3) is re-variably displayed, and the reach line re-variation effect is performed to stop the reach line so as to result in a deviation. Execute. In this reach line re-variation effect, the upper and lower symbols are so that the stop result of the out-of-reach by the even-numbered main symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result becomes the stop result of the out-of-reach by the odd-numbered main symbols corresponding to the probabilistic jackpot result. Columns Z1 and Z3 are revariated. After that, in the next game round (special game round), the middle symbol row Z2 is re-variable so that the reach symbol stops at the reach line corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result. Also for the above reach line re-variation effect, the variation display time of the game times related to the reach line re-variation effect is set with reference to the variation display time of the next game times (special game times).

Changes in the processing for performing the effect of FIG. 106 and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing a confirmation process for holding notice in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the following processing is performed between the main side special hold notice setting process in step S4810 and the hold command setting process in step S4811. That is, after performing the process of step S4810, it is confirmed in step S6201 whether or not the special game times flag is stored, and it is determined whether or not the special game times have been set. If the special game times have already been set, the process proceeds to step S6202, and it is determined whether or not the reserved information acquired this time is the reserved information on the priority side. That is, it is determined whether or not the information is on hold based on the winning of the lower operating port 34. If the information is on hold on the priority side, the process proceeds to step S6203 and the process of storing the priority flag in the RAM 204 is executed. The priority flag is a flag for the MPU 202 to grasp that the hold information on the priority side has been acquired in the situation where the special game times have been set. If a negative determination is made in step S6201 or step S6202, or after the process of step S6203 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4811. In step S4811, the hold command is set so as to include the information indicating that the priority flag is stored.

Although detailed description by the figure is omitted, when the hold command is received on the effect control device 82 side and the hold command contains information indicating that the priority flag is set, the main control is performed. Similar to the device 81 side, the priority flag is stored in the RAM 244, and the hold information (game times) that triggered the priority flag is stored in the hold storage area 250 so that the information can be stored.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the variable display time at the time of executing the special game round in the present embodiment. As a change from the process of FIG. 92, after executing the process of grasping the fluctuation display time according to the hold quantity counter HK in step S5803, it is determined in step S6301 whether or not the priority flag is stored. It is a point. If the priority flag is not stored in step S6301, processing such as subtraction of the hold quantity counter HK after step S5804 is performed in the same manner as the processing of FIG. 92. On the other hand, if the priority flag is stored, the priority flag is cleared and then the present setting process is terminated without performing the process after step S5804. Then, the variable display time is set in step S5705 of FIG.

That is, if the game times to be executed this time are the game times related to the hold information on the priority side acquired in the situation where the special game times are set (when the interrupt of the game times occurs), the game times are concerned. As the fluctuation display time of, the fluctuation display time of the game times related to the hold information that should have been digested this time if an interrupt does not occur is set as the fluctuation display time of this time. Therefore, for example, in the situation where the game round before the special game round is being executed as shown in FIG. 106, that is, the situation where the hold number counter HK = 1, it should be set in the next special game round. The variable display time (20 sec) is used as it is as the variable display time of the interrupted game times. Further, for example, in the situation where the hold number counter HK = 3, the fluctuation display time that should have been set in the next game round (see the setting time table in FIG. 90, for example, the address F (6) is set. If it is done, 90 sec) is used as it is as the variable display time of the interrupted game times.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing in the present embodiment. In step S6401, it is determined whether or not the game round to be started this time is a special game round, and if not, it is determined in step S6402 whether or not the priority flag is stored. If it is not stored, the normal fluctuation start processing is executed in step S6403. If the priority flag is stored, that is, if it is the start processing of the interrupted game round, the special game round preparation effect is set in step S6404. If the game round this time is a special game round, the re-variation process is executed in step S6405. After executing any of the processes of steps S6403 to S6405, the variable start processing is terminated.

As the special game round preparation effect, the effect is selected according to the set variable display time. In other words, the effect corresponding to the effect of the game times that should have been executed if the interrupt of the game times on the priority side does not occur is selected. For example, when the priority side interrupt occurs in the situation where the hold number counter HK = 1 (the situation of FIG. 106), the fluctuation display time of 20 sec, which should have been set for the subsequent special game times, is set. , The effect according to the fluctuation display time is set as the effect of the game times interrupted. As this effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 106, an out-of-order re-variation effect, a reach line re-variation effect, and the like can be considered. Further, if an interrupt on the priority side occurs in a situation where the hold number counter is HK = 3, for example, at the address F (6) as described above, 90 sec, which should have been set for the subsequent game times. The variable display time of is set, and the effect according to the variable display time is set as the effect of the game times interrupted. As this effect, for example, when Super Reach C is executed, the continuous effect of the reach display set in the set time table can be diverted as it is. In the ROM 243, an effect pattern table in which the effect pattern for interruption and the effect pattern (variable display time) of the subsequent game times at the time of interruption are stored one-to-one is set, and the effect pattern table is referred to this time. It is advisable to configure it to determine the special game round preparation production.

As described above, in the configuration in which the variable display time of a plurality of game times is preset by the set time table, when the hold information on the priority side is acquired, the variable display time set for the subsequent game times is set. It is configured to set the variable display time for the reserved information on the priority side by referring to it. As a result, even in the situation where the variable display time of each game is set for the special game (the situation where one address is selected from the set time table), the hold information on the priority side is displayed. It is not necessary to set the variable display time of the game again or change the variable display time of other game times, and the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, since the configuration is such that the variable display time and the effect pattern of the game times of the interrupting side (priority side) are set with reference to the variable display time and the effect pattern set for the subsequent game times, the set game. Even if an interruption occurs in a situation where none of the times (each game time of a series of effects in which a special game time finally occurs) has started, the interrupted game time is used as the subsequent game time. It is possible to set the variable display time and the effect pattern in association with each other. For example, if the configuration is such that the variable display time and the effect pattern set for the game times on the front side are referred to, the side that interrupts even though none of the game times for which a series of effects is set has started. In a situation where the game round of is to be executed (for example, a situation in which an interrupt occurs after the special game round flag is stored and before a new game round is started), it is related to the series of effects. The variation display time and the effect pattern of the game time of the interrupted side will be set by referring to the non-game time. On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the subsequent game times are referred to as in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform an effect related to a series of effects even in the above situation.

In particular, when a special game time is set, as described above, the player's attention is set so that the player's attention is not focused on the special game time but on the immediately preceding game time, and the immediately preceding game time is set. It is configured to notify the player as a result of the deviation, and immediately after that, perform a re-variation effect with a short fluctuation display time to provide the player with surprise and surprise. Therefore, for example, when an interrupt occurs between the immediately preceding game and the special game even though the player was paying attention to the game immediately before the special game, the front side (disengagement result is notified). If the production is performed with reference to the game times of the game times), the same production will be shown to the player who was interested in the game times on the front side, and even the special game times. There is a possibility that the production of will be delayed. Therefore, by referring to the rear side as described above, if the player interrupts immediately before the special game round, the effect for just before the special game round (disengagement re-variation effect or reach line re-variation effect) is performed. , The delay as described above can be reduced, and the fluctuation display time can be shortened. If the interruption is made before the special game, not just before the special game, the continuous reach display for the game immediately before the special game is displayed, so that the attention to the game immediately before the special game is increased. It can be used as a production for the purpose. In this way, different effects are set depending on the interrupt timing, and although the effect of the effects is different, it is possible to set different effects as described above with the same processing configuration such as referring to the variable display time and the effect pattern of the subsequent game times. Therefore, it can be said that the effect of each production can be achieved with a simple processing configuration.

In addition, when an interrupt occurs, the same variable display time as the variable display time of the game times on the rear side is set, but it corresponds to it by referring to the variable display time of the game times on the rear side (different). ) It may be configured to set the variable display time. In this case, for example, if a table is set in which information on the fluctuation display time of the game times on the rear side and information on the fluctuation display time of the interrupted game times are stored on a one-to-one basis, the table and the game times on the rear side can be stored. With reference to the variable display time, it is possible to grasp the variable display time of the interrupted game times. If the corresponding variable display time is set to be shorter than the variable display time of the game times on the rear side, the relationship of short variable display time → long variable display time when interrupted during continuous reach display When it is maintained and interrupted immediately before the special game round, it is possible to reduce the delay of the production before the special game round as a game round with a shorter variable display time before the special game round with a short variable display time. Also, depending on the interrupted situation (whether it was interrupted during the continuous reach display, or just before the special game times, etc.), the relationship with the variable display time of the game times on the rear side (same length or different length). It may have a different configuration.

In the above embodiment, the priority side reserved information acquired in the situation where the special game times are set is described as one, but a plurality of reserved information may be acquired. In this case, when the main control device 81 clears the priority flag (when affirmative determination is made in step S6301), it is confirmed whether or not there is hold information on the other priority side, and when the hold information on the other priority side exists. It is preferable to configure the system so that the priority flag is not deleted (the priority flag is deleted if no other priority flag exists).

In place of or in addition to the configuration for clearing the priority flag, a counter is provided to grasp the number of reserved information on the priority side acquired in the situation where the special game times are set, and the counter is specially increased or decreased by the increase or decrease of the counter. It may be configured to set the variable display time for the reserved information on the priority side in the situation where the game times are set. More specifically, the counter is added by 1 when the reserved information on the priority side is acquired in the situation where the special game times are set, and the counter is decremented by 1 when the affirmative judgment is made in step S6301. do. By doing so, by referring to the counter, it is possible to grasp not only the presence / absence of the reserved information on the priority side in the situation where the special game times are set, but also the number of the reserved information. The above configuration may be applied to the control device (effect control device 82) on the sub side. This is because, as described above, it is necessary to set the effect of the game times related to the hold information on the priority side in the situation where the special game times are set also in the control device on the sub side.

In the configuration in which the priority side game times are executed before the special game times, the effect mode in the priority side game times is not limited to the above. For example, as shown in FIG. 110, the game round before the special game round is ended in a stop mode in which the reach effect performed on the main symbol with "7" is removed and the result is. Then, in the game round on the priority side that interrupts before the special game round after that, the main symbol with "7" in the middle symbol row Z2 is re-changed so as to pass through the reach line (middle line L2), and the priority is given. It is also possible to end the game round on the side, re-variate the middle symbol row Z2 again in the special game round, stop it at the reach line, and align the main symbols marked with "7". In addition, after the reach is lost in the main symbol marked with "7", one of the symbol rows (upper symbol row Z1 in the figure) forming the reach line is re-variated as the priority-side off-game times. A symbol different from the symbol forming the reach line (main symbol with "7") (main symbol with "8") may appear on the display screen G. Then, in the special game round, the pattern of re-variable so as to align the symbols forming the reach line and the pattern of re-variating so as to align the symbols different from the symbols forming the reach line. It becomes possible to set.

When a plurality of pending information on the priority side is acquired as described above, further diversification of the production can be achieved. For example, as shown in FIG. 111, in a plurality of priority-side out-of-game games, different symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are re-variated and stopped so as to result in an out-of-order. Specifically, the single line out of reach due to the main symbol marked with "7" as the game round before the special game round is stopped. In the first off-game round on the priority side, for example, a symbol (“8”) different from the symbol that formed the reach line in the game round before the special game round by re-variably displaying the lower symbol row Z3 is The attached main symbol) appears on the display screen G. The main symbol (main symbol with "7") forming the reach line is also stopped so as to remain on the display screen G. In the second off-game round on the priority side, the upper symbol row Z1 is re-variably displayed to introduce a symbol (main symbol with "8") different from the symbol forming the reach line. In addition, the main symbol (the main symbol with "7") forming the reach line is also stopped so as to remain. Then, the stop result that the reach of the double line (“7” and “8”) by the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 is out of reach is displayed by the two off-game rounds on the priority side. After that, in the special game round, it is changed again so that the symbols of one of the double lines are aligned. As a pattern for forming the double line, the upper symbol row Z1 is re-variated to stop "7" and "8" in the first off-game round on the priority side, and the lower symbol row Z3 is re-variated to ". "8" is made to appear once (" 7" is not displayed from the display screen G). In the second off-game round on the priority side, the lower symbol row Z3 is changed again to stop "7" and "8". Even in this way, the stop result that the reach of the double line by the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 is out of reach is displayed by the two off-game rounds on the priority side. As described above, by making the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 to be re-variable in each game round different, or by making the re-variable direction and the amount of deviation different, the period required for re-variation in each game round is further shortened. It becomes possible to do. Needless to say, the re-variation pattern in each priority-side off-game round is not limited to the above.

Further, in the above embodiment, the description has been made on the premise of a state in which the winning frequency to the lower operating port 34 is low (a state in which it is relatively difficult to acquire the reserved information on the priority side) as in the normal gaming state (low frequency support mode). , It may be executed in a state where the winning frequency to the lower operating port 34 is improved (high frequency support mode, a state in which the hold information on the priority side is relatively easy to be acquired). Further, although the description has been made on the premise that the setting of the special game times is performed based on the reserved information on the non-priority side, the configuration may be performed based on the reserved information on the priority side. When the special game times are set based on the hold information on the priority side, the number of hold information on the priority side may be input in the process of inputting the hold number to the hold number counter HK in step S5615. In addition, the configuration is such that a flag or the like for grasping that the special game times have been set based on the hold information on the priority side is stored. In this case, even if the reserved information on the priority side is subsequently acquired, the acquired reserved information is digested after the game times related to the series of effects set in the special game times. Further, even if the reserved information on the non-priority side is subsequently acquired, the acquired reserved information is also digested after the game times related to the series of effects set in the special game times. Therefore, even if the hold information is acquired after that, the priority flag is not stored based on the above flag or the like (forcibly proceed to NO in step S6201 or step S6202). This makes it possible to set the special game times based on the hold information on the priority side, but in the configuration where each of the priority / non-priority hold information exists, the game times related to the series of effects set for the special game times. The production can be suitably realized.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or a part or all of them may be applied in combination.

(1) In the process of specifying the variable display time on the effect control device 82 side, the variable display time is specified based on each counter C3, CS and the variable display time table for the hold information of the hold number non-corresponding pattern. , The variable display time may be stored in the hold storage area 250 in the process at the time of receiving the hold command (for example, the hold increase process step S1208), or the variable display time may be stored in the hold command output from the main control unit 81. It may be configured to include information.

(2) In the timer input process (FIG. 29) at the time specifying pattern, in step S1710, the subtraction start timing of the timer counter T may be changed based on the time specified in steps S1701 to S1709. That is, by delaying the subtraction start timing, it becomes difficult to satisfy the special condition, and by advancing the subtraction start timing, it becomes easy to satisfy the special condition. By changing the subtraction start timing in this way, the probability of success or failure of the special condition can be adjusted, so that the special hold notice can be suitably executed without requiring the change of the specified time.

Further, in the variation start process (step S1303) of the variation display control process (FIG. 38), the high-speed variation display of the lower symbol column Z3 is terminated in accordance with the end timing of the predetermined set time in the special hold notice. , The effect pattern may be set. In this case, the effect pattern may be set so that the special condition is satisfied, or the effect pattern may be set so as not to be satisfied. In this case, the success or failure of the special condition may be determined according to the game result of the current game round, or the success or failure of the special condition may be determined according to the game result of other reserved information. Further, the success or failure of the special condition may be determined based on the game state (high or low of the winning / failing lottery mode or the support mode, the number of pending information, etc.).

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the variable display time has been described as including the fixed time in each game round, but as it is not included, the fixed time is also separately grasped, and the timer counter T is input and subtracted. It may be configured to perform the above. For example, this configuration may be applied to a gaming machine having a configuration in which the fixed time may change depending on each gaming time or gaming state.

(4) The display of the time display area GE is not limited to the above, and may be another display. For example, the hold information subject to the special hold notice may be displayed in a region (for example, the upper right portion of the display screen G) separated from the hold image P. Further, for example, the display screen G may be displayed so as to be superimposed on the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 on the entire display screen G. In this case, in order to suppress the deterioration of the visibility of the symbols Z1 to Z3, the time display area GE may be displayed behind the symbols Z1 to Z3.

Further, the display of the time display image Gp is not limited to the above, and may be another display. That is, the number of digits in the display is not limited to the above, that is, the minimum unit of subtraction is not limited to the above. Further, the display may be configured in Chinese numerals instead of Arabic numerals, or may be displayed in analog form instead of digital display.

(5) The type of the reserved image P is changed based on the establishment of the special condition, but the determination of the establishment of the special condition may be performed a plurality of times. In other words, in the above embodiment, the special condition is satisfied that the predetermined set time elapses and becomes 0, but by changing this, the predetermined set time elapses and becomes 0, or a predetermined condition is satisfied. The special condition may be established to win the lottery at the timing.

For example, a plurality of determination timings are set in the remaining time of a predetermined set time (for example, five types of determination timings of 30 sec, 20 sec, 10 sec, 5 sec, and 0 sec are set). Then, it is determined whether or not to change the type of the reserved image P at each determination timing, and if it is determined to change, the reserved image P is changed. That is, there is a high possibility that the determination timing will be changed by the number provided. By doing so, the chances of the special condition being satisfied will increase, and the number of times the special hold notice will be watched can be increased accordingly.

(6) The reserved image P may be gradually changed according to the passage of a predetermined set time (according to the change in the probability that the special condition is satisfied). For example, image data of a plurality of holding images P is provided so that the change from the fourth holding image P4 (yellow) to the third holding image P3 (red) is performed step by step, and a predetermined set time is set. The image data of the holding image P may be updated so that the image P4 of the fourth holding image P3 approaches the third holding image P3 as the image approaches 0. In this case, if the color is different depending on the type of the holding image P as in each of the above embodiments, the color is updated so as to gradually approach the color of the holding image P after the change from before the change to after the change. If the shape is different depending on the type of the holding image P, the shape may be updated so as to gradually approach the shape of the holding image P after the change from before the change to after the change.

In these cases, the time input to the timer counter T at the start of the special hold notice is divided by the number to be updated stepwise (for example, 5), and the hold image P is updated each time the divided unit time elapses. It is good to have a configuration that does.

By setting the color and shape of the holding image P to be changed stepwise in this way, the player can grasp the probability of establishment of the special condition based on the color and shape of the holding image P. Therefore, the time display image Gp in the time display area GE may not be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to intuitively grasp the remaining time as compared with the configuration in which the remaining time can be grasped in real time by the time display image Gp, and it is possible to make the effect easy to understand. Further, by doing so, it becomes possible to make it difficult to be understood even if the elapsed speed of the remaining time of the set time or the remaining time is changed, and it is also possible to preferably perform adjustment in the middle of the production. Further, it is possible to reduce the amount of image data stored in advance because the time display area GE and the time display image Gp are not displayed.

In addition, the effect indicating the probability of establishment of the special condition can be changed as follows. As shown in FIG. 58 (a), as an effect showing the probability of establishment of the special condition of the special hold notice, an effect imitating the sunrise of Mt. Fuji may be executed. In this case, the image at which the sun begins to rise from Mt. Fuji is displayed at the start timing (FIG. 59 (a1)), and the image at which the sun has completely risen from Mt. Fuji is displayed at the end timing (FIG. 59 (a2)). As a result, the probability of establishing the special condition can be grasped depending on the condition of the sunrise. In particular, by applying a production such as sunrise, which the player may potentially recognize that he / she cannot see without waiting for a relatively long time, to a production showing the probability of establishment of a special condition, the relevant effect is applied. Even if the production is unfolded for a long time, it can be seen without any discomfort.

Further, the probability that the special condition is satisfied may be determined by a notification means (for example, a display light emitting unit 63 or the like) different from that of the display screen G. Further, as a different notification means, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), the notification may be performed on the screen PG of the mobile terminal. In this case, as in the sixth embodiment, by reading the code of the special condition, the special condition at the time of displaying the code may be displayed on the mobile terminal, or Augmented Reality (AR). It may be configured to display the change of the establishment probability on the screen PG of the mobile terminal in real time by using technology or the like. In this case, the markers AR1 to AR4 for augmented reality may be displayed on the image for special hold notice (for example, the time display area GE), or the image for normal game rounds (for example, the background image or the symbol sequence Z1 to Z3). ) May be displayed. When the markers AR1 to AR4 are updated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 sec cycle), the change in the probability of establishment can be displayed on the mobile terminal.

When displaying using a mobile terminal or the like, the probability that the special condition is satisfied may be displayed directly on the display screen G and abstractly displayed on the screen PG of the mobile terminal (FIG. 59 (b1)). On the contrary, the display screen G may be displayed abstractly and the screen PG of the mobile terminal may be directly displayed (FIG. 59 (b2)).

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the number of duplicate special hold notices that can be executed is adjusted by using the hold notice counter YK, but this may be changed. That is, in each of the above embodiments, the special hold notice based on the hold information of the missed result is executed in duplicate up to two, and the special hold notice based on the hold information of the jackpot result is executed up to one (up to one). (Does not overlap). This may be executed more than once for the number of stored pending information. However, from the viewpoint of suppressing a decrease in attention and understanding of one special hold notice due to duplication of special hold notices, a configuration in which the number of possible duplicates is adjusted as in the above embodiment is preferable.

(8) Character PM and item A are not limited to the above. For example, the character PM may not be always displayed, or a plurality of character PM types may be set so that the player can select which character PM to display. Needless to say, the displayed position and size of the character PM are not limited to those described above.

The item A given as a privilege based on the establishment of the special condition may be, for example, the level of the character PM or the experience value for raising the level.

(9) As a special condition, the condition is satisfied that the predetermined set time elapses and becomes "00.00", but the condition is not limited as long as the condition establishment probability changes based on the elapse of time. .. For example, a set time may be provided for each game, such as "30 sec elapses in the next game" or "40 sec elapses within 2 game times".

Further, it may be a special condition that the number of executions of a predetermined effect that may occur during the game round reaches a predetermined number. Specifically, the predetermined effect may be a reach display, a notice effect such as a bubble notice or a fish school notice during the game round, or execution and stop of the variable display in one game round. It may be a so-called pseudo-continuous production in which the above is repeatedly performed, or in a gaming machine having an operation button or the like, it may be an operation instruction production of the operation button or the like. As these effects, it is preferable that the variation display time is set so that the number of occurrences increases as the display time increases. This can be a condition in which the probability of establishment changes with the passage of time. In this case, as the display of the special condition in the special hold notice, for example, a character display such as "Make the XX effect appear X times! The hold will change!" Can be considered.

In this case, as in each of the above embodiments, the number of occurrences of a predetermined effect required for satisfying the above conditions may be set based on the lottery counter and the number of hold information, or the hold information may change. The configuration may be such that the effect pattern is grasped based on the value of the type counter CS, the number of occurrences of a predetermined effect is grasped, and then the number of times required for satisfying the condition is set. In either case, the special hold notice can be diversified by making it possible to set the case where the condition is satisfied and the case where the condition is not satisfied.

(10) While the special hold notice is being executed, the special condition (predetermined set time) is always displayed, but even if the special condition is not displayed, some condition whose establishment probability changes based on the passage of time. If the player can grasp that the determination based on the above is performed, the details of the special conditions may not be displayed.

Further, even when the display is performed, the display may be such that the player can grasp the special condition at least from the start to the end of the special hold notice. For example, it may be configured to be displayed only at the start of the special hold notice, may be displayed at a predetermined timing in the middle of the special hold notice, or may be displayed and hidden repeatedly. You may. When not displayed, the visibility of the special hold notice may be relatively lower than when it is displayed.

As a method of hiding, there is a configuration in which the time display image Gp in the time display area GE is not simply displayed (for example, the time display area GE or the display screen G is partially or completely hidden). It may be configured to be hidden by another image (the time display image Gp is displayed on the back surface), or it may be shielded by a movable accessory or the like so as to be difficult or impossible to see from the front. It may be configured as such.

By doing so, even if it is difficult or impossible to visually recognize the time display image Gp, the player can grasp the passage of time with his own sense (such as counting in his head). It is possible to create various games. In this case, if the player knows the passage of time by himself / herself, only the player can grasp the success or failure of the special condition, and can add a sense of superiority to the surrounding players. can. In addition, if the time display image Gp is not visible and the subtraction other than the default subtraction is performed, the elapsed time that was grasped by one's own sense as described above when the time display image Gp becomes visible after that. There is a high possibility that different times will be displayed on the time display image Gp. In the case of a configuration in which subtraction other than the default subtraction is more likely to occur as the jackpot expectation is higher, as in each of the above embodiments, the time different from the time that the player has grasped by his / her own sense is displayed. It is thought that you will come to expect. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the enjoyment of grasping the passage of time by oneself in a situation where the time display image Gp cannot be visually recognized.

(11) The determination timing of the special condition is not limited to the high-speed fluctuation end timing of the lower symbol sequence Z3, and may be another timing. For example, it may be at the start of the game round of the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice (the timing when the hold image P moves to the execution display area Gb), or the hold information that is the target. It may be a predetermined timing in the game times before the game times. However, the later the determination timing of the special condition is, the more game times can be related to the success or failure of the special condition, so that the degree of attention to the related game times can be suitably increased. Become. Further, by setting the determination timing as a branch point of the effect during the game rotation (in each of the above embodiments, a branch point of whether or not reach display occurs), the determination is performed at the timing when the degree of attention increases. , It is possible to prevent the judgment from being overlooked.

(12) In the special hold notice, in addition to or instead of each subtraction pattern (default subtraction, shift subtraction, etc.), a pattern to be subtracted by the intervention of the player (for example, the operation of the operation unit 75) may be provided. In this case, the degree of subtraction may differ depending on the degree of participation and skill of the player.

Specifically, a self-subtraction pattern is added as the subtraction pattern. When this self-subtraction pattern is selected, a predetermined game effect is performed during the execution of the special hold notice. In the predetermined game production, the points obtained by the operation of the operation unit 75 can be changed, for example, a rhythm game, a four-choice quiz, an action game, and a shooting game. Then, the subtraction degree of the timer counter T is changed based on the obtained points. That is, in the case of a rhythm game, an effect of matching the instruction timing on the display screen G with the operation timing of the operation unit 75 is executed over a predetermined period (for example, 15 sec). If the operation timing matches the instruction timing (if the deviation is within the first predetermined range), subtraction of 4 sec is performed, and if the deviation is greater than that (the deviation is outside the first predetermined range and is within the second predetermined range). (If any) 2 sec subtraction is performed. If the deviation is more than that (if the deviation is outside the second predetermined range), the subtraction is not performed (the subtraction of 0 sec is performed). In this case, since the number of instruction timings (the number of game occurrences) can be adjusted on the gaming machine side, the success or failure of the special condition can be determined by the gaming machine as compared with the configuration in which the subtraction is performed only based on the operation on the player side. It can be managed to some extent on the side as well.

(13) The subtraction pattern is not limited to the above. For example, a pattern may be set in which the ball is subtracted for a predetermined time when the ball enters the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34, or the through gate 35. In this case, since the hold information is acquired based on the ball entering the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34, the subtraction time and the subtraction probability are set based on the hold information (information such as the game result). It may be configured. In this case, as in the seventh embodiment, if the acquired hold information can be the target of the hit / fail judgment before the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice, the game times during the special hold notice. The relationship with the variable display time of is clarified.

(14) The player may be able to select a predetermined set time when executing the special hold notice. That is, the player may predict the time required from the start to the end of the special hold notice, and if the prediction is correct, the hold image P may be changed as a privilege. Specifically, at the start of the special hold notice, a plurality of time displays (for example, 30 sec, 45 sec, 60 sec) are displayed, and the player selects one time display from the plurality of time displays. The time display selection may be configured based on the operation of the operation unit 75. Then, when the high-speed fluctuation display of the lower symbol string Z3 in the target game round is completed within the selected time, the subtraction corresponding to the selected time display is performed. For example, if 30 sec is selected, 1 sec is subtracted, if 45 sec is used, 5 sec is subtracted, and if 60 sec is used, 10 sec is subtracted. The subtraction probability may change according to the selected time. Since the player will be interested in whether or not the time selected by himself / herself has elapsed, the degree of attention can be suitably increased.

(15) In the special hold notice, the predetermined set time is set based on the variable display time of the game times of the hold information that is digested before the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice. , If the configuration is set based on the pending information other than the pending information that is the target, the configuration may be set based on the pending information that is digested after the pending information that is the target. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the degree of attention not only to the special hold notice but also to the game times related to other hold information.

(16) In the shift subtraction process, the predetermined set time is subtracted according to the shift of the reserved information, but the predetermined set time may be added at the time of shift. In this way, by providing not only the pattern that is subtracted after the fact but also the pattern that is added, it is possible to draw attention to the special hold notice until the end. The timing of addition is not limited to the shift time, and may be another timing.

Further, the probability of addition and the time at the time of addition may be changed according to the type of hold information shifted to the execution area AR (for example, the type of the game result or the hold image P).

(17) In addition to the type of hold information shifted to the execution area AR and the number of hold information, the modification of the predetermined set time in the special hold notice includes, for example, the high and low of the winning / fail lottery mode and the support mode, and the firing handle 54. It may be configured to be performed according to the operation situation (launch intensity and launch duration).

(18) The presence / absence of execution of the subtraction at the time of shift and the subtraction time are determined each time the hold information is shifted, but it may be performed at the start of the special hold notice or at other timings. If the configuration is performed at the start, the time can be set in consideration of the subtraction at the time of shift. However, if the configuration is determined after the fact, the player can experience how the probability of establishing the special condition changes according to the game situation, and the result is predicted at the start of the production like a so-called finished race. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as ending up.

(19) Difficulty in establishing the special condition at the start (length of a predetermined set time) when the reserved image to be changed from the fourth reserved image P4 is determined by lottery or the like based on the establishment of the special condition. The image for holding the change destination may be different depending on the situation. Further, the holding image of the change destination is not limited to the holding image on the side where the jackpot expectation is high, and may have a configuration including a pattern which becomes the holding image on the low side.

(20) In the special hold notice, the predetermined set time is set by the hold information different from the hold information that is the target of the special hold notice, but the execution mode in the special hold notice is determined by the different hold information. In the configuration to be set, the mode of setting with the different hold information is not limited to the above. For example, in the special hold notice, a predetermined set time (special condition) is set based on the variable display time of the different hold information, and the hold image that changes based on the establishment of the special condition is the game result of the different hold information. It may be configured to be set based on.

Further, the special hold notice is set to the same effect as the normal hold notice in each of the above embodiments, and which of the hold images P1 to P5 to be displayed is set based on the different hold information. The display image may be set based on the different hold information as a hold notice different from the normal hold notice.

Even in these cases, the execution mode may be set at the start of the special hold notice, or the execution mode may be set after the start. The configuration set after the start can more clearly reproduce the setting according to the game situation, and the execution mode can be diversified.

(21) Regarding the special hold notice, the probability of execution increases as the number of holds at the time of hold acquisition increases, but the probability of execution may decrease as the number of holds increases. Further, the probability of execution may be higher or lower as the variable display time of the hold information held or the hold information of the game being executed is longer. Further, the setting time of the special hold notice may be set according to the fluctuation display time of the hold information held or the hold information of the game being executed.

(22) In each of the above embodiments, the display control device 212 is controlled by the effect control device 82 based on the command output from the main control device 81, but instead of this, the main control device 81 The display control device 212 may control the effect control device 82 based on the output command. Further, instead of the configuration in which the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 are separately provided, the configuration in which both the control devices 82 and 212 are provided as one sub-side control device may be used. Further, the functions of the effect control device 82 or the display control device 212 may be integrated in the main control device 81, and the functions of both the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 may be integrated in the main control device 81. May be.

(23) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, which is a big hit when a right is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

Further, the configuration is such that the hold information is acquired based on the winning of the operating ports 33 and 34, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a start lever is provided and the hold information is acquired based on the operation of the start lever. It may be configured to be. In short, the conditions for acquiring the pending information are arbitrary.

(24) A non-ballistic gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, the player is given a privilege such as paying out a medal. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

In addition, the main body of the gaming machine supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is equipped with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start rotation of a reel.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

In addition, the invention described in each of the following features states, "For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a hitting game state is triggered by the fact that the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry portion provided in the gaming area. A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as, etc. Further, for example, in a display device provided in a game area, a variation display of a pattern is started based on the above lottery, and the variation is said. Regarding the technical background of "a display effect for one game is executed in which the stop result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed at the final stop display of the display (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853)". Here, it is necessary to raise the degree of attention to the game in the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Further, the inventions described in the following feature groups may be individually combined with different feature groups, and a part or all of the inventions may be combined and applied to the inventions described in the different feature groups. May be good.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. In a gaming machine that can grant benefits (for example, open / close execution mode and high frequency support mode) based on the result of the game.
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball into the game area, and
A ball entry portion (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34) provided in the game area where the game ball can enter, and
Information acquisition means (means for executing a winning process for the operating port by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry portion.
Based on the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, a grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) for determining whether or not to grant the privilege to the player, and
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, the effect setting means (game turn control by the main control device 81) for setting the effect (for example, the game turn effect or the hold notice) to be performed by the predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41). Function to execute processing) and
An effect executing means (a function of executing a variation display control process by the effect control device 82) for executing the effect set by the effect setting means by the predetermined notification means, and
When the effect set by the effect setting means is a predetermined predetermined effect (hold notice), another special effect (special hold notice) is given to the predetermined notification means or different from it. Special effect execution means (function to execute special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) that can be executed by the notification means, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

Special information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry portion provided in the game area, and based on this special information, a grant determination is made as to whether or not the privilege is granted, and the grant determination is made. In a gaming machine in which the effect is executed by a predetermined notification means based on the above, for example, when this effect is a so-called game turn effect for notifying the result of each grant determination, the game turn effect. If the predetermined effect of the above has a long operation period and the period until the result of the grant determination corresponding to the predetermined effect is notified is long, the player will have to wait until then, and this period is redundant. You may feel that something is wrong. Further, for example, in a gaming machine capable of storing a plurality of special information, if this predetermined effect is a so-called look-ahead effect corresponding to a plurality of destination special information, other special information is given up to the special information. Since the result of the determination is notified, the player has to wait until the result of the determination of granting the special information corresponding to the predetermined effect is notified. Therefore, when such a predetermined effect is set, if a special effect different from that is executed by a predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined effect, the grant determination is determined based on the predetermined effect. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest due to the feeling of delay until the result is notified. As a result, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

If the special effect is not executed in place of the predetermined effect but is executed in parallel with the predetermined effect, the above-mentioned effect due to the execution of the special effect can be suitably achieved.

In addition, if it is determined whether or not to grant the privilege to the player based on the special effect, and the privilege is given based on the determination result, it is possible to further increase the degree of attention to the special effect. Will be. In this case, if the privilege given based on the above special information is expressed as the first privilege and the privilege given based on the special effect is expressed as the second privilege, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the two. Then, if the grant determination for the second privilege granted based on the special effect is performed based on information different from the result of the grant determination of the first privilege that triggered the predetermined effect, the predetermined effect It becomes clear that the special production is different from the special production, and it is possible to appropriately enjoy each production.

Feature A2. In a gaming machine that can grant benefits (for example, open / close execution mode and high frequency support mode) based on the result of the game.
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball into the game area, and
A ball entry portion (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34) provided in the game area where the game ball can enter, and
Information acquisition means (means for executing a winning process for the operating port by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry portion.
Based on the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, a grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) for determining whether or not to grant the privilege to the player, and
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, the effect setting means (game turn control process by the main control device 81) for setting the effect (game turn effect) to be performed by the predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) is executed. Function) and
An effect executing means (a function of executing a variation display control process by the effect control device 82) for executing the effect set by the effect setting means by the predetermined notification means, and
Equipped with
The effect setting means starts the game turn operation as the effect based on the grant determination, and ends the game turn operation as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination as one game turn. , The operation for the game round in each game round is set.
The game round operation is set with a plurality of execution modes including at least a short-term mode in which the operation period is short and a long-term mode in which the operation period is longer than the short-term mode. The game rounding operation is performed in the set execution mode.
When the operation mode of the game rotation operation set by the effect setting means is the long-term mode, a special effect (special hold notice) is given by the predetermined notification means or another notification means. A gaming machine characterized by having a special effect executing means (a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) that can be executed.

Special information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry portion provided in the game area, and based on this special information, a grant determination is made as to whether or not the privilege is granted, and the grant determination is made. In a gaming machine in which a game rotation operation as an effect of a game rotation is executed by a predetermined notification means based on the above, when a long-term mode in which the operation mode of the game rotation operation is long is set. The period until the result of the corresponding grant determination is notified becomes long, and this period may be perceived as redundant. Therefore, when the game rotation operation that is in such a long-term mode is set, if the special effect is executed by a predetermined notification means or another notification means, the game rotation operation can be performed. Based on this, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a feeling of delay until the result of the grant determination is notified. As a result, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

It should be noted that if the special effect is not executed in place of the long-term mode of the game rotation operation but is executed in parallel with the game rotation operation, the above-mentioned effect due to the execution of the special effect is achieved. The effect can be suitably achieved.

In addition, if it is determined whether or not to grant the privilege to the player based on the special effect, and the privilege is given based on the determination result, it is possible to further increase the degree of attention to the special effect. Will be. In this case, if the privilege given based on the above special information is expressed as the first privilege and the privilege given based on the special effect is expressed as the second privilege, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the two. Then, if the grant determination for the second privilege granted based on the special effect is made based on information different from the result of the grant determination of the first privilege that triggered the game rounding operation, the configuration is such. It becomes clear that the game turning motion and the special effect are different effects, and it is possible to appropriately enjoy each effect.

Feature A3. In a gaming machine that can grant benefits (for example, open / close execution mode and high frequency support mode) based on the result of the game.
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball into the game area, and
A ball entry portion (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34) provided in the game area where the game ball can enter, and
Information acquisition means (means for executing a winning process for the operating port by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry portion.
Acquired information storage means (a function of executing the process of step S205 by the main control device 81) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, which is a plurality of predetermined numbers, and
A function of executing a grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) for sequentially determining whether or not to grant the privilege to the player based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. )When,
When the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the target of the grant determination at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes the target of the grant determination by the grant determination means. (Function to execute confirmation processing for hold by the main control device 81) to specify the information corresponding to the result of the grant determination of
Based on the specific result by the prior identification means, the effect performed by the predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes the target of the grant determination by the grant determination means. An effect setting means for setting (hold notice) (a function of executing a hold display process by the effect control device 82) and
An effect executing means (a function of executing a hold increase process by the effect control device 82) for executing the effect set by the effect setting means by the predetermined notification means, and
When the effect set by the effect setting means is a predetermined effect (for example, the second reserved image P2), another special effect (special hold notice) is given to the predetermined notification means. Alternatively, a special effect executing means (a function of executing the special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) that can be executed by another notification means, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In a gaming machine in which special information is acquired based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry portion provided in the game area, and whether or not a privilege is granted is determined based on this special information. This special information can be stored up to a predetermined number, which is a plurality of numbers, and information corresponding to the result of the grant determination is specified at a timing prior to the grant determination of the predetermined special information. An effect based on the specified information, a so-called look-ahead effect, is performed by a predetermined notification means. Then, when this effect is a predetermined predetermined effect, a special effect different from that is performed by a predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means. In this case, for example, even if the player predicts or grasps that the result of the grant determination corresponding to the effect based on the predetermined effect is the result of being able to obtain the privilege, and wants to obtain the privilege as soon as possible. Since the predetermined effect is performed before the special information is subject to the grant determination, it is necessary to wait until the grant determination. Therefore, this period may be perceived as redundant. Therefore, when such a predetermined effect is set, if a special effect different from that is executed by a predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined effect, the grant determination is determined based on the predetermined effect. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest due to the feeling of delay until the result is notified. As a result, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

If the special effect is not executed in place of the predetermined effect but is executed in parallel with the predetermined effect, the above effect due to the execution of another effect can be suitably achieved. ..

In addition, if it is determined whether or not to grant the privilege to the player based on the special effect, and the privilege is given based on the determination result, it is possible to further increase the degree of attention to the special effect. Will be. In this case, if the privilege given based on the above special information is expressed as the first privilege and the privilege given based on the special effect is expressed as the second privilege, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the two. Then, if the grant determination for the second privilege granted based on the special effect is performed based on information different from the result of the grant determination of the first privilege that triggered the predetermined effect, the predetermined effect It becomes clear that the special production is different from the special production, and it is possible to appropriately enjoy each production.

Further, if the predetermined effect is an effect in which the expectation that the first privilege is given is higher than that of other effects, when the predetermined effect is performed, the determination of the special information corresponding to the predetermined effect is made earlier. The player should think that it is done, and by doing so, it becomes possible to more preferably play the effect of performing the special effect as described above.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. In a gaming machine that can grant benefits (for example, open / close execution mode and high frequency support mode) based on the result of the game.
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball into the game area, and
A ball entry portion (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34) provided in the game area where the game ball can enter, and
Information acquisition means (means for executing a winning process for the operating port by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry portion.
Based on the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, a grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) for determining whether or not to grant the privilege to the player, and
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, the effect setting means (game turn control by the main control device 81) for setting the effect (for example, the game turn effect or the hold notice) to be performed by the predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41). Function to execute processing) and
An effect executing means (a function of executing a variation display control process by the effect control device 82) for executing the effect set by the effect setting means by the predetermined notification means, and
When the effect set by the effect setting means is a predetermined predetermined effect (hold notice), another special effect (special hold notice) is given to the predetermined notification means or different from it. Special effect execution means (function to execute special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) that can be executed by the notification means, and
In the special effect executed by the special effect executing means, a determination means (timer management process by the effect control device 82) for determining whether or not a special condition in which the establishment probability changes based on the elapse of a predetermined set period is satisfied. Function to execute) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

Special information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry portion provided in the game area, and based on this special information, a grant determination is made as to whether or not the privilege is granted, and the grant determination is made. In a gaming machine in which the effect is executed by a predetermined notification means based on the above, for example, when this effect is a so-called game turn effect for notifying the result of each grant determination, the game turn effect. If the predetermined effect of the above has a long operation period and the period until the result of the grant determination corresponding to the predetermined effect is notified is long, the player will have to wait until then, and this period is redundant. You may feel that something is wrong. Further, for example, in a gaming machine capable of storing a plurality of special information, if this predetermined effect is a so-called look-ahead effect corresponding to a plurality of destination special information, it is determined that other special information is given up to the special information. Since the result of the above is notified, the player has to wait until the result of the grant determination regarding the special information corresponding to the predetermined effect is notified. On the contrary, if the operation period of the predetermined effect is short or the number of special information stored is small, it may be difficult to perform a sufficient effect, which may give the player a sense of insufficiency in the effect.

Therefore, when this predetermined effect is selected, the special effect is executed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means, and in this special effect, the probability of establishment is determined based on the elapse of the predetermined set period. The configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the changing special conditions are satisfied. Therefore, for example, if the production is different depending on the success or failure of this special condition, or if a privilege is given, it is possible to draw attention to the length of the period in which this special production is performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the feeling of extension during the period until the result of the grant determination is notified based on the predetermined effect, and to suitably suppress the deterioration of the interest, and conversely, the operation period of the predetermined effect is short. In some cases, if a special effect is performed, it can be expected that the degree of attention will increase as much as the special effect is performed in addition to the predetermined effect, and it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in interest. As a result, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

If the special effect is not executed in place of the predetermined effect but is executed in parallel with the predetermined effect, the above-mentioned effect due to the execution of the special effect can be suitably achieved.

Further, if the privilege is given based on the establishment of the special condition (determination result of the determination means), it is possible to further increase the degree of attention to this special effect. In this case, if the privilege given based on the above special information is expressed as the first privilege and the privilege given based on the establishment of the special condition is expressed as the second privilege, the two can be clearly distinguished. Then, if the grant determination for the second privilege granted based on the establishment of the special condition is made based on information different from the result of the grant determination of the first privilege that triggered the predetermined effect, the present invention is used. It becomes clear that the predetermined production and the special production are different productions, and it is possible to appropriately enjoy each production.

If the "special condition in which the establishment probability changes based on the elapse of a predetermined setting period" is set to the "special condition in which the establishment probability increases based on the elapse of a predetermined setting period", the grant determination based on the predetermined effect is made. The longer the period until it is performed, the easier it is for the special conditions to be established, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of making the period up to that point feel redundant.

Further, if the "special condition in which the establishment probability changes based on the elapse of a predetermined setting period" is set to the "special condition in which the establishment probability decreases based on the elapse of a predetermined setting period", the grant determination based on the predetermined effect is made. The shorter the period until it is performed, the easier it is for the special conditions to be established. The feeling can be reduced.

Further, when a means for granting a privilege is provided based on the establishment of a special condition, the configuration is such that "if the determination means determines that the special condition is not satisfied, the privilege is not granted". It is possible to more preferably increase the degree of attention as to whether or not the special conditions are satisfied.

Then, the configuration of the "determining means" is changed to "in the special effect executed by the special effect executing means, a special condition in which the probability of establishment changes based on the lapse of a predetermined set period is set at a predetermined timing in the predetermined effect. By using "a determination means for determining whether or not the determination is established", the determination timing of the determination means becomes clearer. If this predetermined timing is set to "a timing before the end timing of the predetermined effect", the continuation of the predetermined effect can be enjoyed in the situation where the success or failure of the special condition is determined, for example, the establishment of the special condition. By making the contents of the predetermined production different based on the above, it is possible to clearly feel the superiority of the establishment of the special condition through the predetermined production.

If the effect set by the "effect setting means" is an effect for a game round, a special effect is performed when a predetermined effect is set among the effects for the game round, and this predetermined effect is It is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention of the game times to be performed. As a specific configuration in this case, the configuration of the "directing execution means" and the "special production execution means" may be used.
"The effect executing means starts the game rotation operation as the effect based on the grant determination, and ends the game rotation operation as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. As a result, the game round operation in each game round is executed by the predetermined notification means.
The game round operation is set with a plurality of execution modes including at least a short-term mode in which the operation period is short and a long-term mode in which the operation period is longer than the short-term mode. The game rounding operation is performed in the set execution mode.
When the operation mode of the game rotation operation set by the effect setting means is the long-term mode, a special effect (special hold notice) is given by the predetermined notification means or another notification means. It is equipped with a special effect execution means (a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) that can be executed. "
It is good to say.

Further, if the effect set by the "effect setting means" is a so-called look-ahead notice (holding notice) effect, the special effect is performed when the predetermined effect is set in the look-ahead notice, and the predetermined effect is performed. It is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention during the period until the game round is performed for the special information that triggered the event. As a specific configuration in this case, "the acquisition information storage means (main control device 81) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, which is a plurality of predetermined numbers. A function of executing the process of step S205) ”, and the configuration of the“ grant determination means ”is given to the player based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Grant determination means (function to execute the hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) that sequentially determines whether or not to grant.
Further, "with respect to the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination at a timing prior to the subject of the grant determination by the grant determination means. A destination identification means (a function of executing a confirmation process for holding by the main control device 81) for specifying information corresponding to the result of the grant determination in the case of a failure, and
Based on the specific result by the prior identification means, the effect performed by the predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes the target of the grant determination by the grant determination means. An effect setting means for setting (hold notice) (a function of executing a hold display process by the effect control device 82) and
An effect executing means (a function of executing a hold increase process by the effect control device 82) for executing the effect set by the effect setting means by the predetermined notification means, and
When the effect set by the effect setting means is a predetermined effect (for example, the second reserved image P2), another special effect (special hold notice) is given to the predetermined notification means. Alternatively, it is provided with a special effect executing means (a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) that can be executed by another notification means. "
It is good to say.

Feature B2. The feature B1 is provided with a condition notification means (a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) for notifying the special condition by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the notification means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, it is possible for the player to grasp the special conditions. As a result, the relationship between the predetermined set period related to the probability of establishment of the special condition and the special effect is clarified, and the probability of establishment of the special condition is determined according to the length of the period of the special effect, that is, the length of the period of the predetermined effect. You can fully entertain how it changes.

Feature B3. The condition notification means includes a advance notification means (a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) that executes notification of the special condition at a timing prior to the determination by the determination means. The gaming machine according to feature B2, which is characterized by being present.

According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the special condition at a timing prior to the determination of success or failure. Since the probability of establishment of a special condition changes with the passage of time, if the special condition is grasped at the earliest possible timing, it is possible to fully entertain whether or not the special condition is satisfied. ..

Feature B4. The advance notification means is provided with means for executing notification of the special condition (a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) based on the start of the lapse of the predetermined setting period. The gaming machine according to the feature B3.

According to the above configuration, since the notification of the special condition is performed based on the start of the predetermined elapsed period, it is possible to entertain the success or failure of the special condition as much as possible for the period involved in the success or failure of the special condition.

Feature B5. The advance notification means is characterized in that it includes means for executing notification of the special condition (a function of executing a special hold notice control process by the effect control device 82) in the middle of the elapse of the predetermined set period. The gaming machine according to the feature B3 or the feature B4.

According to the above configuration, since the notification of the special condition is performed in the middle of the elapse of the predetermined setting period, it is possible to make the player grasp the change in the probability of establishment of the special condition. This makes it possible for the player to clearly understand the relationship between the period during which the special effect is performed and the probability that the special condition is satisfied.

Feature B6. The condition notification means is provided with a post-notification means (a function of executing the process of step S2701 by the effect control device 82) to execute the notification of the special condition at the timing after the determination by the determination means is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B5.

According to the above configuration, the special condition can be grasped even after the determination by the determination means. That is, it is possible to grasp the success or failure of the special condition even after the determination timing. By doing so, it is possible to leave an interest in whether or not the special condition is satisfied as a lingering sound even after the timing of granting the condition, and it is possible to prevent the degree of attention from being extremely lowered after the determination. can.

Feature B7. The gaming machine according to feature B6, wherein the post-notification means notifies the establishment probability at the time of determination of the determination means as notification of the special condition.

According to the above configuration, since the notification regarding the establishment probability at the time of determination is performed, it is possible to grasp not only the success or failure of the special condition but also the degree thereof. Therefore, for example, when the special condition is not satisfied, it is possible to grasp how soon it is satisfied, and it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the degree of attention based on the fact that the special condition is not satisfied. ..

Feature B8. It is provided with acquired information storage means (a function of executing the process of step S205 by the main control device 81) to store the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number which is a plurality of predetermined numbers. ,
The grant determination means sequentially performs the grant determination with respect to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The destination specifying means (for holding by the main control device 81) that specifies the information about the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means at the timing before the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination. Function to execute confirmation processing) and
Condition setting means (a function of executing the special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) for setting the special condition based on the specific result by the prior identification means, and
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7.

According to the above configuration, special conditions are set based on the information of predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Therefore, a game of predicting predetermined special information from the special condition is added, and the game is diversified. That is, by associating the special condition with the special information that triggers the grant determination by the grant determination means, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention regarding the success or failure of the special condition.

The "special condition" set by the condition setting means can be simply rephrased as "predetermined setting period" or "special condition at the start of the predetermined setting period".

Feature B9. Based on the fact that the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means, the game rotation operation is started by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the notification means, and the game is as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. It is provided with a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process by the main control device 81) so that the game rotation operation is terminated once the game rotation operation is completed.
The game turn control means includes an operation period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game rotation operation is performed over a period of time.
The destination specifying means sets the information of the operation period set by the operation period setting means at a timing before the game times to be set by the operation period setting means are executed by the game times control means. Equipped with a means for specifying the destination operation period specified in (a function of executing the effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82).
The condition setting means includes a first setting means (a function of executing a timer input process at a time specifying pattern by the effect control device 82) for setting the special condition based on the specific result of the prior operation period specifying means. The gaming machine according to feature B8, which is characterized in that it is used.

According to the above configuration, special conditions are set based on the information of the operation period specified by the prior operation period specifying means. Therefore, the relationship between the special condition and the operation period in the game round can be further enhanced, and the probability of establishment of whether or not the special condition is satisfied can be associated with the length of the operation period. Therefore, the effect can be suitably executed.

Feature B10. The condition setting means includes a second setting means (a function of executing a timer input process at the time of a normal pattern by the effect control device 82) for setting the special condition regardless of the specific result of the prior operation period specifying means. The gaming machine according to feature B9, which is characterized by being present.

According to the above configuration, if the operation period cannot be specified first by the first operation period specifying means, for example, even if the operation period is determined only at the start of the game round, the special condition is set by the second setting means. It becomes possible to set. Therefore, the effect can be suitably executed.

Feature B11. The game state is set to a special game state in which the operation period can be specified by the advance operation period specifying means regardless of any special information.
The gaming machine according to feature B9 or feature B10, wherein the special condition is set during the special gaming state.

According to the above configuration, if any special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the information of the operation period can be specified in advance during the special gaming state, and special conditions are set in such a state. By doing so, there is no inconvenience that the information on the operation period cannot be specified. This makes it possible to suitably realize an effect using special conditions.

Feature B12. The operation period set by the operation period setting means includes a first operation period (holding number correspondence pattern) that reflects a game situation (for example, the number of holds) when the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means. The second operation period (pattern that does not support the number of pending numbers), which is not so, is included.
The prior operation period specifying means is provided with means for specifying an operation period for the special information to be the second operation period (a function of executing an effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82). Characteristic The gaming machine according to any one of features B9 to B11.

Since the game status at the time of acquisition of special information and the game status at the time of grant determination may differ, even if the operation period is specified at a timing prior to the target of the grant determination, the operation period is specified by the means for specifying the subsequent operation period. The operating period at the time and the operating period at the time of grant determination may be different. Therefore, in the above configuration, not the first operation period in which such a game situation is reflected, but the second operation period is specified at a timing before the target of the grant determination, so that the operation is based on the difference in the game situation. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of specifying the period ahead. This makes it possible to suitably perform an effect using the operation period.

If the present configuration is applied to the feature B9, "the first setting means is based on the operation period specified by the means for specifying the operation period for the special information which is the second operation period. It is advisable to configure "set conditions".

Feature B13. When the operation period of the special information to be specified is the first operation period, the prior operation period specifying means specifies a provisional operation period as an operation period of the special information. The gaming machine according to feature B12, which comprises a provisional identification means (a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82 in the fourth embodiment).

Even if the operation period may differ based on the difference in the gaming situation as in the above configuration, if it is specified as a provisional operation period, it is possible to perform an effect based on at least the success or failure of the special conditions. That is, even if the operation period cannot be specified in advance, it is possible to suppress the monotonicization of the effect by leaving room for executing the effect.

If this configuration is applied to the feature B10, the configuration may be such that "the second setting means sets the special conditions based on the provisional operation period specified by the provisional identification means".

Feature B14. The special condition is set so that the probability of establishment increases as the predetermined setting period elapses.
The provisional specifying means is characterized in that a period that is equal to or less than the shortest period among the first operation periods that can be set by the operation period setting means is specified as the provisional operation period. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, since the operation period for provisional identification can be patterned in advance, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for provisional identification. Further, since the tentative specific period is equal to or less than the shortest period that can change thereafter, the probability of establishment of the special condition is also set to be equal to or higher than the highest probability of establishment. Here, if the probability that the special condition is satisfied becomes extremely low, the player may become accustomed to the fact that the special condition is not satisfied in another production different from the special production, and the interest in the success or failure of the special condition may be diminished. There is. Therefore, by making it easy for the special condition to be satisfied as in the above configuration, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of attention due to a decrease in the probability of establishment due to the provisional identification.

Feature B15. The special condition is set so that the probability of establishment increases as the predetermined setting period elapses.
The provisional specifying means specifies a period that is longer than the longest period among the first operation periods that can be set by the operation period setting means as the provisional operation period.
A means for modifying the special condition (in the fourth embodiment) at a timing after the timing at which the identification by the provisional identification means is performed and at a timing before the determination by the determination means is performed. The gaming machine according to the feature B13 or the feature B14, which is provided with a function of executing a shift subtraction process by the effect control device 82).

According to the above configuration, since the operation period for provisional identification can be patterned in advance, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for provisional identification. Further, since the tentative specific period is longer than the longest period that can change thereafter, the probability of establishment of the special condition is also set to be less than or equal to the lowest probability of establishment. Therefore, in the above configuration, by modifying the special conditions after that, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of attention due to a decrease in the probability of establishment due to the provisional identification.

The "correction" may be, for example, a configuration of "shortening / extending the predetermined setting period", and more specifically, "for the predetermined setting period, the provisional operation period and the operation". A configuration of "shortening / extending the difference between the operation period set by the period setting means" is conceivable.

Feature B16. It is provided with acquired information storage means (a function of executing the process of step S205 by the main control device 81) to store the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number which is a plurality of predetermined numbers. ,
The grant determination means sequentially determines whether or not to grant the privilege to the player based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
When the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the target of the grant determination at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes the target of the grant determination by the grant determination means. It is equipped with a destination identification means (a function of executing a confirmation process for holding by the main control device 81) for specifying information corresponding to the result of the grant determination.
The effect setting means is such that the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination by the grant determination means in the predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) based on the specific result by the prior identification means. It sets the production (holding notice) to be performed at the previous timing.
The effect executing means is given when the predetermined special information, which is the specific target, is the target of the grant determination based on the fact that the specific result by the prior specific means is a predetermined result. A special notification (holding notice) corresponding to the result of the determination is sent to the predetermined notification means or another notification means at a timing prior to the notification of the result of the grant determination regarding the predetermined special information. Is to be executed
The special effect executing means notifies the special effect to the predetermined notification means or another notification based on the content of the special notification executed by the effect executing means corresponding to the predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B15, which is characterized in that it is executed by means.

According to the above configuration, there is a possibility that the special notification is performed for the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means before the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination. As a result, it becomes possible to perform a game in which predetermined special information that has been specified by the prior identification means is predicted before the result of the determination of granting the predetermined special information is notified. Diversification is planned. Therefore, the degree of attention of the game can be increased. In the case of such special notification, if it is a special notification that makes it easy for the player to be given a privilege, the degree of attention to the special notification will increase, while the degree of attention to the production of other special information will increase. It may decrease. In addition, if it is a special notification that makes it difficult for the privilege to be given, there is a possibility that the degree of attention not only to the special notification but also to the subsequent production will be extremely reduced. Therefore, for example, when a predetermined effect is set as the special notification, if the special effect is performed by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means, the degree of attention may be lowered by performing the special notification. It is possible to draw attention to the special production side and avoid a decline in interest.

Feature B17. Based on the fact that the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means, the game rotation operation is started by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the notification means, and the game is as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. It is provided with a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process by the main control device 81) so that the game rotation operation is terminated once the game rotation operation is completed.
The game turn control means includes an operation period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game rotation operation is performed over a period of time.
The destination specifying means sets the information of the operation period set by the operation period setting means at a timing before the game times to be set by the operation period setting means are executed by the game times control means. Equipped with a means for specifying the destination operation period specified in (a function of executing the effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82).
The feature B16 is provided with a condition setting means (a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) for setting the special condition based on the specific result of the prior operation period specifying means. The described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, in the special effect executed based on the content of the special notification being the predetermined effect, the special condition is set based on the information of the operation period. Thereby, the special notification performed based on the predetermined special information and the information of the operation period can be associated with each other.

In this case, the special notification is to notify the predetermined special information, and the special conditions in the special effect executed based on the special notification are set based on the operation period other than the predetermined special information. It may be a configuration that is set based on the operation period of predetermined special information. In the former case, it is possible to raise the attention level of the predetermined special information by the special notification, and to raise the attention level of the other special information by the special effect. Further, in the latter case, the special notification and the special effect can be more closely related. For example, in the case of performing an effect suggesting that it is difficult to give a privilege in the special notification, a special condition is satisfied in the special effect. It is possible to diversify the production by making the composition easy to produce.

Feature B18. The condition setting means is the target of the grant determination before the predetermined special information that is the target of the special notification in the special notification that triggered the execution of the special effect by the special effect executing means. The gaming machine according to feature B17, wherein the special conditions are set based on the operation period specified by the prior operation period specifying means with respect to the special information.

According to the above configuration, since the special condition is set based on the operation period of the special information that is the target of the grant determination before the special information that is the target of the special notification, the special that is the target of the special notification is set. It is possible to raise interest in the operation period of the game round for the special information that is the target of the grant judgment before the information, and to avoid a decrease in the degree of attention to the production for other game rounds due to the special notification. Is possible.

Feature B19. Based on the fact that the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means, the game rotation operation is started by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the notification means, and the game is as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. It is provided with a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process by the main control device 81) so that the game rotation operation is terminated once the game rotation operation is completed.
In the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means, the first operation (reach generation) and the privilege are higher than the first operation at a timing prior to notifying the result of the grant determination of the grant determination means. The branch timing (high-speed fluctuation end timing of the lower symbol string Z3) is set to branch to the second operation (reach non-occurrence) in which the grant probability of is low.
The determination means is characterized in that it determines the success or failure of the special condition at the branch timing in the game rotation operation for the special information that triggered the special condition. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the above configuration, the success or failure of the special condition is determined at the branch timing between the first operation and the second operation. Further, at this branch timing, if the game rounding operation branches to the first operation, the probability of granting the privilege increases, while if the game branches to the second operation, the probability of granting is lower than that. In this case, it is conceivable to further add a branch effect in which the probability of grant is associated with the privilege, but if the effect becomes too complicated, there is a concern that the player's understanding will decrease, and as a result, there will be interest in the game. It is possible that it will fade. Therefore, by configuring the configuration to determine the special conditions different from the privilege at this branch timing, it is possible to suitably execute a plurality of branch effects related to the granting of the privilege while suppressing the complexity of the game.

Feature B20. A changing means (subtraction value adjustment by the effect control device 82) capable of changing the elapsed speed of the predetermined set period from the elapsed speed up to that point or changing the remaining period of the predetermined set period from the remaining period up to that point. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B19, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing).

According to the above configuration, the probability of establishment of the special condition changes as the elapsed speed or the remaining period of the predetermined set period changes. Thereby, for example, even if the special condition is unlikely to be satisfied, the special condition can be satisfied by changing the elapsed speed or the remaining period, and the special condition is likely to be satisfied, for example. Even so, it is possible to prevent the special conditions from being satisfied by changing the elapsed speed or the remaining period. That is, the process of success or failure of the special condition can be varied, and the degree of attention to the production can be suitably increased.

Feature B21. Based on the fact that the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means, the game rotation operation is started by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the notification means, and the game is as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. It is provided with a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process by the main control device 81) so that the game rotation operation is terminated once the game rotation operation is completed.
The game turn control means includes an operation period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game rotation operation is performed over a period of time.
The gaming machine according to feature B20, wherein the changing means is changed according to the operating period set by the operating period setting means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to further enhance the relevance of the probability of fulfillment of the special condition to the operating period, and it is possible to suitably avoid inconveniences based on the length of the operating period of the game.

Feature B22. The special condition is set so that the probability of establishment increases as the predetermined setting period elapses.
The gaming machine according to feature B21, wherein the changing means increases the elapsed speed of the change or shortens the remaining period of the change as the operating period is shorter.

According to the above configuration, when the operation period is short, the period during which the predetermined set period elapses is also shortened, so that the probability of the special condition being satisfied may be low. By changing the period so as to shorten it, it is possible to prevent the interest from diminishing by predicting that the special condition will not be satisfied due to the short operation period.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball into the game area, and
A ball entry portion (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34) provided in the game area where the game ball can enter, and
Information acquisition means (means for executing a winning process for the operating port by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry portion.
Acquired information storage means (a function of executing the process of step S205 by the main control device 81) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, which is a plurality of predetermined numbers, and
Grant determination means (main control device 81) that sequentially determines whether or not to grant a privilege (for example, open / close execution mode or high frequency support mode) to the player with respect to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Function to execute the pass / fail judgment process by
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player, the privilege granting means (according to the main control device 81) for granting the privilege to the player. Function to execute the game state transition process) and
Based on the fact that the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means, the game rotation operation is started by the predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41), and the game rotation is performed as the notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. A function of executing a game turn control process (a function of executing a game turn control process by the main control device 81) for controlling the predetermined notification means so that the game turn operation is terminated once the game turn operation is terminated. )When,
Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the predetermined special information corresponds to the result of the grant determination when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination, and the predetermined special information is the grant determination. A destination result specifying means (a function of executing a hold confirmation process by the main control device 81) to be specified at a timing earlier than the target, and
Corresponds to the result of the grant determination when the predetermined special information which is the specific target becomes the target of the grant determination based on the fact that the specific result by the prior result specifying means becomes a predetermined result. A special notification execution means (a function of executing a hold control command correspondence process by the effect control device 82) for executing the special notification to be performed by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means.
Equipped with
The special notification executing means is a setting means (second) capable of setting an execution mode of the special notification based on the special information different from the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing a shift subtraction process in the embodiment).

According to the above configuration, there is a possibility that the special notification is performed for the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means before the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination. As a result, it becomes possible to perform a game in which the predetermined special information targeted by the prior result specifying means is predicted before the game times corresponding to the predetermined special information, and the game is diversified. It is planned. Therefore, the degree of attention of the game can be increased. Here, in a gaming machine in which such a game time and a special notification are performed in parallel, if the production of the special notification is made flashy, the attention to the special notification can be increased, but the game time being executed is performed. There is a possibility that the degree of attention to will decrease. Therefore, the gaming machine is provided with a setting means for setting the execution mode of the special notification based on the special information different from the predetermined special information that triggered the execution of the special notification. Therefore, based on the special notification, not only the predetermined special information but also other special information can be associated with each other, and the attention of other special information can be increased. This makes it possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, "setting means that enables setting of the execution mode of the special notification" can be rephrased as "changing means that enables the execution mode of the special notification to be changed".

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the setting means can set an execution mode of the special notification after the start of the special notification.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to set the execution mode of the special notification based on other special information while the special notification of the predetermined special information is being executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to execute the special notification by taking into account not only the situation at the start of the special notification (presence / absence of other special information, type, etc.) but also the situation after the start, and execute the special notification. It is possible to diversify the aspects. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the special notification.

The above configuration can also be paraphrased as follows.
"The special notification executing means includes an execution mode setting means for setting an execution mode of the special notification based on the result of the grant determination when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination. The special notification is executed based on the execution mode set by the execution mode setting means.
The setting means can change the execution mode set by the execution mode setting means after the start of the special notification. "

Feature C3. The setting means sets the execution mode of the special notification based on the special information that is the target of the grant determination before the predetermined special information among the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, which comprises means that can be set (a function of executing the processing of step S2802 and step S2803 by the effect control device 82).

According to the above configuration, the execution mode is set based on the special information to be the target of the grant determination before the predetermined special information. The special information that is the target of the grant determination prior to the predetermined special information is the special information that is the target of the grant determination after the start of this special notification, and is based on the special information about the game times executed during the special notification. The execution mode of the special notification will be set. By doing so, it is possible to suitably increase not only the special notification but also the degree of attention to the game times during the execution of the special notification.

Feature C4. The grant determination means grants the grant determination for one special information acquired by the information acquisition means to the other special information acquired by the information acquisition means prior to the one special information. It is provided with a pre-determination means (a function of executing data setting processing by the main control device 81 in the seventh embodiment) to be performed prior to the determination.
The setting means is characterized in that it is possible to set the execution mode of the special notification based on the special information in which the grant determination is performed before the predetermined special information by the prior determination means. The gaming machine described in C3.

According to the above configuration, since the number of special information subject to the grant determination increases during the execution of the special notification, the chances and targets for setting by the setting means also increase. This makes it possible to diversify the execution mode of the special notification.

Further, if this configuration is applied to the feature C3, it is possible to perform the setting by the setting means based on the special information acquired after the start of the special notification and before the setting by the setting means. Therefore, it is meaningful to acquire the special information even after the start of the special notification, and it is possible to promote the continuation of the launch of the game ball.

Feature C5. A storage information notification means (effect) that executes a storage notification (notification by a holding image P) corresponding to the special information stored by the acquired information storage means by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing a hold display setting process by the control device 82).

According to the above configuration, the storage information notification means performs the storage notification for the special information stored in the acquired information storage means and which can trigger the setting of the execution mode of the special notification by the setting means. Therefore, for example, a game is added in which whether or not the execution mode of the special notification is set is predicted from the storage notification by the storage information notification means, and the special notification is executed based on the predetermined result. It is possible to raise the level of attention not only for notifications but also for other stored special information.

In addition, if the configuration is such that "the storage notification by the storage information notification means is performed based on the specific result by the prior result specifying means", the specific result by the prior result specifying means can be grasped by performing the storage notification. It becomes possible to clarify the significance of predicting the execution mode of the special notification from the memory notification.

Feature C6. The stored information notification means is a means for setting notification mode information corresponding to target special information from a plurality of notification mode information (a function of selecting a hold image P in the hold display setting process by the effect control device 82). The storage notification is executed using the notification mode information set by the setting means.
The special notification execution means executes the special notification using the notification mode information.
The setting means is the target of the special notification based on the notification mode information of the special information that is the target of the grant determination at a timing earlier than the predetermined special information that is the target of the special notification. The gaming machine according to feature C5, wherein the notification mode information for the predetermined special information is set to be different from the notification mode information.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the notification mode information is notified, and one of the notification mode information is the target of the special notification. The notification mode information that is the target of the special notification is different from that based on the notification mode information that corresponds to the special information that is the target of the grant determination before the notification mode information that is the target of the special notification. It can be set in the notification mode information. By doing so, in a situation where a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, each special information is not simply stored as a waiting list for grant determination, but the order and special information (notification). The type of mode information) is related to the special notification, and it becomes possible to make people interested in each special information.

Feature C7. The setting means is a selection means (operation correspondence subtraction by the effect control device 82) that enables selection of special information that triggers the setting of the execution mode of the special notification from the special information different from the predetermined special information. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing).

According to the above configuration, when a plurality of special information different from the predetermined special information exists, the selection means selects which special information is used as the basis for setting the execution mode of the special notification. By doing so, it is possible to make the setting more sophisticated than the configuration in which the execution mode of the special notification is simply set based on the special information different from the predetermined special information. That is, for example, assuming that the execution mode of the special notification is set to be preferable for the player in the other special information than in the one special information, the game is that the one special information is selected by the selection means. One would wish, for example, if there is only special information that could be set that is unfavorable to the player, let the game ball enter the entry section so that other special information is stored. Can be considered. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably increase the degree of attention to the special notification.

Feature C8. Equipped with an operation means (operation unit 75) for which the player operates.
The gaming machine according to feature C7, wherein the selection means is capable of selecting special information that triggers the setting of the execution mode of the special notification based on the operation of the operation means.

With the above configuration, it is possible to reflect the player's will in the setting of the execution mode of the special notification. As a result, the player can be involved in the production instead of the production performed unilaterally from the gaming machine side, and the player can be more absorbed in the game.

Feature C9. Any of the features C1 to C8, wherein the setting means can set an execution mode of the special notification based on the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the above configuration, it is clearer that the configuration is such that not only the special information different from the predetermined special information that triggered the special notification but also the execution mode of the special notification is set including the predetermined special information. Become.

Feature C10. The setting means is characterized in that it is possible to set an execution mode of the special notification based on the ball entry information of the game ball generated in the ball entry portion after the start of the special notification. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C9.

According to the above configuration, by using the ball entry information to the ball entry portion generated after the start of the special notification for setting the execution mode of the special notification, the game ball is launched even after the special notification is performed. Can give rise to the significance of continuing.

As described above, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the attention of the special notification, but the higher the attention of the special notification, the lower the attention of the production on the game side. Then, too much attention is paid to the started special notification, and the player may stop the launch of the game ball and watch the production (stop the game).

In a gaming machine configured to shorten the length of the gaming round when the number of stored special information is large, if the firing of the gaming ball is repeatedly stopped during the game, the smooth progress of the game is hindered for the player. It will be gained. In addition, if the launch of the game ball is repeatedly stopped during the game, it is difficult for the manager of the game hall to distinguish it from an illegal act (an act such as launching the game ball at an illegal timing), and as a result, it is illegal. There may be inconveniences such as making it difficult to detect the act. Therefore, as described above, if it is possible to set the execution mode of the special notification based on the ball entry information to the ball entry portion generated after the start of the special notification, the attention to the special notification can be increased, but during that time. , It is meaningful to continue firing the game ball, and it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game while avoiding the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature C11. The setting means uses the ball entry information of the game ball generated in the ball entry section in a situation where the predetermined number of the special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means to execute the special information. The gaming machine according to feature C10, which is characterized by having a configuration that can be set.

According to the above configuration, even when the acquired information storage means stores the upper limit number (predetermined number) of special information that can be stored, it is significant to allow the game ball to enter the ball entry portion. In particular, when the maximum number of special information is stored, the grant determination cannot be obtained even if more balls are entered (the special information is not acquired / stored), so that in general, It is thought that the player also wants to stop the launch of the game ball. On the other hand, even in such a situation, if the launch of the game ball is repeatedly stopped as described above, the inconvenience that it becomes difficult for the game hall to detect fraudulent activity may remain. Therefore, with the above configuration, it is meaningful for the player to continue firing the game ball even when the number of stored special information has reached the upper limit, and the game can be played while avoiding the above-mentioned inconvenience. The degree of attention can be improved.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball into the game area, and
A ball entry portion (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34) provided in the game area where the game ball can enter, and
Information acquisition means (means for executing a winning process for the operating port by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry portion.
Acquired information storage means (a function of executing the process of step S205 by the main control device 81) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, which is a plurality of predetermined numbers, and
Grant determination means (main control device 81) that sequentially determines whether or not to grant a privilege (for example, open / close execution mode or high frequency support mode) to the player with respect to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Function to execute the pass / fail judgment process by
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player, the privilege granting means (according to the main control device 81) for granting the privilege to the player. Function to execute the game state transition process) and
Based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, a game rotation operation is started by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41), and the game rotation is performed as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. A function of executing a game turn control process (a function of executing a game turn control process by the main control device 81) for controlling the predetermined notification means so that the game turn operation is terminated once the game turn operation is terminated. )When,
Equipped with
The game round control means includes an operation period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game round operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The predetermined notification means is controlled so that the game rotation operation is performed over the operation period.
Information on the operation period set by the operation period setting means when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the game times by the game time control means. (A function of executing the effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82) and the destination operation period specifying means (a function of executing the effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82).
Special notification execution that can execute special notification (special hold notice) that is started at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes the target of the game times by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means. Means (a function of executing the special hold notice setting process in the effect control device 82) and
Equipped with
The special notification execution means is an execution period setting means for setting an execution period of the special notification based on the operation period specified by the prior operation period specifying means (timer input at the time specifying pattern in the effect control device 82). A gaming machine having a function of executing a process) and executing the special notification based on an execution period set by the execution period setting means.

According to the above configuration, the special notification in which the execution period is set based on the operation period specified by the prior operation period specifying means is performed, and the game times related to the special information specified by the preceding operating period specifying means are performed. It may be started earlier than it is. That is, there is a possibility that the production of the corresponding operation period for one special information is performed at different start timings for the game times and the special notification. In this way, if a plurality of start timings for the production of one special information are provided, for example, if there is an inconvenience in performing the production for the special information, the inconvenience can be avoided by making the start timings different. be able to. As this inconvenience, for example, in a situation where a plurality of special information is acquired and it is easy to acquire the special information, it is necessary to smoothly perform a production corresponding to each special information, and a game about one special information. If the number of times is lengthened, the digestion will not be able to catch up with the acquisition of special information, and conversely, if the number of special information stored is small, the game time will be interrupted. Then, the player may misunderstand that the probability of granting the privilege is high. In this case, for example, a configuration in which only the result of the grant determination is notified after different start timings can be considered, but only the convenience of the production is given too much priority, and the production of one special information is sufficiently provided. It is not preferable to deviate from the original enjoyment of the gaming machine. In that respect, in the above configuration, even if the start timing is different, the operation period corresponds, so it can be said that the production of the special information is sufficiently performed. This makes it possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game while avoiding inconveniences in the production.

Feature D2. The operation period set by the operation period setting means includes a first operation period (holding number correspondence pattern) that reflects a game situation (for example, the number of holds) when the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means. The second operation period (pattern that does not support the number of pending numbers), which is not so, is included.
When the operation period of the special information to be specified is the first operation period, the prior operation period specifying means specifies the provisional identification means (fourth implementation) as a provisional operation period. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82 in the embodiment.

Even if the operation period may differ based on the difference in the game situation as in the above configuration, if it is specified as a temporary operation period, the special notification is started at least before the game times for the special information. be able to. By doing so, even when it is difficult to specify the operation period in advance, it is possible to increase the chance of executing the special notification by leaving room for executing the special notification.

Feature D3. The special notification execution means is provided with a correction means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3310 to S3313 by the effect control device 82) that can correct the execution period of the special notification after the start of the special notification. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2.

According to the above configuration, when an inconvenience occurs in the execution period on the special notification side, for example, when the previously specified operation period differs from the actual operation period, the period can be corrected, and the inconvenience can be caused. It can be avoided.

In addition, "correction" can be paraphrased as "shortening or extending the execution period".

Feature D4. The prior operation period specifying means includes means for specifying information regarding the operation period for special information other than the predetermined special information (a function of executing the processing of steps S1701 to S1703 by the effect control device 82).
The special notification execution means is a means (effect) including information on the operation period specified by a means for specifying information on the operation period for special information other than the predetermined special information, as the execution period of the special notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing the process of step S1704 by the control device 82).

According to the above configuration, the execution period of the special notification by the special notification execution means can be set as a period including the operation period of the special information other than the predetermined special information specified by the prior operation period specifying means. can. That is, in a configuration in which the special notification is started before the game round for the predetermined special information, the game for other special information performed from the start of the special notification to the start of the game round for the predetermined special information. The special notification can be continued even during the rotation. In other words, even if special information is included in addition to the predetermined special information, the special notification can be continued until the game of the predetermined special information. By doing so, it is possible to make the player clearly understand the relationship between the special notification and the game round, and it is possible to prevent the special notification from ending before the game round and diminishing interest. can.

Feature D5. The game state is set to a special game state in which the operation period can be specified by the advance operation period specifying means regardless of any special information.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein the special notification executing means can execute the special notification during the special gaming state.

According to the above configuration, if any special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the information of the operation period can be specified in advance during the special game state, and in such a state, the operation period can be specified. There is no inconvenience that the information cannot be specified. This makes it possible to suitably realize an effect of specifying the operation period in advance.

Feature D6. The special notification by the special notification executing means is executed so as to end at a predetermined timing during the game rotation for the predetermined special information.
A feature characterized by being provided with means for adjusting the start timing of the special notification (a function of executing the process of step S1710 by the effect control device 82) based on the information specified by the prior operation period specifying means. The gaming machine according to any one of D1 to D5.

According to the above configuration, by adjusting the start timing, it is possible to perform special notification according to the previously specified operation period without the need to modify the operation period or change the end timing. This makes it possible to suitably realize special notification for notifying the length of the operation period of the game.

Feature D7. The special notification by the special notification executing means is executed so as to end at a predetermined timing during the game rotation for the predetermined special information.
The game rotation control means is a means for adjusting the game rotation operation at the predetermined timing during the game rotation for the predetermined special information in response to the special notification (step S2503 by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to associate the effect at the end of the special notification with the game rotation operation by adjusting the game rotation operation at the end timing without modifying the previously specified operation period. .. As a result, the length of the operation period of the game round can be accurately notified while being associated with the operation for the game round.

<Characteristic E group>
Features E1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball into the game area, and
A ball entry portion (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34) provided in the game area where the game ball can enter, and
Information acquisition means (means for executing a winning process for the operating port by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry portion.
Grant determination means (main control device) that determines whether or not to grant the first privilege (for example, open / close execution mode or high frequency support mode) to the player based on the special information acquired by the information acquisition means. Function to execute the pass / fail judgment process by 81) and
The first privilege granting means for granting the first privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the granting determination means being the granting response result corresponding to the granting the first privilege to the player. (A function to execute the game state transition process by the main control device 81) and
Based on the fact that the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means, the game rotation operation is started by the predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41), and the game rotation is performed as the notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. A function of executing a game turn control process (a function of executing a game turn control process by the main control device 81) for controlling the predetermined notification means so that the game turn operation is terminated once the game turn operation is terminated. )When,
Equipped with
The game round control means includes an operation period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game round operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The predetermined notification means is controlled so that the game rotation operation is performed over the operation period.
A special notification executing means (a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) for executing a special notification by the predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. Prepare,
The special notification execution means is
A period presentation means (a function of executing various timer input processes by the effect control device 82) for presenting a predetermined set period, and
A second privilege granting means (by the effect control device 82) for granting a second privilege different from the first privilege to the player based on the fact that one or more of the game rotation operations have continued for the predetermined set period or longer. Function to execute hold display processing) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

Special information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry portion provided in the game area, and based on this special information, it is determined whether or not the first privilege is granted. In a gaming machine in which a game rotation effect (game rotation operation) is executed by a predetermined notification means based on a grant determination, if the game rotation effect is flashy and performed for a long time, the game time is increased accordingly. On the other hand, the degree of attention is increased, but the period of waiting until the first privilege is granted becomes long, which may make the player feel annoyed. Therefore, as in the above configuration, when one or more game rotation operations continue for a predetermined set period or longer, a second privilege different from the first privilege is given, thereby producing a game rotation effect. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience caused by the long operation period of. In particular, since the predetermined setting period is presented by the predetermined notification means or another notification means, the player can clearly understand the relationship between the operation period of the game times and the predetermined setting period. , The second privilege is given and the first privilege is given based on the production of the game times, which can be enjoyed in association with each other. As a result, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature E2. The special notification executing means is described in the feature E1 characterized in that the special notification is executed when the operating period set by the operating period setting means is equal to or longer than a predetermined predetermined period. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, when the operation period of the game round is equal to or longer than a predetermined predetermined period, the predetermined set period is presented, and if the operation for the game round continues for the set period or longer, the second privilege is provided. Is given. By doing so, even if the operation period of the game round is short, the special notification is performed and the second privilege is not easily granted, and the operation period of the game round is long. Inconvenience can be avoided efficiently.

Feature E3. It is provided with acquired information storage means (a function of executing the process of step S205 by the main control device 81) to store the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number which is a plurality of predetermined numbers. ,
The grant determination means sequentially performs the grant determination with respect to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Information on the operation period set by the operation period setting means when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the game times by the game time control means. Is provided with a destination operation period specifying means (a function of executing an effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82) for specifying the predetermined special information at a timing before the target of the game round.
The special notification executing means shall execute the special notification when the operating period of the predetermined special information specified by the prior operation period specifying means is equal to or longer than a predetermined predetermined period. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2.

According to the above configuration, when the operation period of the game round for the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is equal to or longer than the predetermined predetermined period, the predetermined set period is presented. If one or more game rounding operations continue for the set period or longer, the second privilege is granted. By doing so, it is possible to target the special notification for the game rotation operation of the game times before the start, and it is possible to expect an increase in the execution opportunity of the special notification.

Feature E4. The summing means (for example, by the effect control device 82) that sums the operation period for one predetermined special information specified by the prior operation period specifying means and the operation period for the other predetermined special information. A function to execute the process of step S1704) is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature E3, wherein the special notification executing means executes the special notification when the period summed by the summing means is equal to or longer than the predetermined period.

According to the above configuration, special notification can be performed based on the operation period for a plurality of game times before the start. As a result, the total of the operation periods tends to be longer than the predetermined period, and it is possible to expect an increase in the chances of executing the special notification.

Feature E5. It is provided with a remaining period grasping means (a function of executing the process of step S1708 by the effect control device 82) for grasping the remaining operation period in the game times being executed by the game times control means.
The game according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the special notification executing means executes the special notification in consideration of the remaining operation period grasped by the remaining period grasping means. Machine.

According to the above configuration, since the remaining operation period of the game times being executed is also taken into consideration, the game rotation operation being executed can be added as one or more game rotation operations targeted in the special notification. .. By doing so, the probability that the predetermined set period or longer will be exceeded is high, and the start of the special notification is not limited to the start of the game round, and the execution timing can be diversified.

If "adding the remaining operating period" is applied to a configuration such as feature E2 in which special notification is performed according to the length of the operating period, a configuration in which special notification is performed when the remaining operating period is long. May be. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the special notification is performed and the second privilege is difficult to be given when the remaining operation period of the game is short.

Further, "adding the remaining operation period" means that, when applied to a configuration in which the operation period is specified in advance as in feature E3, the configuration in which the operation period specified in advance and the remaining operation period are added up. May be. By doing so, it is possible to make people interested in whether or not the predetermined set period or longer is exceeded, including the game times being executed.

Feature E6. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the special notification executing means executes the special notification based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means.

According to the above configuration, the result of the grant determination can be associated with the execution of the special notification. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the first privilege is easy to be given / difficult to be given if the special notification is performed, and it is possible to entertain the player together with the game rounding operation.

Feature E7. Regarding the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means, the predetermined special information corresponds to the result of the grant determination when the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination, and the predetermined special information is the grant determination. It is equipped with a destination identification means (a function to execute a hold confirmation process by the main control device 81) to specify at a timing earlier than the target.
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the special notification executing means executes the special notification based on a specific result by the prior identification means.

According to the above configuration, the information about the special information before the grant determination can be associated with the execution of the special notification. As a result, if the special notification is performed, it is possible to create a situation in which the first privilege is likely to be granted / difficult to be granted based on the special information determined thereafter, and the result of the grant determination is predicted from the special notification. You can entertain the game.

When this configuration is particularly applied to the configuration of feature E3, it is possible to perform special notification by associating the information on the result of the grant determination with respect to the special information before the grant determination and the information on the operation period, thereby improving the degree of attention. More preferable.

Feature E8. It is provided with acquired information storage means (a function of executing the process of step S205 by the main control device 81) to store the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number which is a plurality of predetermined numbers. ,
The grant determination means sequentially performs the grant determination with respect to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Information on the operation period set by the operation period setting means when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the game times by the game time control means. Is provided with a destination operation period specifying means (a function of executing an effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82) for specifying the predetermined special information at a timing before the target of the game round.
The period presenting means according to any one of features E1 to E7, characterized in that the period presenting means presents a predetermined set period based on the information of the operating period specified by the prior operating period specifying means. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, since the predetermined set period is presented based on the information of the previously specified operation period, it is known in advance whether or not one or more game rounding operations continue for the predetermined set period or longer. While doing so, special notification can be given. As a result, whether or not the second privilege should be granted can be managed in advance on the gaming machine side, so that an effect corresponding to it, for example, an effect suggesting that the second privilege is easy to be given / difficult to be given is performed. Is possible.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball into the game area, and
A ball entry portion (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34) provided in the game area where the game ball can enter, and
Information acquisition means (means for executing a winning process for the operating port by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry portion.
Acquired information storage means (a function of executing the process of step S205 by the main control device 81) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, which is a plurality of predetermined numbers, and
Grant determination means (main control device 81) that sequentially determines whether or not to grant a privilege (for example, open / close execution mode or high frequency support mode) to the player with respect to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Function to execute the pass / fail judgment process by
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player, the privilege granting means (according to the main control device 81) for granting the privilege to the player. Function to execute the game state transition process) and
Based on the fact that the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means, the game rotation operation is started by the predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41), and the game rotation is performed as the notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. A function of executing a game turn control process (a function of executing a game turn control process by the main control device 81) for controlling the predetermined notification means so that the game turn operation is terminated once the game turn operation is terminated. )When,
The destination specifying means (for holding by the main control device 81) that specifies the information about the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means at the timing before the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination. Function to execute confirmation processing) and
Based on the fact that the specific result by the prior identification means is a predetermined result, it corresponds to the result of the grant determination when the predetermined special information which is the specific target is the target of the grant determination. A special notification execution means (a function of executing a hold control command correspondence process by the effect control device 82) for executing the special notification by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means.
Based on the special notification being performed by the special notification execution means, a predetermined effect is executed in the game times related to the special information different from the predetermined special information that triggered the execution of the special notification. Predetermined effect execution means (function to execute special hold notice setting process by effect control device 82) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, there is a possibility that the special notification is performed for the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means before the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination. As a result, it becomes possible to perform a game in which the predetermined special information targeted by the prior identification means is predicted before the game times corresponding to the predetermined special information, and the diversification of the game is achieved. Will be. Therefore, the degree of attention of the game can be increased. Here, in a gaming machine in which such special notification is performed, the higher the attention level of the predetermined special information is to the flashy special notification, the lower the attention level of the game times of other special information is. There is a possibility that it will be done. Therefore, the game times that are performed with great effort simply become a digestion game, and it becomes difficult to fully enjoy the game during that period. Therefore, if the configuration is such that a predetermined effect is performed in the game round of the other special information, and if the predetermined effect is interested, the degree of attention of the other special information during the game round is preferably applied. Can be enhanced.

In addition, if the predetermined effect is performed "based on the special information different from the predetermined special information that triggered the execution of the special notification", not only the execution timing of the predetermined effect but also the effect is performed. The content can also be related to the above-mentioned different special information, and the interest in the different special information can be suitably increased. Further, the predetermined effect may be expressed as "a predetermined effect different from the special notification".

Feature F2. The predetermined effect executing means is characterized in that the predetermined effect is executed in the game times related to the special information to be given, prior to the predetermined special information. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, when the special notification is performed, the game times up to the game times for the predetermined special information that is the target of the special notification are likely to be a digestion game. By performing a predetermined effect, it is possible to attract attention to the game even during the execution of the game times, which tends to lose attention as a digestion game.

Feature F3. A condition setting means (execution of a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) for setting a special condition whose probability of establishment may differ depending on the game situation during execution of the predetermined effect without considering that the special condition is satisfied. Function to do) and
Condition determination means (function for executing special hold notice processing at the time of stop by the effect control device 82) for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied, and
The gaming machine according to the feature F1 or the feature F2.

According to the above configuration, when a predetermined effect is performed, it is possible to draw attention to the playing situation during the execution. That is, it is possible to increase the relationship between a predetermined effect and the game situation during execution, and to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game, instead of simply performing each effect or game. And since the special condition that the probability of establishment may differ depending on the game situation is set without considering the success or failure, it is possible to avoid an event such as a so-called finished race in which the result is known on the way from other information. can. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a good balance of attention to the game.

In addition, if the configuration is provided with a granting means (a function of executing the granting process in the effect control device 82) for granting a privilege when the condition determining means determines that the special condition is satisfied, the degree of attention to the success or failure of the special condition is provided. Can be further enhanced. In this case, by making the privilege given based on the establishment of the special condition different from the privilege given based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, the effect of the game times on the grant determination side and the execution of the predetermined effect are performed. It is possible to clearly show that the determinations are different from each other while associating with the predetermined effect on the means side. In addition, "depending on the game situation" can be rephrased as "in relation to the game situation" or "depending on the game situation".

Features F4. The game according to feature F3, wherein the condition determination means determines whether or not the special condition is satisfied based on one or a plurality of the game rotation operations by the game rotation control means. Machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to associate the special notification based on the prior identification of the special information and the game rounding operation sequentially performed based on the special information through a predetermined effect. By doing so, it is possible to maintain a balance between the degree of attention between the special notification and the game rotation operation, and to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, "based on the game rotation operation" means "based on the operation period (length) of the game rotation operation" and "operation mode (operation content, effect content) of the game rotation operation". ) May be rephrased. In these cases, if the configuration is provided with "operation period setting means for setting the operation period of the game rotation operation" and "operation mode setting means for setting the operation mode of the game rotation operation", those setting means are used. The configuration may be such that the success or failure of the special condition is determined based on the set operation period and operation mode of the game rotation operation, and not only that, these operation periods and operation modes are changed during the game rotation operation. In the configuration to be obtained, the configuration may be such that the success or failure of the special condition is determined based on the operation period and the operation mode after the change.

Feature F5. The special condition is characterized in that the probability of establishment can be higher as the operation period of the game rotation operation in the game times related to the special information different from the predetermined special information is longer. Feature The gaming machine described in F4.

According to the above configuration, the longer the operation period of the game round related to the special information different from the predetermined special information that triggered the special notification, the easier it is for the special condition in the predetermined production to be satisfied. Even in a situation where the operation period of the game times related to the above is long and it may be perceived as redundant, it is possible to draw attention to a predetermined production side and maintain a good balance of attention to the production.

Feature F6. The predetermined notification means is a display means capable of variablely displaying a plurality of patterns.
The game rotation control means controls the display means so as to start variable display of the plurality of symbols as the game rotation operation, stop and display each of the symbols, and notify the determination result by the grant determination means. To do
The condition determining means is defined in any one of the features F3 to F5, which determines whether or not the special condition is satisfied based on the pattern stopped and displayed by the gaming times control means. The described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to relate the pattern that is stopped and displayed as a result of the grant determination in each game round to the success or failure of the special condition in the predetermined effect executed based on the special notification. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to each game while increasing the degree of attention to the special notification.

In particular, in the situation where special notification is performed as described above, there is a strong interest in the game results of the game times related to the special information that triggered the special notification, while the game results of other game times are of great interest. Interest may be diminished. It is considered that this is a problem caused by the player predicting that the game result of the other game times is out of order (the result that the privilege is not given) due to the special notification. On the other hand, if the possibility that the game result of these other game times is too high is increased, the attention to the special notification side may be reduced. Therefore, as described above, the success or failure of the special condition is determined by using each pattern notified as the game result of the other game times, so that the game result itself of the other game times can be changed. However, even if the result is out of order, special conditions can be established only by changing the production. By doing so, it is possible to raise the degree of attention of both in a well-balanced manner in a configuration in which the special notification and the predetermined effect are executed in parallel.

Feature F7. The condition presenting means (variation by the effect control device 82) that presents the special condition set by the condition setting means at a timing before the first of the plurality of symbols in the game rotation operation is stopped. The gaming machine according to feature F6, which is characterized by having a function of executing a start process).

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the success or failure of the special condition is determined based on the stop pattern, the special condition is presented at a timing before the first pattern in the game round is stopped. Therefore, as a player, it is not possible to know the success or failure of the special condition after the pattern is stopped, but in a configuration where the fluctuation display decelerates before the stop and the pattern is known to stop to some extent, it is slightly before the stop. The success or failure of special conditions can be recognized at the timing. By doing so, it is possible to attract attention to the variable display of the pattern and appropriately increase the degree of attention.

Feature F8. The condition presenting means presents the special conditions by presenting the corresponding information (bingo card 300, lotto card 320) corresponding to the pattern that is variablely displayed in the game rounding operation. The gaming machine described in F7.

According to the above configuration, since the variable display pattern and the special condition are associated with each other, it becomes easy for the player to understand. This makes it possible for the player to more easily entertain the predetermined effect.

Features F9. In the game rotation operation, the corresponding information corresponding to the pattern displayed in the stop is compared with the first aspect from the first aspect (mass before establishment) which is the state before the stop display. The game according to feature F8, which is provided with a switching means (a function of executing the process of step S4204 by the effect control device 82) for switching to the second aspect (established mass) that can be identified by the player. Machine.

According to the above configuration, the player can clearly grasp the success or failure of the special condition. This makes it possible to enjoy a predetermined effect even more easily.

Feature F10. The condition determining means determines that the special condition is satisfied based on the fact that the corresponding information according to the second aspect has a predetermined result (bingo establishment, lottery establishment). The gaming machine according to the feature F9, which is characterized by being provided.

According to the above configuration, the player notes that the correspondence information is the second aspect, and that it is a predetermined result. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand how the special conditions during the predetermined production are satisfied, and it becomes possible for the player to fully enjoy the game.

Features F11. The gaming machine according to any one of features F8 to F10, wherein the condition presenting means presents a plurality of correspondence information.

According to the above configuration, since a plurality of correspondence information is presented, the pattern corresponding to the single correspondence information must be stopped in the middle of the variable display as compared with the configuration in which the single correspondence information is presented. Even when predicted / grasped, it is possible to make people think that a special condition is satisfied by the corresponding information corresponding to other patterns, and it is possible to maintain the degree of attention to a predetermined effect. ..

Feature F12. The condition presenting means includes the same correspondence information as the means for presenting the special condition (the function of executing the special effect A1 and the special effect B1 in the effect control device 82) that includes different correspondence information as the correspondence information. It is provided with means for presenting conditions (a function of executing the special effect A2 and the special effect B2 in the effect control device 82).
The gaming machine according to feature F11, wherein the switching means has a configuration capable of switching a plurality of corresponding information corresponding to the stop display of one of the patterns to the second aspect.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where a special condition including the same correspondence information is presented, if the pattern corresponding to the correspondence information is stopped and displayed, the correspondence information is switched to the second mode. The degree of contribution to the special condition for the pattern suspension is increased, and the interest in the pattern suspension can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature F13. The condition presenting means has a configuration capable of presenting special correspondence information (established square "F") corresponding to a plurality of the patterns as one correspondence information, which are features F8 to F12. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the above configuration, any pattern corresponding to the special correspondence information can contribute to the establishment of the special condition regardless of which pattern is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the special conditions can be easily satisfied, and the player can look forward to the subsequent development.

Feature F14. The game according to any one of features F6 to F13, wherein the condition determining means determines whether or not the special condition is satisfied based on the plurality of patterns that are stopped and displayed. Machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to entertain the game such as whether or not a special condition is satisfied by a plurality of patterns. For example, in a configuration in which each symbol is stopped and displayed at different timings in one game, if the success or failure of the special condition is determined based on a plurality of symbols as in the above configuration, each symbol is stopped and displayed. It is possible to entertain the success or failure of the special condition at the timing. In addition, if the success or failure of the special condition is judged by a plurality of patterns that are stopped across the game times, even if the special condition is not satisfied in one game time, it may be satisfied in the next game time. It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation, such as, and to increase the degree of attention to the game more preferably.

Feature F15. A picture storage means (special hold when stopped by the effect control device 82) capable of storing the information of the pattern displayed stopped in the game times and holding the stored information over a plurality of times of the game times. Equipped with a function to execute advance notice processing)
The gaming machine according to feature F14, wherein the condition determining means determines whether or not the special condition is satisfied by using the stored information stored in the pattern storage means.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the success or failure of the special condition is determined based on a plurality of patterns, the success or failure of the special condition can be enjoyed over a plurality of game times, and the success or failure of the special condition is of interest. It is possible to prolong the period of time.

Features F16. The game time control means is the display means so that a specific pattern combination is stopped and displayed in the game time based on the result of the determination by the grant determination means corresponding to the grant of the privilege. Is to control
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F6 to F15, wherein the special condition is more likely to be satisfied when the specific pattern combination is not displayed than when the specific pattern combination is stopped.

According to the above configuration, the player pays attention to the display means in the expectation that the specific pattern combination is stopped and displayed in each game round, but the special condition is more likely to be established if the specific pattern combination is not stopped and displayed. .. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an extremely low degree of attention even when a specific pattern combination is not stopped and displayed while expecting the privilege to be given.

In addition, as a specific configuration for "the special condition is more likely to be satisfied if the specific pattern combination is not stopped and displayed", for example, "the special condition is stopped and displayed." On the premise of the configuration that "the more types of the patterns are, the easier it is to be established", "the specific pattern combination is a combination in which the number of types of the patterns is smaller than the combination in the case where the result corresponds to the non-granting of the privilege". The configuration is conceivable.

Feature F17. The game time control means is the display means so that a specific pattern combination is stopped and displayed in the game time based on the result of the determination by the grant determination means corresponding to the grant of the privilege. Is to control
In the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means, the specific pattern is used as an effect suggesting that the specific pattern combination is likely to be stopped and displayed before the specific pattern combination is stopped and displayed. Some of the symbols that make up the combination (the symbols that form the reach line, the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3, and the left and right symbol rows Y1 and Y3) are stopped, and other symbols that make up the specific symbol combination are used. A specific effect (reach display) is set to variablely display the included pattern group (medium symbol columns Z2 and Y2 that are variablely displayed during reach).
The condition determining means is defined in any one of the features F6 to F16, which determines the success or failure of the special condition based on the fact that the partial pattern and the other pattern are stopped and displayed. The described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, some of the symbols in the specific combination of symbols are stopped, and in the specific effect in which other symbols are variablely displayed, some of the symbols that are stopped and displayed are variablely displayed. The success or failure of the special condition is judged by the pattern of. Therefore, for example, if a part of the special condition is satisfied by some of the above-mentioned symbols, in addition to the enjoyment of whether or not a specific combination of symbols is stopped in the enjoyment of seeing other symbols in the variable display. However, fun such as whether or not special conditions are met will be added. As a result, unlike the conventional game in which the pattern is displayed in a variable manner to simply notify whether or not the privilege is given, the variable display of the pattern can be displayed from a more multifaceted perspective, and the game can be displayed. It is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention.

Feature F18. In the specific effect, the special condition is more when the pattern that does not form the specific pattern combination is stopped and displayed than when the pattern that forms the specific pattern combination is stopped and displayed as the other pattern. The gaming machine according to feature F17, which is characterized in that it is set so as to be easily established.

According to the above configuration, if a pattern that forms a specific pattern combination as another pattern is stopped and displayed in a specific effect, the player can obtain a privilege, and a pattern that does not form a specific pattern combination is stopped. If it is displayed, the special condition is satisfied. In this way, even if the result is that the player normally tends to be disappointed in a specific production, by giving the player some merit, the interest in the production is extremely reduced. It becomes possible to suppress it.

Feature F19. The game turn control means has a stop process of temporarily stopping the pattern in the middle of the variation display of the pattern as a step before the variation display of the pattern is stopped and displayed in correspondence with the determination result by the grant determination means. Is provided with a stop means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4115 and S4116 in the effect control device 82) capable of executing the above.
The gaming machine according to any one of features F6 to F18, wherein the condition determining means determines the success or failure of the special condition including the pattern stopped by the stopping means.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the pattern can be temporarily stopped before it is finally displayed as a stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination, the success or failure of the special condition including the temporarily stopped pattern is determined. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the fluctuation / stop of the pattern of each game, and as a result, increase the degree of attention to the success or failure of the special condition (predetermined effect). In other words, by reflecting a part of the production in the series of productions on the game round side in the success or failure of the special conditions, it is possible to relate the two more closely and synergistically increase the degree of attention of both. ..

Feature F20. When the condition determination means determines that the special condition is satisfied, the second privilege granting means (effect control) for granting a second privilege (rare image or the like) different from the privilege granted by the privilege granting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F19, which comprises a function of executing a privilege granting process in the device 82).

According to the above configuration, since the second privilege different from the privilege based on the grant determination by the grant determination means is granted based on the establishment of the special condition, the effect of the game times on the grant determination side by the grant determination means and the execution of the predetermined effect It is possible to clearly show that the determinations are different from each other while associating with the predetermined effect on the means side. As a result, it is possible to suitably enjoy each of the effect on the game turning side and the effect of the predetermined effect.

Feature F21. A situation grasping means (a function of executing the processes of step S4301, step S4302, and steps S4304 to S4305 by the effect control device 82) for grasping the status of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means.
Execution of the process of step S4306 by the third privilege granting means (effect control device 82) capable of different timing of granting the second privilege based on the situation of the gaming rotation operation grasped by the situation grasping means. The gaming machine according to the feature F20, which is characterized by having a function of performing.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of the feature F20, the timing at which the second privilege is given may differ depending on the situation of the game round operation in the game round. Here, the effect on the game round side is for notifying the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means, and depending on the situation, there is a situation in which the notification of the result of the grant determination should be prioritized over the success or failure of the special condition. obtain. Therefore, by making it possible to make the grant timing different depending on the situation of the game rotation operation as in the above configuration, both of the effects for the game rotation and the production by the predetermined effect execution means coexist. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience caused by the conflict.

Feature F22. The third privilege granting means is characterized in that it is possible to grant the second privilege in a game time different from the game times in which the special condition is determined to be satisfied by the condition determining means. Features The gaming machine described in F21.

According to the above configuration, when the period from the establishment of the special condition to the granting of the second privilege is short, for example, when the special condition is satisfied at the final stage of the game round, or when the game round is the first. 2 Special conditions have been established when the effect for game rounds should be prioritized over the granting of benefits (for example, when the granting determination of the granting determination means is the result corresponding to the granting of benefits). If the second privilege is given in a game round different from the game round, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature F23. The predetermined effect executing means is set to execute the predetermined effect based on the special information different from the predetermined special information that triggered the execution of the special notification by the special notification executing means. It is characterized in that it is provided with a setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4001 to S4003 by the effect control device 82), and the predetermined effect is executed based on the setting by the execution setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F22.

According to the above configuration, whether or not the predetermined effect is executed based on the special information different from the special information that triggered the execution of the special notification is set, and if the execution is set, the different special information is set. It is executed in the game times related to information. In other words, by setting the trigger for the execution of the predetermined effect not only to perform the special notification but also to configure the configuration based on the special information related to the game times to be executed, for example, even in a situation where the predetermined effect should not be executed. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as executing a predetermined effect.

Here, in a configuration in which a predetermined effect is performed based on the execution of such a special notification, unlike the above configuration, whether or not the predetermined effect is also executed when setting whether or not to execute the special notification. A configuration to set is also conceivable. This configuration seems to be preferable from the viewpoint of simplifying the processing configuration. However, since the predetermined effect is a game time related to special information different from the predetermined special information that triggered the execution of the special notification, it is sufficient to grasp the predetermined special information for the special notification. Therefore, it is necessary to grasp special information that is different from the prescribed production. Therefore, if it is configured to set whether or not to execute a predetermined effect when executing the special notification, it becomes necessary to grasp extra special information for the special notification, and the conventional processing configuration for the special notification is performed. It is necessary to make a drastic change, and there is a concern that the processing load of the special notification itself will increase significantly. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the presence / absence of execution of the predetermined effect is set by the execution setting means as in the present configuration, a new configuration is performed in which the predetermined effect is executed while avoiding the inconvenience of the processing on the special notification side. It is possible to add a configuration.

Feature F24. The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect even in the game times related to the special information acquired after the predetermined special information that triggered the special notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F23.

According to the above configuration, a predetermined effect is started with the special notification as an opportunity, and even if the special information is acquired during the predetermined effect, the predetermined effect can be continued until the game times related to the special information. can. Therefore, it is possible to change the content (execution period) of the predetermined effect by acquiring special information after the predetermined effect is started, and it is expected that the player will actively participate in the game and become more absorbed in the game. Can be made to.

Feature F25. The grant determination means grants the grant determination for one special information acquired by the information acquisition means to the other special information acquired by the information acquisition means prior to the one special information. The game according to any one of features F1 to F24, which comprises a pre-determination means (a function of executing data setting processing by the main control device 81 in the seventh embodiment) that is performed prior to the determination. Machine.

According to the above configuration, when the special information is acquired in the situation where the predetermined effect is being performed, the special information acquired above is obtained before the special information about the special notification that triggered the predetermined effect. Can be determined. Therefore, the period until the result of the grant determination relating to the special information regarding the special notification is notified can be longer, and these periods are even more redundant for the player who wants to know the result of the grant determination early. You may feel it. Therefore, by applying the configuration of the feature F1 to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the predetermined special information is acquired later than the predetermined special information and is the target of the grant determination first. It is possible to perform the production, and while avoiding the above-mentioned inconveniences, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the game in a well-balanced manner.

Feature F26. The predetermined effect executing means reflects the information based on the ball entering the ball entry portion in the predetermined effect based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry portion after the start of the predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F25, which is characterized in that it has a possible configuration.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to make the meaning of having the game ball enter the ball entry portion after the start of the predetermined effect. Since the predetermined effect is executed with the special notification based on the specific result by the prior identification means as an opportunity, the player wants to know the result of the determination of granting the special information about this special notification. There is a possibility that the launch of the game ball will be stopped until the game times related to the special notification without entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to promote the continuation of the firing of the game ball by giving the meaning of entering the ball after the start of the predetermined effect as in the above configuration.

Feature F27. The predetermined effect executing means reflects the information that the game ball has entered the ball entry portion in the predetermined effect even when the acquired information storage means stores the predetermined number of special information. The gaming machine according to feature F26, which is characterized in that it has a possible configuration.

According to the above configuration, even when the number of special information reaches a predetermined number, the information is reflected on the predetermined production side by entering the ball into the ball entry portion, so that so-called stop hitting is suppressed. be able to. Here, as a configuration for encouraging the continuation of firing of the game ball, a configuration in which the upper limit of a predetermined number is increased or the upper limit is eliminated can be considered. However, in the case of such a configuration, for example, the time difference between the entry timing of the game ball and the execution timing of the game round becomes large, so that the manager of the game hall can play the game without entering the game ball. There may be inconveniences such as making it difficult to detect fraudulent acts that cause the grant judgment. Therefore, as described above, if the configuration is such that the information on the number of incoming balls exceeding a predetermined number is reflected on the predetermined production side instead of the production on the game round side regarding the grant determination that is directly linked to the profit of the player, as described above. It is possible to fully enjoy a predetermined production while avoiding various inconveniences. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature F28. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball into the game area, and
A ball entry portion (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34) provided in the game area where the game ball can enter, and
Information acquisition means (means for executing a winning process for the operating port by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry portion.
Acquired information storage means (a function of executing the process of step S205 by the main control device 81) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, which is a plurality of predetermined numbers, and
Grant determination means (main control device 81) that sequentially determines whether or not to grant a privilege (for example, open / close execution mode or high frequency support mode) to the player with respect to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Function to execute the pass / fail judgment process by
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player, the privilege granting means (according to the main control device 81) for granting the privilege to the player. Function to execute the game state transition process) and
Based on the fact that the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means, the game rotation operation is started by the predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41), and the game rotation is performed as the notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. A function of executing a game turn control process (a function of executing a game turn control process by the main control device 81) for controlling the predetermined notification means so that the game turn operation is terminated once the game turn operation is terminated. )When,
The destination specifying means (for holding by the main control device 81) that specifies the information about the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means at the timing before the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination. Function to execute confirmation processing) and
Based on the fact that the specific result by the prior identification means is a predetermined result, the predetermined notification is performed at a timing before the predetermined special information which is the specific target is the target of the grant determination. Special notification execution means (function to execute hold control command correspondence processing by the effect control device 82) that executes special notification by means or another notification means, and
Means for reflecting the ball entry information to the ball entry portion generated after the ball entry of the game ball related to the predetermined special information that triggered the special notification in the special notification (10th, 11th). A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing hold control command correspondence processing in the embodiment).

According to the above configuration, there is a possibility that the special notification is performed for the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means before the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination. As a result, it becomes possible to perform a game in which the predetermined special information targeted by the prior identification means is predicted before the game times corresponding to the predetermined special information, and the diversification of the game is achieved. Will be. Therefore, the degree of attention of the game can be increased. Here, in a gaming machine in which such a special notification is performed, the more the special notification is made flashy and the degree of attention to the predetermined special information is increased, the more the game is performed during the period until the game times related to the special notification. There is a possibility that interest may decline, and at the time when the special notification occurs, the player waits by stopping the launch of the game ball until the game round related to the special notification is performed (stopping the game). ) There is a possibility. Therefore, in the special notification, if the ball entry information to the ball entry portion generated after that can be reflected in the special notification, the launch of the game ball is continued even after the special notification is performed. It can give rise to the significance of making it. As a result, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball into the game area, and
A ball entry portion (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34) provided in the game area where the game ball can enter, and
Information acquisition means (means for executing a winning process for the operating port by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry portion.
Acquired information storage means (a function of executing the process of step S205 by the main control device 81) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, which is a plurality of predetermined numbers, and
Grant determination means (main control) that sequentially determines whether or not to grant the first privilege (for example, open / close execution mode or high frequency support mode) to the player with respect to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Function to execute the hit / fail judgment process by the device 81) and
The first privilege granting means for granting the first privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the granting determination means being the granting response result corresponding to the granting the first privilege to the player. (A function to execute the game state transition process by the main control device 81) and
Based on the fact that the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means, the game rotation operation is started by the predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41), and the game rotation is performed as the notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. A function of executing a game turn control process (a function of executing a game turn control process by the main control device 81) for controlling the predetermined notification means so that the game turn operation is terminated once the game turn operation is terminated. )When,
Equipped with
The game round control means includes an operation period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game round operation in each game round, and the operation period. It controls the predetermined notification means so that the game rotation operation is performed over the operation period set by the setting means.
The operation period for which the information of the operation period set by the operation period setting means is specified at a timing before the game times to be set by the operation period setting means are executed by the game times control means. Specific means (a function to execute the effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82) and
A second privilege granting means (effect control device) capable of granting a second privilege different from the first privilege to the player based on the specific result obtained by the prior operation period specifying means having a predetermined result. (Function to execute special hold notice setting process by 82) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, a second privilege different from the first privilege may be given based on the fact that the operation period of the game round has a predetermined result. Therefore, it is possible to raise interest in the operation period. In this case, since the information on the operation period is specified before the execution of the game round, the second privilege can be given before the execution of the game round. By doing so, the player can compare the operation period of the game round with a configuration in which the final length can be grasped only at the end of the game round as the period during which the game round movement is performed. Since it is possible to grasp the situation in advance and the second privilege is given according to the length, it is possible to make the operation period more interesting.

Feature G2. The game round operation is set with a plurality of execution modes including at least a short-term mode in which the operation period is short and a long-term mode in which the operation period is longer than the short-term mode. The game rounding operation is performed in the set execution mode.
In the second privilege granting means, the operation period specified by the prior operation period specifying means is the operation period in the long-term mode rather than the operation period in the short-term mode. 2 The gaming machine according to feature G1, which is characterized by having a configuration that makes it easy to give benefits.

According to the above configuration, the privilege is more likely to be given when the long operation period is specified than when the short operation period is specified. By doing so, the player wants a long operation period, and it is possible to reduce the feeling of extension of the game by lengthening the operation period.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball into the game area, and
A ball entry portion (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34) provided in the game area where the game ball can enter, and
Information acquisition means (means for executing a winning process for the operating port by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry portion.
Acquired information storage means (a function of executing the process of step S205 by the main control device 81) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, which is a plurality of predetermined numbers, and
Grant determination means (main control device 81) that sequentially determines whether or not to grant a privilege (for example, open / close execution mode or high frequency support mode) to the player with respect to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Function to execute the pass / fail judgment process by
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player, the privilege granting means (according to the main control device 81) for granting the privilege to the player. Function to execute the game state transition process) and
Based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, the game rotation operation is started by a predetermined notification means, and the game rotation operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. Is one of the game times, and the game time control means (a function of executing the game time control process by the main control device 81) that controls the predetermined notification means so that the game round operation is performed, and
The destination specifying means (for holding by the main control device 81) that specifies the information about the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means at the timing before the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination. Function to execute confirmation processing) and
Based on the fact that the specific result by the prior identification means is a predetermined result, it corresponds to the result of the grant determination when the predetermined special information which is the specific target is the target of the grant determination. A special notification execution means (a function of executing a hold control command correspondence process by the effect control device 82) for executing the special notification by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means.
An executable state setting means (special hold notice by the effect control device 82) for setting the identification by the prior identification means into an executable viable state based on the predetermined result of the specific result by the prior identification means. Function to execute setting process) and
Equipped with
The game machine is characterized in that the executable state can be continued even after the predetermined special information that triggered the setting is the target of the grant determination.

According to the above configuration, there is a possibility that the special notification is performed for the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means before the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination. As a result, it becomes possible to perform a game in which the predetermined special information targeted by the prior identification means is predicted before the game times corresponding to the predetermined special information, and the diversification of the game is achieved. Will be. Therefore, the degree of attention of the game can be increased. Then, the executable state in which the prior identification by the prior identification means can be executed is set based on the specific result of the prior identification means, and after the predetermined special information that triggered the setting is the target of the grant determination. Even so, its viable state can be carried over. That is, it is set to an executable state based on the specific result by the prior identification means, and after the special information that triggered the setting is digested, the special notification based on other special information can be performed. Therefore, the special notification can be diversified, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

<Characteristic I group>
Features I1. Information acquisition means (operation by the main control device 81) for acquiring grant determination information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34). A means of performing a winning process for the mouth) and
Grant determination means (mainly) that determines whether or not to grant the first privilege (for example, open / close execution mode or high frequency support mode) to the player based on the grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means. (Function to execute the hit / fail judgment process by the control device 81) and
A function of executing a game rotation control process by a first effect setting means (main control device 81) for setting a first effect to be performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) based on the grant determination by the grant determination means. )When,
A first effect executing means (a function of executing a variation display control process by the effect control device 82) for executing the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means.
A first privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
Based on the fact that a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the special hold notice table corresponds to the execution of the special hold notice), the predetermined notification means or another notification means is used. 2nd effect execution means (function to execute special hold notice setting process by effect control device 82) capable of executing 2 effects (special hold notice), and
A condition setting means (a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) for setting a special condition in which the establishment probability differs depending on the length of the period in which the second effect is performed, and
A determination means (a function of executing timer management processing by the effect control device 82) for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the grant determination information is acquired based on the fact that the acquisition condition is satisfied, and the grant determination of whether or not the first privilege is granted is performed based on the grant determination information, and the grant is determined. In a gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by a predetermined notification means based on a determination, a second notification means is used by a predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the fact that a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied. The production is executed. Therefore, in addition to the first effect performed based on the grant determination, the second effect is performed to diversify the effect.

Here, the first privilege is given based on the result of the grant determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the first effect (for example, the effect for game rounds) is performed by a predetermined notification means based on the grant determination. In, while it is possible to expect that the first privilege may be obtained if the first effect based on this grant determination continues for a long time, for example, regarding whether or not the first privilege can be obtained. For a player who is paying attention only, or a player who understands the result of this grant determination to some extent due to some circumstances (for example, the presence or absence of a notice effect, strength, etc.), the first effect performed by a predetermined notification means is If you continue for a long time, you may find it redundant. On the contrary, if the first effect based on the grant determination is short, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be avoided, but the effect of sufficiently enjoying the first effect is reduced. That is, it can be said that the longer the length of the first effect on the grant determination side is, the better it is, and conversely, even if it is short, inconvenience may occur.

Therefore, as in the present configuration, if a special condition having a different probability of establishment is set according to the length of the period in which the second effect is performed and a determination means for determining the success or failure of the special condition is provided, the grant determination side It is possible to have a scale different from the scale such as the length of the simple first effect, and even if the above-mentioned inconvenience may occur in the first effect on the grant determination side, the special condition is set. It is possible to expect that it will be easier to establish, and it will be possible to maintain a good balance of attention to the game.

Feature I2. The determination means includes means for determining the success or failure of the special condition (a function of executing a hold display process by the effect control device 82) regardless of the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means at the time of determination. The gaming machine according to the feature I1.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to reduce the relationship between the success or failure of the special condition in the second effect and the first effect in which the result of the grant determination is reflected. By doing so, it is possible to purely entertain whether or not the special condition is satisfied in the second production. For example, in the first production on the grant determination side, a production in which the first privilege is difficult to be granted is performed. Even if there is, since the success or failure of the special condition is determined regardless of it, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention from being extremely lowered.

The above configuration is, for example,
"The determination means includes means for making the determination regardless of conditions other than the special conditions at the time of determination."
"The special condition has a different probability of establishment based on the passage of a predetermined period in the second effect.
The determination means includes means for determining the elapse of the predetermined period regardless of the result of the grant determination. "
In other words.

Feature I3. A second privilege granting means (process for holding display by the effect control device 82) for granting a second privilege different from the first privilege to the player based on the determination that the special condition is satisfied by the determination means. The gaming machine according to the feature I1 or the feature I2, which is characterized by having a function of executing the above.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to draw more attention to whether or not the special condition is satisfied, that is, the determination result of the determination means. In particular, by making the second privilege different from the first privilege, it is possible to realize a game different from the conventional game, such as simply satisfying the acquisition condition and obtaining the first privilege, and a variety of games. Can be achieved.

Further, if this configuration is applied to the feature I2, the impression that each determination is different can be strengthened.

Feature I4. The condition setting means has one of the features I1 to I3, which is characterized in that the special condition is set so that the longer the period in which the second effect is performed, the easier it is for the special condition to be satisfied. The described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the longer the period in which the second effect is performed, the easier it is for the special condition to be satisfied. By doing so, the player expects that the second production will be performed for a long time.

As described in the feature I1, the longer the effect on the grant determination side is, the more attention is not paid to it, and there is a possibility that it may be perceived as redundant. Therefore, by providing this configuration, even if there is a possibility that the first effect on the grant determination side may be perceived as redundant, it is expected that the special condition will be satisfied on the second effect side. It is possible to keep the degree of attention to the game in a well-balanced manner.

Feature I5. The condition setting means includes means for setting the special conditions according to the length of the first effect set by the first effect setting means (a function of executing the process of step S1501 in the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to relate the length of the first effect on the grant determination side to the ease with which the special condition on the second effect side is satisfied. By doing so, even if an inconvenience occurs due to the length of the first effect performed based on the grant determination, the inconvenience is absorbed by the second effect side, and the degree of attention to the game is extreme. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

If this configuration is applied to the feature I2, the configuration is such that when the special condition is set, the determination is related to the first effect on the grant determination side, and when the special condition is determined, the determination is made regardless of the result of the grant determination. By doing so, it is possible to make a novel game in which the result of the determination can be changed by changing the game situation from the setting of the special condition to the determination. The change in the game situation may be, for example, a change in the number of stored grant determination information in a configuration in which a plurality of grant determination information can be stored.

Feature I6. Feature I1 characterized by having a condition notification means (a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) for notifying the special condition by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of I5.

According to the above configuration, it is possible for the player to grasp the special conditions. As a result, it is possible to fully enjoy the fact that the probability of establishment of the special condition differs depending on the period during which the second effect is performed.

Feature I7. The condition notification means includes a advance notification means (a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) that executes notification of the special condition at a timing prior to the determination by the determination means. The gaming machine according to feature I6, characterized in that it is present.

According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the special condition at a timing prior to the determination of success or failure. Since the probability of establishment of the special condition differs depending on the length of the period in which the second production is performed, if the special condition is grasped at the earliest possible timing, it will be fun to determine whether or not the special condition is satisfied. You can do it.

Feature I8. The advance notification means is characterized by comprising means for executing notification of the special condition (a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) based on the start of the second effect. Feature The gaming machine described in I7.

According to the above configuration, since the notification of the special condition is performed based on the start of the second effect, it is possible to entertain the success or failure of the special condition as much as possible for the period involved in the success or failure of the special condition.

Feature I9. The advance notification means is characterized by having a means for executing notification of the special condition (a function of executing a special hold notice control process by the effect control device 82) while the second effect is being performed. The gaming machine according to the feature I7 or the feature I8.

According to the above configuration, since the notification of the special condition is performed while the second effect is being performed, it is possible to make the player understand that the probability of establishment of the special condition is different. This makes it possible for the player to clearly understand the relationship between the period during which the second effect is performed and the probability of establishment of the special condition.

Feature I10. The condition notification means is provided with a post-notification means (a function of executing the process of step S2701 by the effect control device 82) to execute the notification of the special condition at the timing after the determination by the determination means is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features I6 to I9.

According to the above configuration, the special condition can be grasped even after the determination by the determination means. That is, it is possible to grasp the success or failure of the special condition even after the determination timing. By doing so, it is possible to leave an interest in whether or not the special condition is satisfied as a lingering sound even after the timing of granting the condition, and it is possible to prevent the degree of attention from being extremely lowered after the determination. can.

Feature I11. The gaming machine according to feature I10, wherein the post-notification means notifies the probability of establishment of the special condition at the time of determination of the determination means as notification of the special condition.

According to the above configuration, since the notification regarding the probability of establishment of the special condition at the time of determination is performed, it is possible to grasp not only the success or failure of the special condition but also the degree thereof. Therefore, for example, when the special condition is not satisfied, it is possible to grasp how soon it is satisfied, and it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the degree of attention based on the fact that the special condition is not satisfied. ..

Feature I12. Acquisition information storage means for storing the grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, which is a plurality of predetermined numbers (a function of executing the process of step S205 by the main control device 81). Equipped with
The grant determination means sequentially performs the grant determination with respect to the grant determination information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The destination specifying means (holding by the main control device 81) that specifies the predetermined grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means at a timing before the predetermined grant determination information becomes the target of the grant determination. Has a function to execute confirmation processing)
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I11, wherein the condition setting means sets the special conditions based on the specific result of the prior identification means.

According to the above configuration, special conditions are set based on predetermined grant determination information stored in the acquired information storage means. Therefore, a game of predicting predetermined grant determination information from the special condition is added, and the game is diversified. That is, by associating the special condition with the grant determination information that triggers the grant determination by the grant determination means, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention regarding the success or failure of the special condition.

Feature I13. The first effect executing means starts the game rotation operation by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means based on the grant determination performed by the grant determination means, and the result of the grant determination. As a notification result corresponding to the above, ending the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round control means (playing round control process by the main control device 81) for performing the game round operation is executed. Function to do)
The game turn control means includes an operation period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game rotation operation is performed over a period of time.
The destination specifying means sets the information of the operation period set by the operation period setting means at a timing before the game times to be set by the operation period setting means are executed by the game times control means. Equipped with a means for specifying the destination operation period specified in (a function of executing the effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82).
The condition setting means includes a first setting means (a function of executing a timer input process at a time specifying pattern by the effect control device 82) for setting the special condition based on the specific result of the prior operation period specifying means. The gaming machine according to the feature I12, which is characterized by being

According to the above configuration, special conditions are set based on the information of the operation period specified by the prior operation period specifying means. Therefore, the relationship between the special condition and the operation period in the game round can be further enhanced, and the probability of establishment of whether or not the special condition is satisfied can be associated with the length of the operation period. Therefore, the effect can be suitably executed.

Feature I14. The condition setting means includes a second setting means (a function of executing a timer input process at the time of a normal pattern by the effect control device 82) for setting the special condition regardless of the specific result of the prior operation period specifying means. The gaming machine according to feature I13, characterized in that it is present.

According to the above configuration, if the operation period cannot be specified first by the first operation period specifying means, for example, even if the operation period is determined only at the start of the game round, the special condition is set by the second setting means. It becomes possible to set. Therefore, the effect can be suitably executed.

Feature I15. In the game state, a special state is set in which the operation period can be specified by the prior operation period specifying means regardless of the grant determination information.
The gaming machine according to feature I13 or feature I14, wherein the special condition is set during the special state.

According to the above configuration, if any of the grant determination information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, the information of the operation period can be specified in advance as long as it is in the special state, and the special condition is set in such a state. If it is set, the inconvenience that the information of the operation period cannot be specified does not occur. This makes it possible to suitably realize the second effect using special conditions.

Feature I16. The operation period set by the operation period setting means includes a first operation period (holding number correspondence pattern) that reflects a game situation (for example, the number of holds) when the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means. The second operation period (pattern that does not support the number of pending numbers), which is not so, is included.
The prior operation period specifying means includes means for specifying an operation period for the grant determination information that is the second operation period (a function of executing an effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features I13 to I15.

In a configuration in which a plurality of grant determination information is stored and the grant determination is sequentially performed for the grant determination information, the game status at the time of acquisition of the grant determination information and the game status at the time of the grant determination may differ. Even if the operation period is specified at a timing earlier than the target of the determination, the operation period at the time of specification by the operation period specifying means and the operation period at the time of grant determination may be different. Therefore, in the above configuration, not the first operation period in which such a game situation is reflected, but the second operation period is specified at a timing before the target of the grant determination, so that the operation is based on the difference in the game situation. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of specifying the period ahead. This makes it possible to suitably perform an effect using the operation period.

If this configuration is applied to the feature I13, "the first setting means is based on the operation period specified by the means for specifying the operation period for the grant determination information which is the second operation period. It may be configured to "set the special conditions".

Feature I17. When the operation period of the grant determination information to be specified is the first operation period, the prior operation period specifying means sets a provisional operation period to the operation of the grant determination information. The gaming machine according to feature I16, which comprises a provisional identification means (a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82 in the fourth embodiment) specified as a period.

Even if the operation period may differ based on the difference in the gaming situation as in the above configuration, if it is specified as a provisional operation period, it is possible to perform an effect based on at least the success or failure of the special conditions. That is, even if the operation period cannot be specified in advance, it is possible to suppress the monotonicization of the effect by leaving room for executing the effect.

If this configuration is applied to the feature I14, the configuration may be such that "the second setting means sets the special condition based on the provisional operation period specified by the provisional identification means".

Feature I18. The special condition is set so that the probability of establishment increases as the period during which the second effect is performed becomes longer.
The feature I17 is characterized in that the provisional specifying means specifies a period that is equal to or less than the shortest period among the first operation periods that can be set by the operation period setting means as the provisional operation period. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, since the operation period for provisional identification can be patterned in advance, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for provisional identification. Further, since the tentative specific period is equal to or less than the shortest period that can change thereafter, the probability of establishment of the special condition is also set to be equal to or higher than the highest probability of establishment. Here, if the probability that the special condition is satisfied becomes extremely low, the player becomes accustomed to the fact that the special condition is not satisfied in another production different from the second production, and the interest in the success or failure of the special condition may be diminished. There is sex. Therefore, by making it easy for the special condition to be satisfied as in the above configuration, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of attention due to a decrease in the probability of establishment due to the provisional identification.

Feature I19. The special condition is set so that the probability of establishment increases as the period during which the second effect is performed becomes longer.
The provisional specifying means specifies a period that is longer than the longest period among the first operation periods that can be set by the operation period setting means as the provisional operation period.
A means for modifying the special condition (in the fourth embodiment) at a timing after the timing at which the identification by the provisional identification means is performed and at a timing before the determination by the determination means is performed. The gaming machine according to the feature I17 or the feature I18, which is provided with a function of executing a shift subtraction process by the effect control device 82).

According to the above configuration, since the operation period for provisional identification can be patterned in advance, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for provisional identification. Further, since the tentative specific period is longer than the longest period that can change thereafter, the probability of establishment of the special condition is also set to be less than or equal to the lowest probability of establishment. Therefore, in the above configuration, by modifying the special conditions after that, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of attention due to a decrease in the probability of establishment due to the provisional identification.

The "correction" may be, for example, a configuration of "shortening / extending the period in which the second effect is performed", and more specifically, "the period in which the second effect is performed is the provisional provisional". A configuration of "shortening / extending the difference between the operating period and the operating period set by the operating period setting means" is conceivable.

Feature I20. Acquisition information storage means for storing the grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, which is a plurality of predetermined numbers (a function of executing the process of step S205 by the main control device 81). Equipped with
The grant determination means sequentially performs a grant determination as to whether or not to grant the first privilege to the player based on the grant determination information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Regarding the predetermined grant determination information stored in the acquired information storage means, the subject of the grant determination is at a timing before the predetermined grant determination information becomes the target of the grant determination by the grant determination means. It is equipped with a destination identification means (a function to execute a confirmation process for holding by the main control device 81) to specify the information corresponding to the result of the grant determination in the case of.
In the first effect setting means, the predetermined grant determination information is the target of the grant determination by the grant determination means in the predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) based on the specific result by the prior identification means. It sets the production (holding notice) to be performed at the timing before
In the first effect executing means, the predetermined grant determination information, which is the specific target, is the target of the grant determination based on the fact that the specific result by the prior identification means is a predetermined result. The special notification (holding notice) corresponding to the result of the grant determination in the case is separated from the predetermined notification means or the predetermined notification means at a timing before the result of the grant determination for the predetermined special information is notified. It is executed by the notification means of
The second effect executing means is based on the fact that the content of the special notification executed by the first effect executing means is a predetermined content (for example, a content corresponding to the fourth holding image P4). The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I19, wherein the effect is executed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means.

According to the above configuration, there is a possibility that special notification will be given to the predetermined grant determination information stored in the acquired information storage means before it becomes the target of the grant determination. As a result, it is possible to perform a game in which the predetermined grant determination information that has been specified by the prior identification means is predicted before the result of the grant determination of the predetermined grant determination information is notified. Therefore, the game will be diversified. Therefore, the degree of attention of the game can be increased. In the case of such special notification, if it is a special notification that makes it easy for the player to be given the first privilege, the degree of attention to the special notification will increase, while other information for grant determination will be directed. There is a possibility that the degree of attention will decrease. In addition, if it is a special notification that makes it difficult for the first privilege to be given, there is a possibility that the degree of attention not only to the special notification but also to the subsequent production will be extremely lowered. Therefore, for example, when a predetermined content is set as the special notification, if the second effect is performed by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means, the attention level may be lowered by performing the special notification. It is possible to draw attention to the second effect side in the situation and preferably avoid a decrease in the degree of attention.

Feature I21. The first effect executing means starts the game rotation operation by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means based on the grant determination performed by the grant determination means, and the result of the grant determination. As a notification result corresponding to the above, ending the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round control means (playing round control process by the main control device 81) for performing the game round operation is executed. Function to do)
The game turn control means includes an operation period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game rotation operation is performed over a period of time.
The destination specifying means sets the information of the operation period set by the operation period setting means at a timing before the game times to be set by the operation period setting means are executed by the game times control means. Equipped with a means for specifying the destination operation period specified in (a function of executing the effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82).
The gaming machine according to feature I20, wherein the condition setting means sets the special conditions based on a specific result of the prior operation period specifying means.

According to the above configuration, in the second effect executed based on the content of the special notification being a predetermined content, the special condition is set based on the information of the operation period. Thereby, the special notification performed based on the predetermined grant determination information and the operation period information can be associated with each other.

In this case, the special notification is to notify the predetermined grant determination information, and the special condition in the second effect executed based on the special notification is based on the operation period other than the predetermined grant determination information. It may be a configuration that is set based on the operation period of a predetermined grant determination information. In the former case, it is possible to raise the degree of attention of the predetermined grant determination information by the special notification, and to raise the attention of the other grant determination information by the second effect. Further, in the latter case, the special notification and the second effect can be more closely related. For example, when the effect suggesting that the first privilege is difficult to be given in the special notification is performed, the second effect is special. It is possible to diversify the production by making the production so that the conditions are easily satisfied.

Feature I22. In the special notification that triggered the execution of the second effect by the second effect executing means, the condition setting means determines the grant before the predetermined grant determination information that is the target of the special notification. The gaming machine according to feature I21, wherein the special condition is set based on the operation period specified by the prior operation period specifying means with respect to the grant determination information to be the target of the above.

According to the above configuration, since the special condition is set based on the operation period of the grant determination information that is the target of the grant determination before the grant determination information that is the target of the special notification, it is the target of the special notification. It is possible to raise the interest in the operation period of the game round for the grant judgment information that is the target of the grant judgment before the grant judgment information, and to produce the production for other game rounds by performing special notification. It is possible to avoid a decrease in attention.

Feature I23. The first effect executing means starts the game rotation operation by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means based on the grant determination performed by the grant determination means, and the result of the grant determination. As a notification result corresponding to the above, ending the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round control means (playing round control process by the main control device 81) for performing the game round operation is executed. Function to do)
In the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means, the first operation (reach generation) and the first operation are performed at a timing prior to notifying the result of the grant determination of the grant determination means. The branch timing (high-speed fluctuation end timing of the symbol column Z3 below) is set to branch to the second operation (reach non-occurrence) in which the probability of granting one privilege is low.
The determination means determines the success or failure of the special condition at the branch timing in the game rotation operation for the grant determination information for which the grant determination is performed in the situation where the second effect is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I22.

According to the above configuration, the success or failure of the special condition is determined at the branch timing between the first operation and the second operation. Further, at this branch timing, if the game rounding operation branches to the first operation, the probability of granting the first privilege increases, while if the game branches to the second operation, the probability of granting is lower than that. In this case, it is conceivable to further add a branching effect in which the high and low of the grant probability are associated with respect to the first privilege, but if the effect becomes too complicated, there is a concern that the player's understanding will be lowered, and as a result, the game will be played. It is possible that interest will diminish. Therefore, by configuring the configuration to determine the special conditions different from the first privilege at this branch timing, it is possible to suitably execute a plurality of branch effects related to the privilege grant while suppressing the complexity of the game.

Feature I24. A special setting means capable of making the elapsed speed of the period corresponding to the special condition set by the condition setting means different from the elapsed speed up to that point, or making the remaining period of the period different from the remaining period up to that point. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I23, which comprises (a function of executing a subtraction value adjustment process by the effect control device 82).

According to the above configuration, the probability of establishment of the special condition changes as the elapsed speed or the remaining period of the period corresponding to the special condition changes. Thereby, for example, even if the special condition is unlikely to be satisfied, the special condition can be satisfied by making the elapsed speed or the remaining period different, and for example, when the special condition is likely to be satisfied. Even so, it is possible to prevent the special conditions from being satisfied by making the elapsed speed or the remaining period different. That is, the process of success or failure of the special condition can be varied, and the degree of attention to the second effect can be suitably increased.

Feature I25. The first effect executing means starts the game rotation operation by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means based on the grant determination performed by the grant determination means, and the result of the grant determination. As a notification result corresponding to the above, ending the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round control means (playing round control process by the main control device 81) for performing the game round operation is executed. Function to do)
The game turn control means includes an operation period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game rotation operation is performed over a period of time.
The gaming machine according to feature I24, wherein the special setting means is different according to the operation period set by the operation period setting means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to further enhance the relevance of the probability of fulfillment of the special condition to the operating period, and it is possible to suitably avoid inconveniences based on the length of the operating period of the game.

Feature I26. The special condition is set so that the probability of establishment increases as the period during which the second effect is performed elapses.
The gaming machine according to feature I25, wherein the special setting means increases the elapsed speed of making the difference or shortens the remaining period of making the difference as the operation period is shorter.

According to the above configuration, when the operation period is short, the period during which the predetermined set period elapses is also shortened, so that the probability that the special condition is satisfied may be low. Therefore, in such a case, if the elapsed speed is increased or the remaining period is shortened, it is possible to prevent the interest from diminishing by predicting that the special condition will not be satisfied due to the short operation period. Is possible.

<Characteristic J group>
Features J1. Information acquisition means (operation by the main control device 81) for acquiring grant determination information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34). A means of performing a winning process for the mouth) and
Grant determination means (mainly) that determines whether or not to grant the first privilege (for example, open / close execution mode or high frequency support mode) to the player based on the grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means. (Function to execute the hit / fail judgment process by the control device 81) and
A function of executing a game rotation control process by a first effect setting means (main control device 81) for setting a first effect to be performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) based on the grant determination by the grant determination means. )When,
A first effect executing means (a function of executing a variation display control process by the effect control device 82) for executing the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means.
A first privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
Based on the fact that a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the special hold notice table corresponds to the execution of the special hold notice), the predetermined notification means or another notification means is used. 2nd effect execution means (function to execute special hold notice setting process by effect control device 82) capable of executing 2 effects (special hold notice), and
A condition setting means (a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) for setting a special condition having a different probability of establishment according to the length of the period in which the first effect is performed, and
A determination means (a function of executing timer management processing by the effect control device 82) for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the grant determination information is acquired based on the fact that the acquisition condition is satisfied, and the grant determination of whether or not the first privilege is granted is performed based on the grant determination information, and the grant is determined. In a gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by a predetermined notification means based on a determination, a second notification means is used by a predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the fact that a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied. The production is executed. Therefore, in addition to the first effect performed based on the grant determination, the second effect is performed to diversify the effect.

Here, the first privilege is given based on the result of the grant determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the first effect (for example, the effect for game rounds) is performed by a predetermined notification means based on the grant determination. In, while it is possible to expect that the first privilege may be obtained if the first effect based on this grant determination continues for a long time, for example, regarding whether or not the first privilege can be obtained. For a player who is paying attention only, or a player who understands the result of this grant determination to some extent due to some circumstances (for example, the presence or absence of a notice effect, strength, etc.), the first effect performed by a predetermined notification means is If you continue for a long time, you may find it redundant. On the contrary, if the first effect based on the grant determination is short, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be avoided, but the effect of sufficiently enjoying the first effect is reduced. That is, it can be said that the longer the length of the first effect on the grant determination side is, the better it is, and conversely, even if it is short, inconvenience may occur.

Therefore, as in the present configuration, if a special condition having a different probability of establishment is set according to the length of the period in which the first effect is performed and a determination means for determining the success or failure of the special condition is provided, the first effect is provided. It is possible to make a judgment different from the grant judgment in which is set by the length of the first effect, and even if the above-mentioned inconvenience may occur in the first effect, the special condition is satisfied. It is possible to expect that it will be easier, and it will be possible to maintain a good balance of attention to the game.

It should be noted that "the first effect executing means starts the game rotation operation by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means based on the grant determination performed by the grant determination means, and the grant is performed. As a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination, ending the game rotation operation is regarded as one game rotation, and the game rotation control means (game rotation control by the main control device 81) is performed so that the game rotation operation is performed. Has a function to execute processing)
The game round control means includes an operation period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game round operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. If this feature is applied to a gaming machine, the above-mentioned gaming rotation operation is performed over a period of operation.
"Depending on the length of the period when the first production is performed"
It can be rephrased as "based on the length of the operating period set by the operating period setting means".

Feature J2. Information acquisition means (operation by the main control device 81) for acquiring grant determination information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34). A means of performing a winning process for the mouth) and
Grant determination means (mainly) that determines whether or not to grant the first privilege (for example, open / close execution mode or high frequency support mode) to the player based on the grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means. (Function to execute the hit / fail judgment process by the control device 81) and
A function of executing a game rotation control process by a first effect setting means (main control device 81) for setting a first effect to be performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) based on the grant determination by the grant determination means. )When,
A first effect executing means (a function of executing a variation display control process by the effect control device 82) for executing the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means.
A first privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
Based on the fact that a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the special hold notice table corresponds to the execution of the special hold notice), the predetermined notification means or another notification means is used. 2nd effect execution means (function to execute special hold notice setting process by effect control device 82) capable of executing 2 effects (special hold notice), and
A condition setting means (a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) for setting a special condition having a different probability of establishment depending on the relationship between the first effect and the second effect.
A determination means (a function of executing timer management processing by the effect control device 82) for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the grant determination information is acquired based on the fact that the acquisition condition is satisfied, and the grant determination of whether or not the first privilege is granted is performed based on the grant determination information, and the grant is determined. In a gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by a predetermined notification means based on a determination, a second notification means is used by a predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the fact that a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied. The production is executed. Therefore, in addition to the first effect performed based on the grant determination, the second effect is performed to diversify the effect.

Here, the first privilege is granted based on the result of the grant determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the first effect (for example, the effect for game rounds) is performed by a predetermined notification means based on the grant determination. In, while the content of the first effect raises the degree of attention, the first effect is used by the player who understands the result of this grant determination to some extent due to some circumstances (for example, the presence or absence of the advance notice effect, the strength, etc.). You may find it redundant.

Therefore, as in the present configuration, if a special condition having a different probability of establishment depending on the relationship between the first effect and the second effect is set and a determination means for determining the success or failure of the special condition is provided, the grant determination side is simple. It is possible to entertain the production from a different point of view from the first production, and even if the above-mentioned inconvenience may occur in the first production on the grant determination side, the special condition is likely to be satisfied. Then, it is possible to expect, and it is possible to keep the degree of attention to the game in a well-balanced manner.

It should be noted that "the probability of establishment differs depending on the relationship between the first effect and the second effect" means "the probability of establishment differs depending on the length of each period of the first effect and the second effect". In other words, in this way, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience due to the period during which the first effect is performed (the inconvenience caused by being too long or the inconvenience caused by being too short) in relation to the second effect.

Feature J3. Information acquisition means (operation by the main control device 81) for acquiring grant determination information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34). A means of performing a winning process for the mouth) and
Grant determination means (mainly) that determines whether or not to grant the first privilege (for example, open / close execution mode or high frequency support mode) to the player based on the grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means. (Function to execute the hit / fail judgment process by the control device 81) and
A function of executing a game rotation control process by a first effect setting means (main control device 81) for setting a first effect to be performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) based on the grant determination by the grant determination means. )When,
A first effect executing means (a function of executing a variation display control process by the effect control device 82) for executing the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means.
A first privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
Based on the fact that a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the special hold notice table corresponds to the execution of the special hold notice), the predetermined notification means or another notification means is used. 2nd effect execution means (function to execute special hold notice setting process by effect control device 82) capable of executing 2 effects (special hold notice), and
A second effect setting means (a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) for setting the type of the second effect according to the first effect set by the effect setting means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the grant determination information is acquired based on the fact that the acquisition condition is satisfied, and the grant determination of whether or not the first privilege is granted is performed based on the grant determination information, and the grant is determined. In a gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by a predetermined notification means based on a determination, a second notification means is used by a predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the fact that a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied. The production is executed. Therefore, in addition to the first effect performed based on the grant determination, the second effect is performed to diversify the effect.

Here, the first privilege is granted based on the result of the grant determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the first effect (for example, the effect for game rounds) is performed by a predetermined notification means based on the grant determination. In, while the content of the first effect raises the degree of attention, the first effect is used by the player who understands the result of this grant determination to some extent due to some circumstances (for example, the presence or absence of the advance notice effect, the strength, etc.). You may find it redundant.

Therefore, by setting the type of the second effect according to the first effect as in the present configuration, it is possible to entertain the effect from a viewpoint different from the simple first effect on the grant determination side, and tentatively grant the effect. Even if the above-mentioned inconvenience may occur in the first effect on the judgment side, it is possible to perform an effect that complements the inconvenience in the second effect, and keeps the degree of attention to the game in a well-balanced manner. It becomes possible.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. Information acquisition means (operation by the main control device 81) for acquiring grant determination information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34). A means of performing a winning process for the mouth) and
Grant determination means (mainly) that determines whether or not to grant the first privilege (for example, open / close execution mode or high frequency support mode) to the player based on the grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means. (Function to execute the hit / fail judgment process by the control device 81) and
A function of executing a game turn control process by a first effect setting means (main control device 81) for setting a first effect to be performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) based on the grant determination by the grant determination means. )When,
A first effect executing means (a function of executing a variation display control process by the effect control device 82) for executing the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means.
A first privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
A second effect execution means (special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) capable of executing a second effect (special hold notice) different from the first effect by the predetermined notification means or another notification means. Function to execute) and
A first condition setting means (at the time of a normal pattern by the effect control device 82) for setting a special condition in which the probability of establishment may differ depending on the length of the period in which the second effect is performed, without considering the establishment of the special condition. Function to execute timer input processing) and
After setting the special condition by the first condition setting means, a determination means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied (a function of executing a timer management process by the effect control device 82) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the grant determination information is acquired based on the fact that the acquisition condition is satisfied, and the grant determination of whether or not the first privilege is granted is performed based on the grant determination information, and the grant is determined. In a gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by a predetermined notification means based on a determination, a second notification means is used by a predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the fact that a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied. The production is executed. Therefore, in addition to the first effect performed based on the grant determination, the second effect is performed to diversify the effect.

Here, the first privilege is given based on the result of the grant determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the first effect (for example, the effect for game rounds) is performed by a predetermined notification means based on the grant determination. In, while it is possible to expect that the first privilege may be obtained if the first effect based on this grant determination continues for a long time, for example, regarding whether or not the first privilege can be obtained. For a player who is paying attention only, or a player who understands the result of this grant determination to some extent due to some circumstances (for example, the presence or absence of a notice effect, strength, etc.), the first effect performed by a predetermined notification means is If you continue for a long time, you may find it redundant. On the contrary, if the first effect based on the grant determination is short, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be avoided, but the effect of sufficiently enjoying the first effect is reduced. That is, it can be said that the longer the length of the first effect on the grant determination side is, the better it is, and conversely, even if it is short, inconvenience may occur.

Therefore, as in this configuration, a special condition whose establishment probability may differ depending on the length of the period in which the second effect is performed is set without considering the establishment of the special condition, and after the setting, the special condition is set. If a determination means for determining the success or failure of the grant is provided, it is possible to have a scale different from the scale such as the length of the simple first effect on the grant determination side, and there is the above concern in the first effect on the grant determination side. Even if such inconveniences may occur, it can be expected that the special conditions will be easily satisfied.

In particular, since the special condition set by the first condition setting means is set without considering that the special condition is satisfied, the result may be known from other information in the middle like a so-called finished race. The event can be avoided. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a good balance of attention to the game. In addition, "depending on the length of the period" can be rephrased as "in relation to the length of the period" or "depending on the length of the period". In addition, "without considering that the special condition is satisfied" can be rephrased as "without considering whether or not the special condition is satisfied".

Feature K2. It is characterized by having a second condition setting means (a function of executing a timer input process at a time specific pattern by the effect control device 82) for setting the special condition based on whether or not the special condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to the feature K1.

According to the above configuration, for example, it is possible for the gaming machine to manage to some extent whether or not the special conditions are satisfied according to the gaming situation. Specifically, if the situation is such that the special condition should be satisfied or the situation should not be satisfied, the special condition can be set based on that. It is possible to eliminate the discomfort in the production based on the success or failure, and in this way, the production as designed can be suitably executed.

In particular, by applying this configuration to the gaming machine of feature K1, the special condition by the first condition setting means is set without considering whether or not it is satisfied, and the special condition by the second condition setting means is that. It is set based on whether or not it holds. Therefore, it is not possible to know whether or not the special condition is satisfied in the middle of the race as in the so-called finished race, and the special condition is satisfied regardless of the situation where the special condition should be satisfied according to the game state. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not doing so. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature K3. Information acquisition means (operation by the main control device 81) for acquiring grant determination information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34). A means of performing a winning process for the mouth) and
Grant determination means (mainly) that determines whether or not to grant the first privilege (for example, open / close execution mode or high frequency support mode) to the player based on the grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means. (Function to execute the hit / fail judgment process by the control device 81) and
A function of executing a game rotation control process by a first effect setting means (main control device 81) for setting a first effect to be performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) based on the grant determination by the grant determination means. )When,
A first effect executing means (a function of executing a variation display control process by the effect control device 82) for executing the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means.
A first privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
A second effect execution means (special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) capable of executing a second effect (special hold notice) different from the first effect by the predetermined notification means or another notification means. Function to execute) and
A first condition setting means (at the time of a normal pattern by the effect control device 82) for setting a special condition in which the probability of establishment may differ depending on the length of the period in which the second effect is performed, without considering the establishment of the special condition. Function to execute timer input processing) and
After setting the special condition by the first condition setting means, a determination means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied (a function of executing a timer management process by the effect control device 82) and
The second condition setting means (a function of executing the timer input process at the time specific pattern by the effect control device 82) for setting the special condition based on whether or not the special condition is satisfied, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the grant determination information is acquired based on the fact that the acquisition condition is satisfied, and the grant determination of whether or not the first privilege is granted is performed based on the grant determination information, and the grant is determined. In a gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by a predetermined notification means based on a determination, a second notification means is used by a predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the fact that a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied. The production is executed. Therefore, in addition to the first effect performed based on the grant determination, the second effect is performed to diversify the effect.

Here, the first privilege is given based on the result of the grant determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the first effect (for example, the effect for game rounds) is performed by a predetermined notification means based on the grant determination. In, while it is possible to expect that the first privilege may be obtained if the first effect based on this grant determination continues for a long time, for example, regarding whether or not the first privilege can be obtained. For a player who is paying attention only, or a player who understands the result of this grant determination to some extent due to some circumstances (for example, the presence or absence of a notice effect, strength, etc.), the first effect performed by a predetermined notification means is If you continue for a long time, you may find it redundant. On the contrary, if the first effect based on the grant determination is short, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be avoided, but the effect of sufficiently enjoying the first effect is reduced. That is, it can be said that the longer the length of the first effect on the grant determination side is, the better it is, and conversely, even if it is short, inconvenience may occur.

Therefore, as in this configuration, a special condition whose establishment probability may differ depending on the length of the period in which the second effect is performed is set without considering the establishment of the special condition, and after the setting, the special condition is set. If a determination means for determining the success or failure of the grant is provided, it is possible to have a scale different from the scale such as the length of the simple first effect on the grant determination side, and there is the above concern in the first effect on the grant determination side. Even if such inconveniences may occur, it can be expected that the special conditions will be easily satisfied.

In particular, the special condition by the first condition setting means is set without considering whether or not it is satisfied, and the special condition by the second condition setting means is set based on whether or not it is satisfied. Therefore, it is not possible to know whether or not the special condition is satisfied in the middle of the race as in the so-called finished race, and the special condition is satisfied regardless of the situation where the special condition should be satisfied according to the game state. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not doing so. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game. In addition, "depending on the length of the period" can be rephrased as "in relation to the length of the period" or "depending on the length of the period". In addition, "without considering that the special condition is satisfied" can be rephrased as "without considering whether or not the special condition is satisfied".

Features K4. The second condition setting means grasps and grasps the grant determination information or special information set based on the grant determination information (for example, information such as a hold storage number N, a hit / fail determination result, and a variation display time). Feature K2 or feature characterized by having means (a function of executing the holding information grasping process by the effect control device 82) and setting the special condition based on the information grasped by the grasping means. The gaming machine described in K3.

According to the above configuration, the second condition setting means sets the special condition based on the information on the first effect side (the grant determination information or the special information set based on the grant determination information). Therefore, it is possible to relate the second effect to the first effect, and it is possible to attract the attention to the first effect while attracting the interest to the second effect, and the degree of attention to the game is more preferably increased. It becomes possible.

Feature K5. The second condition setting means is characterized by having a means for setting the special condition so that the special condition is satisfied (a function of executing a timer input process at a time specific pattern by the effect control device 82). Features The gaming machine described in K4.

According to the above configuration, the special condition may be set so that the special condition in the second effect is satisfied based on the information on the first effect side, so that the degree of attention is lowered only on the first effect side, for example. If the special conditions in the second effect are satisfied in such a situation, the second effect side compensates for the decrease in the degree of attention of the first effect side. By doing so, it is possible to raise the degree of attention in a well-balanced manner by using the first effect and the second effect.

Features K6. The determination means includes means for determining the success or failure of the special condition (a function of executing a hold display process by the effect control device 82) regardless of the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means at the time of determination. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to reduce the relationship between the success or failure of the special condition in the second effect and the first effect in which the result of the grant determination is reflected. By doing so, it is possible to purely entertain whether or not the special condition is satisfied in the second production. For example, in the first production on the grant determination side, a production in which the first privilege is difficult to be granted is performed. Even if there is, since the success or failure of the special condition is determined regardless of it, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention from being extremely lowered.

The above configuration is, for example,
"The determination means includes means for making the determination regardless of conditions other than the special conditions at the time of determination."
"The special condition has a different probability of establishment based on the passage of a predetermined period in the second effect.
The determination means includes means for determining the elapse of the predetermined period regardless of the result of the grant determination. "
In other words.

Feature K7. A second privilege granting means (process for holding display by the effect control device 82) for granting a second privilege different from the first privilege to the player based on the determination that the special condition is satisfied by the determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features K1 to K6, which is characterized by having a function of executing the above.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to draw more attention to whether or not the special condition is satisfied, that is, the determination result of the determination means. In particular, by making the second privilege different from the first privilege, it is possible to realize a game different from the conventional game, such as simply satisfying the acquisition condition and obtaining the first privilege, and a variety of games. Can be achieved.

Further, if this configuration is applied to the feature K7, the impression that each judgment is different can be strengthened.

Features K8. The condition setting means is set to any one of the features K1 to K7, characterized in that the special condition is set so that the longer the period in which the second effect is performed, the easier it is for the special condition to be satisfied. The described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the longer the period in which the second effect is performed, the easier it is for the special condition to be satisfied. By doing so, the player expects that the second production will be performed for a long time.

As described in the feature K1, the longer the effect on the grant determination side is, the more attention is not paid to it, and there is a possibility that it may be perceived as redundant. Therefore, by providing this configuration, even if there is a possibility that the first effect on the grant determination side may be perceived as redundant, it is expected that the special condition will be satisfied on the second effect side. It is possible to keep the degree of attention to the game in a well-balanced manner.

The condition setting means in this configuration can be applied to either the first condition setting means or the second condition setting means, or even if only one of them is applied, the above effect can be obtained.

Features K9. Based on the fact that the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means, the first effect executing means starts the game rotation operation by the predetermined notification means, and as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. It is provided with a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process by the main control device 81) so that the game rotation operation is terminated once, and the game rotation operation is performed.
The game turn control means includes an operation period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game rotation operation is performed over a period of time.
The second condition setting means includes means for setting the special condition based on the length of the operation period set by the operation period setting means (a function of executing the process of step S1501 in the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K8.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a game round operation is performed in a game round as the first effect, it is possible to relate the length of the operation period of the game round to the ease with which the special condition on the second effect side is satisfied. It will be possible. By doing so, even if an inconvenience occurs due to the length of the operation period in the game round performed based on the grant determination, the inconvenience is absorbed by the second production side, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It is possible to suppress an extreme decrease.

Features K10. The feature K1 is provided with a condition notification means (a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) for notifying the special condition by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of K9.

According to the above configuration, it is possible for the player to grasp the special conditions. As a result, it is possible to fully enjoy the fact that the probability of establishment of the special condition differs depending on the period during which the second effect is performed.

Features K11. The condition notification means has a function of executing advance notification means (a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) for executing notification of the special condition at a timing closer to the start of the second effect than the end of the second effect. The gaming machine according to the feature K10, which is characterized by having).

According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the special conditions at a relatively early timing. Since the probability of establishment of the special condition differs depending on the length of the period in which the second production is performed, if the special condition is grasped at the earliest possible timing, it will be fun to determine whether or not the special condition is satisfied. You can do it.

Feature K12. The advance notification means is characterized by including means for executing notification of the special condition (a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) based on the start of the second effect. Feature The gaming machine described in K11.

According to the above configuration, since the notification of the special condition is performed based on the start of the second effect, it is possible to entertain the success or failure of the special condition as much as possible for the period involved in the success or failure of the special condition.

Feature K13. The advance notification means is characterized by comprising means for executing notification of the special condition (a function of executing a special hold notice control process by the effect control device 82) while the second effect is being performed. The gaming machine according to the feature K11 or the feature K12.

According to the above configuration, since the notification of the special condition is performed while the second effect is being performed, it is possible to make the player understand that the probability of establishment of the special condition is different. This makes it possible for the player to clearly understand the relationship between the period during which the second effect is performed and the probability of establishment of the special condition.

Feature K14. The condition notification means is provided with a post-notification means (a function of executing the process of step S2701 by the effect control device 82) to execute the notification of the special condition at a timing after the end of the second effect. Characteristic Feature The gaming machine according to any one of K10 to K13.

According to the above configuration, the special conditions can be grasped even after the end of the second production. By doing so, the interest in whether or not the special condition is satisfied can be left as a lingering sound even after the timing of granting the special condition, and the degree of attention is extremely reduced after the end of the second production. It can be suppressed.

Feature K15. The gaming machine according to feature K14, wherein the post-notification means notifies the probability of establishment of the special condition at the time of determination of the determination means as notification of the special condition.

According to the above configuration, since the notification regarding the probability of establishment of the special condition at the time of determination is performed, it is possible to grasp not only the success or failure of the special condition but also the degree thereof. Therefore, for example, when the special condition is not satisfied, it is possible to grasp how soon it is satisfied, and it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the degree of attention based on the fact that the special condition is not satisfied. ..

Feature K16. Acquisition information storage means for storing the grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, which is a plurality of predetermined numbers (a function of executing the process of step S205 by the main control device 81). Equipped with
The grant determination means sequentially performs the grant determination with respect to the grant determination information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The destination specifying means (holding by the main control device 81) that specifies the predetermined grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means at a timing before the predetermined grant determination information becomes the target of the grant determination. Has a function to execute confirmation processing)
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K15, wherein the second condition setting means sets the special conditions based on the specific result of the prior identification means.

According to the above configuration, special conditions are set based on predetermined grant determination information stored in the acquired information storage means. Therefore, a game of predicting predetermined grant determination information from the special condition is added, and the game is diversified. That is, by associating the special condition with the grant determination information that triggers the grant determination by the grant determination means, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention regarding the success or failure of the special condition.

Feature K17. Based on the fact that the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means, the first effect executing means starts the game rotation operation by the predetermined notification means, and as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. It is provided with a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process by the main control device 81) so that the game rotation operation is terminated once, and the game rotation operation is performed.
The game turn control means includes an operation period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game rotation operation is performed over a period of time.
The destination specifying means sets the information of the operation period set by the operation period setting means at a timing before the game times to be set by the operation period setting means are executed by the game times control means. Equipped with a means for specifying the destination operation period specified in (a function of executing the effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82).
The second condition setting means is the first setting means for setting the special condition based on the specific result of the prior operation period specifying means (a function of executing a timer input process at the time specifying pattern by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to the feature K16, which is characterized by having.

According to the above configuration, special conditions are set based on the information of the operation period specified by the prior operation period specifying means. Therefore, the relationship between the special condition and the operation period in the game round can be further enhanced, and the probability of establishment of whether or not the special condition is satisfied can be associated with the length of the operation period. Therefore, the effect can be suitably executed.

Feature K18. The second condition setting means provides a second setting means (a function of executing a timer input process at the time of a normal pattern by the effect control device 82) for setting the special condition regardless of the specific result of the prior operation period specifying means. The gaming machine according to feature K17, which is characterized by being provided.

According to the above configuration, if the operation period cannot be specified first by the first operation period specifying means, for example, even if the operation period is determined only at the start of the game round, the special condition is set by the second setting means. It becomes possible to set. Therefore, the effect can be suitably executed.

Features K19. In the game state, a special state is set in which the operation period can be specified by the prior operation period specifying means regardless of the grant determination information.
The gaming machine according to feature K17 or feature K18, wherein the special condition is set during the special state.

According to the above configuration, if any of the grant determination information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, the information of the operation period can be specified in advance as long as it is in the special state, and the special condition is set in such a state. If it is set, the inconvenience that the information of the operation period cannot be specified does not occur. This makes it possible to suitably realize the second effect using special conditions.

Feature K20. The operation period set by the operation period setting means includes a first operation period (holding number correspondence pattern) that reflects a game situation (for example, the number of holds) when the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means. The second operation period (pattern that does not support the number of pending numbers), which is not so, is included.
The prior operation period specifying means includes means for specifying an operation period for the grant determination information that is the second operation period (a function of executing an effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features K17 to K19.

In a configuration in which a plurality of grant determination information is stored and the grant determination is sequentially performed for the grant determination information, the game status at the time of acquisition of the grant determination information and the game status at the time of the grant determination may differ. Even if the operation period is specified at a timing earlier than the target of the determination, the operation period at the time of specification by the operation period specifying means and the operation period at the time of grant determination may be different. Therefore, in the above configuration, not the first operation period in which such a game situation is reflected, but the second operation period is specified at a timing before the target of the grant determination, so that the operation is based on the difference in the game situation. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of specifying the period ahead. This makes it possible to suitably perform an effect using the operation period.

If this configuration is applied to the feature K17, "The first setting means is based on the operation period specified by the means for specifying the operation period for the grant determination information which is the second operation period. It may be configured to "set the special conditions".

Feature K21. When the operation period of the grant determination information to be specified is the first operation period, the prior operation period specifying means sets a provisional operation period to the operation of the grant determination information. The gaming machine according to feature K20, which comprises a provisional identification means (a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82 in the fourth embodiment) specified as a period.

Even if the operation period may differ based on the difference in the gaming situation as in the above configuration, if it is specified as a provisional operation period, it is possible to perform an effect based on at least the success or failure of the special conditions. That is, even if the operation period cannot be specified in advance, it is possible to suppress the monotonicization of the effect by leaving room for executing the effect.

If this configuration is applied to the feature K18, the configuration may be such that "the second setting means sets the special conditions based on the provisional operation period specified by the provisional identification means".

Feature K22. The special condition is set so that the probability of establishment increases as the period during which the second effect is performed becomes longer.
The feature K21 is characterized in that the provisional specifying means specifies a period that is the shortest period or less of the first operation period that can be set by the operation period setting means as the provisional operation period. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, since the operation period for provisional identification can be patterned in advance, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for provisional identification. Further, since the tentative specific period is equal to or less than the shortest period that can change thereafter, the probability of establishment of the special condition is also set to be equal to or higher than the highest probability of establishment. Here, if the probability that the special condition is satisfied becomes extremely low, the player becomes accustomed to the fact that the special condition is not satisfied in another production different from the second production, and the interest in the success or failure of the special condition may be diminished. There is sex. Therefore, by making it easy for the special condition to be satisfied as in the above configuration, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of attention due to a decrease in the probability of establishment due to the provisional identification.

Feature K23. The special condition is set so that the probability of establishment increases as the period during which the second effect is performed becomes longer.
The provisional specifying means specifies a period that is longer than the longest period among the first operation periods that can be set by the operation period setting means as the provisional operation period.
A means for modifying the special condition (in the fourth embodiment) at a timing after the timing at which the identification by the provisional identification means is performed and at a timing before the determination by the determination means is performed. The gaming machine according to the feature K21 or the feature K22, which is provided with a function of executing a shift subtraction process by the effect control device 82).

According to the above configuration, since the operation period for provisional identification can be patterned in advance, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for provisional identification. Further, since the tentative specific period is longer than the longest period that can change thereafter, the probability of establishment of the special condition is also set to be less than or equal to the lowest probability of establishment. Therefore, in the above configuration, by modifying the special conditions after that, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of attention due to a decrease in the probability of establishment due to the provisional identification.

The "correction" may be, for example, a configuration of "shortening / extending the period in which the second effect is performed", and more specifically, "the period in which the second effect is performed is the provisional provisional". A configuration of "shortening / extending the difference between the operating period and the operating period set by the operating period setting means" is conceivable.

Feature K24. Acquisition information storage means for storing the grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, which is a plurality of predetermined numbers (a function of executing the process of step S205 by the main control device 81). Equipped with
The grant determination means sequentially performs a grant determination as to whether or not to grant the first privilege to the player based on the grant determination information stored in the acquired information storage means.
Regarding the predetermined grant determination information stored in the acquired information storage means, the subject of the grant determination is at a timing before the predetermined grant determination information becomes the target of the grant determination by the grant determination means. It is equipped with a destination identification means (a function to execute a confirmation process for holding by the main control device 81) to specify the information corresponding to the result of the grant determination in the case of.
In the first effect setting means, the predetermined grant determination information is the target of the grant determination by the grant determination means in the predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) based on the specific result by the prior identification means. It sets the production (holding notice) to be performed at the timing before
In the first effect executing means, the predetermined grant determination information, which is the specific target, is the target of the grant determination based on the fact that the specific result by the prior identification means is a predetermined result. The special notification (holding notice) corresponding to the result of the grant determination in the case is separated from the predetermined notification means or the predetermined notification means at a timing before the result of the grant determination for the predetermined special information is notified. It is executed by the notification means of
The second effect executing means is based on the fact that the content of the special notification executed by the first effect executing means is a predetermined content (for example, a content corresponding to the fourth holding image P4). The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K23, wherein the effect is executed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means.

According to the above configuration, there is a possibility that special notification will be given to the predetermined grant determination information stored in the acquired information storage means before it becomes the target of the grant determination. As a result, it is possible to perform a game in which the predetermined grant determination information that has been specified by the prior identification means is predicted before the result of the grant determination of the predetermined grant determination information is notified. Therefore, the game will be diversified. Therefore, the degree of attention of the game can be increased. In the case of such special notification, if it is a special notification that makes it easy for the player to be given the first privilege, the degree of attention to the special notification will increase, while other information for grant determination will be directed. There is a possibility that the degree of attention will decrease. In addition, if it is a special notification that makes it difficult for the first privilege to be given, there is a possibility that the degree of attention not only to the special notification but also to the subsequent production will be extremely lowered. Therefore, for example, when a predetermined content is set as the special notification, if the second effect is performed by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means, the attention level may be lowered by performing the special notification. It is possible to draw attention to the second effect side in the situation and preferably avoid a decrease in the degree of attention.

Feature K25. Based on the fact that the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means, the first effect executing means starts the game rotation operation by the predetermined notification means, and as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. It is provided with a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process by the main control device 81) so that the game rotation operation is terminated once, and the game rotation operation is performed.
The game turn control means includes an operation period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game rotation operation is performed over a period of time.
The destination specifying means sets the information of the operation period set by the operation period setting means at a timing before the game times to be set by the operation period setting means are executed by the game times control means. Equipped with a means for specifying the destination operation period specified in (a function of executing the effect setting process when the time can be specified by the effect control device 82).
The gaming machine according to feature K24, wherein the second condition setting means sets the special condition based on a specific result of the prior operation period specifying means.

According to the above configuration, in the second effect executed based on the content of the special notification being a predetermined content, the special condition is set based on the information of the operation period. Thereby, the special notification performed based on the predetermined grant determination information and the operation period information can be associated with each other.

In this case, the special notification is to notify the predetermined grant determination information, and the special condition in the second effect executed based on the special notification is based on the operation period other than the predetermined grant determination information. It may be a configuration that is set based on the operation period of a predetermined grant determination information. In the former case, it is possible to raise the degree of attention of the predetermined grant determination information by the special notification, and to raise the attention of the other grant determination information by the second effect. Further, in the latter case, the special notification and the second effect can be more closely related. For example, when the effect suggesting that the first privilege is difficult to be given in the special notification is performed, the second effect is special. It is possible to diversify the production by making the production so that the conditions are easily satisfied.

Feature K26. In the special notification that triggered the execution of the second effect by the second effect executing means, the second condition setting means is described before the predetermined grant determination information that is the target of the special notification. The gaming machine according to feature K25, wherein the special condition is set based on the operation period specified by the prior operation period specifying means for the grant determination information to be the target of the grant determination. ..

According to the above configuration, since the special condition is set based on the operation period of the grant determination information that is the target of the grant determination before the grant determination information that is the target of the special notification, it is the target of the special notification. It is possible to raise the interest in the operation period of the game round for the grant judgment information that is the target of the grant judgment before the grant judgment information, and to produce the production for other game rounds by performing special notification. It is possible to avoid a decrease in attention.

Feature K27. Based on the fact that the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means, the first effect executing means starts the game rotation operation by the predetermined notification means, and as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. It is provided with a game rotation control means (a function of executing the game rotation control process by the main control device 81) so that the game rotation operation is terminated once, and the game rotation operation is performed.
In the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means, the first operation (reach generation) and the first operation are performed at a timing prior to notifying the result of the grant determination of the grant determination means. The branch timing (high-speed fluctuation end timing of the symbol column Z3 below) is set to branch to the second operation (reach non-occurrence) in which the probability of granting one privilege is low.
The determination means determines the success or failure of the special condition at the branch timing in the game rotation operation for the grant determination information for which the grant determination is performed in the situation where the second effect is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K26.

According to the above configuration, the success or failure of the special condition is determined at the branch timing between the first operation and the second operation. Further, at this branch timing, if the game rounding operation branches to the first operation, the probability of granting the first privilege increases, while if the game branches to the second operation, the probability of granting is lower than that. In this case, it is conceivable to further add a branching effect in which the high and low of the grant probability are associated with respect to the first privilege, but if the effect becomes too complicated, there is a concern that the player's understanding will be lowered, and as a result, the game will be played. It is possible that interest will diminish. Therefore, by configuring the configuration to determine the special conditions different from the first privilege at this branch timing, it is possible to suitably execute a plurality of branch effects related to the privilege grant while suppressing the complexity of the game.

Feature K28. A special setting means capable of making the elapsed speed of the period corresponding to the special condition set by the condition setting means different from the elapsed speed up to that point, or making the remaining period of the period different from the remaining period up to that point. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K27, characterized in that it is provided with (a function of executing a subtraction value adjustment process by the effect control device 82).

According to the above configuration, the probability of establishment of the special condition changes as the elapsed speed or the remaining period of the period corresponding to the special condition changes. Thereby, for example, even if the special condition is unlikely to be satisfied, the special condition can be satisfied by making the elapsed speed or the remaining period different, and for example, when the special condition is likely to be satisfied. Even so, it is possible to prevent the special conditions from being satisfied by making the elapsed speed or the remaining period different. That is, the process of success or failure of the special condition can be varied, and the degree of attention to the second effect can be suitably increased.

The condition setting means in this configuration can be applied to either the first condition setting means or the second condition setting means, or even if only one of them is applied, the above effect can be obtained.

Feature K29. The first effect executing means starts the game rotation operation by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means based on the grant determination performed by the grant determination means, and the result of the grant determination. As a notification result corresponding to the above, ending the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round control means (playing round control process by the main control device 81) for performing the game round operation is executed. Function to do)
The game turn control means includes an operation period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game rotation operation is performed over a period of time.
The gaming machine according to feature K28, wherein the special setting means is different according to the operation period set by the operation period setting means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to further enhance the relevance of the probability of fulfillment of the special condition to the operating period, and it is possible to suitably avoid inconveniences based on the length of the operating period of the game.

Feature K30. The special condition is set so that the probability of establishment increases as the period during which the second effect is performed elapses.
The gaming machine according to feature K29, wherein the special setting means increases the elapsed speed of making the difference or shortens the remaining period of making the difference as the operation period is shorter.

According to the above configuration, when the operation period is short, the period during which the predetermined set period elapses is also shortened, so that the probability that the special condition is satisfied may be low. Therefore, in such a case, if the elapsed speed is increased or the remaining period is shortened, it is possible to prevent the interest from diminishing by predicting that the special condition will not be satisfied due to the short operation period. Is possible.

Features K31. Information acquisition means (operation by the main control device 81) for acquiring grant determination information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34). A means of performing a winning process for the mouth) and
Grant determination means (mainly) that determines whether or not to grant the first privilege (for example, open / close execution mode or high frequency support mode) to the player based on the grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means. (Function to execute the hit / fail judgment process by the control device 81) and
A function of executing a game rotation control process by a first effect setting means (main control device 81) for setting a first effect to be performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) based on the grant determination by the grant determination means. )When,
A first effect executing means (a function of executing a variation display control process by the effect control device 82) for executing the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means.
A first privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
A second effect executing means (a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) capable of executing a second effect (special hold notice) by the predetermined notification means or another notification means.
A condition setting means (a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) for setting a special condition in which the probability of establishment may differ depending on the length of the period in which the second effect is performed, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the grant determination information is acquired based on the fact that the acquisition condition is satisfied, and the grant determination of whether or not the first privilege is granted is performed based on the grant determination information, and the grant is determined. In a gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by a predetermined notification means based on a determination, a second notification means is used by a predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the fact that a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied. The production is executed. Therefore, in addition to the first effect performed based on the grant determination, the second effect is performed to diversify the effect.

Here, the first privilege is given based on the result of the grant determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the first effect (for example, the effect for game rounds) is performed by a predetermined notification means based on the grant determination. In, while it is possible to expect that the first privilege may be obtained if the first effect based on this grant determination continues for a long time, for example, regarding whether or not the first privilege can be obtained. For a player who is paying attention only, or a player who understands the result of this grant determination to some extent due to some circumstances (for example, the presence or absence of a notice effect, strength, etc.), the first effect performed by a predetermined notification means is If you continue for a long time, you may find it redundant. On the contrary, if the first effect based on the grant determination is short, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be avoided, but the effect of sufficiently enjoying the first effect is reduced. That is, it can be said that the longer the length of the first effect on the grant determination side is, the better it is, and conversely, even if it is short, inconvenience may occur.

Therefore, if a means for setting a special condition in which the probability of establishment may differ depending on the length of the period in which the second effect is performed is provided as in this configuration, a scale such as the length of the simple first effect on the grant determination side is provided. It is possible to have a scale different from that, and even if the above-mentioned inconvenience may occur in the first effect on the grant determination side, it is expected that the special condition will be easily satisfied. It is possible to maintain a good balance of attention to the game. In addition, "depending on the length of the period" can be rephrased as "in relation to the length of the period" or "depending on the length of the period".

Feature K32. Information acquisition means (operation by the main control device 81) for acquiring grant determination information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34). A means of performing a winning process for the mouth) and
Grant determination means (mainly) that determines whether or not to grant the first privilege (for example, open / close execution mode or high frequency support mode) to the player based on the grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means. (Function to execute the hit / fail judgment process by the control device 81) and
A function of executing a game rotation control process by a first effect setting means (main control device 81) for setting a first effect to be performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) based on the grant determination by the grant determination means. )When,
A first effect executing means (a function of executing a variation display control process by the effect control device 82) for executing the first effect set by the first effect setting means by the predetermined notification means.
A first privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
A second effect execution means (special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) capable of executing a second effect (special hold notice) different from the first effect by the predetermined notification means or another notification means. Function to execute) and
A second condition setting means (time specifying pattern by the effect control device 82) for setting a special condition whose probability of establishment may differ depending on the length of the period in which the second effect is performed, based on whether or not the special condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a function to execute time timer input processing).

According to the above configuration, the grant determination information is acquired based on the fact that the acquisition condition is satisfied, and the grant determination of whether or not the first privilege is granted is performed based on the grant determination information, and the grant is determined. In a gaming machine in which the first effect is executed by a predetermined notification means based on a determination, a second notification means is used by a predetermined notification means or another notification means based on the fact that a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied. The production is executed. Therefore, in addition to the first effect performed based on the grant determination, the second effect is performed to diversify the effect.

Here, the first privilege is given based on the result of the grant determination based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the first effect (for example, the effect for game rounds) is performed by a predetermined notification means based on the grant determination. In, while it is possible to expect that the first privilege may be obtained if the first effect based on this grant determination continues for a long time, for example, regarding whether or not the first privilege can be obtained. For a player who is paying attention only, or a player who understands the result of this grant determination to some extent due to some circumstances (for example, the presence or absence of a notice effect, strength, etc.), the first effect performed by a predetermined notification means is If you continue for a long time, you may find it redundant. On the contrary, if the first effect based on the grant determination is short, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be avoided, but the effect of sufficiently enjoying the first effect is reduced. That is, it can be said that the longer the length of the first effect on the grant determination side is, the better it is, and conversely, even if it is short, inconvenience may occur.

Therefore, as in this configuration, a second condition setting means for setting a special condition in which the probability of establishment may differ depending on the length of the period in which the second effect is performed is provided based on whether or not the special condition is satisfied. If this is the case, it is possible to have a scale different from the scale such as the length of the simple first effect on the grant determination side, and if the first effect on the grant determination side may cause the above-mentioned inconvenience. Even so, we can expect that special conditions will be more likely to be met.

In particular, since the special conditions set by the second condition setting means are set based on whether or not the special conditions are satisfied, for example, the gaming machine side determines whether or not the special conditions are satisfied according to the gaming situation. It can be managed to some extent. Specifically, if the situation is such that the special condition should be satisfied or the situation should not be satisfied, the special condition can be set based on that. It is possible to eliminate the discomfort in the production based on the success or failure, and in this way, the production as designed can be suitably executed. In addition, "depending on the length of the period" can be rephrased as "in relation to the length of the period" or "depending on the length of the period".

When the characteristic configurations described in the features K1 to K30 are applied to the feature K31 or the feature K32, the effects of the characteristic configuration to be applied can be synergistically achieved.

<Characteristic L group>
Feature L1. Information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for a working port by the main control device 81) to acquire information for grant determination (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and
Information storage means (acquired information storage means, reserved ball storage area 232) that stores the grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number (4 pieces) which is a plurality of predetermined numbers. When,
With respect to the grant determination information stored in the information storage means, the grant determination means (presence / absence determination by the main control device 81) for determining whether or not to grant the first privilege (open / close execution mode, etc.) to the player. Function to execute processing) and
Based on the grant determination performed by the grant determination means, the predetermined notification means starts the first effect operation, and ends the first effect operation as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. The first effect setting means (a function of executing the game time control process by the main control device 81) that causes the first effect (for example, a game time) to be performed once, and the operation for the first effect is performed.
An operation period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period in which the first effect is performed, and
A first effect executing means (a function of executing a variation display control process by the effect control device 82) that enables the first effect operation to be performed over an operation period set by the operation period setting means.
A first privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
A second effect executing means (a function of executing a hold control command correspondence process by the effect control device 82) capable of executing the second effect by the predetermined notification means or another notification means.
A condition setting means (a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) for setting a special condition in which the probability of establishment may differ depending on the length of the period in which the second effect is performed, and
A destination specifying means for executing a process of specifying information about predetermined grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means at a timing before the predetermined grant determination information becomes the target of the grant determination ( A function for executing the hold information grasping process by the effect control device 82, a function for executing the hold command setting process by the main control device 81), and
Equipped with
The condition setting means is
The first means (for example, the function of executing the timer input process at the time of the normal pattern by the effect control device 82) that can set the special condition without considering whether or not the special condition is satisfied, and
The special condition is set by a second means (a function of executing a timer input process at a time specific pattern by the effect control device 82, a main control device 81) capable of setting the special condition based on whether or not the special condition is satisfied. (Function to execute the process of step S4910) and
The special condition is set by a third means (a function of executing the process of steps S1706 and S1707 by the effect control device 82, a main control device 81) capable of setting the special condition based on the result of the specified process by the prior identification means. Function to execute the main side special hold notice setting process) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the first effect is unfolded according to the operation period set by the operation period setting means, and the first effect is based on the result of the grant determination related to the grant determination information that triggered the first effect. In a gaming machine to which a privilege is given, a second effect may be executed in which a special condition is set in which the probability of establishment may differ depending on the length of the period. By doing so, in addition to the conventional game in which information for grant determination is simply acquired and the result is grasped through the first effect, it is possible to entertain other effects, and the interest of the game can be enjoyed. Can be improved.

Here, as the production of the gaming machine, a device is made to make the first production flashy, or to execute other productions other than the first production, thereby increasing the attention of the first production. Some are. However, these are the first effects themselves or the effects accompanying them. On the other hand, in the above configuration, in the second effect, a special condition in which the probability of establishment may differ depending on the length of the effect is set without considering that the condition is satisfied (first means). Or, when it is set based on the fact that it is established (second means), or it is set based on the result of the process of specifying the stored grant determination information before the timing of the grant determination. There are cases (third means) and the like. In other words, regardless of the first effect, the special condition is established in relation to the first effect, while assuming that the special condition may be set regardless of whether or not the special condition is satisfied. When inconveniences such as when you want to make it (when you do not want to make it) occur, you can deal with it and use them properly, so that the first effect and the second effect can be compatible well. As a result of the above, it is possible to obtain a second effect that is completely different from the conventional effect that is uniquely determined by the relationship with the first effect side, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

The feature L1 can also be expressed as follows. In this case, if each configuration of the following feature L group is applied to this configuration, the "grant determination information" is referred to as "judgment information", the "grant determination means" is referred to as "determination means", and the "first identification" is applied. It is advisable to read "means" as "first determination means", "operation period" as "period", and "operation period setting means" as "period setting means", respectively. Further, if the "predetermined number" is set to the "predetermined number, which is a plurality of predetermined numbers", it is possible to increase the number of judgment targets by the "first judgment means", and a variety of games based on the judgment result. Can be achieved.

"Information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for a working port by the main control device 81) to acquire determination information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and
Information storage means (acquired information storage means, reserved ball storage area 232) that stores the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number (4 pieces) predetermined.
For the determination information stored in the information storage means, a determination means (execution of a hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) for determining whether or not to give the player a first privilege (open / close execution mode, etc.). Function to do) and
The first effect is to start the first effect by a predetermined notification means based on the determination by the determination means, and end the first effect as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination by the determination means. A period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting a period in which the first effect is performed, with one effect (for example, a game).
The first effect executing means (a function of executing the game turn control process by the main control device 81, the variation display control by the effect control device 82) so that the first effect is performed over the period set by the period setting means. Function to execute processing) and
Based on the determination by the determination means, the first privilege granting means (function for executing the game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
A second effect executing means (a function of executing a hold control command correspondence process by the effect control device 82) capable of executing the second effect by the predetermined notification means or another notification means.
A condition setting means (a function of executing a special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) for setting a special condition in which the probability of establishment may differ depending on the length of the period in which the second effect is performed, and
Preliminary determination means (holding by the effect control device 82) that determines the predetermined determination information acquired by the information acquisition means at a timing before the predetermined determination information is the target of the determination by the determination means. A function to execute information grasping processing, a function to execute hold command setting processing by the main controller 81), and
Equipped with
The condition setting means is
The first means (for example, the function of executing the timer input process at the time of the normal pattern by the effect control device 82) that can set the special condition without considering whether or not the special condition is satisfied, and
The special condition is set by a second means (a function of executing a timer input process at a time specific pattern by the effect control device 82, a main control device 81) capable of setting the special condition based on whether or not the special condition is satisfied. (Function to execute the process of step S4910) and
The special condition can be set based on the result of the determination process by the prior determination means (a function of executing the process of steps S1706 and S1707 by the effect control device 82, and the main control device 81). (Function to execute side special hold notice setting process) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with. "

Feature L2. The second means sets the special condition based on whether or not the special condition is satisfied based on the result of the specific processing by the prior identification means set by the third means. The gaming machine according to the feature L1.

According to the above configuration, the processing for specifying the grant determination information that is stored by the information storage means and has not yet been the target of the grant determination is performed by the prior identification means, and the special condition is established based on the result. The special conditions are set based on whether or not. Therefore, it is possible to associate the above-mentioned stored grant determination information with respect to the success or failure of the special condition. The special condition is that the probability of establishment may differ depending on the period in which the second effect is performed. However, associating the grant determination information stored as described above is related to the grant determination information. 1 The information on the operation period of the effect is associated with each other, and the success or failure of the special information is taken into consideration. By doing so, in the second effect, it is possible to enhance the relationship with the length of the operation period of the first effect.

Here, for example, when the first effect becomes long, the player has the expectation that the information for determining the grant related to the first effect is the result of the grant correspondence, but when it is not so, or If you have detected in advance that this is not the case (for example, if you have detected that it is extremely unlikely that the result is a grant response result from an effect such as a reserved image as another effect), the first effect should be longer. The more, it is a wasteful period for the player, and the interest in the game may be diminished. On the contrary, if the first effect is shortened, it is preferable for the player to efficiently digest the first effect, which does not result in the grant response, in a short period of time, but even the first effect, which results in the grant response. If the period is short, the game of enjoying the production leading up to the grant response result will be impaired, which can also be a factor that diminishes the interest in the game. Therefore, for the first effect, it is considered that the length of the operation period is set so that the effect of the effect is the highest in relation to the result of the grant correspondence. In such a relationship, if the second effect side also enhances the relevance according to the operation period of the first effect, the operation period may become longer or shorter in the first effect, as described above. Even if an inconvenience occurs, the probability of establishing the special condition changes in the second effect, so that the inconvenience due to the operation period of the first effect can be covered by the second effect. It is possible to further enhance the significance of performing the second effect in which the conditions are set.

Feature L3. As the identification process, the destination specifying means executes a period specifying process for specifying information on the operation period related to the first effect when the predetermined grant determination information is the target of the grant determination. It is provided with means (a function of executing the process of grasping the hold information by the effect control device 82, and a function of executing the process of steps S4908 to S4909 by the main control device 81).
The second means is characterized in that the special condition is set based on whether or not the special condition is satisfied based on the result of the specified process by the period specifying means among the third means. The gaming machine according to the feature L1 or the feature L2.

According to the above configuration, the effect described in the feature L2 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature L4. The second means sets the special condition based on whether or not the special condition is satisfied based on the result of the specific processing by the prior identification means set by the third means.
The operation period setting means is a special period setting means (steps S4907 to S4914 by the main control device 81, when the hold notice is executed, in which the operation period can be set based on the special conditions set by the second means. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing a variable display time setting process).

According to the above configuration, the processing for specifying the grant determination information that is stored by the information storage means and has not yet been the target of the grant determination is performed by the prior identification means, and the special condition is established based on the result. The special conditions are set based on whether or not. Therefore, it is possible to associate the above-mentioned stored grant determination information with respect to the success or failure of the special condition. The special condition is that the probability of establishment may differ depending on the period in which the second effect is performed. However, associating the grant determination information stored as described above is related to the grant determination information. 1 The information on the operation period of the effect is associated with each other, and the success or failure of the special information is taken into consideration. By doing so, in the second effect, it is possible to enhance the relationship with the length of the operation period of the first effect.

Here, for example, when the first effect becomes long, the player has the expectation that the information for determining the grant related to the first effect is the result of the grant correspondence, but when it is not so, or If you have detected in advance that this is not the case (for example, if you have detected that it is extremely unlikely that the result is a grant response result from an effect such as a reserved image as another effect), the first effect should be longer. The more, it is a wasteful period for the player, and the interest in the game may be diminished. On the contrary, if the first effect is shortened, it is preferable for the player to efficiently digest the first effect, which does not result in the grant response, in a short period of time, but even the first effect, which results in the grant response. If the period is short, the game of enjoying the production leading up to the grant response result will be impaired, which can also be a factor that diminishes the interest in the game. Therefore, for the first effect, it is considered that the length of the operation period should be set so that the effect of the effect is the highest in relation to the result of the grant correspondence. In such a relationship, if the second effect is also associated with the operation period of the first effect, the operation period may become longer or shorter in the first effect, and the above-mentioned inconvenience occurs. Even so, since the probability of establishment of the special condition changes in the second production, the inconvenience due to the operation period of the first production side can be followed by the second production side, and the special condition is set. The significance of performing the second production can be further enhanced.

Further, in the above configuration, since the special period setting means for setting the operation period of the first effect is provided based on the special condition set in the second effect, the grant determination that has not yet been the target of the grant determination is provided. Even if the operation period is not fixed for the information, special conditions can be set at a timing earlier than that. By doing so, regarding the operation period of the first effect related to the grant determination information, the game status when the grant determination information is the target of the grant determination (for example, the grant determination stored in the information storage means). Even in a configuration that changes according to the number of information, etc.), the result set first on the second production side based on the success or failure of the special condition and the operation period of the first production that is the target of the grant judgment after that. It is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the success or failure of the special condition is different from that at the time of setting due to the discrepancy.

Not only that, since the operation period may be set based on the special condition set earlier on the first production side, a complicated configuration such as changing the grant determination information itself based on the special condition is used. Even if it is not necessary, the operation period can be set to meet the special conditions, and it is possible to greatly simplify the processing configuration regarding the setting of the effect. As a result of the above, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably measured.

Feature L5. The feature L4 is characterized in that the special period setting means includes a means for setting the operation period so that the special condition is satisfied (a function of making an affirmative determination in the process of step S4911 by the main control device 81). The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, since the operation period is set so that the special condition is satisfied, even if the result is not preferable for the player on the first effect side, the special condition is satisfied on the second effect side. Therefore, it can be a favorable result for the player. By doing so, it becomes possible to suitably follow the first effect by the second effect.

Feature L6. Described in feature L5, the special period setting means includes means for setting the operation period so that the special condition is not satisfied (a function of executing the process of step S4912 by the main control device 81). Pachinko machine.

According to the above configuration, it may be set so that the special condition is satisfied, or it may be set so that the special condition is not satisfied. By doing so, it is possible to make the production more diverse and to improve the interest.

Feature L7. It is equipped with a period information storage means (variable display time table) that stores information groups for a plurality of predetermined operation periods.
The operation period setting means selects an operation period information group stored in the period information storage means based on the grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means, and operates according to the first effect of the present time. It is a configuration to set the period,
The special period setting means is characterized in that the operation period can be set based on the special conditions by differentiating the information group of the selected operation period. The gaming machine according to any one of L6.

According to the above configuration, when the operation period is set by the special period setting means, if the information group of the selected operation period is different, the grant determination information is not changed and is based on the special conditions. It can be an operating period. Therefore, for example, an event that the information for grant determination differs between the time of acquisition and the time of determination does not occur. If such an event occurs, it is considered that the unfairness of the game is increased by rewriting the grant determination information. Even if such an event is allowed, is the grant determination information different due to normal processing as a gaming machine, or is the grant determination information different due to noise or some kind of fraudulent activity? It becomes necessary to judge, and there is a concern that the processing configuration will be complicated. Therefore, the fairness of the game is ensured and the processing configuration is simplified by using the above configuration so that the operation period can be changed within the range that does not require the change of the grant determination information. It is possible to plan.

In the above feature L7, "operation period" is read as "period", "operation period setting means" is read as "period setting means", and "grant determination information" is read as "judgment information", as follows. It is also possible to express.

"It is equipped with a period information storage means (variable display time table) that stores a plurality of predetermined period information groups.
The period setting means selects one period information group stored in the period information storage means based on the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means, and selects the first period information group from the period information group this time. It is a configuration that sets the period related to the production,
The special period setting means can select a period information group corresponding to setting a period related to the first effect based on the special condition, and set a period related to the first effect. The gaming machine according to any one of the features L4 to L6, which is characterized in that.

Feature L8. A first control device (main control device 81) having the grant determination means and the operation period setting means,
A second control device (effect control device 82) having the first effect execution means and the second effect execution means,
Equipped with
The first control device is an output means (main control device 81) that outputs information on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means and information on the operation period set by the operation period setting means to the second control device. (Function to execute the process of steps S5003 to S5005) by
The second control device executes the first effect based on the information received from the output means.
As the identification process, the destination specifying means executes a period specifying process for specifying information on the operation period related to the first effect when the predetermined grant determination information is the target of the grant determination. It is provided with means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4908 to S4909 by the main control device 81).
The second means sets the special condition based on whether or not the special condition is satisfied based on the result of the specified process by the period specifying means among the third means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L7, wherein the first control device has the second means and the third means.

According to the above configuration, the first effect is performed over the operation period set in the operation period setting means of the first control device, and the second effect is executed by the second effect item means of the second control device. The second means and the third means having an operation period related to the special condition of the second effect are set on the first control device side, and the first means having no relation to the operation period is set on the second control device side. To. That is, in the case of special conditions related to the operation period, it is set on the first control device side, and if not, it is set on the second control device side. If the special conditions related to the operation period are also configured to be performed on the second control device side, it becomes necessary to output the information on the special conditions determined on the second control device side to the first control device side. However, the first control device originally outputs the information on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means and the information on the operation period to the second control device, and the second control device is based on these information. 1 It is assumed that the production will be performed. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the information about the special condition is output from the second control device to the first control device as described above, the input / output is the reverse route to the normal one. Then, it becomes necessary to separately provide a path (cable or the like) for input / output, and there is a concern that the number of components of the gaming machine will increase (cost increase) and the configuration will become complicated. Therefore, if the first control device side has the second means and the third means as in the above configuration, the special conditions related to the operation period can be set on the first control device side, and the second It is not necessary to output the information about the special condition from the control device side to the first control device side.

Feature L9. The gaming machine according to feature L8, wherein the second control device has the first means.

According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine of feature L8, since the first means not related to the operation period is configured to be possessed by the second control device side, the first control device and the second control device are specially designed separately. The condition is set. By doing so, it is possible to distribute the processing load.

Feature L10. The second means means that the result of the process specified by the prior identification means by the third means is the grant correspondence result when the predetermined grant determination information is the target of the grant determination. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L9, wherein the special condition is set so that the special condition is satisfied based on the corresponding result.

According to the above configuration, it is specified that the predetermined grant determination information stored in the information storage means corresponds to the grant correspondence result at the timing before the target of the grant determination. In this case, the second means (third means) is set so that the special condition is satisfied, and the second effect is executed based on the setting. The special condition can have a different probability of being established depending on the length of the second effect. Therefore, in the above configuration, special conditions are satisfied according to the length of the first effect related to the grant determination information that is the result of the grant correspondence and the length of the first effect related to the grant determination information executed before that. It is configured to be set to.

Here, in a situation where the player predicts that the information of the grant determination result of the grant determination information stored in the information storage means is the grant response result for some reason (for example, so-called advance notice effect). , The following inconveniences are possible. That is, for example, while expecting that the first effect of the grant determination information is performed, the first effect of the previous grant determination information is too much to be performed as soon as possible. It can be annoying. Therefore, in such a situation, if the second effect is configured so that the special condition is satisfied, another enjoyment is given that the special condition is satisfied even if the length of the second effect is long. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the first effect is annoying. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature L11. The condition setting means is a means (main control device 81) for setting by the first means or the second means instead of the third means based on the condition that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L10, characterized in that it is provided with (a function of executing the processes of steps S4902 and S4903 and steps S5610 to S5612) according to the above.

According to the above configuration, the special condition is set even when the process specified by the first specifying means cannot be executed or the result of the specified process is unsuitable for setting the special condition by the third means. Can be done. As a result, by forcibly setting by the third means, it is possible to suitably set the special conditions by other means (first means or second means) without causing a contradiction in the special conditions and other effects. It becomes.

Feature L12. Information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for a working port by the main control device 81) to acquire information for grant determination (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and
Information storage means (acquired information storage means, reserved ball storage area 232) that stores the grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number (4 pieces) which is a plurality of predetermined numbers. When,
With respect to the grant determination information stored in the information storage means, the grant determination means (presence / absence determination by the main control device 81) for determining whether or not to grant the first privilege (open / close execution mode, etc.) to the player. Function to execute processing) and
Based on the grant determination performed by the grant determination means, the predetermined notification means starts the first effect operation, and ends the first effect operation as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. The first effect setting means (a function of executing the game time control process by the main control device 81) that causes the first effect (for example, a game time) to be performed once, and the operation for the first effect is performed.
An operation period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period in which the first effect is performed, and
A first effect executing means (a function of executing a variation display control process by the effect control device 82) that enables the first effect operation to be performed over an operation period set by the operation period setting means.
A first privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
A second effect executing means (a function of executing a hold control command correspondence process by the effect control device 82) capable of executing the second effect by the predetermined notification means or another notification means.
Condition setting means (a function of executing the main side special hold notice setting process by the main control device 81) for setting a special condition in which the establishment probability may differ depending on the length of the period in which the second effect is performed, and
Equipped with
The operation period setting means is a special setting means for setting the operation period of the first effect based on the special condition set by the condition setting means (variation display time at the time of execution of the hold notice by the main control device 81). A gaming machine characterized by having a function (function to execute setting processing).

According to the above configuration, the first effect is unfolded according to the operation period set by the operation period setting means, and the first effect is based on the result of the grant determination related to the grant determination information that triggered the first effect. In a gaming machine to which a privilege is given, a second effect may be executed in which a special condition is set in which the probability of establishment may differ depending on the length of the period. By doing so, in addition to the conventional game of simply acquiring the grant determination information and grasping the result through the first effect, the second effect (whether or not the special condition is satisfied) is obtained. It is possible to entertain the production) and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the above configuration, the operation period of the first effect may be set based on the special condition on the second effect side. That is, since the special condition has a different probability of establishment depending on the length of the second effect, the operation period of the first effect is set based on the special condition set on the second effect side, and the operation period of the first effect is set based on the special condition. The length of the second effect is set. By doing this,
The operation period of the first effect can be set so that the special condition is satisfied, or the operation period of the first effect can be set so that the special condition is not satisfied. Then, the execution period of the second effect changes accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to closely relate the first effect corresponding to the result of the grant determination and the second effect corresponding to the success or failure of the special condition, and the effect related to the establishment of different judgments / conditions, for example, on the first effect side. When it is desired to establish a special condition for convenience (when it is not desired to be established), it is possible to prevent a discrepancy from occurring in relation to the second production side. Therefore, the first effect and the second effect can be suitably executed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

When the characteristic configurations described in the features L1 to L11 are applied to the feature L12, the effect of the applied characteristic configuration can be synergistically achieved.

Further, the above feature L12 can also be expressed as follows. In this case, if each configuration of the above-mentioned feature L group is applied to this configuration, the "grant determination information" is referred to as "judgment information", the "grant determination means" is referred to as "determination means", and "prior identification". It is advisable to read "means" as "first determination means", "operation period" as "period", and "operation period setting means" as "period setting means", respectively. Further, if the "predetermined number" is set to the "predetermined number, which is a plurality of predetermined numbers", it is possible to increase the number of judgment targets by the "first judgment means", and a variety of games based on the judgment result. Can be achieved.

"Information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for a working port by the main control device 81) to acquire determination information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and
Information storage means (acquired information storage means, reserved ball storage area 232) that stores the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number (4 pieces) predetermined.
For the determination information stored in the information storage means, a determination means (execution of a hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) for determining whether or not to give the player a first privilege (open / close execution mode, etc.). Function to do) and
The first effect is to start the first effect by a predetermined notification means based on the determination by the determination means, and end the first effect as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination by the determination means. A period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting a period in which the first effect is performed, with one effect (for example, a game).
The first effect executing means (a function of executing the game turn control process by the main control device 81, the variation display control by the effect control device 82) so that the first effect is performed over the period set by the period setting means. Function to execute processing) and
Based on the determination by the determination means, the first privilege granting means (function for executing the game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
A second effect executing means (a function of executing a hold control command correspondence process by the effect control device 82) capable of executing the second effect by the predetermined notification means or another notification means.
Condition setting means (a function of executing the main side special hold notice setting process by the main control device 81) for setting a special condition in which the establishment probability may differ depending on the length of the period in which the second effect is performed, and
Equipped with
The period setting means is a special setting means for setting the period of the first effect based on the special condition set by the condition setting means (processing of setting the variable display time at the time of execution of the hold notice by the main control device 81). A gaming machine characterized by having a function to execute). "

<Characteristic M group>
Features M1. Information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for a working port by the main control device 81) to acquire information for grant determination (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and
Information storage means (acquired information storage means, reserved ball storage area 232) that stores the grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number (4 pieces) which is a plurality of predetermined numbers. When,
With respect to the grant determination information stored in the information storage means, the grant determination means (presence / absence determination by the main control device 81) for determining whether or not to grant the first privilege (open / close execution mode, etc.) to the player. Function to execute processing) and
Based on the grant determination performed by the grant determination means, the predetermined notification means starts the first effect operation, and ends the first effect operation as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. The first effect setting means (a function of executing the game time control process by the main control device 81) that causes the first effect (for example, a game time) to be performed once, and the operation for the first effect is performed.
Based on the grant determination performed by the grant determination means, the process of the first setting means (processes S5302 to S5305 by the main control device 81) capable of setting the operation period in which the first effect is performed is executed. Function to do) and
A first effect executing means (a function of executing a variation display control process by the effect control device 82) that enables the first effect operation to be performed over an operation period set by the first setting means.
A first privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
A destination specifying means that executes a process of specifying information about the predetermined grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means at a timing before the predetermined grant determination information becomes the target of the grant determination ( (Function to execute the setting process of the hold command by the main controller 81) and
A second setting means (a process of setting a variable display time when a hold notice is executed by the main control device 81) capable of setting an operation period of the first effect based on the result of the specific process by the prior identification means. Function to execute) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, with respect to the grant determination information stored in the information storage means, the first effect is unfolded according to the operation period set by the first setting means, and the grant that triggers the first effect is performed. In a gaming machine to which the first privilege is granted based on the result of the grant determination related to the determination information, the operation period of the first effect is at a timing before the grant determination that triggers the first effect is performed. It may be set based on the result of the process specified by the destination identification means to be performed. That is, the operation period of the first effect may be set before the start of the first effect and is stored in the information storage means on hold. By doing so, since the operation period can be set before the start of the first effect, for example, it is possible to execute the effect using the operation period of the first effect before the start of the first effect. Become. As a result, it is possible to diversify the production and preferably increase the degree of attention to the game.

The feature M1 can also be expressed as follows. In this case, if each configuration of the following feature M group is applied to this configuration, the "grant determination information" is referred to as "judgment information", the "grant determination means" is referred to as "determination means", and the "first identification" is applied. It is advisable to read "means" as "first determination means" and "operation period" as "period", respectively. Further, if the "predetermined number" is set to the "predetermined number, which is a plurality of predetermined numbers", it is possible to increase the number of judgment targets by the "first judgment means", and a variety of games based on the judgment result. Can be achieved.

"Information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for a working port by the main control device 81) to acquire determination information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and
Information storage means (acquired information storage means, reserved ball storage area 232) that stores the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number (4 pieces) predetermined.
For the determination information stored in the information storage means, a determination means (execution of a hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) for determining whether or not to give the player a first privilege (open / close execution mode, etc.). Function to do) and
The first effect is to start the first effect by a predetermined notification means based on the determination by the determination means, and end the first effect as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination by the determination means. A first setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S5302 to S5305 by the main control device 81) capable of setting a period in which the first effect is performed, which is one effect (for example, a game), and
A first effect executing means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the main control device 81, a variation display by the effect control device 82) that allows the first effect to be performed over a period set by the first setting means. Function to execute control processing) and
Based on the determination by the determination means, the first privilege granting means (function for executing the game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
With respect to the predetermined determination information acquired by the information acquisition means, the prior determination means (holding by the main control device 81) makes a determination at a timing before the predetermined determination information becomes the target of the determination by the determination means. Function to execute command setting processing) and
A function of executing a second setting means (a function of setting a variation display time at the time of executing a hold notice by the main control device 81) capable of setting the period of the first effect based on the result of the determination by the prior determination means. )When,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with. "

Features M2. The second setting means is the first effect relating to the grant determination information that is the target of the grant determination before the predetermined grant determination information that is the target of the identification process by the prior identification means. The gaming machine according to feature M1, wherein the operation period can be set based on the result of the specified process.

According to the above configuration, when the process specified by the prior identification means is performed, the first information regarding the grant determination that is the target of the grant determination is prior to the grant determination information that is the target of the specific process. It is also possible to set the operation period of the production. By doing so, for example, not only the first effect related to the grant determination information that is the target of the specific process, but also the effect using the operation period of the first effect that is performed prior to that can be obtained. It is possible to perform the process before the start of the first effect, which is the target of the specified process. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the production and preferably increase the degree of attention to the game.

In the above feature M2, the "grant determination information" is read as "judgment information", the "destination specifying means" is read as "first determination means", and the "operation period" is read as "period". It can also be expressed as follows.

"The second setting means describes the period of the first effect related to the determination information to be determined before the predetermined determination information to be determined by the prior determination means. The gaming machine according to feature M1, which is characterized in that it has a configuration that can be set based on a determination result by a prior determination means. "

Features M3. The first effect executing means is a selection means (main control) capable of performing a process of selecting the operation period set by the first setting means or the second setting means as the operation period of the first effect this time. The gaming machine according to feature M1 or feature M2, which is provided with a function of executing the process of step S5301 by the device 81).

According to the above configuration, when the selection means is provided, the process specified by the first specifying means is not performed, or the result of the specified process is the result corresponding to the case where the setting by the second setting means is not performed. Even if the setting by the second setting means is not performed, the operation period set by the first setting means may be selected, and the operation period is not set when the first effect is performed. Does not occur.

Features M4. The gaming machine according to feature M3, wherein the selection means has a configuration capable of performing the selection process at least by the start of the first effect.

According to the above configuration, since the operation period can be set at least by the start of the first effect, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration set after the start.

Here, in the first effect, the effect is developed according to the result of the grant determination, and in order to diversify the effect, various effect contents may be set at the start of the first effect. Therefore, at the start of the first effect, it is considered that the processing load may be extremely increased due to the control of the gaming machine. Then, for example, if the operation period is long, the effect content will be set so that a long effect will be developed accordingly, and if the operation period is short, the effect content will be set so that the effect will be short accordingly. Will be. That is, the setting of the operation period of the first effect is an important factor in setting the effect content, and if the operation period is not determined, the effect content cannot be set or is difficult to perform. Can be. Therefore, as described above, if the operation period can be determined when the information for grant determination is acquired, the effect content may be set according to the operation period at the start of the first effect, which increases the processing load. Can be significantly reduced.

Feature M5. The special grant determination information (reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach) in which the operation period of the first effect related to the grant determination information can be determined at the stage when the grant determination information is acquired by the information acquisition means. It has been set and
The gaming machine according to feature M3 or feature M4, wherein the selection means has a configuration capable of selecting the operation period based on the special grant determination information.

According to the above configuration, in performing the process of selecting the operation period, not only the operation period set by the first and second setting means but also the special grant determination in which the operation period can be determined when the grant determination information is acquired. Information-based operating periods can also be selected. By doing so, it is possible not only to make the operation period various, but also to apply the invention of the feature M1 to the configuration in which the operation period is set at the time of acquiring the grant determination information. Become.

Features M6. It is equipped with a period information storage means (variable display time table) in which information groups of a plurality of predetermined operation periods are stored.
The operation period setting means selects an operation period information group stored in the period information storage means based on the grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means, and operates according to the first effect of the present time. It is a configuration to set the period,
The information group of the operation period selected differs depending on whether the operation period is set by the first setting means or the operation period is set by the second setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M5.

According to the above configuration, the information group of the operation period to be used may be different depending on whether the operation period is set by the first setting means or the operation period is set by the second setting means. , There is no need to change the information for determining grant. Therefore, for example, an event that the information for grant determination differs between the time of acquisition and the time of determination does not occur. If such an event occurs, it is considered that the unfairness of the game is increased by rewriting the grant determination information. Even if such an event is allowed, is the grant determination information different due to normal processing as a gaming machine, or is the grant determination information different due to noise or some kind of fraudulent activity? It becomes necessary to judge, and there is a concern that the processing configuration will be complicated. Therefore, the fairness of the game is ensured and the processing configuration is simplified by using the above configuration so that the operation period can be changed within the range that does not require the change of the grant determination information. It is possible to plan.

Feature M7. The second setting means is a specific period setting means (step by the main control device 81) for setting a specific period (setting period) used for setting the operation period based on the result of the specific process by the prior identification means. Features M1 to M6 having a function of executing the process of S4910) and setting the operation period of the first effect within the range of the specific period set by the specific period setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the above configuration, a specific period is set based on the result of the process specified by the prior identification means, and the operation period is set so that the operation period of each first effect falls within the range of the specific period. By doing so, for example, when an effect corresponding to a specific period is set, it is possible to link the execution period of the effect and the operation period of the first effect. As a result of the above, it is possible to diversify the effects and preferably increase the degree of attention to the game by using the operation period of the first effect.

Features M8. The second setting means is
The specification regarding the operation period of the first effect related to the grant determination information that is the target of the grant determination before the predetermined grant determination information that is the target of the specific process by the prior identification means. It is a configuration that can set the operation period based on the result of the processing to be performed.
Further, within the range of the specific period set by the specific period setting means, the grant determination target of the grant determination is prior to the predetermined grant determination information targeted for the specific process. The gaming machine according to feature M7, which has a configuration capable of setting an operation period of the first effect related to information.

According to the above configuration, the operation period and the specific period of the first effect related to the grant determination information to be the subject of the grant determination before the predetermined grant determination information to be the target of the process to be specified by the prior identification means. And can be associated. As a result, as described in the above-mentioned feature M7, when an effect corresponding to a specific period is set, it can be associated with this effect.

Features M9. When the second setting means has a plurality of the grant determination information to be the grant determination prior to the predetermined grant determination information to be the target of the specific process, the plurality of the grant determination means. It is possible to set the operation period of the first effect related to each grant determination information so that the total of the operation periods of the first effect related to the grant determination information is within the range of the specific period. The gaming machine according to the feature M8.

According to the above configuration, if there is a plurality of grant determination information to be granted prior to the predetermined grant determination information targeted for the process to be specified by the prior identification means, the plurality of grant determination information is granted. The total operation period of the first effect related to the determination information and the specific period can be linked. As a result, for example, it is possible to perform an effect linked to the operation period of the first effect related to the plurality of grant determination information, and it is possible to diversify the effect.

Features M10. The grant determination means determines the grant determination of the first grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means with respect to the second grant determination information acquired after the first grant determination information. It is provided with a prior determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3801 to S3811 by the main control device 81) that can be performed before the grant determination of the first grant determination information.
The second setting means has a configuration capable of setting the operation period within the range of the specific period, including the second grant determination information acquired later by the prior determination means. The gaming machine according to feature M8 or feature M9.

According to the above configuration, the operation period of the first effect for the second grant determination information, which is acquired later but is the target of the grant determination, is also set to be within the range of the specific period. By doing so, even if the second grant determination information is acquired after the process of specifying by the prior identification means is performed, the first effect of the second grant determination information is performed. It is possible to link the operation period and the specific period.

Features M11. The second setting means is within the range of the specific period including the operation period of the first effect related to the predetermined grant determination information that is the target of the specific process by the prior identification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features M7 to M10, characterized in that the operation period of the first effect related to each grant determination information can be set.

According to the above configuration, the operation period of the first effect related to the predetermined grant determination information that is the target of the specific process, and the first effect related to the grant determination information that is the target of the grant determination before that. The operating period of and is set to be within the range of a specific period. By doing so, it is possible to link the period until the end of the first effect related to the grant determination information that is the target of the specific process with the specific period, and the effect using the specific period can be linked. It is possible to diversify the production, such as by doing it.

Features M12. The second setting means is used by the first setting means among the grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means to set the operation period based on the result of the identification process by the prior identification means. The information for the first operation period (variation type counter CS) is used as the information for the second operation period (special variation type counter) corresponding to the result of the specified process, and the information for the second operation period is used as the first operation. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M11, which is characterized in that it can be stored in an area (special holding storage area) different from the area in which period information is stored.

According to the above configuration, based on the result of the process specified by the prior identification means, the information for the first operation period of the grant determination information is used as the information for the second operation period, which is different from the information for the first operation period. Remember in. By doing so, the information for the first operation period itself can be stored and held in the original storage area, and there is no need to change the information for the first operation period. Therefore, for example, an event that the information for the first operation period in the information for grant determination is different between the time of acquisition and the time of determination does not occur. If such an event occurs, it is considered that the unfairness of the game is increased by rewriting a part of the information for grant determination. Even if such an event is allowed, is it possible that some of the information for determining the grant (information for the first operation period) is different due to normal processing as a gaming machine, or is there noise or some kind of fraudulent activity? It becomes necessary to determine whether a part of the grant determination information (information for the first operation period) is different depending on the method, and there is a concern that the processing configuration may be complicated. Therefore, the fairness of the game is ensured and the processing configuration is simplified by using the above configuration so that the operation period can be changed within the range that does not require the change of the grant determination information. It is possible to plan.

Feature M13. As the operation period in which the first effect is performed, a long operation period (for example, a variable display time corresponding to super reach A to C) and a short operation period (for example, special game times) are supported so as to be relatively long and short. (Variable display time) is set,
The second setting means operates the first effect related to the grant determination information that is the target of the grant determination before the grant determination information that is the target of the identification process by the prior identification means. A long-term setting means that can easily set the period to be the long operation period (in the main control device 81, the hold number counter HK ≧ 2 in the setting process of the variation display time at the time of executing the special game round). The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M12, characterized in that it is provided with a function of setting a variable display time.

According to the above configuration, the first effect related to the grant determination information that is digested before the grant determination information that is the specific target by the prior identification means tends to have a long operation period. Regarding the first effect, the longer the operation period, the more flashy the effect can be performed by using the period as much as possible. If the first effect related to the determination information is set to a long operation period, it becomes easier to perform the effect of the side that is digested before that, not the side that is the specific target, and it is digested before that. It is possible to increase the degree of attention on the side. Then, not only the attention of the side to be digested before the said is increased, but also the first privilege is given after that (that is, the first effect related to the information for grant determination which is the specific target). It is possible to entertain the first effect on the side that is digested before the said while predicting, and it is possible to reduce the feeling of extension during the first effect.

In addition, the above-mentioned feature M13 can be expressed as follows after reading "first-identifying means" as "first-determining means" and "granting-determining information" as "determining information". be. In this case, if each configuration of the feature M group is applied to this configuration, the "long operation period" may be read as "long term" and the "short operation period" may be read as "short period".

"The period in which the first effect is performed is a long period (for example, a variable display time corresponding to super reach A to C) and a short period (for example, a variable display corresponding to a special game time) so as to be relatively long and short. Time) and is set,
The second setting means tends to set the period of the first effect related to the determination information to be determined before the determination information to be determined by the prior determination means to be a long period of time. Long-term setting means that can be set to be ). The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to M12.

Features M14. The second setting means can set the operation period of the first effect related to the grant determination information, which is the target of the identification process by the prior identification means, so as to be likely to be the short operation period. It is characterized by having a short-term setting means (a function of setting the variable display time in the situation where the hold number counter HK = 1 in the variable display time setting process at the time of executing the special game round in the main control device 81). The gaming machine according to the feature M13.

According to the above configuration, the first effect that is digested before the grant determination information that is the specific target by the prior identification means has a long operation period (M13), and the first of the side that is the specific target. As for the production, it tends to be a short operation period. Therefore, after the first effect on the side to be digested before the first effect is performed for a long time (flashily), the first effect on the specific target side is less likely to become the long first effect. The longer and flashy the first effect is, the more attention is paid to the first effect, but if it is a disappointing result (a result that is not the target of the first privilege), the player's The degree of disappointment also increases. In that respect, if the same long and flashy production is performed in the subsequent first production, even if it is a winning result (result that is subject to the grant of the first privilege), the long and flashy production is performed. It makes me feel that it will come off anyway because of the continuation of the above, and it may make me feel that the first production is an increase. In the first place, it is not desirable that the above-mentioned inconvenience occurs because it is the first effect related to the grant determination information that has been specified by the prior identification means. Therefore, as in the above configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience by making it easy for the first effect, which is a specific target, to become a short first effect after the long and flashy first effect.

Feature M15. The long-term setting means is the first effect related to the grant determination information that is the target of the grant determination before the grant determination information that is the target of the identification process by the prior identification means. The gaming machine according to feature M13 or feature M14, wherein the operation period is set so as to easily become the long operation period.

According to the above configuration, the first effect immediately before the first effect of the specific target tends to have a long operation period. In this way, it is possible to perform the first effect immediately before the first effect, which is the specific target to be most noticed. Then, for example, when combined with the configuration of the feature M14, a novel effect such that the first effect of the specific object to be most noticed is performed flashily and then the first effect of the specific object is performed soberly. It becomes possible to do. For example, if the specific result by the prior identification means is the result (hit) corresponding to the granting of the first privilege, the one before the result is greatly flashy and the first. If the result (disengagement) corresponding to the granting of one privilege is notified, and then the result corresponding to the granting of the first privilege in the first production of a short operation period is to be notified soberly, the game. As a person, you will be surprised that you will be hit soon after you are disappointed, and it will be possible to make a novel production.

It should be noted that, on the premise that a plurality of items having different operating period lengths are set as the "long operation period" in the above configuration, "the subject of the grant determination is one before the grant determination information". "The operation period of the first effect related to the grant determination information is likely to be the long operation period", and "the grant determination information to be the target of the grant determination immediately before the grant determination information". The operation period of the first effect is likely to be the longest operation period. ” By doing so, it becomes possible to more preferably exert the above-mentioned excellent effect.

Features M16. When the operation period is set by the second setting means, the first effect executing means is said to be one before the grant determination information that is the target of the identification process by the prior identification means. Using the notification result of the first effect operation in the first effect related to the grant determination information that is the target of the grant determination, the above-mentioned related to the grant determination information that is the target of the specific process. It is provided with a specific first effect executing means (a function of executing a change display time control process at the time of special game rotation in the effect control device 82) capable of executing the first effect operation of the first effect. Characteristic Feature The gaming machine according to any one of M13 to M15.

According to the above configuration, in the first production before the first production, which is the specific target of the prior identification means, a very flashy production is performed, while the first production, which is the specific target, is performed quietly. However, if the first effect is performed using the notification result in the first effect immediately before the first effect that is the specific target, the effect will be so flashy for the first effect that is the specific target. It is preferable because there is no need. By doing so, it is possible to realize a novel production such as notifying the specific result of the prior identification means by a quietly sober production after the flashy production.

Feature M17. The predetermined notification means is a display means capable of variablely displaying a plurality of patterns.
The first effect executing means, as the first effect operation, starts the variable display of the plurality of symbols, stops and displays each of the symbols, and notifies the determination result by the grant determination means. To control
The specific first effect executing means is the first aspect of the grant determination information that is the subject of the grant determination before the grant determination information that is the target of the specific process by the prior identification means. The above-mentioned information for determining grant, which is the target of the specific processing, by using a part of the symbols that have been stopped and displayed as the notification result of the operation for the first effect in one effect. The gaming machine according to feature M16, which has a configuration capable of executing the first effect operation of the first effect.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which variable display of a plurality of symbols is performed by the display means as the first effect, and the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is notified by the stop result of the plurality of symbols, the prior identification means. In the first effect specified by the above, a part of the stop patterns in the previous first effect is used to perform the first effect operation. That is, since the other patterns are not displayed in a variable manner, it can be used as a so-called re-variable effect. In a general re-variation effect, the effect is to stop → re-variate as the effect during the first effect, but with this configuration, the re-variation effect straddles a plurality of first effects. It becomes possible to realize, and it is possible to provide a novel production.

Features M18. As an operation mode of the first effect operation, a specific pattern combination corresponding to the case where a part of the plurality of patterns is stopped and the remaining patterns are variably displayed to give the first privilege. Includes a reach behavior that suggests that
The specific first effect executing means uses the reach operation mode as the first effect operation of the first effect related to the grant determination information that was the target of the grant determination one before the remaining pattern. Is stopped so as not to be the specific pattern combination, and the operation is terminated, and the remaining patterns are used as the first effect operation of the first effect related to the grant determination information that is the target of the specific process. The gaming machine according to feature M17, which is characterized in that it has a configuration capable of variable display.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably realize the so-called re-variation effect after the (off) reach operation mode corresponding to the non-granting of the first privilege.

Features M19. Based on the fact that the result of the specific process by the prior identification means is a predetermined result, the timing before the grant determination information, which is the target of the specific process, becomes the target of the grant determination. A function of executing a special notification executing means (a function of executing a hold control command correspondence process by the effect control device 82) for executing a special notification corresponding to the result of the specified processing by the predetermined notification means or another notification means. )
As a notification mode of the special notification by the special notification executing means, the result of the grant determination when the predetermined grant determination information is the target of the grant determination is the result corresponding to the grant of the first privilege. A high expectation mode and a low expectation mode in which the expectation level is relatively high and low are set.
The special notification executing means can select the notification mode of the low expectation mode as the notification mode of the special notification for the grant determination information that is the target of the identification process by the prior identification means. 1 The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, the first effect is performed for a long operation period for the grant determination information that is the target of the grant determination before the grant determination information that is the specific target, and the special grant determination information after that is performed. The notification is in a low expectation mode. As a result, it is possible to further expect the production on the front side of the specific target grant determination information (in other words, do not expect or concentrate the specific target grant determination information). It becomes possible, and the player's attention can be focused on the production on the front side. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the effect (surprise, etc.) of producing the information for determining the grant of the specific target side.

In the above feature M19, the "priority specifying means" is read as "priority determination means", the "granting determination means" is read as "judgment means", and the "granting determination information" is read as "judgment information". It is also possible to express it as follows.

"The special notification corresponding to the determination result by the prior determination means is the predetermined timing before the predetermined determination information that is the determination target by the prior determination means is subject to the determination by the determination means. It is equipped with special notification execution means (a function to execute hold control command correspondence processing by the effect control device 82) that is executed by the notification means or another notification means.
As a notification mode of the special notification by the special notification executing means, the result of the determination when the predetermined determination information is the target of the determination by the determination means corresponds to the provision of the first privilege. A high expectation mode and a low expectation mode in which the expectation level is relatively high and low are set.
The special notification executing means is a first selection means (effect) that makes it easy to select the notification mode of the low expectation mode as the notification mode of the special notification for the determination information that is the target of the determination by the prior determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of features M13 to M18, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing a process of selecting a holding image on the low expectation side in steps S6003 and S6004 by the control device 82. " ..

Feature M20. The special notification executing means notifies the special notification about the grant determination information to be granted determination immediately before the grant determination information targeted for the identification process by the prior identification means. A second selection means capable of selecting the notification mode of the high expectation mode as the mode (a function of executing a process of selecting a holding image on the high expectation side in steps S6003 and S6004 by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to the feature M19, which is characterized in that it is provided with.

According to the above configuration, for the grant determination information that is the target of the grant determination immediately before the grant determination information that is the specific target, not only the first effect is performed in a long operation period, but also the high expectation level. A special notification is performed as an embodiment. By doing so, it becomes possible to further pay attention to the first effect immediately before. In other words, it is possible to diminish the interest in the specific target side. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the effect (surprise, etc.) of producing the information for determining the grant of the specific target side.

In the above feature M20, the "priority specifying means" is read as "priority determination means", the "granting determination means" is read as "judgment means", and the "granting determination information" is read as "judgment information". It can also be expressed as follows.

"The special notification executing means has the above-mentioned high as the notification mode of the special notification about the determination information to be determined before the determination information to be determined by the prior determination means. It is characterized by having a second selection means (a function of executing a process of selecting a holding image on the high expectation side in steps S6003 and S6004 by the effect control device 82) that makes it easy to select the notification mode of the expectation degree mode. The gaming machine according to the feature M19. "

Features M21. A second effect executing means (a function of executing a hold control command correspondence process by the effect control device 82) capable of executing the second effect by the predetermined notification means or another notification means.
Condition setting means (a function of executing the special hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) for setting a special condition in which the probability of establishment may differ depending on the length of the period in which the second effect is performed, and
Equipped with
The second setting means is characterized in that it is possible to set the operation period of the first effect based on the result of the identification process by the prior identification means and the special conditions. The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to M20.

According to the above configuration, in a predetermined notification means or the like, a second effect may be performed instead of the first effect, and there is a special condition that the probability of establishment may differ depending on the length of the period in which the second effect is performed. It is set. Then, the second setting means sets the operation period of the first effect in consideration of not only the specific result by the prior specifying means but also the special conditions. By doing so, it is possible not only to associate the first effect and the second effect, which seem to have nothing to do with each other, but also to make a special condition (length of the second effect) in the previously executed effect. ) Can be used as a novel gaming machine that determines the length of the first production after that.

Feature M22. The second setting means is such that the special condition in the second effect being executed is satisfied based on the result of the identification process by the prior identification means being a predetermined result. The gaming machine according to feature M21, wherein the operation period of the first effect, which is the setting target of the setting means, can be set.

According to the above configuration, the acquisition condition is satisfied during the execution of the second effect, the grant determination information is acquired, the information about the grant determination information is specified by the prior identification means, and the result is a predetermined result. (For example, the result corresponding to the granting of the first privilege), the operation of the first effect relating to the acquired information for grant determination so that the special condition for the second effect being executed is satisfied. A period may be set. For example, if the player senses in the middle that the special conditions for the second effect will not be satisfied in relation to the first effect in the situation where the second effect is being performed, the second effect is started. Attention is greatly reduced. Therefore, if the operation period of the first effect can be set so that the special condition for the second effect being executed is satisfied as in the present configuration, the degree of attention to the second effect can be suitably increased. ..

In this case, for example, based on the fact that the result of the process specified by the prior identification means is "the result corresponding to the granting of the first privilege", the special condition on the second production side is satisfied as described above. By doing so, it is possible to clearly relate that the special condition is satisfied in the second effect to the notification that the first privilege is given in the first effect. Therefore, the first effect and the second effect can be more closely related to each other, and the degree of attention to both of the effects can be suitably increased.

Feature M23. The second setting means is such that the special condition in the second effect being executed is satisfied based on the number of the grant determination information stored by the information storage means being a specific number. The gaming machine according to feature M21 or feature M22, wherein the operation period of the first effect, which is the setting target of the second setting means, can be set.

According to the above configuration, the acquisition condition is satisfied during the execution of the second effect, and as a result of the acquisition of the grant determination information, the number of the grant determination information is a specific number, and the execution is performed. (2) The operation period of the first effect related to the acquired information for grant determination may be set so that the special condition for the effect is satisfied. Since the probability of establishment of the special condition of the second effect may differ depending on the length of the period in which the first effect is performed, the number of grant determination information that triggers the first effect depends on the success or failure of the special condition. It is considered to be directly connected. Then, for example, if the player has a configuration in which the number of the stored grant determination information is notified, the player can pass or fail the special condition being executed based on the number of the notified grant determination information. Can be easily predicted. Then, if it is predicted that the number of stored grant determination information is small and the special condition cannot be satisfied, the interest in the second effect is greatly reduced. Therefore, if the operation period of the first effect is set so that the special condition of the second effect is satisfied when the number of stored grant determination information is a specific number, the special condition can be set. It will be an unexpected result for the player who predicts that it will not be established, and it will lead to improvement of interest, and as a result, even if the number of information for grant judgment is small, there is still a chance that special conditions will be established. It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

As the timing at which the number of grant determination information is a specific number, for example, "the number of the grant determination information stored in the acquired information at the timing when the grant determination information is acquired by the information acquisition means is Based on the specific number. "

Further, if the "specific number" is limited to, for example, "1", the specific number will be 0 before the information for grant determination is acquired by the information acquisition means. In such a situation, if the subsequent grant determination information is not acquired, only the first effect being executed is involved in the success or failure of the special condition of the second effect. Then, it is considered that the length of the first effect can be grasped to some extent from the effect pattern for the player who is accustomed to the game, and then the second effect side does not wait for the end of the first effect being executed. It is considered that the success or failure of the special conditions of is more clearly predictable. As a result, it is considered that the decrease in the degree of attention to the second effect side as described above is more likely to occur. In that respect, the merit of making the above configuration becomes greater.

Features M24. The second setting means is the predetermined grant determination means based on the grant determination information that is the target of the grant determination after the predetermined grant determination information that is the target of the specific process by the prior identification means. It is provided with post-setting means (a function of setting a variation display time at the time of executing a special game round in the thirteenth embodiment) capable of setting the operation period of the first effect for the grant determination information. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M23.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to set the operation period of the first effect related to the predetermined grant determination information in relation to the subsequent first effect. If the operation period of the predetermined grant determination information is set according to the content (effect pattern and operation period) of the first effect executed / performed prior to the predetermined grant determination information, the above-mentioned destination can be obtained. It can be a first effect having continuity with the first effect performed / performed, and it is considered possible to maintain the interest of the player. On the other hand, for example, in a situation where the player can grasp to some extent which first effect has continuity from the relationship with the acquisition timing of the grant determination information as the effect having the continuity. If the first effect having continuity is further continued in the first effect of the newly acquired information for grant determination, it is easy to make that the further continuous first effect is a so-called continuous effect of Gase. It can be identified and can lead to an extreme drop in attention. In that respect, if the operation period of the first effect related to the predetermined grant determination information can be set based on the subsequent grant determination information, it has not been performed yet, and the subsequent grant determination information is continuously produced. As the pre-effect, the first effect related to the predetermined grant determination information can be used, and the first effect for the subsequent grant determination information can be further enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature M25. The grant determination means said that the grant determination for one grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means is the same for other grant determination information acquired prior to the one grant determination information. It is provided with a priority means (a function of executing data setting processing by the main control device 81 in the seventh embodiment) to be performed with priority over the grant determination.
The post-setting means may set the operation period of the first effect related to the grant determination information to be determined by the priority means based on the other grant determination information previously acquired. The gaming machine according to feature M24, which is characterized by having a possible configuration.

According to the above configuration, the event of the feature M24 is more likely to occur by having the priority means. In such a configuration, the first effect related to the grant determination information for which the grant determination is prioritized first can be executed in association with the first effect related to the grant determination information on the side to be postponed. , The effect of the feature M24 can be more preferably achieved.

In the above feature M25, the "grant determination means" is read as "determination means", the "grant determination information" is read as "judgment information", and the "operation period" is read as "period". It can be expressed as.

"The determination means gives priority to the determination of one determination information acquired by the information acquisition means over the determination of other determination information acquired prior to the one determination information. With priority means to do
The feature M1 to be characterized in that the period of the first effect related to the determination information prioritized by the priority means can be set based on the other determination information previously acquired. The gaming machine according to any one of M24. "

Feature M26. The post-setting means is the predetermined regardless of the type of the grant determination information that is the target of the grant determination after the predetermined grant determination information that is the target of the specific process by the prior identification means. The gaming machine according to the feature M24 or the feature M25, which has a configuration capable of setting the operation period of the first effect for the grant determination information.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to perform post-setting using the same processing configuration regardless of the type of grant determination information to be granted later. Therefore, the effects of the feature M24 and the feature M25 can be obtained with a simpler configuration.

Feature M27. As a result of the grant determination, an advantageous result (probability variation jackpot result) and a disadvantageous result (normal jackpot result) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high or low are included.
The specific first effect executing means is specified by the prior identification means even if the result of the grant determination of the grant determination information to be specified by the prior identification means is the advantageous result. The first effect related to the grant determination information that was the target of the grant determination before the grant determination information that was the target of the process, or the said that was the target of the specified process by the prior identification means. As the first effect related to the grant determination information, it is possible to execute an effect of notifying that the adverse result may occur, and then the target of the specified process by the prior identification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M26, characterized in that it has a configuration capable of notifying the result of the grant determination information.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of attention due to the detection of the result of the grant determination by the first effect. That is, if the first effect is an effect that is likely to be unfavorable to the player (disadvantageous result), it is difficult for the player to pay attention to it. On the other hand, even if an unfavorable result is notified to the player, if there is room for the favorable result to be notified after that, the result is predicted early and the degree of attention is lowered. Can be avoided.

Feature M28. A specific effect (demo screen, etc.) to be executed in a situation where the grant determination information is not stored by the information storage means is set.
The first effect executing means includes the first effect related to the grant determination information that is the target of the specific process by the prior identification means, and the grant determination information that is the target of the specific process. One of the features M1 to M27 characterized in that the specific effect can be executed between the first effect related to the grant determination information that is the target of the grant determination. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to reduce the relationship between the first effect that is the target of the process specified by the prior identification means and the first effect before that. That is, if the specific effect occurs after the first effect before that, it can be determined that the player no longer has the information for determining the grant. After that, if the first effect that is the target of the process to be specified by the prior identification means is performed, the first effect that is the target can be made more prominent.

In particular, if this configuration is applied to a configuration that utilizes the notification result of the previous first effect, such as the features M16 to M18, the effect as if it was once interrupted as described above is notified so as to have relevance again. It will be possible to provide a surprise to the player. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature M29. As an effect suggesting the result of the grant determination, a first expectation degree suggestion effect (holding image) and a second expectation degree suggestion effect (chance effect) that occur after that are set.
In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, the first high expectation degree suggestion effect and the first high expectation degree suggestion effect so that the expectation degree, which is the result corresponding to the granting of the first privilege, is relatively high or low. 1 Low expectation suggestion effect is included,
In the second expectation suggestion effect, the second high expectation suggestion effect and the second high expectation suggestion effect are provided so that the expectation degree, which is the result corresponding to the granting of the first privilege, is relatively high or low. 2 Low expectation suggestion production is included,
The first height is targeted at the first effect related to the grant determination information that is the subject of the grant determination immediately before the grant determination information that is the target of the identification process by the prior identification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M28, characterized in that it is possible to execute the expectation degree suggestion effect and the second low expectation degree suggestion effect.

According to the above configuration, after the production with high expectation (first high expectation suggestion production) is performed for the first production before the first production which is a countermeasure for the process to be specified by the prior identification means. , A production with a low degree of expectation (second low expectation degree suggestion production) is performed. In general, a production design is performed in which the degree of expectation increases in order (step-up effect), but the player's attention level can be greatly reduced by using this configuration. However, what should be essentially paid attention to in this gaming machine is the first effect, which is the specific target of the prior identification means, and the lower the degree of attention of the first effect immediately before it, the more the next second effect. It is considered that the production performed by one production stands out. In particular, the first effect immediately before the above is a state in which the degree of attention is once raised by the first high expectation suggestion effect, and the original specific target is in a state where emotional ups and downs such as expectation → disappointment occur. It is possible to make it desired for the first production that has become. Therefore, it is possible to use the ups and downs of the player's emotions to narrow down the points and appropriately increase the degree of attention.

<Characteristic N group>
Feature N1. Information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for a working port by the main control device 81) to acquire information for grant determination (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and
Information storage means (acquired information storage means, reserved ball storage area 232) that stores the grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number (4 pieces) which is a plurality of predetermined numbers. When,
With respect to the grant determination information stored in the information storage means, the grant determination is performed to determine whether or not the grant determination result corresponds to the grant of the first privilege (opening / closing execution mode, etc.) to the player. Means (a function to execute the hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) and
Based on the grant determination performed by the grant determination means, the predetermined notification means starts the first effect operation, and ends the first effect operation as a notification result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. The first effect setting means (a function of executing the game time control process by the main control device 81) that causes the first effect (for example, a game time) to be performed once, and the operation for the first effect is performed.
A function of executing an operation period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period in which the first effect operation is performed based on the grant determination performed by the grant determination means. )When,
A first effect executing means (a function of executing a variation display control process by the effect control device 82) that enables the first effect operation to be performed over an operation period set by the operation period setting means.
Based on the fact that the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result, the first privilege granting means (function for executing the game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
A destination specifying means for executing a process of specifying information about predetermined grant determination information acquired by the information acquisition means at a timing before the predetermined grant determination information is the target of the grant determination ( (Function to execute the setting process of the hold command by the main controller 81) and
Based on the fact that the result of the specified process by the prior identification means is a predetermined result, the special notification corresponding to the result of the specified process is executed by the predetermined notification means or another notification means. It is equipped with special notification execution means (a function to execute hold control command correspondence processing by the effect control device 82).
The above-mentioned destination identification means
As the specifying process, the result specifying means (process of step S6001 by the effect control device 82) for executing the process of specifying the information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined grant determination information is the target of the grant determination. Function to execute) and
As the process for specifying, a period specifying means (effect control) for executing a process for specifying information corresponding to an operation period in which the first effect is performed when the predetermined grant determination information is the target of the grant determination. The function of executing the process of step S6002 by the device 82) and
Equipped with
As a notification mode of the special notification by the special notification execution means, the degree of expectation that the result of the grant determination when the predetermined grant determination information is the target of the grant determination is relative to the grant correspondence result. A high expectation mode and a low expectation mode are set to be high and low.
When the special notification is executed by the special notification executing means, the first selection means (step S6003 by the effect control device 82) capable of selecting the notification mode of the high expectation mode as the notification mode of the special notification. , A function to execute the process of selecting the reserved image on the high expectation side in S6004),
When the special notification is executed by the special notification execution means, the second selection means (step S6003 by the effect control device 82) capable of selecting the notification mode of the low expectation mode as the notification mode of the special notification. , A function to execute the process of selecting the reserved image on the low expectation side in S6004),
Equipped with
In the first selection means and the second selection means, the result of the specified process by the result specifying means is the grant correspondence result, and the result of the specified process by the period specifying means is shorter than the predetermined period. If it is, the gaming machine is characterized in that it is set so that the special notification of the low expectation mode can be easily selected.

According to the above configuration, with respect to the predetermined grant determination information that is the target of the process to be specified by the prior identification means, the result of the grant determination is the grant correspondence result, and the operation period of the first effect is shorter than the predetermined period. In that case, the notification mode of the special notification is likely to be set to the low expectation mode. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to predict that the result of the predetermined grant determination information is the grant correspondence result at a timing before the target of the grant determination.

Here, in a gaming machine in which the first effect of the first effect operation according to the result of the grant determination is performed, the effect that makes the player expect the result to be the grant response is made to correspond to the length of the operation period. The configuration to be set is considered to be common. Specifically, the effect is set so that the expectation is high when the operation period is long, and the expectation is low when the operation period is short. In that respect, even if the result of the grant determination is the grant response result, if the operation period of the first effect is short, it becomes difficult to secure the period for the effect by that amount, and it is expected that the result is the grant response result. It is not possible to fully entertain the player with the production of expectations (for example, Super Reach). On the other hand, even if it is a production with a low expectation, it does not completely eliminate the possibility of the grant response result, but by leaving the possibility of the grant response result, such a low expectation production. Even so, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being reduced. However, since it is rare that such a low-expectation production results in a grant response, it is positioned as a low-expectation production and provides a surprise when the grant response result is obtained. Is possible.

In the above situation, in the special notification that is executed at the timing before the grant determination information becomes the target of the grant determination, the high expectation that the grant correspondence result is a high expectation as the notification mode of the special notification. If the special notification is given in a certain manner, the player expects that the notification that the grant correspondence result is given in the first effect related to the grant determination information, that is, the first privilege is granted. Then, if the special notification is performed in the high expectation mode, the player predicts that the high expectation effect (for example, super reach as described above) will occur even in the first effect, and the first effect. You can fully enjoy the high-expected production in one production. On the other hand, if a low expectation effect occurs in the first effect in a situation where the special notification is performed in a high expectation mode, the effect is low expectation at that time. The player predicts that it is the result of the grant correspondence. Then, in the first production, there is a possibility that the effect such as the surprise that the result of the grant judgment is obtained by the production with a low expectation degree is eliminated.

Therefore, even if it is a grant response result, in a situation where a low expectation degree effect is to be performed in the first effect, that is, when the operation period is shorter than a predetermined period, it is easy to select the special notification in the low expectation degree mode. For example, not only is it possible to avoid eliminating the surprising effect given to the player, but also because the special notification is in the low expectation mode, the grant response result is further in the low expectation mode in the first production. It is possible to further enhance the surprise in the case of. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Further, the above feature N1 can also be expressed as follows. In this case, if each configuration of the following feature N groups is applied to this configuration, the "grant determination information" is referred to as "judgment information", the "grant determination means" is referred to as "determination means", and the "first identification" is applied. It is advisable to read "means" as "first determination means", "operation period" as "period", and "operation period setting means" as "period setting means", respectively. Further, if the "predetermined number" is set to the "predetermined number, which is a plurality of predetermined numbers", it is possible to increase the number of judgment targets by the "first judgment means", and a variety of games based on the judgment result. Can be achieved.

"Information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for a working port by the main control device 81) to acquire determination information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and
Information storage means (acquired information storage means, reserved ball storage area 232) that stores the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number (4 pieces) predetermined.
A determination means (main control) for determining whether or not the determination information stored in the information storage means is a response result corresponding to the provision of the first privilege (opening / closing execution mode, etc.) to the player. Function to execute the hit / fail judgment process by the device 81) and
The first effect is to start the first effect by a predetermined notification means based on the determination by the determination means, and end the first effect as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination by the determination means. A period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting a period in which the first effect is performed, with one effect (for example, a game).
The first effect executing means (a function of executing the game turn control process by the main control device 81, the variation display control by the effect control device 82) so that the first effect is performed over the period set by the period setting means. Function to execute processing) and
Based on the determination by the determination means as the corresponding result, the first privilege granting means (function for executing the game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the first privilege, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
With respect to the predetermined determination information acquired by the information acquisition means, the prior determination means (holding by the main control device 81) makes a determination at a timing before the predetermined determination information becomes the target of the determination by the determination means. Function to execute command setting processing) and
The special notification corresponding to the determination result by the prior determination means is the predetermined notification at the timing before the predetermined determination information, which is the determination target by the prior determination means, is subject to the determination by the determination means. It is equipped with special notification execution means (a function to execute hold control command correspondence processing by the effect control device 82) so that it can be executed by means or another notification means.
The first determination means is
As the determination, the result determination means for determining the information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined determination information is the target of the determination by the determination means (function of executing the process of step S6001 by the effect control device 82). When,
As the determination, when the predetermined determination information is the target of the determination by the determination means, the period determination means for determining the information corresponding to the period in which the first effect is performed (step S6002 by the effect control device 82). Function to execute processing) and
Equipped with
As a notification mode of the special notification by the special notification executing means, the degree of expectation that the result of the determination when the predetermined determination information is the target of the determination by the determination means is relatively high. A high expectation mode and a low expectation mode, which are high and low, are set.
When the special notification is executed by the special notification executing means, the first selection means (step S6003 by the effect control device 82) capable of selecting the notification mode of the high expectation mode as the notification mode of the special notification. , A function to execute the process of selecting the reserved image on the high expectation side in S6004),
When the special notification is executed by the special notification execution means, the second selection means (step S6003 by the effect control device 82) capable of selecting the notification mode of the low expectation mode as the notification mode of the special notification. , A function to execute the process of selecting the reserved image on the low expectation side in S6004),
Equipped with
The first selection means and the second selection means have the low expectation when the determination result by the result determination means is the corresponding result and the determination result by the period determination means is shorter than the predetermined period. A gaming machine characterized in that the special notification of the mode is set so as to be easy to select. "

Feature N2. The first selection means and the second selection means specify the period of the grant determination information that is the target of the grant determination before the predetermined grant determination information that is the target of the special notification. The feature N1 is characterized in that when the result of the specified process by the means is longer than a predetermined period, the low expectation mode is set so as to be easy to select as the notification mode of the special notification. The described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine of feature N1, the operation period of the grant determination information that is the target of the grant determination before the predetermined grant determination information that is the target of the special notification is longer than the predetermined period. If it is long, it becomes easy to select the low expectation mode as the notification mode of the special notification. That is, the shorter the operation period of the first effect for the predetermined grant determination information that is the target of the special notification, the earlier the grant determination is made before the predetermined grant determination information that is the target. The longer the operation period of the first effect for the grant determination information to be the target of the above, the easier it is to select the special notification in the low expectation mode. As described above, if the operation period of the first effect is long, it is easy to perform an effect with a high degree of expectation. It is thought that it will be easier to produce high expectations. Then, if the result of the grant determination for the grant determination information to be the target of the grant determination is the grant correspondence result, the player is satisfied, but if it is not the grant correspondence result, it is not the case. As a player, it is considered very disappointing.

In a situation where such a player is discouraged, in the first production of the grant judgment information that is the target of the grant judgment (the target of the special notification), the grant is supported by the production with a low expectation. It is considered that the surprise given to the player will be further enhanced if the result is notified. This is because, in the first place, the player should not have much expectation for the result of the grant determination regarding the grant determination information that is the target of the special notification. By doing so, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature N3. When the special notification of the low expectation mode is selected, the special notification execution means has the special notification of the high expectation mode with respect to the grant determination information to be the target of the grant determination prior to that. It is provided with another execution means (a function of executing a process of selecting a hold image for holding off during a special game in steps S6003 and S6004 by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to feature N1 or feature N2.

According to the above configuration, although the operation period is short, although it is the result of granting, it is only necessary to lower the expectation in advance for the predetermined grant determination information that is likely to be produced with a low expectation as the first effect. However, it is possible to raise the expectation in advance for the grant correspondence information that is the target of the grant determination before that. As a result, it is considered that the surprise of the result of the grant response with the low expectation production will be further enhanced.

Feature N4. The separate execution means sets the special notification so that the special notification of the high expectation degree mode ends at a timing prior to the start of the first effect of the predetermined grant determination information. The gaming machine according to the feature N3.

According to the above configuration, after the expectation for the information for determining the grant of the special notification in the high expectation mode changes to the feeling of loss, after that, the result of the grant is obtained after the production of the low expectation. It is possible to intentionally cause the emotional fluctuation of. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature N5. Based on the operation period set by the operation period setting means, the first effect execution means obtains the execution mode of the first effect operation from the plurality of predetermined execution modes of the first effect operation. It is provided with an execution mode setting means (a function of executing a variation start process by the effect control device 82) to be set, so that the first effect operation is performed in the execution mode set by the execution mode setting means. can be,
The execution mode setting means can be different in the execution mode to be set depending on whether the special notification of the low expectation mode is selected or not (steps S5901 by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N4, characterized in that it has a function of executing the process of S5903).

According to the above configuration, if the execution mode of the first effect is different depending on whether the special notification of the low expectation degree mode is selected or not, not only the prior expectation such as the special notification but also the first It is also possible to adjust the expectation of the result of the grant determination itself, such as one effect. By doing so, it is possible to further enhance the surprise when the grant correspondence result is obtained in the first effect having a short operation period.

Feature N6. As an execution mode of the first effect operation set by the execution mode setting means, there are a high expectation degree execution mode and a low expectation degree execution mode so that the expectation degree as a result of the grant correspondence is relatively high and low. The execution mode setting means is set for the first effect of the present time according to the operation period set by the operation period setting means from the high expectation degree execution mode and the low expectation degree execution mode. It sets the execution mode of the operation.
When the special notification of the low expectation degree mode is selected, the low expectation degree execution mode is the execution mode of the first effect operation related to the predetermined grant determination information that is the target of the special notification. The gaming machine according to feature N5, which is characterized in that it is easy to set an execution mode.

According to the above configuration, when the special notification of the low expectation degree mode is selected, the execution mode of the first effect that is the target of the special notification is also set to the execution mode of the low expectation degree execution mode. In order to make it easier, not only the feeling of expectation in advance such as special notification but also the feeling of expectation for the production that notifies the result of the grant judgment itself such as the first production can be lowered to further enhance the surprise as the result of the grant response. can.

Feature N7. As an execution mode of the first effect operation set by the execution mode setting means, there are a high expectation degree execution mode and a low expectation degree execution mode so that the expectation degree as a result of the grant correspondence is relatively high and low. The execution mode setting means is set for the first effect of the present time according to the operation period set by the operation period setting means from the high expectation degree execution mode and the low expectation degree execution mode. It sets the execution mode of the operation.
When the special notification of the low expectation mode is selected, the information related to the grant determination that is the target of the grant determination is prior to the predetermined grant determination information that is the target of the special notification. The gaming machine according to feature N5 or feature N6, characterized in that it is easy to set an execution mode that is the high expectation execution mode as the execution mode of the first effect operation.

According to the above configuration, when the special notification of the low expectation degree mode is selected by the selection means, the grant to be the target of the grant determination is prior to the predetermined grant determination information that is the target of the special notification. In the first effect of the determination information, the first effect operation of the high expectation execution mode is facilitated. As a result, the result of the first effect related to the high-expectation execution mode is different, which gives the player a sense of loss, and can further enhance the surprising effect of the subsequent grant response result.

Feature N8. Even when the result of the specified process by the result specifying means is the grant response result and the result of the specified process by the period specifying means is shorter than the predetermined period, it is determined in advance. When the specific condition is satisfied, the processing of the limiting means (steps S4902 and S4903 by the main control device 81 and steps S5610 to S5613) for restricting the selection of the special notification in the low expectation mode is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N7, characterized in that it is provided with a function).

Even if the predetermined grant determination information corresponds to the grant correspondence result and the operation period of the first effect is short, inconvenience may occur if the special notification in the low expectation mode is performed. For example, when the grant response results are continuously generated, the latter grant response result shifts to a disadvantageous state for the player in the continuous grant response results (for example, the lottery mode is a high probability mode). When shifting to the low probability mode) is conceivable. Therefore, if it is notified in advance that such a situation occurs, for example, in a configuration in which the priority order of grant determination differs depending on the type of acquired grant determination information, the priority side grant determination information can be obtained. It is possible to take measures such as acquiring as much as possible and preventing the transition to the above-mentioned disadvantageous state. Therefore, if a specific condition is satisfied as in the above configuration, if the configuration is such that the selection of the special notification in the low expectation mode is restricted, a disadvantage occurs for the player as described above. Can be avoided.

The basic configurations of various gaming machines to which the above features can be applied are shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and grants a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device that is provided with a ball tray to generate a game, etc., and is provided with a throwing device that takes in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device that pays out the game ball to the ball tray. A gaming machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the gaming ball is thrown in.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 33 ... Upper operating port, 34 ... Lower operating port, 41 ... Symbol display device, 54 ... Launch handle, 63 ... Display light emitting unit, 75 ... Operation unit, 81 ... Main control device, 82 ... Production control device ..

Claims (1)

Information acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
An information storage means that stores the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined.
With respect to the determination information stored in the information storage means, a determination means for determining whether or not to give a privilege to the player, and a determination means.
Based on the determination by the determination means , it is possible to execute the first effect by a predetermined notification means as the notification corresponding to the result of the determination, and the period setting for setting the period during which the first effect is performed. Means and
A first effect executing means for allowing the first effect to be performed over a period set by the period setting means, and a first effect executing means.
Based on the determination by the determination means, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege and the privilege granting means
In a gaming machine equipped with
A second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect of displaying for a predetermined period by the predetermined notification means or another notification means.
An update means for performing a predetermined update in the predetermined period display during the execution of the second effect, and an update means.
Equipped with
Depending on the period of the update by the update means, the specific effect of executing the display on the side that is advantageous to the player can be easily executed.
When the second effect is performed by the second effect executing means, a specific setting means for setting a period displayed in the predetermined period display is provided .
The specific setting means is
The first means, in which the period displayed in the predetermined period display can be set when the specific effect is not executed ,
The second means, in which the period displayed in the predetermined period display can be set when the specific effect is executed ,
Equipped with
The period setting means can be set so that the period in which the first effect is performed differs depending on the period set by the second means .
The gaming machine is characterized in that, as an aspect when the predetermined period display is started, the gaming machine is provided with a means capable of executing a special aspect regarding a determination for granting the privilege .

Images